Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography of the Thanatological Literature

SZABO

Reference • Bibliography—Thanatology

Death and Dying will be helpful to students, researchers, academics, caregivers, healthcare professionals, psychologists, social workers, and anyone interested in death, dying, bereavement, or care of the terminally ill. JOHN F. SZABO is director of the Atlanta–Fulton Public Library System. He is the author

DEATH AND DYING

DEATH AND DYING

In Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography of the Thanatological Literature, John F. Szabo provides more than 2,200 citations of monographs, many annotated, on the science and study of death and dying. Among the areas addressed are the psychological, philosophical, and attitudinal aspects; coping and dealing with the burdens of caregiving and working in the helping professions; instructional and educational topics for practitioners, primarily healthcare providers; cultural differences in bereavement rituals; and grief, mourning, and loss. In addition, notable titles on or relating to death and dying in popular culture, death themes in literature, methods of death, or specific ethical, policy, or public issues are also included when they contribute important information to subject areas on which the book focuses.

AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE THANATOLOGICAL LITERATURE

Traced to the 1700s, the term thanatology is defined as the study of the broad and complex topic of death. Because of the breadth of the published material and the challenges of discovery in large bibliographic databases and catalogs, finding and identifying monographic material on death, dying, grief, and bereavement can be extremely challenging. Although several bibliographical resources have been published on thanatology, those titles were incomplete, limited in scope, or leaned heavily toward one area of the field while ignoring others.

of Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook (Scarecrow Press, 1993).

For orders and information please contact the publisher SCARECROW PRESS, INC. A wholly owned subsidiary of The Rowman & Littlefield Publishing Group, Inc. 4501 Forbes Boulevard, Suite 200 Lanham, Maryland 20706 1-800-462-6420 • fax 717-794-3803 www.scarecrowpress.com

DeathDyingPODLITH.indd 1

AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE THANATOLOGICAL LITERATURE

JOHN F. SZABO

10/8/09 11:09:33 AM

Death and Dying An Annotated Bibliography of the Thanatological Literature John F. Szabo

The Scarecrow Press, Inc. Lanham • Toronto • Plymouth, UK 2010

Published by Scarecrow Press, Inc. A wholly owned subsidiary of The Rowman & Littlefield Publishing Group, Inc. 4501 Forbes Boulevard, Suite 200, Lanham, Maryland 20706 http://www.scarecrowpress.com Estover Road, Plymouth PL6 7PY, United Kingdom Copyright © 2010 by John F. Szabo All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any electronic or mechanical means, including information storage and retrieval systems, without written permission from the publisher, except by a reviewer who may quote passages in a review. British Library Cataloguing in Publication Information Available Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Szabo, John F., 1968– Death and dying : an annotated bibliography of the thanatological literature / John F. Szabo. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978-0-8108-7275-2 (hardback : alk. paper) — ISBN 978-0-8108-7276-9 (ebook) 1. Death—Bibliography. 2. Thanatology—Bibliography. I. Title. Z5725.S93 2010 016.1559'37—dc22 2009029795

 ™ The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of American National Standard for Information Sciences—Permanence of Paper for Printed Library Materials, ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992. Printed in the United States of America

Contents

Introduction

v

1

Adolescents

1

2

Aging and Death

6

3

Attitudes toward Death

11

4

Bibliographies

18

5

Childhood Bereavement

23

6

Communication about Death

41

7

Coping and Caregivers

46

8

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

57

9

Death Education

72

10

The Death of a Child

80

11

Dying

92

12

Eschatology

113

13

Ethical Issues

116

14

Fear of Death

125

15

General Works

128

16

Grief and Mourning

149

17

Historical Views of Death and Dying

193

iii

iv

Contents

18

Hospice

200

19

Immortality

213

20

Legal and Financial Issues

216

21

Mental Health Issues

220

22

Miscellaneous

225

23

Near-Death Experiences

227

24

Nursing

231

25

Palliative Care

234

26

Parental Loss and Grief

242

27

Pastoral Care

249

28

Philosophical Studies

257

29

Practitioner Education

265

30

Rituals

276

31

Sibling Loss and Grief

282

32

Thanatology

285

33

Widowhood

289

Name Index

301

Title Index

327

About the Author

375

Introduction

Since Geoffrey Gorer’s essay “The Pornography of Death” in 1955, there has been a clear and unarguable deluge of publishing in the subject areas of death, dying, grief, and bereavement. Gorer asserts that while sex was the pornography of Victorian society, death is today’s pornography. This provocative proposition led to significant writing and research on death attitudes, the psychology of death, viewing death and grief as a natural part of life, and a reevaluation of care for the dying. All of this, of course, has diminished the taboo of death and dying, though it has certainly not eliminated it. While it can be traced to the 1700s, the term thanatology has gained traction in recent decades to refer to the study of the broad and complex topic of death. Thanatology is fundamentally the interdisciplinary study of death, dying, grief, and bereavement; however, use of the term is seen more commonly in academic works, specifically scientific, and those intended for practitioners in the helping professions. There have been several bibliographical resources published on thanatology in an effort make discovery easier. Unfortunately, those titles are now limited due to their age. Many of them were incomplete at the time, were limited in scope, or leaned heavily toward one area of the field while ignoring others. From my bibliographical work on mortuary science, funerals, and other death rituals, I discovered that a bibliographical resource that encompassed all of thanatology was seriously needed. Because of the breadth of the published material and the challenges of discovery in large bibliographic databases and catalogs, finding and identifying monographic material on death, dying, grief, and bereavement can be extremely challenging without such a resource. This book provides more than 2,200 citations, many annotated, on the science and study of death and dying; psychological, philosophical, and attitudinal aspects; coping and dealing with the burdens of caregiving and working in the v

vi

Introduction

helping professions; instructional and educational topics for practitioners, primarily health care providers; rituals, but limited to the contexts of bereavement and cultural differences; and grief, mourning, bereavement, and loss. It does not include titles on death and dying in popular culture; death themes in literature; methods of death (homicide, suicide, cancer, and so forth); or specific ethical, policy, or public issues around death and dying (euthanasia, right-to-die, capital punishment, etc.). There are, of course, numerous exceptions. Notably, titles on or relating to these areas are included when they contribute important information to subject areas on which the book focuses. The greatest volume of material is on grief, mourning, bereavement, and loss, primarily because these titles have the broadest audience and, as the taboo of death topics has subsided, the desire for popular materials on these subjects has swelled. While much of this material has self-help or religious themes, there is a sizeable body of research material on this subject. General works on loss have only been included when they provide useful content on loss associated with death. A huge sea of material exists on childhood bereavement, the death of children and adolescents, and communicating with young people about death and dying. Categorizing these can be difficult, as much of this material covers all three areas. Noted death educator Kenneth J. Doka’s Children Mourning, Mourning Children is an excellent example of this collective treatment. I hope that this book will be helpful to students, researchers, academics, caregivers, health care professionals, psychologists, social workers, and anyone with an interest in death, dying, bereavement, or the care of the terminally ill. I am indebted to librarians, library support staff, and collections from many libraries, but I am particularly indebted to the rich collections of Emory University Libraries.

1 Adolescents

1. Allen, Janet. Using Literature to Help Troubled Teenagers Cope with Endof-Life Issues. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 2001. 2. Baxter, Grant, and Wendy Stuart. Death and the Adolescent: A Resource Handbook for Bereavement Support Groups in Schools. Ontario: University of Toronto Press, 1999. 3. Bode, Janet. Death Is Hard to Live With: Teenagers Talk about How They Cope with Loss. New York: Bantam Doubleday Dell Books for Young Readers, 1993. Cartoon artwork by Stan Mack. Bode uses personal stories, vignettes, graphics, and a direct discussion of death to present the issue to young adults. She covers funerals, violent deaths, parental and sibling death, and the myriad of feelings experienced by teenagers. Comments or explanations by professionals on various subjects are offered throughout the book. Bode also offers some treatment for issues of cultural and religious variations in approaching death, dying, and bereavement. References for recommended books and videos are presented in a narrative at the book’s conclusion. 4. Corr, Charles A., and David E. Balk. Handbook of Adolescent Death and Bereavement. New York: Springer, 1996. 5. Corr, Charles A., and Joan N. McNeil, eds. Adolescence and Death. New York: Springer, 1986. 6. Dower, Laura, and Elena Lister. I Will Remember You: What to Do When Someone You Love Dies: A Guidebook through Grief for Teens. New York: Scholastic, 2001. In assisting teens in coping with death, Dower talks about being in a state of denial, keeping a grief journal, different types of grief, the role of ritual in grief, 1

2

Chapter 1

cultural expressions of grief (African American, Ancient Egyptian, Buddhist, Christian, Islam, Judaic, Native American), dealing with feelings, physical effects of grief, helping others grieve, remembering the loved one, aftershocks of grief, and finding routine again. She offers guidance for specific situations: parental loss, losing a friend, violent or sudden death, and so forth. Appendixes include reading lists, music, movies, and organizations with websites. Includes a bibliography and author biographies. 7. Finch, Stuart M., and Elva O. Poznanski. Adolescent Suicide. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1971. 8. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Grieving Teen: A Guide for Teenagers and Their Friends. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2000. A certified death educator, Fitzgerald offers an incredibly thorough guide for teens dealing with death. She discusses reacting to the news of a death, support groups, the hospice movement, feelings of fear and anger, visiting the hospital, saying goodbye, funerals and related subjects, grief and bereavement, and recovery. The book answers some very specific questions teens may have about death, for example, what is death like for the dying person? What does a dead body look or feel like? Fitzgerald includes extensive discussion on feelings, grief, and the future following a death, and she offers stories from teens who have experienced a death and advice on being a friend to someone grieving. Includes a resource list, bibliography, and list of websites. Foreword by noted thanatologist Earl A. Grollman. 9. Footman, Marilyn E., and Pamela Espeland. When a Friend Dies: A Book for Teens about Grieving and Healing. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 2005. Originally published in 1994. Straightforward and direct, this book stresses to teens that feelings of grief are normal and confirms that teens and adults grieve differently. 10. Giddens, Sandra, and Owen Giddens. Coping with Grieving and Loss. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 2003. Rev. ed. Originally published in 2000. Intended for high school audiences, this text addresses issues of loss, grief, mourning, and funerals. The authors discuss feelings of anger, guilt, depression, and acceptance often experienced by those grieving. They offer coping techniques and suggestions for recovery. Thoughtful chapters are included on violence in schools and the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks. A brief glossary, organizations providing assistance to teens, and suggestions for further reading are included. 11. Gravelle, Karen, and Charles Haskins. Teenagers Face-to-Face with Bereavement. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Julian Messner, a division of Silver Burdett Press, Simon & Schuster, 1989.

Adolescents

3

Gravelle and Haskins present seventeen adolescents and young adults who describe their grief experienced as teens following the deaths of family members and friends from causes ranging from cancer to automobile accidents to cystic fibrosis. The authors discuss what is different about adolescent bereavement and present a caring, sensitive treatment of the subject. The focus is on the feelings and experiences of teenagers and their methods of coping with grief. Subjects include personal relationships with the terminally ill, initial reactions to death, problems facing classmates and friends, coping with depression, feelings of guilt and anger, and renewing family life following the death of an immediate family member. 12. Grollman, Earl A., ed. Bereaved Children and Teens: A Support Guide for Parents and Professionals. Boston: Beacon Press, 1995. In a collection of articles by prominent thanatology and death education experts, Grollman presents a comprehensive guide to bereavement in youth for parents, caregivers, teachers, clergy, and health care professionals. Topics covered include explaining death to young children, adolescent understandings of death, disenfranchised grief of children, talking to children about terminal illness, cultural and religious perspectives on death and children, treatments and therapies to help children cope with death, care of the dying child, special needs of bereaved children, and using film and drama to help children cope with death. A section on cultural and religious perspectives includes articles on issues among African American, Jewish, Protestant, and Catholic children. 13. Hogan, N. S. An Investigation of the Adolescent Sibling Bereavement Process and Adaptation. Chicago: Loyola University, 1987. Author’s doctoral dissertation. 14. Hughes, Lynne B. You Are Not Alone: Teens Talk about Life after the Loss of a Parent. New York: Scholastic, 2005. Hughes, who lost both of her parents at a young age, is the founder and director of the nonprofit Comfort Zone Camp, a place for grieving children. She, along with her campers, offers suggestions for coping with grief and moving beyond it through testimonials. Includes detailed information about the camp. 15. Irish, Jerry A. A Boy Thirteen: Reflections on Death. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1975. 16. Kuehn, Eileen. Death: Coping with the Pain. Mankato, MN: LifeMatters, 2001. Intended for an elementary and junior high school audience. 17. LaGrand, Louis E. Coping with Separation and Loss as a Young Adult: Theoretical and Practical Realities. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1986. 18. McBride, Alfred. Death Shall Have No Dominion. Dubuque, IA: William C. Brown, 1979.

4

Chapter 1

McBride, a Roman Catholic priest, offers death education for adolescents from a Catholic perspective. 19. Meyers, Karen, Mark J. Kittleson, and William Kane. The Truth about Death and Dying. New York: Facts on File, 2005. The authors offer a guide to death and dying for teen audiences. 20. Millet, Edmund A. An Investigation among Junior Highs into the Understanding of Death and Dying and a Program Response. Boston: Boston University School of Theology, 1979. This book was a project report associated with Millet’s pursuit of the doctor of ministry degree. 21. Morgan, John D., ed. The Dying and the Bereaved Teenager. Philadelphia, PA: Charles Press, 1990. In addition to collections of essays on the dying and the bereaved teenager, this book also offers four essays on the role of the school in dealing with the bereaved teen, including suicide postvention. Morgan is coordinator of Death Education Conferences and a professor of philosophy at King’s College in London, Ontario. Most of the contributors are health and mental health professionals from Canada. 22. Myers, Edward. Teens, Loss, and Grief: The Ultimate Teen Guide. Lanham, MD: Scarecrow Press, 2006. Part of the It Happened to Me series, volume 8, Arlene Hirschfelder, series editor. First paperback edition. Illustrations by Kelly Adams. Previously published in 2004 as When Will I Stop Hurting?: Teens, Loss, and Grief. 23. Pershy, Mary Kelly. Helping Teens Work through Grief. Washington, DC: Accelerated Development, 1997. 24. Schoeneck, Therese. Griefjourney: Notes on Grief for Teens, Young Adults, and Anyone Who Is Grieving. Syracuse, NY: Hope for the Bereaved, 2006. A booklet printed by nonprofit group Hope for the Bereaved, an organization offering one-on-one counseling, support groups, a helpline, the HOPELine newsletter, and community education. Schoeneck is the founder. 25. Scrivani, Mark. When Death Walks In: For Teenagers Facing Grief. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1991. Poetry and illustrations by Ben Sieff. Intended for adolescents, this 32-page paperback serves as an easy-to-read guide that discusses feelings, different styles of grief, suicidal thoughts, dreams, remembrances, going back to school, seeking and finding support, and forgiveness. 26. Ward, Barbara. Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with over Elevens and Adults: A Holistic Approach. Bristol, PA: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1996. Originally published in 1993.

Adolescents

5

27. Wilde, Gary. Dealing with Death: A Four-Week Course to Help Junior Highers Explore Their Feelings about Death. Loveland, CO: Group Publishing, 1991. 28. Wolfelt, Alan D. Healing a Teen’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt, educator and grief counselor, discusses the special mourning needs of teens and offers suggestions for family members, teachers, coaches, clergy, and caregivers. 29. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart for Teens: One Hundred Practical Ideas. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt offers a book to help teens mourn. He presents 100 specific, practical ideas for mourning well and ends with a touching final word. Each numbered idea includes a suggestion to express yourself. Wolfelt is also director of the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 30. Wolfelt, Alan D., and Megan E. Wolfelt. The Healing Your Grieving Heart Journal for Teens. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2002. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 31. Zim, Herbert S., and Sonia Bleeker. Life and Death. New York: William Morrow, 1970. Illustrated by Rene Martin. In this 64-page hardback book for young adolescents, husband and wife authors discuss physical facts of death, funeral and mourning customs, and attitudes surrounding death and dying. Customs from around the world are presented, as death is discussed as an important part of life. Illustrated with black-and-white sketches. Includes an index.

2 Aging and Death

32. Angel, Marc D. Aging and Dying as Aspects of Living. New York: United Jewish Appeal, 1984. Part of the United Jewish Appeal Young Leadership Cabinet Judaica Series. 33. Benoliel, Jeanne Quint. Dealing with Death: Discussions of Death Presented for Those Concerned with the Delivery of Care Service for the Elderly. Los Angeles: University of Southern California, Ethel Percy Andrus Gerontology Center, 1973. 34. Botsford, Anne L., and Force Lawrence T. Botsford. End of Life Care: A Guide for Supporting Older People with Intellectual Disabilities and Their Families. Albany, NY: New York State Association of Regional Councils, 2000. 35. Boyle, Joan M., and James E. Morriss. The Mirror of Time: Images of Aging and Dying. New York: Greenwood Press, 1987. 36. Cicirelli, Victor G. Older Adults’ Views on Death. New York: Springer, 2002. Cicirelli, professor of developmental and aging psychology at Purdue University, presents a study of older adults ranging in age from 70 to 90 examining influences of age-related health changes, religious beliefs, culture, and family relations. He also discusses various meanings of death, fears about death, and how people view the dying process. Topics include sociocultural and personal meanings of death, death trajectories, views and expectations about the dying process, and interrelationships between all of these themes. Includes extensive references and an index. 37. DeRopp, Robert Sylvester. Man against Dying. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1960. 6

Aging and Death

7

38. Gaventa, William C., and David L. Coulter, eds. End-of-Life Care: Bridging Disability and Aging with Person-Centered Care. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2005. Copublished simultaneously as Journal of Religion, Disability, and Health, Volume 9, Number 2, 2005. The editors present a series of articles about how to achieve a good death, taking into account the special considerations for those with a disability. The articles are structured around two primary papers on end-of-life issues among disabled and aging populations. With a particular focus on Alzheimer’s disease, this book explores how society thinks about disability in general as well as within the context of death and dying. Policies, ethics, quality of life, and consent are addressed in detail. An extensive bibliography and list of websites are included. 39. Jury, Mark, and Dan Jury. Gramp: A Man Ages and Dies. New York: Grossman Publishers (Viking Press), 1976. Photographs by Mark Jury and Dan Jury. Narrative text by Mark Jury. With powerfully emotional and raw photographs of their grandfather’s final weeks and months, Mark Jury and Dan Jury open a door to death and dying in this 152-page biographical piece. Accompanied by text that relays both Frank Tugend’s dying and his caregivers’ struggle and perseverance, they reveal the realities of all that the dying process can involve. 40. Kutscher, Austin H., and I. K. Goldberg, eds. Oral Care of the Aging and Dying Patient. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1973. Part of the American Lecture Series. This book is a strange text on a rarely explored corner of thanatology. Includes a chapter titled “Use of an Electrically Driven Toothbrush in the Management of Oral Hygiene in the Dying Patient.” 41. Marshall, Victor W. Last Chapters: A Sociology of Aging and Dying. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole, 1980. Part of the Brooks/Cole Series in Social Gerontology, Vern Bengtson, editor. Bengtson notes in his foreword that the proliferation of material published on death and dying in the 1960s and 1970s was characterized by titles focusing on awareness of death and dying rather than an understanding of the subject. This book attempts to bring together research on the social organization of death, dying, and aging. The primary theme is that problems and issues associated with dying and aging are based on society’s need to “construct meaning in a continually changing world.” Marshall points out that humans are constantly negotiating with one another to resolve issues of who they are, who they were, and who they will be. He discusses the character of death in society, societal problems associated with death and dying, fear of death, attitudes toward death, awareness of finitude, the concept of terminal status passage, environmental and community contexts, and making sense of death and dying. Appropriate for death education and sociology classes, each section concludes with review questions. Includes a lengthy list of references and name and subject indexes.

8

Chapter 2

42. McCall, Junietta Baker. Grief Education for Caregivers of the Elderly. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1999. 43. McGee, Ann Young. The Impact of an Educational Intervention Module on Death and Dying on Death Anxiety among Middle-Aged and Older Adults in North Carolina. Raleigh: North Carolina State University, 1980. This title is McGee’s doctoral dissertation. In 2005, she served as executive director of the White House Conference on Aging. 44. Meeks, Linda Brower, and Philip Heit. Aging, Dying, and Death. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill Co., 1984. Part of the Health: Focus on You series. 45. ———. Aging, Dying, and Death: A Teacher’s Guide. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill Co., 1984. 46. Minot, Charles. The Problem of Age, Growth, and Death. New York: Putnam, 1908. 47. Morgan, John D. Ethical Issues in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved Aged. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1996. 48. Munnichs, Joep M. A. Old Age and Finitude: A Contribution to Psychogerontology. New York: S. Karger, 1966. 49. Nearing, Helen. Light on Aging and Dying. Gardiner, ME: Tilbury House, 1995. 50. Overall, Christine. Aging, Death, and Human Longevity: A Philosophical Inquiry. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2003. 51. Prichard, Elizabeth R., Margot Tallmer, Austin H. Kutscher, Robert DeBellis, and Mahlon S. Hale, eds. Geriatrics and Thanatology. New York: Praeger, 1984. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series, volume 1, Austin H. Kutscher and Lillian H. Kutscher, general editors. Prichard and her coeditors present a collection of articles on care for the dying elderly. Topics include psychiatric considerations in aging and death, the bereaved elderly, effects of parental death on middle-aged adults, adaptive behavior of the elderly in facing death, the relationship between death and the elderly’s perception of self-worth, and reincarnation. Includes references, an index, and brief professional information about each contributor. Preface written by Rose Dobrof, director of the Brookdale Center on Aging at Hunter College of the City University of New York. 52. Roslansky, John D., and George Wald, eds. The End of Life: A Discussion at the Nobel Conference. London: North-Holland, 1973. This is the eighth volume of the Nobel Conference Lectures at the Gustavus Adolphus College, St. Peter, MN, 1972. It is dedicated to Arne Tiselius (1902–1971), winner of the 1948 Nobel Prize in Chemistry.

Aging and Death

9

This book is a collection of five papers on the origin of death, physiological aspects of aging and death, the modern imagination of death, changing the life span, and immortality. Contributors to the 83-page volume include medical faculty and theologians. 53. Samarel, Nelda. Caring for Life and Death. New York: Taylor & Francis, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 54. Shrut, Samuel D. Old Age and Death Attitudes: A Comparative Analysis and Evaluation of Responses by a Group of Ambulatory White Female Persons Sixty-Five Years and Older Living under Varying Conditions of Institutional Supervision. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms, 1956. Publication No. 16,604. 55. Sinick, Daniel. Counseling Older Persons: Careers, Retirement, Dying. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1977. 56. Sterns, H. L., E. A. Kennedy, and C. Sed. Person-Centered Planning for Later Life: A Curriculum on Death and Dying for Adults with Mental Retardation. Chicago: Rehabilitation Research and Training Center Clearinghouse on Aging and Developmental Disabilities, 2000. 57. Tallmer, Margot. Thanatologic Aspects of Aging: Selected Readings. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1980. 58. Tomer, Adrian. Death Attitudes and the Older Adult: Theories, Concepts, and Applications. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Tomer offers a series of scholarly works that explore death attitudes and bridge the closely related though infrequently connected fields of thanatology and gerontology. This book examines death attitudes among older adults, attitudes regarding themselves in relation to the end of life, and controversial end-of-life issues in the context of older adults. Articles discuss meanings of life and death in successful aging; terror management perspectives on successful aging; developing a comprehensive model of death anxiety; microsuicide and the elderly; conceptual distinctions in death-related attitudes; death anxiety in younger and older adults; ageism and elderly suicide; fear of death and end-of-life decisions in the context of older adults’ ethnicity; and death anxiety in nursing home personnel as a function of race, hospice care, death attitudes, and aging in the twenty-first century. A comprehensive review of correlates of death anxiety in older adults is also incorporated. Includes several tables, extensive references, and an index. Also includes a series foreword by Neimeyer and foreword by Jeffrey A. Giordano, professor of gerontology at the University of South Florida. 59. Watson, Wilbur H., and Robert J. Maxwell, eds. Human Aging and Dying: A Study in Sociocultural Gerontology. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1977.

10

Chapter 2

The authors attempt to “fill a void created by the lack of ethnographic data on the organization of behavior in old age.” Using field studies, they offer insight into the dying and their caregivers with a distinct focus on Jewish and African American elderly. The first part of the book examines aging as status passage in comparative social and cross-cultural contexts, while the second part looks at social organization within the families of various cultural groups. Includes references and an index. 60. Zarit, Steven H., ed. Readings in Aging and Death: Contemporary Perspectives. New York: Harper & Row, 1977. Part of the Contemporary Perspectives Reader Series, Phillip Whitten, editor. Zarit, of the University of Southern California’s Adrus Gerontology Center, offers fifty-nine reprinted articles on aging and death from a sociological perspective. The paperback begins with a 75-item questionnaire written by Edwin Shneidman.

3 Attitudes toward Death

61. Adlerstein, Arthur M., and H. I. Gerard. The Relationship between Religious Belief and Death Affect. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1958. 62. Anderson, Patricia, with an interview from Marilee Longacre. All of Us: Americans Talk about the Meaning of Death. New York: Delacorte Press, 1996. This is a book about how people feel about dying presented as a collection of interviews. Anderson relays the stories and feelings of celebrities, professionals, teens in gangs, and many others. Many insights concerning fear of death; attitudes toward death; and lessons to be learned from dying, death, and grieving are presented. An excellent final chapter titled “The Highest Common Denominator” offers commentary on the commonalities of Americans’ views toward death and the juxtaposition of these with general accepted thought on death. A short biographical narrative is included for each of the more than sixty people featured. Also includes a bibliography. 63. Armstrong, Harry G. The Emerging Death Mystique: The Challenge and the Promise. Hicksville, NY: Exposition Press, 1978. 64. Bradbury, Mary. Representations of Death: A Sociological Perspective. New York: Routledge/Taylor & Francis, 1999. Bradbury, with a background in both anthropology and social psychology, presents a book for both the social scientist and the bereaved. It is a study of how death is presented in images and how this affects the social psychology of deathrelated institutions. The sometimes jarring photographs in the book, taken by Peter Rauter, stress the observational nature of her study. They include a funeral parlor interviewing room, coffin-making workshop, storage facilities in an embalming room, corpses, a horse-drawn hearse, funeral vehicles, funeral flowers, a catafalque in a crematorium chapel, computer-operated cremators, a burning 11

12

Chapter 3

coffin in a cremator, and a cemetery. Bradbury discusses social representations of death and loss, medicine’s effect on death representations, attitudes toward the body, commerce and ritual associated with death, and thoughts on “representing” death. Includes an appendix detailing research methods and approach as well as a lengthy bibliography and an index. 65. Callahan, Daniel. The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993. Also cited as The Troubled Dream of Life: In Search of a Peaceful Death. Callahan, a medical ethicist, discusses the politics, ethics, and social issues associated with death and dying. He examines death attitudes and the balance between the goals of medicine and having a realistic perspective of dying. 66.

Curl, James Stevens. A Celebration of Death. London: Constable, 1980.

67. Day, Stacey B., ed. Death and Attitudes toward Death. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, Bell Museum of Pathobiology, 1972. 68. de Parvillez, Alphonse. Joy in the Face of Death. New York: Desclee, 1963. Translated by Pierre de Fon. 69. Deveau, Eleanor J., and David W. Adams, eds. Beyond the Innocence of Childhood: Factors Influencing Children and Adolescents’ Perceptions and Attitudes toward Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 70. Dumont, Richard G., and Dennis C. Foss. The American View of Death: Acceptance or Denial? Cambridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing, 1972. Noting in their introduction that the major objective of the monograph is to invalidate a key that it poses, the authors suggest that the question of whether Americans accept or deny that death is naïve, since many individuals both accept and deny death simultaneously. While a study of a particular albeit diverse group— Americans—the text is more an analysis of changes in how people cope with the notion and reality of death and their attitudes toward the phenomenon. Dumont and Foss review and discuss attitude formation and change, fear of death, death wishes, the acceptance–denial controversy, methodological problems in death attitude research, individual variability of death attitudes, and the acceptance–denial hypothesis. Includes references and suggestions for further reading. 71. Fleming, Steve, and Richard Lonetto. Children’s Conceptions of Aging and Death. New York: Springer, 1978. Also published as volume 3 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide in 1980, with only Richard Lonetto as author. 72. Fulton, Robert. A Compilation of Studies of Attitudes toward Death, Funerals, and Funeral Directors: Participated in by the Clergy, the Public, Including Critical Segments Thereof, Funeral Directors. Minneapolis: Center for Death Education and Research, University of Minnesota, 1971.

Attitudes toward Death

13

73. ———. The Sacred and the Secular: Attitudes of the American Public toward Death. Milwaukee, WI: Bulfin, 1963. A small, 23-page booklet on varying views toward death in the United States. 74. Goldsmith, Charles E. A Theoretical Analysis of Attitudes of Older People toward Dying. Boston: Boston University Graduate School, 1967. 75. Goodman, Lisl Marburg. Death and the Creative Life: Conversations with Prominent Artists and Scientists. New York: Springer, 1981. Volume 4 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. 76. Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, Symposium No. 11. Death and Dying: Attitudes of Patient and Doctor. New York: Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, 1966. 77. Gualtieri, Antonio R. The Vulture and the Bull: Religious Responses to Death. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1984. 78. Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker. Reconstructing Illness: Studies in Pathography. West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University Press, 1993. Hawkins suggests that accounts of religious conversions are being replaced by personal accounts of experience with disease. She divides these pathographies into three categories: those where patients believe they can be responsible for their own recovery, those searching for the good death, and those who view death as a battle with disease or a personal journey. She discusses the myth of rebirth and the promise of a cure, the myths of battle and journey, constructing death through myths about dying, and myths about medicine and the healthy mind. The appendix includes a bibliography of pathographies organized by disease as well as an extensive list of references. 79. Kaplan, Pascal M. Understanding Death from a Spiritual Perspective. New York: Sufism, 1977. 80. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Ruth Aisenberg. Death in Our Lives and Thoughts. New York: Springer, 1975. Condensed from The Psychology of Death. 81. Kaufman, Barry Neil, and Suzi Lyte Kaufman. A Land beyond Tears: The Liberating Approach to Death and Dying. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1982. 82. Klein, Allen. The Courage to Laugh: Humor, Hope, and Healing in the Face of Death and Dying. New York: Jeremy P. Tarcher/Putnam, 1998. Calling himself a “jollytologist,” Klein brings laughter to the subject of death and dying. He discusses the lines between helpful humor and hurtful humor and attempts to answer the question, “Tasteless or triumphant?” In this book, he talks about the courage to laugh in the face of death; humor’s role with hope and healing; when humor is and is not appropriate; humor in hospice; turning tears

14

Chapter 3

to laughter in children; humor with cancer and AIDS; humor in bereavement and loss; and last laughs at funerals, at memorials, and in eulogies. Klein includes numerous stories, anecdotes, and quotes. Includes a bibliography. 83. Knott, J. Eugene. Thanatopics: Activities and Exercises for Confronting Death. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1989. 84. Kramer, Herb, and Kay Kramer. Conversations at Midnight: Coming to Terms with Dying and Death. New York: W. Morrow and Co., 1993. 85. Lehner, Ernst. Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation. New York: Dover, 1972. 86. Lonetto, Richard, and Donald I. Templer. Death Anxiety. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1986. Part of the Series in Health Psychology and Behavioral Medicine, Charles D. Spielberger, editor in chief. The authors attempt to frame the study of death anxiety in such a way that it will find a prominent place in the behavioral and social sciences. They present both theoretical analyses and research on death anxiety that have been derived from a variety of environments. The text explores the correlates of death anxiety, its dimensions, death imagery, and coping with the anxiety. The appendix deals with measurement and features Boyar’s Fear of Death Scale, other death attitude scales, and the Death Anxiety Scale. Includes extensive references and an index. 87. Lunceford, Ronald, and Judy Lunceford. Attitudes on Death and Dying: A Cross-Cultural View. Los Alamitos, CA: Hwong Publishers, 1976. 88. Marks, Amy Seidel, and Bobby J. Calder. Attitudes toward Death and Funerals. Evanston, IL: Center for Marketing Sciences, J. L. Kellogg Graduate School of Management, Northwestern University, 1982. 89. McCoy, Marjorie Casebier. To Die with Style! Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1974. Through numerous stories and literary references, McCoy comments on varying approaches to death. She refers to these “styles” in chapters on accepting, defiant, sensual, humorous, tragic, and questing attitudes toward death. A final chapter addresses “achieving” one’s own death. Includes a list of titles for further reading arranged by subject. 90. Mitchell, Marjorie Edythe. The Child’s Attitude toward Death. New York: Schocken, 1967. 91. Moore, Virginia. Ho for Heaven! Man’s Changing Attitude toward Dying. New York: Dutton, 1956. 92. Murphy, Marie. New Images of the Last Things: Karl Rahner on Death and Life after Death. New York: Paulist Press, 1988.

Attitudes toward Death

15

93. Murphy, N. Michael. The Wisdom of Dying: Practices for Living. Boston: Element Books, 1999. Advocating for a celebration of job in death, Murphy, a physician who has worked in hospice environments, presents a positive vision from a spiritual, soulful perspective. He incorporates references to ancient myths and traditions from Ireland and the United Kingdom. This book is marketed as “An inspirational guide for dying consciously. A celebration of living consciously.” Includes emotional stories of the dying and their caregivers. 94. National Cancer Foundation. A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness. New York: National Cancer Foundation, 1962. 95. Neimeyer, Robert A., ed. Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumentation, and Application. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1994. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Offering the first comprehensive treatment of death anxiety, Neimeyer’s book explores the causes, correlates, and consequences of the fear of death; implications for applied contexts; useful ideas for health care settings; applications for psychotherapy; and instruction for death education. Such in-depth measurements of death attitudes as copies of instruments with scoring keys, extensions and refinements of widely used instruments, scales assessing death acceptances and competencies, and reliability of available data are included. Philosophical and psychological theories on death are covered as to how they affect the attitudes of bereaved young adults, persons with AIDS, nursing home care workers, clients in psychotherapy, and individuals who have had near-death experiences. This title is intended for physicians, researchers, psychotherapists, hospice workers, and others in the helping professions. Neimeyer is a professor of psychology at University of Memphis and is widely published on thanatological topics. 96. Nouwen, Henri J. M. Our Greatest Gift: A Meditation on Dying and Caring. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1994. Nouwen explores attitudes toward death in the context of Catholic spirituality. 97. Sheikh, Anees A., and Katharina S. Sheikh. Death Imagery: Confronting Death Brings Us to the Threshold of Life. Milwaukee, WI: American Imagery Institute, 1991. 98. Singer, Peter. Rethinking Life and Death: The Collapse of Our Traditional Ethics. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994. Published by St. Martin’s Press in 1995. 99. Stannard, David E., ed. Death in America. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1975. An important work in thanatology, Stannard’s book offers a collection of eight essays by anthropologists, cultural historians, and literary scholars Phillippe

16

Chapter 3

Aries, Mary Ann Meyers, Patricia Fernandez Kelly, Stanley French, Ann Douglas, Lewis O. Saum, Jack Goody, and Stannard himself. In his introduction, Stannard highlights what he sees as contradicting themes in Americans’ attitudes and approaches toward death. He notes that one of those themes is “the popular social criticism, exemplified by Jessica Mitford’s The American Way of Death, focusing on the excesses of the funeral industry.” The other is the “more scholarly sociological analysis of the common fate of most Americans, who now die in hospitals and rest homes, deserted by their families and friends, and faced with doctors and nurses so intent on maintaining their professional demeanor that they avoid personal contact with the dying at every turn.” He later argues, however, that these two themes, “the extravagant masquerade of death and the determined avoidance of the dying,” are actually reactions with a common source. Contributed articles discuss bibliographic trends in death and the interpretation of culture, the cemetery as cultural institution, death in Mexican folk culture, death and the Puritan child, death in Mormon thought and practice, changes in attitudes toward death in Western societies, and death in the popular mind of pre–Civil War America. Includes references, a small number of illustrations, and brief biographical information on the editor and contributors. Stannard is an American studies and history professor at Yale University. 100. Stillion, Judith M. Death and the Sexes: An Examination of Differential Longevity, Attitudes, Behaviors, and Coping Skills. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1985. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. A developmentally oriented psychologist, death education teacher, and counselor, Stillion examines the psychology of sex roles in the context of death and dying. She presents research on sex differences in longevity, looking at the changing face of death as well as biogenetic, environmental, and psychosocial perspectives on death. Other topics covered include sexism in death, sex roles and death attitudes across the life span, implications of gender identity and role for death attitudes, gender and suicide, speculations concerning sex differences in murder and suicide, widowhood, adult grief reactions, women and grief, a model of bereavement counseling, sex roles and death education, and counseling the bereaved with observations on sex roles. Each chapter concludes with a list of references. 101. Walker, Kenneth M. The Circle of Life: A Search for an Attitude to Pain, Disease, Old Age, and Death. New York: Consortium Press, 1970. 102. Weiner, Bill. Quiet Desperation: Plain Talk on Life and Death. Secaucus, NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1980. Originally intended to be a book about the life experiences of older people, it became a narrative about death as Weiner’s oral documentary brought to the surface many comments on death and dying. For two years, the author spoke with 400 men and women in hospitals, nursing homes, and funeral parlors and taped

Attitudes toward Death

17

them. He spoke with war veterans, the terminally ill, holocaust survivors, and those grieving the death of a loved one. The words of those interviewed are sad, humorous, and often inspiring. 103. Weiss, Jess E. The Vestibule. Port Washington, NY: Ashley Books, 1972. In an effort to alleviate “the sting of death” and to “establish with more certainty that there is an afterlife,” Weiss offers a collection of varied essays on death experiences. Includes Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s essay “The Experience of Death.” 104. Zinker, Joseph Chaim. Terminal Illness as a Source of Personality Change in a Woman Suffering from Cancer. Cleveland: Western Reserve University, 1963. This is Zinker’s doctoral dissertation. Founder of the Gestalt Institute in Wellfleet, MA, he has been involved in the growth and development of Gestalt theory and methodology for many years.

4 Bibliographies

105. Annotated Catalog of Books and Audiovisual Materials on Thanatology: Death, Bereavement, Loss, Grief, and Recovery from Bereavement. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1976. Cover title is The Thanatology Library. This is both a bibliography and a catalog with prices. Includes indexes. 106. Benson, Hazel B. The Dying Child: An Annotated Bibliography. New York: Greenwood Press, 1988. Part of the Contemporary Problems of Childhood series, number 6, Carol Ann Winchell, editor. This text is an extensive annotated bibliography of books, journal articles, and dissertations published primarily from 1960 to 1987. The entries are divided by subject within the general categories of General Aspects, The Young Child, The Adolescent, The Family, The Caregivers, and Physical Care. General Aspects includes bibliographies, historical views on death and dying, religious aspects of death, cultural beliefs, legal and ethical issues, grief and mourning, and anticipatory grief. Appendixes offer lists of children’s books on death, audiovisual materials, support organizations, wish-granting organizations, hospices, and basic bibliographic tools. Includes an author index, a selective keyword subject index, and a list of journal abbreviations. Benson is a medical librarian and head of the pharmacy library at Ohio State University. 107. Bernstein, Joanne E. Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and Loss. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1977. Bernstein, an authority on bibliotherapy, presents an annotated bibliography of 438 titles dealing with childhood bereavement. She also devotes a significant part of the book to book selection, thoughts and concepts relating to childhood bereavement, and an overview of bibliotherapy. Includes a section on selected reading for adult guides; a bibliography on bibliotherapy; author, title, and sub18

Bibliographies

19

ject indexes; and an extremely useful interest level index listing subject followed by age group interest level. 108. Farberow, Norman L. Bibliography on Suicide and Suicide Prevention: 1897–1957; 1958–1967. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health, 1969. Also published and distributed by the U.S. Government Printing Office. Farberow provides 2,202 references in this 203-page book. 109. Friedler, Anna B. Guide to the 400 Best Children’s and Adult’s Multicultural Books about Disability, Illness, and Death. Newton Centre, MA: Lift Every Voice Multicultural and Minority Source Materials Co., 1997. 110. Fulton, Robert. Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A Bibliography, 1845– 1975. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series, Robert J. Kastenbaum, editor. The title page notes “with the assistance of Jerry Carlson, Karl Krohn, Eric Markusen, and Greg Owen.” Fulton’s introduction attributes the publishing to the Center for Death Education and Research at the University of Minnesota, of which he is affiliated. Fulton offers more than 3,800 references that include both monographic and serial publications. Entries are numbered consecutively and are arranged alphabetically by author. Citations do not include notes or annotations. Includes a simple subject index. 111. ———. Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A Chronological Bibliography, 1843–1970. Minneapolis: Center for Thanatological Studies, University of Minnesota, 1970. Publisher also cited as the Center for Death Education and Research at the University of Minnesota. 112. Fulton, Robert, Margaret R. Reed, and Joyce H. Thielen. Death, Grief, and Bereavement II: A Bibliography, 1975–1980. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Also cited as A Bibliography on Death, Grief, and Bereavement II, 1975–1980. This is a supplement to Fulton’s earlier work, Death, Grief, and Bereavement, 1845–1975. Includes Joseph C. Santora’s 230-title Guide to Doctoral Dissertations on Death and Dying, 1970–1978. 113. Guthman, Robert F. Jr., and Sharon Kay Womack. Death, Dying, and Grief: A Bibliography. Lincoln, NE: Pied Publications, 1978. Also cited as published by Word Services, Waco, TX. The authors present an alphabetical list of more than 2,000 citations, most published in the thirty years preceding publication of the bibliography. Works cover all areas of death, dying, and grief. Citations are divided into sections based on format: articles in periodicals and newspapers; books; miscellaneous; speeches and reprinted, mimeographed, and unpublished papers; government documents; theses and dissertations; pamphlets; and surveys and papers presented at meetings. No annotations are included.

20

Chapter 4

114. Halporn, Roberta. The Thanatology Library. New York: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1976. An annotated catalog of books and audiovisual materials available from Highly Specialized Promotions. 115. Hayslip, Bert, and Robert J. Kastenbaum. Death and Dying: A Selective Bibliography for Gerontology Instruction. Washington, DC: Association for Gerontology in Higher Education, 1995. 116. Kutscher, Austin H. A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 1935–1968. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1969. Also cited as A Bibliography of Books on Death, Loss, and Grief: 1935–1968. Kutscher lists approximately 1,200 references in this 84-page book. 117. ———. A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 1968-1972. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1974. Also cited as A Bibliography of Books on Death, Loss, and Grief: 1968–1972. 118. Kutscher, Martin L., Daniel J. Cherico, Austin H. Kutscher, Robert DeBellis, Raphael Lorenzo, and Roberta Halporn. A Cross-Index of Indices of Books of Thanatology. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno Press. 119. Kutscher, Martin L., Daniel J. Cherico, Austin H. Kutscher, Amy E. Hanninen, Steven Johnson, and David Peretz. A Comprehensive Bibliography of the Thanatology Literature. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1975. Part of the MSS Thanatology Series. This book’s title is also cited as Bibliography of the Thanatology Literature. Kutscher and others offers more than 4,800 citations of journal articles, monographs, and other publications. There are no notes or annotations. A short list of bibliographical sources is included in the acknowledgments. Includes a simple subject index. 120. Mace, Gillian S., Faren R. Akins, and Dianna L. Akins. The Bereaved Child: Analysis, Education, and Treatment: An Abstracted Bibliography. New York: IFI/Plenum Press, 1981. 121. Marks, Renee U. The Sociology of Death: A Selected Bibliography. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, School of Public Health, Department of Epidemiology, 1965. 122. Meagher, David K., ed. As It Is Said: A Selected, Annotated Bibliography in Death and Dying. 11th ed. Brooklyn, NY: Center for Thanatology Research and Education, 2003. 123. Miller, Michael James, and Albert Jay Acri. Death: A Bibliographical Guide. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1977.

Bibliographies

21

124. Morgan, J. H., ed. Death and Dying: A Resource Bibliography for Clergy and Chaplains (1960–1976). Wichita, KS: Institute on Ministry and the Elderly, 1977. 125. Poteet, G. Howard. Death and Dying: A Bibliography, 1950–1974. Troy, NY: Whitston Publishing, 1976. 126. Poteet, G. Howard, and Joseph C. Santora. Death and Dying: A Bibliography (1974–1978). Troy, NY: Whitston Publishing Co., 1989. An unannotated bibliography of mostly periodical literature published from 1974 to 1978. Subject focus is death and dying, euthanasia, and suicide. Citations are divided by subject. Includes an author index and a broad list of journals. 127. Prince, Arlene. Death and Dying: A Mediagraphy: An Annotated Listing of Audiovisual Materials. 1977. Project sponsored by the Health Sciences Learning Resources Center, the University of Washington, and the Allied Memorial Council. Prince has compiled a 266-page bibliography of audiovisual materials on terminal care, thanatology, and related subjects. Includes indexes. 128. Sell, Irene L. Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography. New York: Tiresias Press, 1977. Sell, an associate professor of nursing at Long Island University, offers 506 annotations (382 articles, 71 books, and 53 audiovisual items) that are presented for their relevance to nursing. Most of the works cited were published in the 1970s with some in the 1960s. Includes author and extensive subject indexes. 129. Sell, Kenneth D. Hospice, an International English Language Bibliography. Durham, NC: Hospice of North Carolina, 1981. 130. Simpson, Michael A. Dying, Death, and Grief: A Critically Annotated Bibliography and Source Book of Thanatology and Terminal Care. New York: Plenum Press, 1979. Simpson plays the role of critic for the literature of death and dying. He uses a one- to five-star rating system and writes candid and helpful commentary on more than 700 titles on death and dying. Examples of comments include “catchy title,” “well-meaning but not at all special,” “over-emotional,” and “wispy and frail book.” Such formats as books, films, audiovisual materials, and journal articles are included. There is no index. Simpson is on the faculty at the Academic Department of Psychiatry, Royal Free Hospital, London. 131. Southard, Samuel. Death and Dying: A Bibliographical Survey. Bibliographies and Indexes in Religious Studies. New York: Greenwood Press, 1991. Primarily focused on theological, pastoral, and counseling aspects of death and dying, this annotated bibliography includes more than 2,200 books, articles, chapters, and reports.

22

Chapter 4

132. Szabo, John F. Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1993. Paperback reprint published in 2002. In the first reference book devoted entirely to mortuary science, Szabo presents a thorough bibliographical examination of the funeral industry and related subjects, including even the most specialized areas of the field. Most citations are annotated, with special notes on editions and reprints. Areas covered include autopsy, cremation, burial rites and ceremonies, caskets and vaults, cemeteries, embalming, epitaphs, ethnic customs, funeral dress and apparel, funeral music, funeral reform, grave markers, laws and regulations, liturgies and sermons, memorial societies, organ and body donation, premature burial, per-need service, restorative art, and several others. The text is organized by subject, with author and title indexes and five appendixes. 133. Vernick, Joel J. Selected Bibliography on Death and Dying. Washington, DC: National Institutes of Health/U.S. Government Printing Office, 1970. 134. Zalaznik, Patricia Weller. Bibliography on Grief: Your Guide to the Right Resources to Cope with Loss and Death. Minneapolis, MN: Abundant Resources, 1995.

5 Childhood Bereavement

135. Alderman, Linda. Why Did Daddy Die?: Helping Children Cope with the Loss of a Parent. New York: Pocket Books/Simon & Schuster, 1989. Alderman offers her own emotional journey following the death of her husband and how she guided her children through their own bereavement. Helpful for both those grieving and those helping children grieve, this book provides tips for teachers as well as answers to commonly asked questions following the loss of a parent. Alderman discusses how to tell children about death and loss; funerals and issues surrounding them pertinent to children; understanding a child’s concept of death; phases of grief (shock and denial, anger, bargaining, depression, acceptance); and reaching out for help. Includes a brief annotated bibliography. 136. Altschul, Sol, and G. H. Pollock. Childhood Bereavement and Its Aftermath. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1988. 137. Anthony, Sylvia. The Discovery of Death in Childhood and After. New York: Basic Books, 1972. First American edition. Originally published as The Child’s Discovery of Death: A Study in Child Psychology by Kegan Paul, London, in 1940, and by Harcourt, Brace, New York, in 1940. Also published by Penguin, Baltimore, MD, in 1973. In a revised edition of her earlier work, Anthony presents an exploration of how children respond to death. She highlights similarities between the way contemporary children react to death and the rituals of prehistoric peoples. Anthony’s authoritative book is an often-cited classic. An appendix to chapter 1 is titled “Story-Completion Responses from Children Whose Mental Condition Appears to Be Pathological.” Includes bibliography and name index.

23

24

Chapter 5

138. Barnard, Paul, Ian Morland, and Jan Nagy. Children, Bereavement, and Trauma: Nurturing Resilience. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999. 139. Bernstein, Joanne E. Helping Children Cope with Loss: A Bibliotherapy Approach. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1978. 140. Bernstein, Joanne E., and Stephen V. Gullo. When People Die. New York: Dutton, 1977. Bernstein and Gullo provide frank information about what happens when people die from both physical and spiritual perspectives. For ages five and up. 141.

Berry, Joy Wilt. About Death. Chicago: Children’s Press, 1990.

142. ———. Good Answers to Tough Questions about Death. Chicago: Children’s Press, 1990. 143. Boritzer, Etan. What Is Death? Santa Monica, CA: Veronica Lane Books, 2000. Part of the Love and Feelings for Kids series. Illustrated by Nancy Forrest. This book is a gentle and thoughtful presentation of death for young children. With understandable but specific narrative, Boritzer explores death traditions from various cultures and religions. 144. Christ, Grace Hyslop. Healing Children’s Grief: Surviving a Parent’s Death from Cancer. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. Christ, an associate professor of social work at Columbia University, studied 88 families in which 157 children lost one of their parents when they were three to seventeen years old. Fifty-one fathers and thirty-seven mothers were treated for advance stages of cancer at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center. The families, except for one, participated in a psychoeducational intervention program designed to help families cope with the death of one parent. The interventions provided information that allowed Christ to conduct quantitative and qualitative analyses. This book summarizes the latter. The analysis examines how the children coped from six months preceding to fourteen months following the parent’s death. The data yielded five developmentally separate age groups. Most of the children in the study adapted well to the loss. Includes a bibliography and name and subject indexes. 145. Coloroso, Barbara. Parenting through Crisis: Helping Kids in Times of Loss, Grief, and Change. New York: HarperCollins, 2000. Also published by Quill, New York, in 2001. 146. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr. Handbook of Childhood Death and Bereavement. New York: Springer, 1996. 147. Dennison, Amy, Allie Dennison, and David Dennison. After You Lose Someone You Love: Advice and Insight from the Diaries of Three Kids Who’ve

Childhood Bereavement

25

Been There. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 2005. Published in 2003 as Our Dad Died: The True Story of Three Kids Whose Lives Changed. Written from a child’s point of view, this book relays the experiences of young children dealing with the sudden loss of a parent. The authors write about the death, the funeral, the cemetery, the first week, the first year, thoughts and feelings, and their sadness and grief. Includes practical suggestions for coping and a brief list of recommended titles. Foreword by Harold S. Kushner. 148. Dickerson, Julie G., and Patricia Brant. Grandpa’s Berries: A Story to Help Children Understand Grief and Loss. Johnstown, PA: Cherubic Press, 1995. 149. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Children Mourning, Mourning Children. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1995. Doka and several fellow scholars on death and dying offer twelve articles on various topics related to childhood bereavement and death. They address children’s understandings of death, answering the questions of grieving children. They talk to children about illness, life-threatening illnesses in children, HIV in the context of orphans and victims, parental and childhood grief, children and traumatic loss, the role of the school, the worlds of dying children and their well siblings, a child’s reconstruction of a deceased parent, and family bereavement. Contributors include J. William Worden, Charles A. Corr, Catherine M. Sanders, and Earl A. Grollman. Includes references, a sampler of literature for young readers arranged by age group, and selected and annotated bibliographies by Corr. The back of the book provides information about the Hospice Foundation of America and its educational and publishing activities. 150. ———, ed. Living with Grief: Children, Adolescents, and Loss. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2000. Distributed by Brunner/Mazel, Philadelphia. Produced in conjunction with the Hospice Foundation of America’s National Bereavement Teleconference, this text is a compendium of articles by noted experts on childhood grief. Divided into sections titled “Theoretical Overview,” “Clinical Approaches with Children and Adolescents,” and “Special Losses,” Doka’s book offers chapters on adolescent grief, the relationship of culture and class to grief, the role of the school, empowering families and other natural support systems, counseling approaches, play therapy, benefits of ritual, the role of groups with grieving children and teens, death education, parental and sibling bereavement, and traumatic loss. Most chapters are followed by stories, vignettes, dialogues, or other narratives that illustrate the chapter’s theme. Charles A. Corr offers a special chapter on using books to help children cope. In it he presents an annotated bibliography of recommended titles. Also included is a list of resource organizations with detailed descriptions and a list of references. Foreword by Jack D. Gordon, president of the Hospice Foundation of America.

26

Chapter 5

151. Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families. Helping the Grieving Student: A Guide for Teachers: A Practical Guide for Dealing with Death in Your Classroom. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 1998. 152. ———. Thirty-Five Ways to Help a Grieving Child. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 1999. Part of the Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families Guidebook Series. 153. ———. When Death Impacts Your School: A Guide for School Administrators. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 2000. 154. Dyregov, Atle. Grief in Children: A Handbook for Adults. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1991. 155. Emswiler, Mary Ann, and James P. Emswiler. Guiding Your Child through Grief. New York: Bantam Books, 2000. The Emswilers are founders of the New England Center for Loss and Transition and The Cove, a program for grieving children and their families. This compassionate guide provides professional advice for parents and caregivers who are helping a child through a period of bereavement. It discusses the variety of ways in which children grieve, changes in family dynamics, effective ways to ease the transition to these changes, communicating with children about death and dying, coping with the overwhelming sorrow experienced during holidays, depression emanating from grief and how to identify it, and other suggestions for helping children heal. Other chapters address stepparenting a grieving child, issues with grieving teens, and long-term effects of childhood grief. Includes a suggested reading list and ideas for school personnel and health care professionals for dealing with grieving children. Also includes information about the organizations founded by the authors. 156. Fassler, Joan. Helping Children Cope: Mastering Stress through Books and Stories. New York: Free Press, 1978. 157. Fiorini, Jody J., and Jodi Ann Mullen. Counseling Children and Adolescents through Grief and Loss. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2006. 158. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Grieving Child: A Parent’s Guide. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992. Fitzgerald, director of the first grief program in the nation established in a community health center, presents a guide for parents to help make a child’s world whole again following a death. Acknowledging that explaining death to a child is an incredibly difficult task for parents, the author offers advice for telling a child about death and coping with loss. She discusses introducing children to the reality of death through books, language, and other methods; children’s reactions to death; coping with the reality of death; dealing with the emotional responses of a

Childhood Bereavement

27

child—anger, fear, guilt, depression, and so on; and moving beyond grief and returning to school. Fitzgerald also includes a section on resolving childhood grief as an adult and several activities for children and adults—drawing, writing, activities with clay, funeral home and cemetery visits, and so forth. Includes a short bibliography sectioned by age group. Introduction by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross. 159. Fogarty, James A. The Magical Thoughts of Grieving Children: Treating Children with Complicated Mourning and Advice for Parents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 160. Fox, Sandra Sutherland. Good Grief: Helping Groups of Children When a Friend Dies. Boston: New England Association for Education of Young Children, 1985. 161. Fry, Virginia Lynn. Part of Me Died, Too: Stories of Creative Survival among Bereaved Children and Teenagers. New York: Dutton/Penguin, 1995. Fry attempts to help children and teens to express their grief in a manner that brings healing rather than angst by presenting stories about young people. Each chapter offers a different story and focuses on a different type of grief, including that experienced following an accidental death; the death of a grandparent, mother, father, sibling, friend; a death from AIDS; a suicide; and a murder. The book concludes with an epilogue bringing the reader up-to-date with how the young people in the stories are doing now. Fry is the director of the Hospice Council of Vermont and teaches at the University of Vermont. 162. Furman, Edna. A Child’s Parent Dies: Studies in Childhood Bereavement. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1974. 163. Gaffney, Donna A. The Seasons of Grief: Helping Your Children Grow through Loss. New York: New American Library, 1988. 164. Goldman, Linda. Breaking the Silence: A Guide to Help Children with Complicated Grief—Suicide, Homicide, AIDS, Violence, and Abuse. Washington, DC: Accelerated Development, 1996. 165. ———. Helping the Grieving Child in School. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Education Foundation, 2000. 166. ———. Life and Loss: A Guide to Help Grieving Children. Muncie, IN: Accelerated Development, 1994. 167. Greenlee, Sharon, and Bill Drath. When Someone Dies. Atlanta, GA: Peachtree Publishers, 1992. Illustrated by Bill Drath. A simple book for children on loss and grief featuring soft, gentle nature scenes. Greenlee is also a counselor. 168.

Grollman, Earl A. The Child and Death. Boston: Beacon Press, 1967.

28

Chapter 5

169. Hartnett, Johnette. Children and Grief: Big Issues for Little Hearts. South Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993. 170. Heegaard, Marge Eaton. Coping with Death and Grief. Minneapolis, MN: Lerner Publications, 1990. Emphasizing that death is a natural part of life, Heegaard presents a helpful book for older children on how to say goodbye, dealing with the feelings that follow the death of a loved one, and helping others who are grieving. Heegaard, a grief and loss counselor who works with children, provides practical information on death and funerals in a gentle, thoughtful way. Includes a glossary and titles for further reading. 171. Hickman, Martha Whitmore. Last Week My Brother Anthony Died. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1984. Illustrated by Randie Julian. 172. Holford, Karen, and Kevin McCain. I Miss Grandpa: A Story to Help Your Child Understand Death—and Eternal Life. Nampa, ID: Pacific Press Publishing Association, 2004. 173. Huntley, Theresa. Helping Children Grieve When Someone They Love Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1991. Revised paperback edition published in 2002. 174. Jackson, Aariane R., and Leigh Lawhon. Can You Hear Me Smiling?: A Child Grieves a Sister. Washington, DC: Child & Family Press, 2004. 175. James, John W., Russell Friedman, and Leslie Landon Matthews. When Children Grieve: For Adults to Help Children Deal with Death, Divorce, Pet Loss, Moving, and Other Losses. New York: HarperCollins, 2001. This book is designed to equip parents, teachers, and caregivers with the skills to help grieving children. The authors present an easy-to-read guide with numerous practical suggestions, personal stories, and real-life accounts. Includes the questionnaire used by Matthews to assess how children process loss and the effect that parental skills in the area have on recovery from bereavement. Information on the Grief Recovery Institute is included. 176. Jersild, Arthur T., and Frances B. Holmes. Children’s Fears. New York: Teachers College, Columbia University, 1935. 177. Jewett, Claudia L. Helping Children Cope with Separation and Loss. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1982. Also cited as being published by Bergin & Garvey Publishers in 1982 with coauthor S. Hadley. 178. Job, Nina, and Gill Frances. Childhood Bereavement: Developing the Curriculum and Pastoral Support. London: National Children’s Bureau, 2004. Job and Frances provide a guide for teachers and school personnel to address issues relating to dying, death, and grief. They utilize best practices, case studies,

Childhood Bereavement

29

and expert knowledge from a network of professionals studying childhood bereavement. This book strongly emphasizes the critical role of schools in assisting young people with these issues. Work of the Childhood Bereavement Network is featured. 179. Johnson, Joy. Keys to Helping Children Deal with Death and Grief. Hauppauge, NY: Barron’s Educational Series, 1999. Also cited as Keys to Teaching Children about Death and Grief. 180. Johnson, Joy, and Marv Johnson. Tell Me Papa: A Family Book for Children’s Questions about Death and Funerals. Council Bluffs, IA: Centering Corporation, 1978. Illustrated by Shari Borum. 181. Juneau, Barbara Frisbie. Sad but O.K. My Daddy Died Today: A Child’s View of Death. Grass Valley, CA: Blue Dolphin Publishing, 1988. 182. Klicker, Ralph L. A Student Dies, a School Mourns: Dealing with Death and Loss in the School Community. Philadelphia: Accelerated Development, 2000. Also published by Hemisphere Publishing, Washington, DC, in 1999. 183. Kliman, Gilbert. Preventive Opportunities in Childhood Bereavement (Death of a Parent Study). White Plains, NY: Center for Preventive Psychiatry, 1964. 184. Knowles, Don, and Nancy Reeves. But Won’t Granny Need Her Socks?: Dealing Effectively with Children’s Concerns about Death and Dying. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., 1983. 185. Koocher, Gerald P. Talking about Death with “Normal” Children: Research Strategies and Issues. Boston: Developmental Evaluation Clinic, The Children’s Hospital Medical Center, 1973. 186. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia. Where Has Grandpa Gone?: Helping Children Cope with Grief and Loss. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 1983. Includes a read-aloud section for children titled “Mommy, What Does It Mean to Die?” 187. Kroen, William C., and Pamela Espeland. Helping Children Cope with the Loss of a Loved One: A Guide for Grownups. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 1996. 188. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Children and Death: How Children and Their Parents Can and Do Cope with Death. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, 1997. Originally published in 1983. 189. ———. Remember the Secret. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 1981. Illustrated by Heather Preston.

30

Chapter 5

Kübler-Ross offers a touching story about loss for children facing lifethreatening illness or the loss of a loved one. A 32-page paperback, this book will help young people understand the gift of life as well as the reality of death. 190. Kysar, Ardis, and Elizabeth Overstad. Helping Young Children Cope with Crisis: A Guide for Training Child Care Workers. St. Paul, MN: Toys ’n Things Press, 1979. 191. Lamers, William Jr. Death, Grief, Mourning, the Funeral, and the Child. Chicago: National Association of Funeral Directors, 1965. 192. Landau, Elaine. Death: Everyone’s Heritage. New York: Julian Messner, 1976. A sensitive explanation of death for youth, Landau provides an overview of death and discusses euthanasia, the process of dying, caring for the terminally ill, suicide, grief and bereavement, funerals, and recovery from grief. Includes a comforting epilogue and brief bibliography. Landau worked as a newspaper reporter, children’s book editor, and children’s librarian. 193. Lehmann, Linda, Shane R. Jimerson, and Ann Gaasch. Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Early Childhood Edition: Kindergarten–Grade 2. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. 194. ———. Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Middle Childhood Edition: Grades 3–6. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. 195. ———. Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Preschool Edition: Denny the Duck Stories. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. 196. LeShan, Eda. Learning to Say Goodbye: When a Parent Dies. New York: Macmillan, 1976. A guide for middle school–aged children dealing with the death of a parent. 197. ———. When a Parent Is Very Sick. Boston: Joy Street Books, a Division of Little, Brown and Company, 1986. 198. Levete, Sarah, Christopher O’Neill, and Roger Vlitos. When People Die. Brookfield, CT: Copper Beach Books, 1998. Intended for elementary school audiences. 199. Levy, E. L. Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Siblings. Greely, CO: Counseling Consultants, 1982. 200. Lewis, Paddy Greenwall, and Jessica G. Lippman. Helping Children Cope with the Death of a Parent: A Guide for the First Year. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2004. 201. Lindsay, Bruce, and John Elsegood. Working with Children in Grief and Loss. London: Bailliere Tindall, 1996.

Childhood Bereavement

31

202. Mallonie, Bryan, and Robert Ingpen. Lifetimes: The Beautiful Way to Explain Death to Children. New York: Bantam Books, 1983. Intended for audiences ages eight to ten. 203. McCarthy, Jane Ribbens, and Julie Jessop. Young People, Bereavement, and Loss: Disruptive Transitions? London: National Children’s Bureau for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation, 2005. In this 86-page paperback, the authors examine the implications of bereavement on the lives of children and teens through a thorough review of scholarly literature on the topic. They suggest that bereavement is a general part of growing up. The book explores case studies on how young people discuss experiences with loss; the theoretical history of research on bereavement and young people; empirical evidence of bereavement as a risk factor in the lives of young people; social and cultural contexts of bereavement; approaches to education and intervention; and implications for policy makers and practitioners in forming guidelines, procedures, and practices for working with young people who are bereaved. An appendix provides statistical data on numbers of young people experiencing bereavement. Also includes an extensive list of references. 204. McGuire, Leslie. Death and Illness. Vero Beach, FL: Rourke Corporation, 1990. Intended for juvenile audiences, this book uses the experiences of several young people to explain losing a loved one because of a terminal illness. 205. Miller, Sally Downham. Mourning and Dancing for Schools: A Grief and Recovery Sourcebook for Students, Teachers, and Parents. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, 2000. Miller’s book is about recognizing the losses experienced by members of a school community and understanding the effects of bereavement over time. She includes many stories about her work with schools and those mourning. She also discusses team training, print and audiovisual resources, organizations and support groups, and “writing through the storm.” 206. Monroe, Barbara, and Frances Kraus, eds. Brief Interventions with Bereaved Children. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005. Monroe and Kraus, both on staff at the St. Christopher’s Hospice in London, present theoretical concepts on and practical implications of brief work with bereaved youth and their families. The authors’ unique focus is on “flexible and accessible short-term services delivered at the right time” and how they “underpin the strengths of bereaved children.” Their premise is that such brief interventions support the youths’ recovery rather than pathologizing the grief process. This notion appears in other works but is not examined in-depth as it is here. Appropriate for practitioners and educators, this book includes chapters from seventeen contributors. Topics include family assessment, therapeutic interventions, shrinking the space between people, brief interventions before bereavement, the role of

32

Chapter 5

volunteers in providing bereavement support to children, loss and grief in school communities, interventions in critical care environments, traumatically bereaved children, the aftermath of suicide, and moving beyond grief. Includes several highlighted personal stories as case studies. 207. Moody, A. Mr. Death: Four Stories. New York: Harper & Row, 1975. Intended for audiences ages twelve and older. 208. Moore, Jane Peters. Crafting a Crazy Quilt: Four Teachers Piece Together Death in a School Context. Milwaukee, WI: National-Louis University, National College of Education, 2001. Author’s doctoral dissertation. 209. Morgan, John D., ed. Young People and Death. Philadelphia: The Charles Press, 1991. Several experts in child psychology and behavior collectively offer a guidebook for families dealing with death and loss. 210. Moser, Adolph, and David Melton. Don’t Despair on Thursdays!: The Children’s Grief Management Book. Kansas City, MO: Landmark Editions, 1996. With its compelling cartoon cover and elementary text, this 61-page book helps children deal with grief following both death and the loss of friends who have moved away. 211. Mundy, Michaelene. Sad Isn’t Bad: A Good-Grief Guidebook for Kids Dealing with Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1998. 212. Nussbaum, Kathy. Preparing the Children: Information and Ideas for Families Facing Terminal Illness and Death. Kodiak, AK: Gifts of Hope, 1998. 213. Nussbaum, Kathy, and Melody Chord. Including the Children: A Resource Guide for Adults to Help Children Deal with the Terminal Illness and Death of a Loved One. Eugene, OR: Healing Wings, 1994. 214. O’Toole, Donna R. Growing through Grief: A K–12 Curriculum to Help Young People through All Kinds of Loss. Burnsville, NC: Mountain Rainbow Publications, 1989. 215. Oates, Martha D. Death in the School Community: A Handbook for Counselors, Teachers, and Administrators. Alexandria, VA: American Counseling Association, 1993. 216. Palmer, Pat, and Dianne O’Quinn Burke. “I Wish I Could Hold Your Hand”: A Child’s Guide to Grief and Loss. San Luis Obispo, CA: Impact Publishing, 1994. 217. Papadatou, Danai, and Constantine J. Papadatos. Children and Death. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991.

Childhood Bereavement

33

218. Papenbrock, Patricia L., and Robert F. Voss. Loss: How Children and Teenagers Can Cope with Death and Other Kinds of Loss. Raymond, WA: Medic Publishing Co., 1990. 219. Pennells, Margaret, and Susan C. Smith. The Forgotten Mourners: Guidelines for Working with Bereaved Children. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1995. 220. Pringle, Laurence. Death Is Natural. New York: Four Winds Press, 1977. A simple 54-page book for children that explains death in the most general sense. 221. Rathke, Julia Wilcox. What Children Need When They Grieve: The Four Essentials: Routine, Love, Honesty, and Security. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2004. 222. Reed, Elizabeth L. Helping Children with the Mystery of Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1970. 223. Richmond, Judy. Just You and Me: Making Memories with Your Children. St. Joseph, MO: Hands of Hope Hospice, 1995. 224. Romain, Trevor. What on Earth Do You Do When Someone Dies? Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 1999. Edited by Elizabeth Verdick. Romain, an author and illustrator of several children’s books, offers this 72page small paperback written for younger children. It is divided into eighteen chapters, each a question about death, mourning, or funerals. Examples include Who can I talk to? Is it ok to cry? Will I ever feel better? Where has the person gone? Where else can I go for help? Includes four titles for suggested reading. Romain encourages children to visit libraries and bookstores for additional information. Includes simple illustrations. 225. Romond, Janice Loomis. Children Facing Grief. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1989. 226. Rowling, Louise. Grief in School Communities: Effective Support Strategies. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2003. Departing from the traditional approach of addressing grief in young people from an individual, supportive perspective, Rowling uses the “school community” as the organizing supportive framework, recognizing that losses are “embedded in a young person’s social environment as well as the family.” She also focuses more on the effects of bereavement on the child in their present environment rather than the adult the child will become. A member of the International Work Group on Death, Dying, and Bereavement and associate professor at the University of Sydney, Rowling’s topics include critical incident management, creating a supportive school environment, partnerships with outside agencies,

34

Chapter 5

disenfranchised grief in school settings, and the impact of loss on children and adolescents. Includes an excellent glossary, a bibliography, and an index. 227. Rudman, Masha Kabakow. Children’s Literature: An Issues Approach. 2nd ed. New York: Longman, 1984. 228. Rudman, Masha Kabakow, Kathleen Dunne Gagne, and Joanne E. Bernstein. Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and Loss: An Annotated Bibliography. 4th ed. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1993. Part of the Serving Special Needs Series. Containing more than an annotated bibliography, Rudman’s book is a sourcebook on the issue of loss and children. In the bibliography, she includes 746 titles and provides thorough critical annotations. More than half of the titles were published between 1989 and 1993. Rudman also includes some lengthy narrative in the front of the book on separation, loss, and bibliotherapy for young people. Here she discusses a child’s concepts of separation, a child’s reaction to separation, helping children cope, history of bibliotherapy, research in bibliotherapy, and tips for successful bibliotherapy. She also provides lists of books and chapters within books about separation and loss for adults. Another list contains titles on bibliotherapy, including periodical articles. An appendix offers a list, arranged by subject, of organizations and contact information with brief descriptions of each. The book concludes with author, title, and subject indexes along with a helpful interest level index listing bibliographic entries according to subject and age level. 229. Rugg, Sharon. Memories Live Forever: A Memory Book for Grieving Children. Marietta, GA: Rising Sun Center for Loss and Renewal, 1995. Rugg, a licensed social worker, presents a collection of children’s writings about death and loss along with exercises to help with sharing feelings. 230. Rugg, Sharon, and Rebecca Randall. Puppet Plays for Grieving Children. Marietta, GA: Rising Sun Center for Loss and Renewal, 2000. Rugg and Randall present a collection of sixteen puppets dealing with various themes of death and dying. Themes include fatal accidents, terminal illnesses, parental losses, life changes, the loss of a pet, natural disasters, suicides, divorces, homesickness, HIV and AIDS, among others. The authors also offer ideas about creating puppets and puppet theaters. 231. Schaefer, Dan, and Christine Lyons. How Do We Tell the Children? New York: Newmarket Press, 1986. Published in 1993 with the subtitle A Step-by-Step Guide for Helping Children Two to Teen Cope When Someone Dies. Third edition published in 2001. Told in direct and simple language, this book explains the facts of death to children and teens and offers guidance on coping with loss. It explores how their emotions affect their reactions to death. Schaefer and Lyons begin with a review of what children think about death, noting differences by age group. They exam-

Childhood Bereavement

35

ine how to explain death to children in various situations, including the death of a grandparent, infant death, the death of friend or classmate, an accidental death, a murder, a suicide, and AIDS. They offer compassionate advice on talking to children about someone who is dying. A touching chapter is offered on speaking about death with a mentally challenged child. Grief and recovery from bereavement are thoroughly treated with chapters on special grief needs of children; the grieving process; dealing with anger, guilt, and responsibility; and helping children heal. A brief chapter on funerals is included. The authors also offer an extensive crisis checklist as well as an annotated bibliography divided by subject and a list of support groups. Foreword by David Peretz, professor of psychiatry at the College of Physicians and Surgeons at Columbia University. 232. Schuurman, Donna L. Helping Children Cope with Death. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 1998. 233. ———. Never the Same: Coming to Terms with the Death of a Parent. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2003. Schuurman presents a thoughtful and sensitive guide for parents, teachers, and other caregivers for grieving children. She discusses feelings without emphasizing stages of grief. An appendix includes an article titled “Limitations of Studies: How to Know What to Believe When You Read a Study’s Findings.” Includes a bibliography. Schuurman is executive director of The Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families and past president of the Association for Death Education and Counseling. 234. Seibert, Dinah, Judy Catherine Drolet, and Joyce V. Fetro. Are You Sad Too?: Helping Children Deal with Loss and Death. Santa Cruz, CA: ETR Associates, 1993. This 154-page paperback offers “suggestions for teachers, parents, and other care providers of children to age 10.” Chapters address educating children about loss and death; sharing death experiences to include cultural traditions and religious beliefs; how children learn about death; what children need to know about death; responding to children’s questions, including examples; responding to a loss or a death; and using children’s literature to teach about death. Also includes suggested readings, references, and a short glossary. 235. Siekmann, Theodore C. Come the End: Instructions for Young People on the Last Things. New York: J. F. Wagner, 1951. 236. Silverman, Janis. Help Me Say Goodbye: Activities for Helping Kids Cope When a Special Person Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 1999. Silverman presents an art therapy and activity book for young children coping with death. 237. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Never Too Young to Know: Death in Children’s Lives. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.

36

Chapter 5

Though somewhat theoretical, this book’s numerous vignettes make it helpful to general readers seeking help with dealing with death in the context of children. The publisher notes that it is the first book to “bring together diverse fields of study and offer a practical as well as multifaceted theoretical approach to how children cope with death.” Silverman explores how children are affected by loss and challenges brought on by grief and how they can be supported in bereavement. Includes extensive references; an index; and a helpful appendix featuring resources, organizations, and websites for the bereaved. 238. Sirvis, Barbara. Death and Dying: An Educational Module for Special Educators. New York: Teachers College of Columbia University, 1976. 239. Smilansky, Sara. On Death: Helping Children Understand and Cope. New York: P. Lang, 1987. 240. Smith, B. A. Somewhere Just Beyond. New York: Macmillan, 1993. Intended for audiences ages eight to twelve. 241. Smith, Susan C., and Margaret Pennells. Interventions with Bereaved Children. Bristol, PA: J. Kingsley Publishers, 1995. 242. Sogn, Donnelen L. Remember the Laughter: Children, Death, and Loss. Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1978. 243. Sprung, Barbara. Death. Austin, TX: Raintree Steck-Vaughn, 1998. Part of the Preteen Pressures series. Intended for elementary and junior high school audiences, Sprung’s book is an easy-to-read overview of death and grieving. She offers chapters on the death of a parent, sudden death, suicide, and coping with the death of a loved one. Includes a glossary, organizations to turn to for help, and a suggested reading list of both fiction and nonfiction titles. Illustrated with photographs. 244. Stein, Sara Bonnett, Gilbert Kliman, and Dick Frank. About Dying: An Open Family Book for Parents and Children Together. New York: Walker, 1974. Reprinted in 1985. Intended for audiences ages four to nine. 245. Stevenson, Robert G., ed. What Will We Do? Preparing a School Community to Cope with Crises. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Second edition is part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 246. Stewart, Gail B. Death. San Diego, CA: KidHaven Press, 2002. Part of the Understanding Issues series. Stewart introduces young children to death with photographs and narrative discussing what death is, saying goodbye, and experiencing grief. Includes a tenword glossary with such terms as “brain-dead” and “rigor mortis,” a list of four

Childhood Bereavement

37

titles for further exploration, and information about the author. The Understanding Issues series explores “uncomfortable topics” that impact children. 247. Swetland, Sandra, and Nancy Calhoun. Helping Children Cope with Death: A Guide for School Personnel. Pittsburgh, PA: Allegheny Intermediate Unit, Nonpublic Schools Program, 1984. 248. Terhune, James A. Coping with Personal Losses. Eugene, OR: J. Terhune, 1987. A self-published text for juvenile audiences. 249. Trozzi, Maria, and Kathy Massimini. Talking with Children about Loss. New York: Berkley, 1999. 250. Vandeman, George E. Papa, Are You Going to Die? Mountain View, CA: Pacific Press, 1970. 251. Vogel, Linda Jane. Helping a Child Understand Death. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1975. 252. Ward, Barbara. Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with under Elevens: A Holistic Approach. Bristol, PA: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1996. Originally published in 1993. 253. Wass, Hannelore, and Charles A. Corr, eds. Childhood and Death. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1984. 254. ———, eds. Helping Children Cope with Death: Guidelines and Resources. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1982. Revised second edition published in 1984 as part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 255. Webb, Nancy Boyd, ed. Helping Bereaved Children: A Handbook for Practitioners. New York: Guilford Press, 2002. Originally published in 1993. A member of the faculty of Fordham University’s Graduate School of Social Service, Webb has assembled articles from ten diverse contributors along with several of her own pieces to assist social workers, psychologists, and others who may fill the role of helping a child through loss. Topics include children’s emotional responses to death, differences between childhood and adult grief, religious and cultural influences on a child’s understanding of death, disabling grief, several variations on professional intervention, therapy options, vicarious traumatization of counselors, sibling death, grandparent death, parental death, suicide and grieving children, violent deaths, play therapy groups, the death of a teacher, and school-based intervention. Case studies are almost always referenced. Appendixes include training programs and certifications in play therapy, grief counseling, and trauma/crisis counseling; a brief list of bereavement resources; resources for play materials; and a limited bibliography focused on religious, cultural, and ethnic practices related to death. Foreword by Earl A. Grollman.

38

Chapter 5

256. Weitzman, Elizabeth. Let’s Talk about When a Parent Dies. New York: PowerKids Press/Rosen Publishing Group, 1996. Part of the Let’s Talk Library. Intended for young children, this is a simple book on grief. The author emphasizes how death is not the child’s fault, how one can never love too much, sharing feelings, fear, accepting the loss, and holding on to memories. Includes a brief glossary and color photographs to illustrate the concepts. 257. Wolfelt, Alan D. A Child’s View of Grief: A Guide for Parents, Teachers, and Counselors. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2004. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt, director of the Center for Loss and Life Transition, presents a 45-page booklet on how children and adolescents grieve after a loved one dies. Includes guidance for parents and caregivers. 258. ———. Healing the Bereaved Child: Grief Gardening, Growth through Grief, and Other Touchstones for Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1996. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt offers guidance for helping a child through bereavement. He discusses the unique qualities of a child’s grief, the six needs of mourning, foundations for counseling bereaved children, counseling techniques, support groups for bereaved children, helping grieving children at school, and helping the grieving adolescent. Wolfelt advocates a more holistic approach to the grief process. 259. ———. Healing a Child’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt presents an idea book for adults who are helping a child grieve. 260. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart for Kids: 100 Practical Ideas: Simple Advice and Activities for Children after a Death. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. For six- to twelve-year-olds, this book offers simple advice and suggested activities for children following the death of a loved one. Wolfelt affirms feelings and emphasizes that they are normal and necessary. 261. ———. Helping Children Cope with Grief. Muncie, IN: Accelerated Development, Inc., 1983. Prolific author Wolfelt offers a guide for parents, educators, and caregivers working with grieving children. He offers suggestions for creating a caring relationship and an open atmosphere for children to discuss feelings and attitudes toward death and dying. Topics covered include factors influencing a child’s response to death, emotional responses, dimensions of childhood grief, physiological changes, regression, explosive emotions, acting out, fears, guilt and self-

Childhood Bereavement

39

blame, reconciliation, skills needed by the caregiver, and helping others to help children. Discussion questions are also provided to help in facilitating group conversations about grief and death. Wolfelt also includes an important chapter on the “Big Man” or “Big Woman” syndrome among bereaved children. Includes a list of twelve activities for children and their caregivers, selected periodicals, organizations and support groups, several tables of data, and an extensive list of contemporary resources that deal with children and grief. Wolfelt wrote the book while he was a doctoral fellow in the Department of Psychiatry and Psychology at the Mayo Clinic in Rochester, Minnesota. 262. Wolfenstein, Martha, and Gilbert Kliman, eds. Children and the Death of a President: Multidisciplinary Studies. New York: Doubleday, 1965. Developed from a conference at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine on “Children’s Reactions to the Death of the President” in April of 1964, this volume is a collection of studies by thirteen researchers. Most of the material relates to the death of President John F. Kennedy. The studies explore reactions to the assassination, Oedipal themes in the reactions, differences between the death of the president and the death of a parent, and others. Includes titles and institutional affiliation of the contributors, a questionnaire for school children used in one study, several essays by junior high school students about the assassination, a transcript of tape recorded interviews between a researcher and children about the assassination, and an index. 263. Wolff, S. Bereavement in Children under Stress. New York: Penguin, 1969. 264. Worden, J. William. Children and Grief: When a Parent Dies. New York: Guilford Press, 1996. Worden, codirector of the Harvard Child Bereavement Study based at Massachusetts General Hospital, presents major findings of the study in this book, which combines theory, research, and practical advice for those helping children grieve the loss of a parent. Offering a detailed examination of bereavement in children, the book is based on extensive interviews and assessments of schoolaged children who have a lost a parent. Worden explores the mourning process for children, the role of mediators in a child’s bereavement experience, loss through death compared to other types of loss, counseling and intervention, and intervention models and activities. The text is appropriate for advanced courses in bereavement, child therapy, and developmental psychopathology. A touching epilogue includes several quotes from children who have lost a parent because of death, offering advice to other children who have experienced the same loss. Appendixes include project assessment instruments and a screening instrument with scoring instructions. Includes a list of suggested readings by subject area. 265. Zeligs, Rose. Children’s Experience with Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1974.

40

Chapter 5

A clinical child psychologist in private practice, Zeligs discusses the effects of death on children, their developmental concepts of death, fear of death, hospital settings for sick children, communicating with dying children, parental issues when a child is dying, special issues with disabled children, death and adolescents, parental death, and religion and death from a child’s perspective. Includes author and subject indexes.

6 Communication about Death

266. Arnstein, Helene S. What to Tell Your Child about Birth, Illness, Death, Divorce, and Other Family Crises. Indianapolis, IN: Bobbs-Merrill, 1962. Published in cooperation with the Child Study Association of America. Originally published in 1960 as What to Tell Your Children about Birth and Death. In addition to the other topics, Arnstein discusses how best to communicate about serious health issues, death, and dangers. A brief section on where to go for help is included along with a list of print and organizational resources. 267. Berrigan, Daniel. We Die before We Live: Talking with the Very Ill. New York: Seabury Press, 1980. 268. Better Business Bureau. Alerting Bereaved Families: A Special Bulletin. New York: Better Business Bureau, 1961. 269. Bryant-Mole, Karen. Talking about Death. Austin, TX: Raintree SteckVaughn, 1999. Part of the Talking About series. This book is a heavily illustrated 32-page book for young children on death, dying, funerals, feelings, and remembering loved ones. Includes a glossary and list of three titles for suggested readings. 270. Buckman, Robert, Ruth Gallop, and John Martin. I Don’t Know What to Say: How to Help and Support Someone Who Is Dying. Boston: Little, Brown, 1989. Also published by Key Porter Books, Toronto, in 1988, and by Vintage Books, New York, in 1992. 271. Callanan, Maggie, and Patricia Kelly. Final Gifts: Understanding the Special Awareness Needs and Communications of the Dying. New York: Bantam, 1997. Originally published in 1992.

41

42

Chapter 6

272. Carmody, John. Conversations with a Dying Friend. New York: Paulist Press, 1992. 273. Cobb, Nancy. In Lieu of Flowers: A Conversation for the Living. New York: Pantheon Books, 2000. Cobb’s book is an effort to bring laughter and enlightenment to the subject of death and loss. She refers to the instances when the living meet the dying as “divine intersections.” Told in a direct and frank style, unlike many books of consolation, Cobb relays the stories of others who have experienced loss. 274. Coute, Lucille. Conversations with a Dying Friend. Pacific Percep., 1977. 275. Dempsey, David. Death, the Press, and the Public. New York: Arno Press, 1982. 276. DiGiulio, Robert C., and Rachel Kranz. Straight Talk about Death and Dying. New York: Facts on File, 1995. Written for adolescents, this book provides concise information about a variety of death-related topics. DiGiulio covers American attitudes toward death, teens’ individual experiences with death, coming to terms with death, and KüblerRoss’s five stages of dying. He includes a valuable “Where to Find Help” section that includes suicide and homicide resources, alcohol and drug counseling and help, sexually transmitted diseases, as well as gay and lesbian support groups. A brief but appropriate list of books on death and dying is also provided. 277. Golubow, Mark. For the Living: Coping, Caring, and Communicating with the Terminally Ill. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2001. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 278. Grollman, Earl A., ed. Explaining Death to Children. Boston: Beacon Press, 1967. 279. Guilmartin, Nance. Healing Conversations: What to Say When You Don’t Know What to Say. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2002. 280. Hartnett, Johnette. Death Etiquette for the 90s: What to Do, What to Say. South Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993. 281. Hedtke, Lorraine, and John Winslade. Remembering Lives: Conversations with the Dying and the Bereaved. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 282. Iserson, Kenneth V. Grave Words: Notifying Survivors about Sudden, Unexpected Deaths. Tucson, AZ: Galen Press, 1999. This book is a 342-page manual covering all imaginable aspects of adult and pediatric death notification, along with relevant aspects of grief, bereavement, and communication skills.

Communication about Death

43

283. Jackson, Edgar N. Explaining Death to Children. Boston: Beacon Press, 1967. 284. ———. Telling a Child about Death. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1965. Also cited as published by Channel Press, New York. 285. Jacobsen, Gail B. Write Grief: How to Transform Loss with Writing. Menomonee Falls, WI: McCormick & Schilling, 1990. 286. Klopfenstein, Janette. Tell Me about Death, Mommy. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1977. 287. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Living with Death and Dying. New York: Macmillan, 1981. Published by Collier Books, New York, in 1981 and 1984. Published by Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, New York, in 1997, with the title Living with Death and Dying: How to Communicate with the Terminally Ill. 288. Kutscher, Austin H. Death, the Press, and the Public. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Published by Arno Press, New York, in 1981 as part of the Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on Thanatology, with David Dempsey as the lead author. This 254-page edition is based on a symposium by the Foundation of Thanatology and others. 289. Kutscher, Austin H., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Dialogues: The Dying and the Living. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno Press. 290. Levine, Stephen. Meetings at the Edge: Dialogues with the Grieving and the Dying, the Healing, and the Healed. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press, 1984. Levine presents stories of people in different phases of terminal illness and bereavement. 291. Linn, Erin. I Know Just How You Feel: Avoiding the Clichés of Grief. Incline Village, NV: Publisher’s Mark, 1986. 292. MacGregor, Cynthia, and David Clark. Why Do People Die?: Helping Your Child Understand—with Love and Illustrations. Secaucus, NJ: Carol Publishing Group, 1998. 293. Menten, Ted. Gentle Closings: How to Say Goodbye to Someone You Love. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1991. Known for his books on teddy bears and his own teddy bear creations, Menten offers a book of stories about those who have gracefully said goodbye and how they did it. The book began when he joined a local teddy bear lovers’ club on a visit to give bears to critically ill children in the hospital. Menten notes that the goodbye at death is about pushing aside despair and rejoicing in memories. A short bibliography is included.

44

Chapter 6

294. Moffatt, Bettyclare. Gifts for the Living: Conversations with Caregivers on Death and Dying. Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1988. 295. Morris, Virginia. Talking about Death Won’t Kill You. New York: Workman Publishing, 2001. Morris attempts to demystify death and dying by offering straight talk on feelings about death. She notes that this means talking about loss, pain, and deep fears as well as love and intimacy. The book is filled with personal stories that illustrate the art of dying well or what Morris calls the “good death.” 296. Resnick, Sheila Handler. Coping with Dying: A Study of Patient and Family Interaction in Terminal Illness. Washington, DC: Catholic University of America, 1976. 297. Rudolph, Marguerita. Should the Children Know?: Encounters with Death in the Lives of Children. New York: Schocken Books, 1978. This guidebook is designed to equip adults with the skills necessary to help young children deal with death. Rudolph offers suggestions to help children recognize their fears, deal with feelings of loss upon the death of a loved one, and help familiarize children with the concept of death using literature and through the care of plants and animals. She uses individual stories to convey the concepts. Includes a brief annotated bibliography. 298. Shepard, Martin. Someone You Love Is Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping. New York: Harmony Books, 1975. Shepard, a psychiatrist, presents a practical guide to dealing with the complex emotions of anxiety, guilt, resentment, despondency, aversion, and helplessness. He notes that all are natural reactions to death. He discusses preparing for death, minimizing fear and grief, and the benefits of talking about experiences with death. Shepard stresses the importance of open and honest communication. He also suggests realistic alternatives to the traditional ways in which society treats the dying. Includes a list of organizations with narrative and contact information about each and suggested book and film titles. 299. Standard, S., and Nathan H. Standard, eds. Should the Patient Know the Truth? New York: Springer, 1955. 300. Thomas, V. R. Saying Goodbye to Grandma. New York: Clarion Books, 1988. 301. Verwoerdt, Adriaan. Communication with the Fatally Ill. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1966. 302. Watts, Richard G. Straight Talk about Death with Young People. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1975. 303. Wogrin, Carol. Matters of Life and Death: Finding the Words to Say Goodbye. New York: Broadway Books, 2001.

Communication about Death

45

Wogrin presents a simple, straightforward guide to communicating with the terminally ill through both verbal and nonverbal expression. She discusses the dying process, long goodbyes, helping children say goodbye, saying goodbye even when the relationship has been difficult, and learning lessons from the dying. She focuses on conversations with dying people and what to say and do. Includes an annotated bibliography and list of websites as well as information on organizations that offer advice and suggestions on saying goodbye. Wogrin is a registered nurse and licensed clinical psychologist who serves as executive director of the National Center for Death Education and also as director of the Bereavement Studies Program at Mount Ida College in Newton, Massachusetts. 304. Wooten-Green, Ron. When the Dying Speak: How to Listen and Learn from Those Facing Death. Chicago: Loyola Press, 2001. 305. Zagaranski, D. Stuck for Words: What to Say When Someone Is Grieving. Melbourne, Australia: Hill of Content Publishing, 1994.

7 Coping and Caregivers

306. Ainsworth-Smith, Ian, and Peter W. Speck. Letting Go: Caring for the Dying and the Bereaved. London: SPCK Publishing, 1982. 307. Anderson, Jon. Death and Friends. Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1970. Published by Carnegie Mellon University Press, Pittsburgh, in 2003 as part of the Carnegie Mellon Classic Contemporary Series. 308. Baird, Robert M., and Stuart E. Rosenbaum. Caring for the Dying: Critical Issues at the Edge of Life. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 2003. 309. Barnard, Christiaan. Good Life/Good Death: A Doctor’s Case for Euthanasia and Suicide. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1980. 310. Bartlow, Bruce G. Medical Care of the Soul: A Practical and Healing Guide to End-of-Life Issues for Families, Patients, and Health Care Providers. Boulder, CO: Johnson Books, 2000. 311. Barton, David, ed. Dying and Death: A Clinical Guide for Caregivers. Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins, 1977. Barton argues that for practitioners to be successful in collectively caring for dying persons, they must be able to “discern and respond appropriately to the myriad of needs of the person and the members of his or her family.” He also believes they must have a working knowledge of basic theoretical concepts and the ability to “appreciate the perspectives and abilities of a wide variety of health care and health care–related personnel.” This multidimensional approach, he asserts, will lead to optimal assistance and the greatest benefit for dying patients. He notes in his preface that the book is intended for physicians, clergy, social workers, psychologists, mental health counselors, nurses, and others working with the dying and their families. The text features articles by contributors Jan van Eys; 46

Coping and Caregivers

47

John M. Flexner; Ann B. Hamric; Liston O. Mills; Daniel T. Peak; Charles E. Scott; and Robert M. Veatch, who wrote “Caring for the Dying Person: Ethical Issues at Stake.” There are also two unlisted contributors: Linda Cummings and John W. Gattis. Articles focus on theoretical considerations; dying, death, and bereavement as health care problems; clinical care approaches to the dying person; emotions and feelings of the dying; deterrents to therapeutic care; issues for clergy; the elderly and death; and caring for children who may die. Includes references and a limited index. 312. Beckman, Gunnel. Admission to the Feast. New York: Rinehart & Winston, 1971. This book is the end-of-life account of a nineteen-year-old woman with leukemia. 313. Brown, Norman O. Life against Death. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1959. Also published by Random House, New York, and by Sphere Books, London, in 1968. 314. Callari, Elizabeth S. A Gentle Death: Personal Caregiving to the Terminally Ill. Greensboro, NC: Tudor, 1986. Callari is founder and executive director of the Center for Awakening, a nonprofit organization that provides care and support for terminally ill patients. Her book provides compassionate guidance for those caring for the terminally ill. She begins with a discussion of caregiving and learning from the dying. Other chapters address communication with the dying, the suddenness of death even when it is expected, respecting patients’ choices, special needs of the dying, privacy, treating the fear of abandonment, working with clergy, dignity, the importance of commitment, physical aspects of death, funerals, unresolved grief, emotions of survivors, moving forward, and resolution and healing. Helpful guidance and discussion is provided on the seemingly minor issues of flowers versus donations, funeral dinners, and prearranged funerals. Callari’s concluding chapter, “Birthing and Dying,” draws on her experience as an obstetrical nurse to make the link between birth and death, the concept of passage. 315. Cargas, Harry J., and Ann White, eds. Death and Hope. Washington, DC: Corpus Books, 1970. The editors and their fellow contributors offer commentary and analysis on the theologies of death, hope, and faith, contrasting them today with yesteryear. The text is written from various Christian perspectives. 316. Carlson, Lisa. Caring for the Dead: Your Final Act of Love. Hinesburg, VT: Upper Access Books, 1998. 317. Carpenter, Edward. The Drama of Love and Death. New York: Mitchell Kennerley, 1912.

48

Chapter 7

318. Carroll, David. Living with Dying: A Loving Guide for Family and Close Friends. New York: Paragon House, 1991. Originally published by McGrawHill, New York, in 1985. Carroll offers an excellent practical guide for loved ones of the dying. He presents a significant amount of authoritative information and advice from physicians, psychiatric nurses, gerontologists, and thanatologists. Several personal stories and anecdotes from the dying are also incorporated. Topics include caring for the dying at home, talking to a dying person about dying, sources for help and support, funeral arrangements, hospice care, how to grieve, helping someone handle pain, talking with young people about death, and providing emotional first aid. Includes an annotated list of references and an index. Foreword by Austin H. Kutscher. 319. Carter, Nick. Death Strain. Lincoln, NE: University Publishing Co., 1970. Published by Award Books in 1976. 320. Carter, Steven. The Nothing That Is and the Nothing That Is Not: On Death, Dying, and Suffering. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 2004. 321. Cutter, Fred. Coming to Terms with Death: How to Face the Inevitable with Wisdom and Dignity. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1974. 322. Davies, Betty. Fading Away: The Experience of Transition in Families with Terminal Illness. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 323. Davis, Richard H., ed. Dealing with Death. Los Angeles: University of Southern California Press, 1973. 324. De Bary, Richard. My Experiments with Death: A Study of the World Soul in Its Relations with the Private Self. London: Longmans, Green & Co., 1936. 325. Destouches, L. F. Death on the Installment Plan. New York: New Directions, 1966. 326. Dicks, Russell, and Thomas Kepler. And Peace at Last. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1953. 327. Doka, Kenneth J. Living with Life-Threatening Illness: A Guide for Patients, Their Families, and Caregivers. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1998. Originally published by Lexington Books, New York, in 1993. 328. Doyle, Nancy. The Dying Person and the Family. New York: Public Affairs Commission, 1972. 329. Farberow, Norman L., and Edwin S. Shneidman, eds. The Cry for Help. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972.

Coping and Caregivers

49

330. Furman, Joan, and David McNabb. The Dying Time: Practical Wisdom for the Dying and Their Caregivers. New York: Belltower Publishing, 1997. Furman and McNabb present a comprehensive guide for both the dying and their caregivers. It focuses on creating environments conducive to peace and tranquility. The book covers guided imagery for coping with pain, specifics about the moment of death, memorial services, health concerns for caregivers, physical care, and spiritual matters. Furman is a holistic nurse practitioner, and McNabb is an AIDS educator and caregiver. They deliver a very sensitive and thoughtful book with several personal and emotional stories from the authors’ own experiences. 331. Griffith, William H. Confronting Death. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 1977. 332. Grof, Stanislav, and Joan Halifax. The Human Encounter with Death. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1977. 333. Grollman, Earl A., ed. When Your Loved One Is Dying. Boston: Beacon Press, 1980. Grollman, a rabbi and widely respected authority on thanatology, presents a simple collection of thoughts and words of advice on critical matters during the final weeks of life. This book is intended for use as emotional support and guidance. Includes numerous quotes and a list of organizations. 334.

Gruber, Otto. When I Die. New York: Vantage Press, 1965.

335. Gubrium, Jaber F. Living and Dying at Murray Manor. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1975. Stressing that the book is not a survey of statistics about nursing homes, Gubrium examines the social organization of care in a single nursing home, which he calls Murray Manor. The question he poses that frames the book is “How is care in a nursing home accomplished by those people who participate in its everyday life?” The care he refers to is whatever the participants consider to be part of life in the nursing home in contrast with life in other places, and the people he refers to are the staff, residents, relatives, visiting physicians, morticians, and others who have cause to be there. Includes an index. 336. Hansen, Adolf. Responding to Loss: A Resource for Caregivers. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 337. Henderson, Randi, and Richard Marek. Here Is My Hope: Inspirational Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital. New York: Doubleday, 2001. The cover title is Here Is My Hope: A Book of Healing and Prayer: Inspirational Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital. The alternate title is Here Is My hope:

50

Chapter 7

Inspirational Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital: A Book of Healing and Prayer. One of the most highly regarded hospitals in the United States, Johns Hopkins Hospital is also known for its spiritual component, which is highlighted by the large marble statue of Christ in its rotunda. Patients, family members, and others leave prayers at the statue called Divine Healer by Bertel Thorvaldsen (1770–1844). An appendix in Henderson and Marek’s book includes many of the prayers. The book provides a link between faith and medicine through the telling of true stories. It stands as an inspirational guide for the terminally ill, caregivers, and the bereaved. It was inspired by an article in the Baltimore Sun by Diana Sugg. 338. Jackson, Edgar N. When Someone Dies. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1971. 339. Johnson, L. D. The Morning after Death. Nashville, TN: Broadman Publishing, 1978. Johnson writes about the death of his daughter, Carole Johnson, in 1962. Includes a bibliography. 340. Kastenbaum, Robert J. On Our Way: The Final Passage through Life and Death. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2004. 341. Kavanaugh, R. E. Facing Death. Baltimore, MD: Penguin Group, 1974. Published by Nash Publishing, Los Angeles, in 1972. 342. Kelly, Evelyn B. Dealing with Death: A Strategy for Tragedy. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Educational Foundation, 1990. 343. Kramer, Scott, and Kuang-ming Wu. Thinking through Death. Malabar, FL: R. E. Krieger Publishing Co., 1988. 344. Kreeft, Peter J. Love Is Stronger Than Death. San Francisco, CA: Harper & Row, 1979. 345. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Working It Through. New York: Collier Books, 1987. Originally published by Macmillan, New York, in 1982. 346. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia, and Kenneth J. Doka, eds. Coping with Public Tragedy. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2003. Part of the Hospice Foundation of America’s Living with Grief Series, supported by the Foundation for End of Life Care. The book’s subject, the annual theme for the Hospice Foundation of America, is designed to “give local hospices an opportunity to make known their capabilities in helping their communities when terrible events occur.” Using examples of various national tragedies throughout the text, the contributing writers discuss dimensions of public tragedy, responses, loss and grief, public grief, different

Coping and Caregivers

51

perceptions of public tragedy in the context of different faiths, the role of funeral directors, critical incident stress management, crisis counseling approaches, talking to children about terrorism, implications for school environments, finding meaning in the wake of a public tragedy, memorialization and ritual, victim advocacy, and lessons from combat veterans. Two articles touch on the role of hospice in such instances, specifically collaboration with relief agencies. Includes a list of organizations with descriptions and contact information. Foreword by Jack D. Gordon, president of the Hospice Foundation of America. 347. Leahey, Maureen, and Lorraine M. Wright, eds. Families and LifeThreatening Illness. Springhouse, PA: Springhouse Corp., 1987. 348. Lee, Elizabeth. A Good Death: A Guide for Patients and Carers Facing Terminal Illness at Home. London: Rosendale Press, 1995. 349. Lembke, Janet. The Quality of Life: Living Well, Dying Well. Guilford, CT: Lyons Press, 2003. Born from her experiences with her own dying mother, Lembke writes about the challenging decisions and issues that must be dealt with by those who care for the dying “old, frail people whose minds are lost forever in the shadows.” Using her own research and the stories of a diverse group of caregivers, she examines hospice, dementia, and coping with dementia as a caregiver; the bioethics of withdrawal of life support; other methods of death by choice; and maintaining quality of life. The book concludes with a list of helpful organizations, notes, and a bibliography that includes both print and online resources. 350. Lerner, Gerda. A Death of One’s Own. New York: Harrow, 1980. Also published by the University of Wisconsin Press, 1985. 351. Little, Deborah Whiting. Home Care for the Dying: A Reassuring, Comprehensive Guide to Physical and Emotional Care. Garden City, NY: Dial Press, 1985. 352. Lugt, Herbert Vander. Light in the Valley. Wheaton, IL: Victor Books, 1977. 353. McGeachy, D. P. A Matter of Life and Death. Richmond, VA: John Knox, 1966. 354. McKerrow, Margaret M. A Time to Care: A Study in Terminal Illness. England: Self-published, 1980. 355. McMullen, Ernan. Death and Decision. Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1978. Includes T. C. Schelling’s “Strategic Relationships in Dying.” 356. McNamara, Beverley. Fragile Lives: Death, Dying, and Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2001.

52

Chapter 7

A lecturer in anthropology at the University of Western Australia, McNamara greets the subject of death from a sociological perspective. She notes how the fragility of the dying reminds the living in a stark way of their own mortality. Her book muses on how this affects the care of the dying, on health care professionals and their work, and on the social institutions that work with death and dying. McNamara highlights the patterns in how society deals with death and dying and contrasts this with what she describes as an often “chaotic” process. In her analysis, she discusses the fear of concern, uncertainty among the terminally ill, the medical profession’s “affair” with death, palliative care, and the “good death.” Includes a methodological appendix and extensive references. 357. Mervyn, Carol. The Effects of Chronic and Terminal Illness on the Family. Vancouver: University of British Columbia, 1980. 358. Metzger, Arnold. Freedom and Death. Ralph Manheim, trans. London: Human Context Books, 1973. 359. Meyer, Maria M., and Paula Derr. The Comfort of Home: An Illustrated Step-by-Step Guide for Caregivers. Portland, OR: CareTrust Publications, LLC, 1998. 360. Morgan, John D., ed. Meeting the Needs of Our Clients Creatively: The Impact of Art and Culture on Caregiving. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1999. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. With a tremendously broad array of topics, Morgan assembles a collection of articles that explore the important role of the arts and cultural elements in helping those with terminal illness, their caregivers, and the bereaved. Topics include using popular music with adolescents, humor, culture-centered counseling, palliative care and bereavement in a Buddhist context, Hindu funerals, rituals for the nonreligious, self-awareness among caregivers, children’s exposure to sudden traumatic death and strategies for helping them, general music therapy, and hospice care of formerly abused individuals. 361. Nadeau, Janice Winchester. Families Making Sense of Death. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1998. Part of the Understanding Families series, Bert N. Adams and David M. Klein, editors. A licensed psychologist and family therapist, Nadeau explores family dynamics following a death and how they contribute to healing in bereavement. She uses personal stories that illustrate this healing. Chapters focus on meaningmaking in the grief process, family stress, dreams, afterlife, attitudes toward death, philosophical meanings, and details on her research methods. She also introduces the term “coincidancing” to “capture the action of grieving people as they used coincidences to construct meanings.” Includes references, an index, and information about the author.

Coping and Caregivers

53

362. Newell, Martha M. The Role of the Volunteer in the Care of the Terminal Patient and the Family. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Also cited as published by MSS Information Corp., New York, in 1978, as The Role of the Volunteer and Volunteer Director in Caring for the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. 363. Oaks, J., and G. Ezell. Dying and Death: Coping, Caring, and Understanding. 2nd ed. Scottsdale, AZ: Gorsuch Scarisbrick, 1993. 364. Oliver, Marjorie. Through the Valley: A Caregiver’s Account of Terminal Illness. Shippensburg, PA: Treasure House, 1995. 365. Osborne, Ernest. When You Lose a Loved One. New York: Public Affairs Committee, 1965. Pamphlet 269. This book is a discussion of the emotional, social, and financial problems relating to death in the family. 366. Parry, Joan K. Social Work Theory and Practice with the Terminally Ill. New York: Haworth Press, 1989. 367. Pearson, Cynthia, and Margaret L. Stubbs. Parting Company: Understanding the Loss of a Loved One: The Caregiver’s Journey. Seattle, WA: Seal Press, 1999. This compassionate guide is a collection of case studies—fourteen narratives from caregivers who are dealing with end-of-life issues. With these stories, the authors address psychological aspects of caring for the terminally ill, aspects of home care, and the stresses and emotional strain of caregiving. 368. Pelgrin, Mark. And a Time to Die. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House, 1976. Pelgrin’s account was edited by Elizabeth B. Howes and Sheila Moon. This book chronicles the personal experiences of a cancer patient, giving insights into his faith, thoughts on the meaning of life, and dealing with a terminal illness. 369. Perry, J. K., ed. Social Work Practices with the Terminally Ill: A Transcultural Perspective. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1990. 370.

Quill, Timothy E. Death and Dignity. New York: W. W. Norton, 1993.

371. Reoch, Richard. To Die Well: A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their Caregivers. New York: Harper Perennial, 1996. Also published as Dying Well: A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their Carers by Gaia Books, London, in 1997. 372. Roth, Deborah, and Emily LeVier. Being Human in the Face of Death. Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1990. Roth and LeVier offer a guidebook for caregivers with advice for coping and dealing with the emotional challenges surrounding death rather than tips for

54

Chapter 7

specific tasks, which many other titles contain. Roth is director of publications for the Center for Help in Time of Loss, and LeVier leads training programs for hospice volunteers. Mary Ball, founder of the Center for Help in Time of Loss in Hillsdale, NJ, wrote the introduction and notes that the purpose of the book is to help caregivers “unlock one of the best resources they have—their humanness.” Though not noted elsewhere, chapters are written by professionals in the field. Includes a fill-in-the-blank Caregiver’s Workbook and bibliography arranged by subject. 373. Rothman, J. C. Saying Goodbye to Daniel: When Death Is the Best Choice. New York: Continuum, 1995. 374. Sankar, Andrea. Dying at Home: A Family Guide for Caregiving. New York: Bantam Books, 1995. This revised edition includes a special preface. Originally published by Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, MD, in 1991. In this comprehensive guide to caring for the terminally ill at home, Sankar presents numerous first-person accounts by people who have been part of a home death experience. These accounts illustrate both the emotional and practical issues associated with caring for the dying at home. She examines the reasons so many people choose to spend their final time at home and offers practical suggestions for making this decision and assuming some measure of control of the dying process and environments. Sankar also examines the tradition of home death; transitioning from hospital to home care; the use of professional assistance in the home; caregiving; social support for both the dying person and the caregiver, including children involved in the process; the physical drain and emotional strain for the caregiver; support groups and therapy; demystifying death; signs of approaching death; legal and financial matters; and funerals. Appendixes provide specific guidance on the tasks and problems of caregiving; pain medications; and additional resources featuring living wills, nursing home resources, and organizations that support caregivers. Specific guidance includes general appearance, hygiene, skin care, sexuality, nutrition, bowel issues, mobility, transfers, eye care, sleep, cognitive impairment, agitation, administering medications, breathing problems, oxygen, seizures, pain control, and assessment. A final appendix offers two sample letters, one to send to a physician notifying them of the decision to provide home care for the dying, and the other a letter from the physician indicating agreement with the decision to allow death at home and willingness to sign the death certificate. Includes a helpful glossary, a short bibliography, and an index. Also includes nine illustrations, most showing how to complete a task, and two tables. 375. Sharoff, Kenneth. Coping Skills Therapy for Managing Chronic and Terminal Illness. New York: Springer, 2004. Title also cited as A Coping Skills Manual for Chronic and Terminal Illness.

Coping and Caregivers

55

376. Sharp, Joseph. Living Our Dying: A Way to the Sacred in Everyday Life. New York: Hyperion Books, 1996. 377. Shield, Renee Rose. Uneasy Endings: Daily Life in an American Nursing Home. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1988. Part of the Anthropology of Contemporary Issues series, Roger Sanjek, editor. Shield, having participated in life at a nursing home for fourteen months, offers clearly defined suggestions for improving care. Interestingly, she points out the limitations on reciprocity within this environment, noting that the “old people are always recipients whose need and obligation to repay are seen as unnecessary and difficult to satisfy. The system encourages their passivity, which deepens their dependency and helps to explain why they are often perceived as children.” Many individual stories are shared. The author is a clinical instructor in community health at Brown University. Includes three tables, notes, references, and an index. 378. Smith, Bradford. Dear Gift of Life: A Man’s Encounter with Death. Wallingford, PA: Pendle Hill Publishing, 1965. 379. Smith, Carole R. Social Work with the Dying and Bereaved. London: Macmillan, 1982. 380.

Snow, Lois W. A Death with Dignity. New York: Random House, 1975.

381. Spiegel, Maura, and Richard Tristman, eds. The Grim Reader: Writings on Death, Dying, and Living On. New York: Anchor Books/Doubleday, 1997. Spiegel and Tristman pull together an impressive array of writings on death and dying that capture the evolution of societal thinking on the subject. 382. Storley, C. J. Beginning at the End: A Study in Death and Life. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Publishing House, 1975. 383. Sudnow, David. Passing On: The Social Organization of Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1967. Originally titled Passing On: The Social Organization of Dying in the County Hospital. Author’s 1966 doctoral dissertation from the University of California, Berkeley. 384. Turnbull, Richard. Terminal Care. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1986. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 385. Van Bommel, Harry. Choices: For People Who Have a Terminal Illness, Their Families, and Their Caregivers. Toronto: NC Press, 1986. Distributed in the United States by Independent Publishers Group, Port Washington, NY. 386. Vernon, Glenn M. The Sociology of Death: An Analysis of Death-Related Behavior. New York: Ronald Press, 1970.

56

Chapter 7

387. Wagner, Heather Lehr, and Marvin Rosen. Dealing with Terminal Illness in the Family. Philadelphia: Chelsea House Publishers, 2002. 388. Webb, Marilyn. The Good Death: The New American Search to Reshape the End of Life. New York: Bantam Books, 1997. 389. Wolfelt, Alan D. How to Care for Yourself While You Care for the Dying and the Bereaved. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1996. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.

8 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

390. Ashenburg, Katherine. The Mourner’s Dance: What We Do When People Die. New York: North Point Press, 2003. The publisher notes that Ashenburg explores the “rich and endlessly inventive choreographies different cultures have devised to mark a universal and deeply felt condition.” Indeed, she covers a variety of faiths and cultures while examining everything from bereavement garb to keepsakes to deathbed portraits. Other topics include hair bracelets, funeral rites, mourning rituals, etiquette, funeral pyres, wakes, and Internet support groups. Includes a bibliography. 391. Bailey, Lloyd R. Biblical Perspectives on Death. Durham, NC: Duke University, 1979. 392. Barlow, Brent. Understanding Death. Salt Lake City, UT: Deseret Books, 1979. 393. Berger, Arthur. Perspectives on Death and Dying: Cross-Cultural and Multidisciplinary Views. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1989. 394. Braun, Kathryn L., James H. Pietsch, and Patricia L. Blanchette, eds. Cultural Issues in End-of-Life Decision Making. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 2000. With text alternating between clinical and philosophical topics, the authors cover a broad range of cultural issues that affect decision making by and for the dying. Topics addressed include physical aspects of dying, advance directives, the Patient Self-Determination Act, and ethnic and religious perspectives. A section of the book is devoted to end-of-life issues within institutional cultures and among special populations. A special chapter on communicating with patients about death and dying concludes the book. The book is intended for health care professionals. 57

58

Chapter 8

395. Bregman, Lucy. Death and Dying, Spirituality, and Religions: A Study of the Death Awareness Movement. New York: Peter Lang, 2003. 396. Brener, Anne. Mourning and Mitzvah: A Guided Journal for Walking the Mourner’s Path through Grief to Healing. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights, 1993. In this easy-to-navigate book, Brener offers more than sixty guided exercises to help loved ones during the period of bereavement. The text is divided into three parts: Tzimzum (Contraction), Shevirat Kelim (The Breaking of Vessels), and Tikkun (Healing). The contents page offers excellent descriptions of each concept. Includes art by Laurie Gross and Hebrew text by Joel Hoffman. Also includes source acknowledgments, a glossary, and a list of recommended titles. 397. Brice, Carleen. Lead Me Home: An African American’s Guide through the Grief Journey. New York: Avon, 1999. Sharing her personal story of loss, Brice gives practical tips for navigating the journey through bereavement and how to see that one becomes wiser and stronger as a result. The publisher notes the special aspect of grief among African Americans: “the grief journeys often include more complicated and painful emotions: frustration with the knowledge that black men and women have a greater chance of dying from major common diseases than their white counterparts, anger at the frequency of drug- and violence-related deaths, and the collective grief of a community that has buried too many of its young people.” 398. Carter, James. Death and Dying among African Americans: Cultural Characteristics and Coping Tidbits. New York: Vantage Press, 2001. 399. Charmaz, Kathy, Glennys Howarth, and Allan Kellehear. The Unknown Country: Death in Australia, Britain, and the USA. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1997. This book looks at death from an extremely broad perspective, including articles on death themes in Australian painting and nineteenth-century fiction, but also notable pieces on death attitudes in Britain and death-related bioethics in the United States. Included are articles by noted writers on thanatological subjects Donald P. Irish, Michael R. Leming, Peter C. Jupp, and Beverley Raphael. Topics run the gamut from American death practices, emotional reserve and grieving among the English, cryonics, the birth of cremation in Britain, and loss of self associated with grief. Irish’s article, “Diversity in Universality: Dying, Death, and Grief,” includes interesting commentary and insights on African American funeral customs, Mexican American perspectives regarding death, Lakota culture and death, and Hmong death customs. Professional background on each contributor is also included. 400. Chen, Clarence Lee. Chinese Americans in Loss and Separation: Social, Medical, and Psychiatric Perspectives. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1992.

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

59

401. Chung, Sue Fawn, and Priscilla Wegars. Chinese American Death Rituals: Respecting the Ancestors. Lanham, MD: AltaMira Press, 2005. 402. Church of England, Board for Social Responsibility. On Dying Well: An Anglican Contribution to the Debate on Euthanasia. London: Church Information Office, 1975. This book presents the Anglican Church’s perspective and theology on euthanasia, exploring issues of legality, medicine, and morality. Also cited with Lord Amulree as author. 403. Churn, Arlene H. The End Is Just the Beginning: Lessons in Grieving for African Americans. New York: Harlem Moon/Broadway Books, 2003. Churn, an ordained Baptist minister and grief counselor, discusses the often misunderstood traditions within the African American perspective on death. She offers insights into the concept of communal loss and group mourning brought to North America by African slaves. Churn explores African traditions of lavish burial, the adoption of biblical guidelines for mourning, and the funeral celebrations of the home-going and victory celebration. Includes numerous biblical references. 404. Cooper-Lewter, Nicholas C. Black Grief and Soul Therapy. Richmond, VA: Harriet Tubman Press, 1999. 405. Counts, David R., and Dorothy Ayers Counts, eds. Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1991. 406. Crissman, James K. Death and Dying in Central Appalachia: Changing Attitudes and Practices. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1994. Much of this book is focused on various death rituals employed by people of the Appalachian region of the United States and the meanings behind them. Topics include neighborliness and the death watch, burial receptacles and grave digging, wakes, funeral services and burial customs, grave markers and other forms of memorialization, music, and mining disasters. Includes several images from the early twentieth century, notes, a bibliography, and an index. 407. Day, Stacey B., and Thomas Dillon Redshaw. Tuluak and Amaulik: Dialogues on Death and Mourning with the Inuit Eskimo. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, Bell Museum of Pathobiology, 1973. 408. Dyer, Barry Albin. Final Departures: Weird and Wonderful Tales of Death, Funerals, and Bereavement from around the World. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 2005. First published in 2003. A London funeral director, Dyer offers a humorous look at undertaking around the world and how humans view death across cultures. With such chapter titles as “Amazing Embalmings,” Dyer explores cryonics, mummification, funeral

60

Chapter 8

ceremonies and death rites, and the newer idea of projecting the dead into space. A small section of photos includes images of, among other things, a cryostat, Elvis Presley’s funeral cortege, a Japanese hearse, and a woman entombed in her husband’s glass coffee table (with beer cans resting on top). Weird indeed. An appendix offers a list of possible methods of final departure by both burial and cremation. 409. Field, David, Jenny Hockey, and Neil Small, eds. Death, Gender, and Ethnicity. New York: Routledge, 1997. Jenny Hockey is also cited as Jennifer Lorna Hockey. The editors present a series of articles that explore cross-cultural attitudes and views toward death, many in a British context. The editors’ own article analyzes differences in how the British view death according to gender and ethnicity. Others topics in the book include childhood death, masculinity and loss, cultural representation and social practice in grieving women, sex and death in the tabloid press, ethnicity and the use of palliative care services, multiculturalism in palliative care, and thoughts on loss and burial from a migrant’s perspective. Tables and information on research tools are also included. 410. Freemantle, Francesca. The Tibetan Book of the Dead: The Great Liberation through Hearing in the Bardo. Berkeley, CA: Shambhala, 1975. Translated by Chogyam Trungpa. 411. Gorer, Geoffrey. Death, Grief, and Mourning in Contemporary Britain. London: Cresset Press, 1965. 412. Goss, Robert, and Dennis Klass. Dead but Not Lost: Grief Narratives in Religious Traditions. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press, 2005. 413. Grollman, Earl A. Living with Loss, Healing with Hope: A Jewish Perspective. Boston: Beacon Press, 2000. 414. Hayslip, Bert, and Cynthia A. Peveto. Cultural Changes in Attitudes toward Death, Dying, and Bereavement. New York: Springer, 2005. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. Comparing their own study to Richard A. Kalish and David K. Reynolds’s Death and Ethnicity study first published in 1976, Hayslip and Peveto look at the impact of cultural changes and attitudes toward death, dying, grief, and mourning. The latter study, highlighted in this book, focuses on Hispanic Americans, African Americans, and Asian Americans and uses Caucasians as a comparison group. The text reexamines the Kalish and Reynolds study, explores the impact of cultural change on death attitudes, presents the current study and its findings, and offers various hypotheses. Appendixes provide details of the study data. Includes references and an index. Foreword by Robert J. Kastenbaum.

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

61

415. Heilman, Samuel C. When a Jew Dies: The Ethnography of a Bereaved Son. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2001. An S. Mark Taper Foundation Jewish Studies book. Often using his own experiences surrounding the death of his father, Heilman explores the social aspects and mourning customs of Jewish bereavement. Includes a helpful glossary and an extensive index. Heilman is chair in Jewish studies and sociology at City University of New York. 416.

Hendin, Herbert. Black Suicide. New York: Basic Books, 1969.

417. Holloway, Karla F. C. Passed On: African American Mourning Stories: A Memorial. Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 2002. A John Hope Franklin Center book. More than a collection of mourning stories and vignettes, Holloway’s book is a superb survey of death and dying in black America. She explores the most unusual areas of death and dying to give a thorough overview of African American funeral practices and rituals. Includes photographs, a bibliography, and an index. In addition to serving as dean of Humanities and Social Sciences at Duke University, Holloway is also a faculty associate at the Duke Institute on Care at the End of Life. 418. Howarth, Glennys, and Peter C. Jupp, eds. Contemporary Issues in the Sociology of Death, Dying, and Disposal. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1996. Both a review of attitudes toward death and an examination of cultural variations on death and associated rituals, this book is a collection of articles discussing death in Western societies, social representations of death throughout the world, the role of health and death workers, and social implications of legal and medical responses to death and dying. Specific areas treated include the anthropology of the non-Western death ritual; social facts of death; funeral rituals of Sikhs in Britain; American denial and British avoidance of death; the preservation, memorialization, and destruction of beauty in death; death attitudes of British Hindus; terminal care education for doctors; nurses’ perceptions of stress in terminal care environments; police coping with death; the culture of childhood cancer; euthanasia and assisted suicide; organ donation; and facing death without tradition. Contributors include noted thanatology scholars Jennifer Hockey, Douglas Davies, Tony Walter, and Jeanne Katz. Includes an extensive bibliography and index. 419. Infeld, Donna Lind, and Audrey K. Gordon. Hospice Care and Cultural Diversity. New York: Haworth Press, 1995. 420. Irish, Donald P., Kathleen F. Lundquist, and Vivian Jenkins Nelson, eds. Ethnic Variations in Dying, Death, and Grief: Diversity in Universality. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1993. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.

62

Chapter 8

421. Isaacs, Ronald H. Every Person’s Guide to Death and Dying in the Jewish Tradition. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1999. 422. Jalland, Pat. Changing Ways of Death in Twentieth-Century Australia: War, Medicine, and the Funeral Business. Sydney, Australia: University of New South Wales Press, 2006. Addressing such topics as palliative care, cancer, cemeteries, cremation, and the funeral business, Jalland offers a thorough examination of Australian attitudes and approaches to death, dying, grief, and bereavement from 1918 onward. She looks at the transformed culture of death and grief, the denial of grief, and particularly the effects of World War I and World War II and medical advances on how Australians view death. Jalland also discusses a second cultural shift that began in the 1980s. She notes the influence of Kübler-Ross. The book gives an excellent in-depth look at Australian funerals, disposal, and memorialization practices. Includes a small number of black-and-white photographs and an index. The bibliography lists both primary and secondary sources. Primary sources include family papers, oral histories, manuscripts, and unpublished memoirs. 423. Jarow, Rick. Tales for the Dying: The Death Narratives of the BhagavitaPurana. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2003. 424. Jewish Theological Seminary of America. From This World to the Next: Jewish Approaches to Illness, Death, and the Afterlife. New York: Jewish Theological Seminary of America Library, 1999. 425. Johnson, Christopher Jay, and Marsha G. McGee, eds. How Different Religions View Death and Afterlife. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1991. The authors present a collection of articles written mostly by clergy from approximately twenty faith traditions. They explore how each faith views matters of death and dying. 426. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1979. Part of the Perspectives on Death and Dying series, volume 1. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in Human Experience. Examining death across time and cultures, Kalish presents fourteen articles that explore attitudes toward death, rituals surrounding death and dying, and approaches to grief and bereavement. Articles are divided into three sections: “Death in Other Cultures,” “Death in Mexico and the United States,” and “War and Disaster.” Topics covered include death and ancient Finnish culture, preparation for death in western New Britain, the death culture of Mexico and Mexican Americans, the black experience with death analyzed through writings, death rituals and bereavement practices in Appalachian and non-Appalachian Kentucky, grief work in the aftermath of an airplane crash, justifying death, and handling the dead in a disaster. Includes references.

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

63

427. Kalish, Richard A., and David K. Reynolds. Death and Ethnicity: A Psychocultural Study. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1981. Second printing. Originally published by the Ethel Percy Andrus Gerontology Center at the University of Southern California, Los Angeles, in 1976. Noting that significant research has been conducted in the death, dying, and bereavement field and that most of the studies were conducted with such highly specialized populations as the elderly or mental patients, Kalish and Reynolds make comparisons between groups of varying ethnocultural backgrounds. Their study focuses on the ways people verbalize their thinking about death, dying, and grieving and the ways they actually behave. Participants in the study were from four major ethnic groups in the Los Angeles area: black Americans, Japanese Americans, Mexican Americans, and Anglo Americans. Influences of age, sex, education, and religiousness are also explored. An appendix summarizes interview results by ethnicity, age, and sex. The interviewed was made up of 178 questions. Includes a bibliography and an index. 428. Kamerman, Jack B. Death in the Midst of Life: Social and Cultural Influences on Death, Grief, and Mourning. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1988. 429. Kay, Alan A. A Jewish Book of Comfort. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1993. Kay delivers a comforting and compassionate collection of readings reflecting Jewish approaches to dying, death, and mourning. Includes references and an index. 430. Klein, Stanley. The Final Mystery. New York: Doubleday, 1974. Klein explores the varied interpretations of death in different cultures and religions. 431. Kraemer, David Charles. The Meanings of Death in Rabbinic Judaism. New York: Routledge, 2000. Noting that there are many books devoted to death and mourning in the context of Jewish laws and customs, the publisher notes that this is the first title studying the death and mourning practices of the founders of postbiblical Judaism, the rabbis of late antiquity. Kraemer, professor of Talmud and rabbinics at the Jewish Theological Seminary of America in New York, connects the rituals and death preparations mentioned in the earliest canonical texts with Jewish beliefs that formed their foundation. From a sometimes archeological and anthropological approach, he explores early rabbinic death practices, approaches to burial, and mourning. Includes eleven photographs of catacombs, ossuaries, ceiling paintings, reliefs, and carvings. Also includes detailed notes, references, and an index.

64

Chapter 8

432. Kramer, Kenneth. The Sacred Art of Dying: How the World Religions Understand Death. New York: Paulist Press, 1988. 433. Lamm, Maurice. The Jewish Way in Death and Mourning. Middle Village, NY: Jonathan David Publishers, 2000. Originally published in 1969. 434. Leary, Timothy Francis, Ralph Metzner, and Richard Alpert. The Psychedelic Experience: A Manual on the Tibetan Book of the Dead. New Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1964. Published by the Citadel Press, New York, in 1992, as the First Citadel Underground Edition. 435. Lee, J. Y. Death and Beyond in the Eastern Perspective: A Study Based on the Bardo Thodol and the I Ching. New York: Gordon and Breach, 1974. 436. Lifton, Robert Jay, Shuichi Kato, and Michael Reich. Six Lives, Six Deaths: Portraits from Modern Japan. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1979. The authors take psychohistorical and sociohistorical approaches to investigating and discussing six Japanese men and how they experience dying. Lifton’s “paradigm of death and the continuity of life, particularly in the context of Japanese culture and history” is presented, along with Kato’s examination and exploration of the “differences and similarities in elite and mass world views in Japan and how they have influenced attitudes toward death.” Most of these men died in the first half of the twentieth century. Includes a bibliography arranged by chapter and an index. 437. Liss-Levinson, Nechama, and Karen Savary. When a Grandparent Dies: A Kid’s Own Remembering Workbook for Dealing with Shiva and the Year Beyond. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights, 1995. Liss-Levinson provides a guide and workbook for Jewish children who have recently lost a grandparent. Includes places to draw and doodle, fill-in-the-blank exercises for remembering the grandparent’s life, ideas and addresses of organizations for giving tzedakah, and places for photos and writing down feelings. The book also encourages children to correspond with the author about the book. Concludes with an excellent glossary. 438. Long, Susan Orpett. Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice at the End of Life. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 2005. Long reports on a decade-long study of end-of-life decisions in Japan. While she points out differences, the book is as much about the commonality of approach toward such decisions. Long notes in the first chapter: “Real-life decisions are not limited to the application of explicit cultural rules or moral principles but rather are tied up with a cacophony of multiple, sometimes conflicting values and interpersonal relationships.” Coverage includes the structuring of options for dying, metaphors and scripts for the good death, social roles and relationships, deciding whether to treat terminal illnesses, cultural stereotypes in the context of life-and-death decisions, and choice and the creation of a meaningful death. Includes extensive notes, a lengthy bibliography, and an index.

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

65

439. McIlwain, Charlton. Death in Black and White: Death, Ritual, and Family Ecology. Cresskill, NJ: Hampton Press, 2003. Part of the Hampton Press Communication Series: Critical Bodies. 440. Millen, Rochelle L. Women, Birth, and Death in Jewish Law and Practice. Hanover, NH: University Press of New England for Brandeis University Press, 2004. 441. Moller, David Wendell. Dancing with Broken Bones: Portraits of Death and Dying among Inner-City Poor. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004. 442. Morgan, John D. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement in the Emerging World. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2007. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 443. Morgan, John D., and Pittu Laungani, eds. Death and Bereavement around the World: Asia, Australia, and New Zealand (Volume 4). Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2005. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 444. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement in Europe (Volume 3). Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 445. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement in the Americas (Volume 2). Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 446. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Major Religious Traditions. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 447. Mullin, Glenn H. Death and Dying: The Tibetan Tradition. Boston: Arkana, 1986. 448. ———. Living in the Face of Death: The Tibetan Tradition. Ithaca, NY: Snow Lion Publications, 1998. 449. Nader, Kathleen, Nancy Dubrow, and B. H. Stamm, eds. Honoring Differences: Cultural Issues in the Treatment of Trauma and Loss. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. 450. Neuberger, Julia. Caring for Dying People of Different Faiths. Abingdon, U.K.: Radcliffe Medical Press, 2004. Also cited as published by the Austen Cornish and Lisa Sainsbury Foundations in 1987. 451. Northcott, Herbert C., and Donna M. Wilson. Dying and Death in Canada. Aurora, Ontario: Garamond Press, 2001.

66

Chapter 8

452. O’Shaughnesay, T. Muhammed’s Thoughts on Death: A Thematic Study of the Qur’Anic Data. London: Brill, 1969. 453. Palmer, Greg. Death: The Trip of a Lifetime. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1993. Based on the PBS series by the same title (a KCTS-Palmer/ Fenster, Inc. coproduction). Sometimes bizarre and creepy, this around-the-world narrative explores an expansive variety of death-related subject matter to include cryogenic resurrection, Australian funeral practices, a Taiwanese “death theme park,” positive death images in film, and mortality as seen through different world cultures. 454. Parkes, Colin Murray, and Pittu Laungani. Death and Bereavement across Cultures. New York: Routledge, 1997. 455. Parry, Joan K., and Angela Shen Ryan. A Cross-Cultural Look at Death, Dying, and Religion. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1995. 456. Pine, Vanderlyn R., Otto S. Margolis, Kenneth J. Doka, Austin H. Kutscher, Daniel J. Schaefer, Mary-Ellen Siegel, and Daniel J. Cherico, eds. Unrecognized and Unsanctioned Grief: The Nature and Counseling of Unacknowledged Loss. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1990. The editors present a collection of twenty-two articles focusing on the grief experienced by individuals that is often not recognized or sanctioned by individual members of society and/or society as a whole. Many reasons for such unrecognized or unsanctioned grief are given, including AIDS patients, brain death, Alzheimer’s patients, children of divorced parents, comatose patients, homosexuals, prisoners, psychiatric patients, the “old old,” the “other woman,” rape victims, unmarried cohabitants, children of the elderly, fiancés, foster home relationships, and war veterans. The text is broken up into the following sections: “Unrecognized and Unsanctioned Grief in the Family,” “Perspectives on Unacknowledged Grief,” “Approaches to Coping with Unsanctioned or Unrecognized Grief,” “Caregivers and Unacknowledged Grief,” and “Unsanctioned Grief at the Loss of the Companion Animal.” Includes some illustrations and academic and professional information for each contributor but no index. 457. Platt, Larry A., and V. Richard Persico, eds. Grief in Cross-Cultural Perspective: A Casebook. New York: Garland, 1992. Noting the growth in anthropological research on the social meaning of death, grief, and mourning, the editors stress the need to make cross-cultural comparisons of this data and attempt to do so in this book. They present twelve articles divided into sections titled “The Social Meaning of Death,” “The Relationship between the Deceased and the Survivor,” “Mode of Death,” and “Social Support Network.” Topics include materialism and the ritual economy of death; symbolism and social change in Whalsay, Shetland; Gusli funerals; Sebei mortuary rituals; Bara funeral customs in Madagascar; death in Islam; mortuary rituals in

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

67

Highland Peru; traumatic loss among Crow Indian children; dying processes in a Hutterian colony; aging and death in Kaliai; patterns and processes of mourning among the Yolngu of Australia; and dying, death, and bereavement among the Maya Indians of Mesoamerica. Includes notes, references, and an index. 458. Price, Julius J. Rabbinic Conceptions about Death. Chicago: Open Court Press, 1920. 459. Rabinowicz, Rabbi Tzvi. A Guide to Life: Jewish Laws and Customs of Mourning. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1989. Rabbi Rabinowicz presents a thorough practical guide to the death rites and mourning customs within the Jewish faith. Includes memorial prayers, a family record form for yahrzeit dates, an extensive glossary, a lengthy bibliography, and a detailed index. 460. Rahner, Karl. On the Theology of Death. New York: Seabury Press, 1961. Also cited as being published by Herder and Herder, New York, in 1961. Translated by Charles H. Henkey. This book includes an in-depth explanation and overview of Catholic beliefs about death. 461. Riemer, Jack. Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning. New York: Schocken Books, 1996. Published with coauthor Sherwin B. Nuland by Syracuse University Press, Syracuse, NY, in 2002. 462. ———. Jewish Reflections on Death. New York: Schocken Books and Jewish Publication Society of America, 1974. 463. ———. Wrestling with the Angel: Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning. New York: Schocken Books, 1995. 464. Robben, Antonius C. Death, Mourning, and Burial: A Cross-Cultural Reader. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, 2004. 465. Ronan, Margaret. Death around the World. New York: Scholastic Book Services, 1978. 466. Rosenblatt, Paul C., and Beverly R. Wallace. African American Grief. New York: Routledge, 2005. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Rosenblatt presents a thorough examination of African American grief and bereavement, noting cultural elements and other unique aspects. He discusses visitations, wakes, and funerals; African American institutions dealing with death; discussing grief; family involvement in the grieving process; religion; continuing contact with the deceased; and talking and crying with others. He offers such insightful chapters as “Our Grief and Theirs: African Americans Compare Their Grief with Euro-American Grief” and “Understanding African American Grief.” Rosenblatt notes that “in order to understand African American grief it is

68

Chapter 8

important to understand how an African American death may have been caused in whole or in part by racism.” Premature death occurs with greater frequency among African Americans that with the population as a whole. He elaborates on connections between African American premature death and racism. Appendixes include a list of those interviewed with a brief description and the interview guide with questions. Includes extensive references as well as author and subject indexes. 467. Rosenblatt, Paul C., R. P. Walsh, and D. A. Jackson. Grief and Mourning in Cross-Cultural Perspectives. New Haven, CT: Human Relations Area Files, 1976. Also cited as being published in Washington, DC, in 1977. 468. Saunders, Cicely M., and Robert J. Kastenbaum, eds. Hospice Care on the International Scene. New York: Springer, 1997. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. Saunders, founder of the hospice movement, offers an introduction to the hospice mission and philosophy. Several articles follow detailing how the hospice approach manifests itself in various countries around the world. Jan Stjernsward presents the perspective of the World Health Organization on the international hospice movement. In addition to cultural differences, notable treatment is given to palliative care and attitudes toward death. An appendix features regional data presented in graphs. Includes references and an index. 469. Shiloh, Ailon, and Ida Cohen Selavan, eds. Ethnic Groups of America: Their Morbidity, Mortality, and Behavior Disorders, Volume I: The Jews. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1974. Shiloh, a professor of anthropology in public health at the University of Pittsburgh, assembles a group of sixty-four contributors to write this extensive survey of death and dying among Jews. The writers explore demography, blood groups among Sephardic and Ashkenazi Jews, genetic disorders, carcinoma, morbidity patterns, and behavior disorders. Includes author and subject indexes. 470. Smith, Sharon Hines. African American Daughters and Elderly Mothers: Examining Experiences of Grief, Loss, and Bereavement. New York: Garland, 1998. Part of Garland Studies on the Elderly in America series and a revision of the author’s doctoral thesis at the University of Pennsylvania in 1996. Smith presents her study of thirty African American women who share experiences of grief and loss upon the death of their elderly mothers. Tables documenting her research include “Themes Describing the Personal Meaning of Elderly Mother’s Death for Daughter’s Interview,” “Characterizations of Elderly African American Mothers by Daughters Interviewed,” “Years of Schooling” (of daughters interviewed), and “Marital Status of Daughters and Frequency” (number of marriages). Appendixes include Smith’s research tools. Includes extensive references.

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

69

471. Solomon, Lewis D. The Jewish Tradition and Choices at the End of Life: A New Judaic Approach to Illness and Dying. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 2001. 472. Spiro, Howard M., Mary G. McCrea Curnen, and Lee Palmer Wandel, eds. Facing Death: Where Culture, Religion, and Medicine Meet. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1996. Prepared under the auspices of the Program for Humanities in Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, and The GoetheInstitut, Boston. This book was derived from a colloquium on ars moriendi, typically referencing the art of dying but here really referring to the way of dying. The colloquium was at the Yale University School of Medicine in New Haven, Connecticut, and it was jointly sponsored by the Program for Humanities in Medicine at Yale and the Goethe-Insitut in Boston. At this gathering, medical professionals spoke of their reactions to death, followed by philosophers, historians, and clergy relaying how cultural differences and religious experiences have affected how people deal with and are affected by death. There was also a focus on AIDS. Spiro notes in his preface that those in the caring professions need to focus less on reacquainting themselves with death and instead stop ignoring it. He writes: “We doctors and nurses have simply to open our eyes to what we do—and our hearts and minds to what we fear. We need to contemplate, and talk about, death. We need once again to express our grief when our patients die and our anger that defeat sometimes brings. We need to feel.” There are twenty-two articles divided into two sections titled “Witnessing Death: The Medical Battle” and “Framing Death: Cultural and Religious Responses.” Articles focus on limitations of medical technology, reflections on death and AIDS, the doctor’s role in death, euthanasia and physician-assisted suicide, caring for the dying, death in children, childhood bereavement, emergence of hospice care in the United States, aging and dying, the peaceful death, the art of dying in Hindu India, mortality from a Jewish perspective, Catholic theology’s views on death, Chinese popular beliefs on death, the meaning of death in Islam, death and dying in early America, and the NAMES Project AIDS Quilt. Includes references, brief biographies of the contributors, and an index. Foreword by Daniel Callahan. 473. Spiro, Jack D. Time to Mourn: Judaism and the Psychology of Bereavement. New York: Bloch Publishing, 1968. Spiro presents a study and analysis of Jewish mourning and bereavement from a psychological perspective. 474. Sulzberger, Cyrus. My Brother Death. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1961. Reprinted edition published by Arno Press, New York, in 1977, as part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Sulzberger, former lead foreign correspondent with the New York Times, offers a narrative that is part travelogue and part anthropological study into death

70

Chapter 8

attitudes and cultural differences surrounding death issues. Told from the viewpoint of a newspaper man who lives abroad, Sulzberger brings concepts to life through journalistic prose. Ideas from this book were incorporated into the 1965 film The Playground. Includes a bibliography. 475. Taylor, Richard P. Death and the Afterlife: A Cultural Encyclopedia. Santa Barbara, CA: ABC-CLIO, 2000. 476. Van Der Zee, James, Owen Dodson, and Camille Billops. The Harlem Book of the Dead. Dobbs Ferry, NY: Morgan & Morgan, 1978. In this book, Van Der Zee has compiled a collection of funeral photography. The work documents African American funeral traditions and offers poems with each photograph. Includes a conversation with the photographer when he was ninety-one years old. Foreword by Toni Morrison. 477. Wardi, Anissa Janine. Death and the Arc of Meaning in African American Literature. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 2003. Originally Wardi’s dissertation at the University of Florida, this book explores African American death themes in literature. Wardi presents five essays with the themes “Graveyard Dirt: The Embodied South in A Gathering of Old Men and Beloved,” “Cotton Fields and Cane Stalks: Labor and Death in Of Love and Dust and Song of Solomon,” “‘His House Is a Dead Thing’: Home and Exile in Linden Hills,” “‘A Crooked Kind of Mourning’: Migration and Loss in Jazz, The Men of Brewster Place, and In My Father’s House,” and “Conversations with the Dead: Echoes of ‘Kabnis’ in Mama Day.” Wardi offers a conclusion titled “Our People’s Graves.” Includes notes, a bibliography, and an index. 478. Watt, Jill. Canadian Guide to Death and Dying. Toronto: International Self-Counsel Press, 1974. 479. Weiss, Abner. Death and Bereavement: A Halakhic Guide. Brooklyn, NY: Union of Orthodox Jewish Congregations of America, 2000. Distributed by Mesorah Publications. Originally published in 1991. 480. White Deer of Autumn. The Great Change: A Native American Perspective on Dying. Hillsboro, OR: Beyond Words Publishing, 1992. 481. Wilson, Liz. The Living and the Dead: Social Dimensions of Death in South Asian Religions. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2003. 482. Wolfson, Ron. A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights, 1993. A project of the Federation of Jewish Men’s Clubs and the University of Judaism. Part of the Art of Jewish Living series. Also cited as A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort: A Guide to Jewish Bereavement and Comfort. Intended to reach two audiences simultaneously, mourners and comforters, Wolfson’s book explores all aspects of Jewish approaches to death, dying,

Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying

71

mourning, and comforting. Through many anecdotes and personal stories presented as a guidebook, he covers many pertinent topics. Among them are talking with the dying, the process of dying, advance directives, issues surrounding disposition of the body, childhood death, the phases of Jewish bereavement, grief work and Jewish mourning, funeral arrangements, Kaddish, Sephardic burial customs, observance of Shiva, condolence letters, visiting the grave, memorials, ethical wills, living wills, excessive grief, exhumation, remembering the deceased, widowhood, estate issues, and afterlife concerns. Includes an appendix that addresses estate instructions, an estate planning checklist, a selected bibliography with special section on books for children, and a glossary. Also includes information on the Federation of Jewish Men’s Clubs. Wolfson is vice president of the University of Judaism in Los Angeles.

9 Death Education

483. Barnett, Geraldine E. Death Anxiety of Perinatal Nurses: The Relationship to Death Education and Death Exposure. Miami, FL: Barry University, 1996. 484. Bennett, Roger V. Death and the Curriculum. Chicago: American Education Research Association, 1974. 485. Berg, David W., and George G. Daugherty. Death Education: A Survey and Study of Colleges and Universities. DeKalb, IL: Educational Perspectives Associates, 1974. Berg and Daugherty, associate directors of the Task Force on Death Education, conducted this survey and study to determine the number of courses at the post–high school level that are devoted entirely to the study of death and dying and those that devote a significant proportion of time to the topic, to identify the materials used in the courses, to ascertain the names of those teaching the courses, to determine the departments within the respective institutions incorporating the courses, and to analyze the basic topics included in the death education courses. Complete listings of the above are included. A chapter on the study’s conclusions includes commentary on death and dying as a multidisciplinary area of teaching, the recent development (in 1974) of these courses being offered, and the wide range of depth that courses offer into the subject. A copy of the survey form is included. 486. ———. Perspectives on Death: Student Activity Handbook. DeKalb, IL: Perspectives on Death, 1972. 487. ———. Perspectives on Death: Teacher’s Resource Book. DeKalb, IL: Perspectives on Death, 1972.

72

Death Education

73

488. Blowers, Margaret Robin. The Effectiveness of a Death Education Program on Children’s Knowledge and Attitudes toward Death. Albany, NY: College of St. Rose, 1991. 489. Brinkman, June M., and Tresa F. Quarles. Death Education Resource Book. Portland, ME: J. Weston Walch, 1988. This spiral-bound paperback provides basic information on death-related subjects to instructors teaching a death education unit as part of a life skills, health, or sociology class. It offers guidelines and suggestions for presentation of the subject to students. Appropriate for both teen and adult audiences, this book may also be appropriate for seminars or workshops. Each section contains special activities and projects as well as questions for review and discussion. A short bibliography and an extensive glossary of death-related terminology are included. The authors are teachers in Virginia. 490. Cable, Dana G., and Ellen Zinner. Death in the Public Scene, Facing the 1990s: Papers and Addresses of ADEC’s 1989 Conference, Association for Death Education and Counseling Conference in Baltimore, MD. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1990. 491. Carse, James P., and Arlene B. Dallery, eds. Death and Society: A Book of Readings and Sources. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1977. The authors note in their introduction that the book is “offered as a provocation for further reflection on the problem of death.” It is a collection of essays appropriate for death education courses, divided into sections on abortion, euthanasia, suicide, death and the law, death and aging, and death and the caring institutions. The appendix offers an essay by Monroe Lerner titled “When, Why, and Where People Die,” with excellent statistical tables. Includes a selected bibliography of books on death and dying published in the early 1970s. 492. Cline, Sally. Lifting the Taboo: Women, Death, and Dying. New York: New York University Press, 1997. This edition was published in Great Britain by Abacus in 1996. Also published by Little, Brown in 1995. Cline gives three reasons for her examination of issues relating to death now. The first is to take death “out of the closet” and look at the special relationship women have to the dying process. The second is to investigate society’s current uninformed attitude toward death. The third is the advent of AIDS and its effects on increasing awareness of death and mortality. She also notes that in addition to numerous women being HIV-positive, many are also filling the role of caregiver during this crisis. Cline examines earlier cultural and religious views toward death, female funeral directors, widowhood, notions of image, sex and language with cancer, suicide, and unacknowledged losses. Includes extensive notes, a bibliography with suggestions for further reading, and an index.

74

Chapter 9

493. Corr, Charles A., ed. Creativity in Death Education and Counseling. Lakewood, OH: Forum for Death Education and Counseling, 1983. 494. Croskery, Beverly F. Death Education: Attitudes of Teachers, School Board Members, and Clergy. Palo Alto, CA: R & E Research Associates, 1979. Originally presented as the author’s thesis at the University of Toledo. 495. Davis, Thomas Martin. The Effect of the Death Education Film “In My Memory” on Elementary School Students in the La Crosse Wisconsin Public Schools. Bloomington: Indiana University, 1975. This is Davis’s doctoral dissertation. He now serves as a professor and chair of the Division of Health Promotion and Education at the University of Northern Iowa. 496. Eddy, James M. The Development and Validation of a Knowledge Test of Death and Dying for College Students. University Park: Pennsylvania State University, 1979. 497. Eddy, James M., and Wesley Alles. Death Education. St. Louis: Mosby, 1982. 498. Fredrick, David L., and Donna M. Fredrick, eds. Death Education and Counseling: A Training Manual. Berkeley, CA: Pilgrimage, 1978. 499. Gatliffe, Eleanor D. Death in the Classroom: A Resource Book for Teachers and Others. London: Epworth Press, 1988. 500. Gibson, A. Barbara, Polly C. Roberts, and Thomas J. Buttery. Death Education: A Concern for the Living. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Educational Foundation, 1982. 501. Gordon, Audrey K., and Dennis Klass. They Need to Know: How to Teach Children about Death. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1979. 502. Green, Betty R., and Donald P. Irish, eds. Death Education: Preparation for Living. Cambridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1971. 503. Gullo, Stephen V., Paul R. Patterson, and John E. Schowalter, eds. Death and Children: A Guide for Educators, Parents, and Caregivers. Dobbs Ferry, NY: Tappan Press, 1985. 504. Halporn, Roberta. Lessons from the Dead: The Graveyard as a Classroom for the Study of the Life Cycle. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1979. 505. Holbrook, Frank B. Frank Answers on Death. London: Southern Press, 1975. 506. Horton, Keith V. Elders: The Need for Death Education. Orangeburg: South Carolina State University, 1996.

Death Education

75

507. Jackson, Maggie, and Jim Colwell. A Teacher’s Handbook of Death. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2002. 508. Kienow, Nancy Louise. Death Education and Death Anxiety in Student Nurse Aides. 1992. Author’s doctoral dissertation. 509. Knott, J. Eugene. Thanatopics: A Manual of Structured Learning Experiences for Death Education. Kingston, RI: SLE Publications, 1982. 510. Krohe, Dale C. A Survey to Determine the Status of Death Education in the Wisconsin Secondary Health Education Curriculum. La Crosse: University of Wisconsin, La Crosse, 1975. A 63-page seminar paper. 511. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Questions and Answers on Death and Dying. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, 1997. Originally published by Macmillan, New York, in 1974. This 177-page companion volume to On Death and Dying answers the most frequently asked questions about death and dying. Questions are divided into several categories, including telling the patient, suicide and terminal illness, sudden death, prolongation of life, euthanasia, where to best care for dying patients, family problems after death, funerals, old age, and personal questions for the author herself. 512. Lansing, Patricia. A Comparison of Attitudes of Associate Degree Student Nurses Caring for the Dying Patient before and after Death Education. Laramie: University of Wyoming School of Nursing, 1992. This was Lansing’s master’s thesis. 513. Leaman, Oliver. Death and Loss: Compassionate Approaches in the Classroom. New York: Cassell Publishing Co., 1995. 514. Lunney, June Rigby. Describing Death in America: What We Need to Know. Washington, DC: National Academies Press, 2003. 515. Macpherson, Colin R. Must I Think about Death? Now?: Student Essays from “Death, Dying, and Grieving,” a First-Year Course, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, Ohio. Cincinnati, OH: University of Cincinnati, 1996. 516. Meagher, David K., and Robert G. Stevenson. Dying, Death, and Bereavement: Continuities, Changes, and Challenges: Papers from ADEC’s 1990 Conference. London: Taylor & Francis, 1991. 517. Memorial Society of Edmonton and District. A Teaching Unit on Death and Dying. Edmonton, Alberta: The Society, 1975. Intended for senior high school and junior college students.

76

Chapter 9

518. Mills, Gretchen C., Ray Reisler, Alice E. Robinson, and Gretchen Vermilye. Discussing Death: A Guide to Death Education. Homewood, IL: ETC Publications, 1976. The authors offer a straightforward resource for educators presenting death topics or teaching a death education course. Concepts to cover, lesson ideas, activities, and selected resources are offered for various age groups. Includes a list of questions to be explored through fiction and a questionnaire about death experiences and attitudes. Also includes special notes for teachers. 519. Morgan, John D. Death Education in Canada: Survey, Curricula, Protocols, Bibliography. London, Ontario: King’s College, 1990. 520. Nessit, Marion. Death: A Teacher’s Guide. Toronto, Ontario: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1972. Part of the Infinity Series. 521. Otero, George G. Death, a Part of Life: An Experimental Unit. Denver, CO: Center for Teaching International Relations, Graduate School of International Studies, University of Denver (Colorado Seminary), 1976. Also cited as being published by the Office of Education, Washington, DC, in 1975. 522. Pacholski, Richard A. Long-Term Effects of Death Education and Counseling: Papers from the 1987 Annual Meeting of ADEC, Ontario Association for Death Education and Counseling Meeting in London. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1989. 523. ———. Re-Searching Death: Selected Essays in Death Education and Counseling. Lakewood, OH: Forum for Death Education and Counseling, 1986. 524. Pyles, Marian S. Death and Dying in Children’s and Young People’s Literature: A Survey and Bibliography. Jefferson, NC: McFarland, 1988. Pyles offers a study of death and dying themes in literature for youth. General topics covered include folklore; the death of pets, friends, and relatives; and one’s own death. Includes numerous passages from the literature and bibliographies for adults and children. The index is very helpful. 525. Reynolds, Paul Davidson, and Robert Fulton. Decision for Death: Simulation of a Societal Consensus Group. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, Center for Death Education and Research, 1973. 526. Reynolds, Rita M. Blessing the Bridge: What Animals Teach Us about Death, Dying, and Beyond. Troutdale, OR: NewSage Press, 2001. 527. Rofes, Eric E., and “The Unit” at Fayerweather Street School, ed. The Kids’ Book about Death and Dying, by and for Kids. Boston: Little, Brown, 1985. Rofes presents a book for children that answers the most common questions about death and dying. The questions originated from a group of students ages

Death Education

77

eleven to fourteen who called themselves “The Unit” at Fayerweather Street School, where Rofes is teacher and codirector. Subjects addressed include a definition of death, funeral customs, the death of older relatives and parents, the death of children, violent deaths, and life after death. Includes a brief but thoroughly annotated bibliography. 528. Rothschild, Janet. Income Level and Parental Attitudes toward Death Education for Preschool Children. Denton: University of North Texas, 1982. 529. Sargent, Marilyn. Talking to Children about Death. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health, U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, 1990. 530. Scott, Frances G., and Ruth M. Brewer, eds. Confrontations on Death: A Book of Readings and a Suggested Method of Instruction. Corvallis, OR: Continuing Education Publications, 1971. 531. Silverman, Nancy Jean Price. The Relationship between End-of-Life Education Obtained through Didactic, Clinical, Personal, and Introspective Experiences and the Attitudes of Nursing Students toward the Care of the Dying Patient. Dayton, OH: Wright State University, 2004. 532. Somerville, Rose M. Death Education as Part of Family Life Education: Using Imaginative Literature for Insights into Family Crises. Minneapolis, MN: Family Coordinator, 1972. 533. Spinetta, John J. Talking with Children with a Life-Threatening Illness: A Handbook for Health Care Professionals. Bethesda, MD: National Cancer Institute, 1979. A 35-page booklet. 534. Stevenson, Robert G., and Eileen P. Stevenson, eds. Teaching Students about Death: A Comprehensive Resource for Educators and Parents. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1996. Includes articles by thirty-two contributors on issues relating to childhood bereavement, life-threatening illnesses in adolescents, coping with grief, perspectives on death education in the United States, suicide, death themes in literature, and others. The authors both work in high schools as grief counselors and death educators. 535. Thomas, James L., ed. Death and Dying in the Classroom: Readings for Reference. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press, 1984. Thomas aims to encourage educators to discuss the topic of death freely and openly with students. Contributors provide suggested activities that have been tested in the classroom as well as personal accounts of creatively dealing with death and dying in the school setting. Sections included are “Teachers’ and Students’ Perceptions,” “Instructional Methods,” and “Classroom Encounters/Personal

78

Chapter 9

Narratives.” Appendixes include material for children and young adults, a list of organizations and associations with descriptions, and a questionnaire entitled “You and Death,” designed by Edwin S. Shneidman of the Center for Advanced Study in the Behavioral Sciences. The 75-question instrument is intended to motivate discussion among students about attitudes, experiences, and thoughts about death. Includes a brief annotated bibliography, an index, and a list of contributors with brief biographical information. 536. Thomas, Pat. I Miss You: A First Look at Death. Hauppauge, NY: Barron’s Educational Series, 2001. 537. Ulin, Richard Otis, and Robert Kelly. Death and Dying Education. Washington, DC: National Education Association, 1977. 538. Wass, Hannelore. Death Education II: An Annotated Resource Guide. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1985. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Wass delivers an updated version of her earlier resource guide. 539. Wass, Hannelore, Charles A. Corr, Richard A. Pacholski, and Catherine M. Sanders. Death Education: An Annotated Resource Guide. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1980. The authors, all educators on death and dying, offer this critically annotated list of resources on death education. Titles are divided by subject area, typically according to the intended audience. Other categories covered are reference books, bibliographies, periodical articles, audiovisual resources, conference listings, organizational resources, and community resources. Includes more than 500 entries and topical indexes and a general index. 540. Wolf, Anna M. Helping Your Children to Understand Death. Rev. ed. New York: Child Study Press, 1973. Originally published by Child Study Association of America, New York, in 1955, as Helping Your Child Understand Death. Also cited as Helping Your Child to Understand Death. 541. Zalaznik, Patricia Weller. Dimensions of Loss and Death Education: A Resource and Curriculum Guide. Minneapolis, MN: EDU-PAC Publishing Co., 1987. Earlier edition published in 1980. 542. Zinner, Ellen S. Coping with Death on Campus. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1985. Part of the New Directions for Student Services series, Ursula Delworth and Gary R. Hanson, editors. Also part of the Jossey-Bass Higher Education Series. Through a collection of articles, the author covers several topics relating to death in a campus environment. Among them are effects of loss experiences on academic performance and student behavior, student services’ responses to death, the role of the counseling center in responding to student death, group

Death Education

79

survivorship, suicide on campus, and death education. Includes a brief annotated bibliography and an index. 543. Zinner, Ellen S., and Joan D. McMahon. How to Conduct a One-Day Conference on Death Education: The Dos and Don’ts. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1980. Part of the Forum for Death Education and Counseling’s Thanatology Service Series.

10 The Death of a Child

544. Anthony, E. James, and Cyrille Koupernik, eds. The Child in His Family: The Impact of Disease and Death. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1973. Part of the Yearbook of the International Association for Child Psychiatry and Allied Professions and also The Child in His Family series, volume 2. While describing many cultural variations in the reaction to death by children, the contributors also draw on common elements in these responses to death, dying, and disease. Intended for clinicians, topics covered include meaningful communication with the fatally ill child; fear of death in fatally ill children and their parents; dying children in a hospital environment; effects of death on an adolescent pediatric ward; the capacity for mourning in children; pathological mourning; psychic loss; and issues surrounding suicide, homicide, and parricide. Includes bibliographic references and an index. Foreword by John Bowlby. 545. Arnold, Joan Hagan, and Penelope Buschman Gemma. A Child Dies: A Portrait of Family Grief. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1994. Winner of the 1994 American Journal of Nursing Book of the Year Award, this short paperback features chapters on the meaning of loss, the process of grieving, differences in dealing with the death of an older and a younger child, and guidance for caregivers dealing with grieving families. Includes a foreword by Earl A. Grollman. Grollman notes in his foreword: “If I were to recommend one book to grieving families and health professionals concerning the catastrophic experience of a child’s death, it would be this one. The deep truths and exquisite beauty will bring solace to many grieving hearts.” 546. Ashton, Joyce, and Dennis Ashton. Loss and Grief Recovery: Help Caring for Children with Disabilities, Chronic or Terminal Illness. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1996.

80

The Death of a Child

81

547. Avery, Gillian, and Kimberley Reynolds, eds. Representations of Childhood Death. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000. Avery and Reynolds, both scholars of children’s literature, present a fascinating examination and analysis of childhood death imagery and representations in folklore, ballads, women’s manuscript journals, religious writings, literature, Edwardian fantasy writing, poetry, horror fiction, and cinema. Includes notes, eight plates with images, a bibliography, and an index. 548.

Berg, Julie. When a Classmate Dies. Fargo, ND: Prairie House, 1991.

549. Bernstein, Judith R. When the Bough Breaks: Forever after the Death of a Son or Daughter. New York: Andrews McMeel Publishing, 1998. 550. Bertoia, Judi. Drawings from a Dying Child: Insights into Death from a Jungian Perspective. New York: Routledge, 1993. 551. Bluebond-Langner, Myra. The Private Worlds of Dying Children. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1978. 552. Bordow, Joan. The Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child. New York: Beaufort Books, 1982. Discussing the crisis of child death, Bordow notes in her introduction that this book “talks about entering into, moving through, and then going beyond a child’s death through acceptance not only of what has happened but what is.” Includes moving stories of children’s deaths and suggestions for the grieving process. Also includes a chapter on support groups and organizations with narrative on each. 553. Breebaart, Joeri, and Piet Breebaart. When I Die, Will I Get Better? New York: P. Bedrick Books, 1993. 554. Bruce, James W. From Grief to Glory: Spiritual Journeys of Mourning Parents. Wheaton, IL: Crossway Books, 2002. 555. Buckingham, Robert W. A Special Kind of Love: Care of the Dying Child. New York: Continuum Publishing Co., 1983. Part of the Continuum Counseling Series. Published as Care of the Dying Child: A Practical Guide for Those Who Help Others, by Continuum, New York, in 1990. Buckingham presents a guide for doctors, nurses, social workers, ministers, teachers, family, and friends on caring for terminally ill children. 556. Burton, Lindy, ed. Care of the Child Facing Death. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1974. 557. Conrad, Bonnie Hunt. When a Child Has Been Murdered: Ways You Can Help the Grieving Parents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 558. Cook, Judith A. The Adjustment of Parents Following the Death of a Child from a Terminal Illness: A Dissertation. Columbus: Ohio State University

82

Chapter 10

Research Foundation and Ohio Department of Mental Health, Office of Program Evaluation and Research, 1982. 559. Cook, Sarah Sheets. Children and Dying: An Exploration and a Selective Professional Bibliography. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1973. Revised and expanded in 1974 with the title Children and Dying: An Exploration and Selective Bibliographies. Also cited as being published by the Center for Thanatology Research and Education, New York, in 1974, with the title Children and Dying: An Exploration and Annotated Bibliography. Compiled and edited by Roberta Halporn, the revised and expanded edition contains fourteen essays divided into three sections: “How Children Feel and React to Death,” “How Adults React to the Sick, Dying, or Bereaved Child,” and “Working Constructively with the Dying or Bereaved Child.” Contributors include Earl A. Grollman, Edgar Jackson, Edward D. Futterman, Phyllis R. Silverman, and others. Bibliographies contain only a few dozen titles. 560. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr. Hospice Approaches to Pediatric Care. New York: Springer, 1985. Includes S. J. Fleming’s article “Children’s Grief.” 561. Crider, Tom. Give Sorrow Words: A Father’s Passage through Grief. Chapel Hill, NC: Algonquin Books, 1997. Intended for those grieving with no firm religious beliefs, this book suggests seeking comfort from stories, poetry, mythology, memoirs, and biographies from a variety of cultures and beliefs. The narrative includes entries from Crider’s journal documenting his progress through bereavement following the death of his twenty-one-year-old daughter, Gretchen, in a house fire while she was away at college. Includes a list of titles for suggested reading. 562. Daher, Douglas. And the Passenger Was Death: The Drama and Trauma of Losing a Child. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 563. Dean, Katie Hodge. Grief’s Journey . . . When a Child Dies. Huntington Beach, CA: Dancing Peanut Productions, 2004. Dean created this spiral-bound booklet following the death of her son, Blake “Peanut,” who was seventeen months old when he died in a car crash in 2000. Poetry and photos accompany open spaces for the reader to create a journal. Dean’s intent is to assist other parents who have lost a child. 564. Deaton, Bob, and William A. Berkan. Planning and Managing Death Issues in the Schools. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1995. 565. Deveau, Eleanor J., and David W. Adams. Beyond the Innocence of Childhood: Helping Children and Adolescents Cope with Life-Threatening Illness and Dying. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.

The Death of a Child

83

566. Dick, Harold M. Dying and Disabled Children: Dealing with Loss and Grief. New York: Haworth Press, 1988. 567. Doerr, Maribeth Wilder. For Better or Worse: For Couples Whose Child Has Died. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1992. 568. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Child. New York: Macmillan, 1982. 569. Easson, William M. The Dying Child: The Management of the Child or Adolescent Who Is Dying. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1970. Second edition published in 1981. 570. Edelstein, Linda. Maternal Bereavement: Coping with the Unexpected Death of a Child. New York: Praeger, 1984. Developed from the author’s doctoral dissertation, this book addresses the issues of the mourning–liberation process, bereavement, and the adaptations of mothers to the deaths of their children. She also includes the social contexts of bereavement in her study. Edelstein covers the stages of bereavement; outcomes and atypical reactions; psychological defenses; the special relationship between mother and child; the nature of the loss; the impact of the death and the early days following death; memorials; death wishes; faith; connections in heaven; superstition; guilt; anger and depression; new directions emerging from bereavement; and emotional and social supports through family, selfhelp groups, and professionals. The appendix includes the questionnaire used in the author’s research and sixteen tables that reflect the research. Includes a bibliography. 571. Fargues, Marie. The Child and the Mystery of Death. Glen Rock, NJ: Paulist Press, 1966. Translated by Sister Gertrude. 572. Field, Marilyn J., and Richard E. Behrman, eds. When Children Die: Improving Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families. Washington, DC: National Academies Press, 2003. A publication of the Committee on Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families, Board on Health Sciences Policy, National Institute of Medicine. 573. Fischoff, Joseph, and Noreen O’Brien Brohl. Before and After My Child Died: A Collection of Parents’ Experiences. Detroit: Emmons-Fairfield Publishing Co., 1981. 574. Floyd, Gregory. A Grief Unveiled: One Father’s Journey through the Death of a Child. Brewster, MA: Paraclete Press, 1999. 575. Frantz, Thomas T. When Your Child Has a Life-Threatening Illness. Rev. ed. Washington, DC: Association for the Care of Children’s Health and the Candlelighters Childhood Cancer Foundation, 1988.

84

Chapter 10

576. Goldman, Ann. Care of the Dying Child. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994. 577.

Gyulay, Jo-Eileen. The Dying Child. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978.

578. Hamovitch, Maurice B. The Parent and the Fatally Ill Child. Los Angeles: Delmar, 1964. Reprinted in 1968. Also cited as being published by the City of Hope Medical Center in Duarte, CA. 579. ———. Parental Reactions to the Death of a Child. 1962. A mimeograph. 580. Hill, Lenore, ed. Caring for Dying Children and Their Families. New York: Chapman & Hall, 1994. Distributed by Singular Publishing Group. Hill, head nurse at Martin House Hospice for Children in Wetherby, United Kingdom, provides practical advice to all those involved in the care of a dying child. She explores physical and educational care, symptom control, special issues with AIDS diagnoses, the role of hospice, sibling issues, spiritual care, and home health care. Communication about death is covered thoroughly. Includes references, suggestions for further reading, a resource guide for organizations in the United Kingdom, and an index. 581. Huber, Terri. No Time Out from Grief: Surviving the Death of My Son. San Jose, CA: Writer’s Club Press/iUniverse.com, 2000. 582. Johnson, Joy, and Marv Johnson. Children Die, Too. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1978. Johnson and Johnson present a small booklet that compassionately discusses death and children for parents and caregivers immediately following the news that a child may die. 583. Johnson, Sherry E. After a Child Dies: Counseling Bereaved Families. New York: Springer, 1987. 584. Judd, Dorothy. Give Sorrow Words: Working with a Dying Child. London: Free Association Books, 1989. Published by Haworth Press, New York, in 1995. 585. Kagan, Henya. Gili’s Book: A Journey into Bereavement for Parents and Families. New York: Teachers College Press, 1998. Author also cited as Henya Kagan (Klein), Henya Klein Kagan, and Henya Kagan Klein. In his foreword, Allen E. Ivey of the University of Massachusetts at Amherst notes that Kagan presents a holistic meaning of the experience of loss in this book, a memorial to her daughter. Gili was fatally injured by a reckless driver and died five days after the accident in 1989. Kagan offers an alternative to the theories that identify stages and suggest that there are rigid commonalities in how people react to death and dying. She suggests that for many the stages and

The Death of a Child

85

theories are irrelevant. The book is divided into three parts, the first focusing on the life and death of Gili with photos and drawings. An interlude follows where the author talks about her initial reactions to Gili’s death. The third part is a more academic, in-depth discussion of bereavement. Includes a bibliography, list of organizations and other resources, and an index. 586. Klass, Dennis. The Spiritual Lives of Bereaved Parents. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. 587. Klopfenstein, Pamela. My Heart Will Forever Go On: Coping with the Daily Challenges of Raising a Child with Special Needs and How to Survive the Loss When They Are Called Away. Bloomington, IN: AuthorHouse, 2005. In this 125-page book, Klopfenstein describes her efforts to get the best medical care for her son, Jonathan Michael Klopfenstein, and other challenges of care for terminally ill children. 588. Kluger-Bell, K. Unspeakable Loss: Understanding the Experience of Pregnancy Loss, Miscarriage, and Abortion. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 1998. 589. Knapp, Ronald J. Beyond Endurance: When a Child Dies. New York: Schocken Books, 1986. Knapp’s text emerges from 155 interviews with families who experienced the tragic loss of a child. He explores three types of death and the problems associated with mourning in each: death occurring after a long illness, sudden or unexpected death, and death by murder. This book is intended for both families and professionals working with the bereaved. Subjects covered include maturity of dying children; the helpfulness of anticipating death; the effects on the relationship between parents; devastation of the diagnosis; final moments with dying children; grief following sudden death and the “why” question; information and assistance-seeking following a child’s murder, including information on Parents of Murdered Children, Inc.; the family as a unit during crisis; postdeath issues, including autopsies and funerals; coping and survival; and depression. Includes a thorough discussion of the Kinder-Mourn Experiment by Lucy D. Christopher. Kinder-Mourn was established and organized in Charlotte, North Carolina, in 1978, to serve as a safe harbor for parents who have suffered the death of a child. A short bibliography is also included. 590. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. The Dougy Letter: A Letter to a Dying Child. Berkeley, CA: Ten Speed Press, 1979. In 1981, a young boy with an inoperable brain tumor named Dougy Turno wrote a letter to Dr. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, asking her why no one would talk to him about death and dying. She corresponded with him and encouraged him to meet Beverly Chappell, a registered nurse who worked in the area of death and dying. Eventually, Chappell founded The Dougy Center in Portland, Oregon, in

86

Chapter 10

1982. The center provides a safe place for young people and their families who are grieving a death to share their experiences. 591. Limbo, Rana K., and Sara Rich Wheeler. When a Baby Dies: A Handbook for Healing and Helping. La Crosse, WI: Resolve through Sharing, La Crosse Lutheran Hospital/Gundersen Clinic, Ltd., 1986. 592. Lister, Marcie, and Sandra Lovell. Healing Together: For Couples Grieving the Death of Their Baby. Omaha, NE: Centering Corp., 1991. 593. Livingston, Gordon. Only Spring: On Mourning the Death of My Son. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1995. Published by Marlowe and Co., New York, in 1999. Cover provides the additional subtitle A Father’s Story of a Child’s Gift of Love. Livingston’s book documents the illness and death of his son, Lucas Scott Livingston, who died in 1992. He describes this difficult journey and how his family dealt with the trajectory of Lucas’s illness, his death, and their bereavement. Foreword by Mark Helprin. 594. Martinson, Ida Marie. The Dying Child, the Family, and the Health Professionals. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976. 595. ———, ed. Home Care for the Dying Child: Professional and Family Perspectives. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1976. Martinson, associate professor of nursing and lecturer in physiology at the University of Minnesota, discusses the home as an alternative location for care of the dying child and presents a collection of articles from a pediatric nursing perspective. The book fully describes the Home Care Project and explores clinical details of leukemia. Article topics include the role of advocacy in the rite of passage, effects of pain on the child, parent and health care professionals, support systems for professional caregivers, the remaining child, reintegration of the family following death, support groups, clinical diagnoses, health care approaches to hair loss in children with cancer, appropriate hospital settings, a model of care for dying in the home, children’s conceptions of death, and child–adult interactions in health care environments. Personal recollections from parents and health care professionals are also included. Includes a listing of contributors with related educational backgrounds. 596. Marx, Robert J., and Susan Wengerhoff Davidson. Facing the Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child. Belgium, WI: Champion Press, 2003. 597. McCracken, Anne, and Mary Semel. A Broken Heart Still Beats: After Your Child Dies. Center City, MN: Hazelden, 1998. New edition published in 2000. 598. Mehren, Elizabeth. After the Darkest Hour the Sun Will Shine Again: A Parent’s Guide to Coping with the Loss of a Child. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1997. A Fireside edition.

The Death of a Child

87

599. Miller, Sukie, and Doris Ober. Finding Hope When a Child Dies: What Other Cultures Can Teach Us. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1999. Reprint Fireside edition published in 2002. Miller, along with cocontributer Doris Ober, provides meaningful answers to painful questions following the death of a child, including Why did my child die? Where is my child now? Can my child hear me? Can I help my child where she’s gone? Includes appendixes on self-help resources as well as on the Institute for the Study of Afterdeath and its senior researchers. Miller is the institute’s founder and director. 600. Mitchell, Ellen, Carol Barkin, Audrey Cohen, Lorenza Colletti, Barbara Eisenberg, Barbara J. Goldstein, Madelaine Perri Kasden, Phyllis Levine, Ariella Long, and Rita Volpe. Beyond Tears: Living after Losing a Child. New York: St. Martin’s Griffin, 2005. The authors are bereaved mothers who lost their children as young adults and who have told their stories to frequent Newsday contributor Ellen Mitchell. Relaying their experiences with the unimaginable loss of a child, they share what parents should expect in the first year following the death of a child and beyond, including how a once harmonious relationship can become strained, the development of a new definition of “normal,” differences in grief between mothers and fathers, and accepting that there is no answer to the question Why? The book includes the important reassurance that the clouds do lift over time, that parents can find a way to survive, and that it is possible to learn to live and even laugh again. A touching book. 601. Murray, Donald Morison. The Lively Shadow: Living with the Death of a Child. New York: Ballantine Books, 2003. Murray, a Pulitzer Prize–winning journalist for the Boston Globe, writes about the long road to healing following the loss of a child. This book is also his own story of the loss of his daughter, Lee Murray. 602. Osgood, Judy. Meditations for Bereaved Parents. Sunriver, OR: Gilgal Publications, 1983. Osgood offers a collection of fifty meditations written by parents who have lost a child. Bible verses precede most of the meditations, and reliance on faith and religion is emphasized. 603. Pearson, Judy C. Marriage after Mourning: The Secrets of Surviving Couples. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., 1995. 604. Pedersen, Debbie Wiley. An Exploration of Issues and Challenges Surrounding the Marital Relationships of Parents after the Death of a Child. Denver, CO: Regis University, 1997. Spine title: Marriage after the Death of a Child. 605. Peppers, Larry G. How to Go on Living after the Death of a Baby. Atlanta, GA: Peachtree Publishers Ltd., 1985.

88

Chapter 10

606. Peppers, Larry G., and Ronald J. Knapp. Motherhood and Mourning: Perinatal Death. New York: Praeger, 1980. The authors thoroughly examine issues surrounding perinatal death. Sections focus on the problem of perinatal death and common characteristics of grieving mothers; material grief; problems in relationships, including communication and sexual matters; and such practical issues as funerals, support groups, and community responses. Includes four charts, a short bibliography, and brief information about the authors. 607. Pregent, Carol. When a Child Dies. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1992. 608. Rando, Therese A., ed. Parental Loss of a Child. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1986. 609. Reed, Mary Lou. Grandparents Cry Twice: Help for Bereaved Grandparents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 610. Rheingold, Joseph C. The Mother, Anxiety, and Death: The Catastrophic Death Complex. Boston: Little, Brown, 1967. This first edition was also published by J. & A. Churchill, London. Rheingold offers a review and an analysis of the catastrophic death complex in the context of the mother–child relationship, the meaning of anxiety, and the psychology of death. He discusses meanings of death, attitudes toward death, origins of the fear of death, maternal destructiveness, basic anxiety, psychopathology, and psychotherapy. Includes a bibliography and author and subject indexes. 611. Riches, Gordon, and Pam Dawson. An Intimate Loneliness: Supporting Bereaved Parents and Siblings. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2000. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. Riches and Dawson explore the effects of a child’s death on family relationships, how differences between the grief of mothers and fathers contribute to marital tension, and the significant effect of parental grief on bereaved siblings. They also explore the impact of grief on self and family identity, particularly the role of shared remembrances in “transforming survivors’ relationships with the deceased.” Special topics covered include isolation in bereavement, sudden death, the “invisibility” of fathers’ and siblings’ grief, cultural and gender expectations, and the failure of intimate relationships. Appropriate for death education and counseling classes, this book includes case studies and discussion questions on some topics. Also includes extensive references. 612. Rosenblatt, Paul C. Help Your Marriage Survive the Death of a Child. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 2000.

The Death of a Child

89

613. ———. Parent Grief: Narratives of Loss and Relationship. Philadelphia: Brunner-Mazel, 2000. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Through intensive interviews with twenty-nine couples who have endured the devastating loss of a child, Rosenblatt uses narrative to convey the unique nature of parental grief. He highlights numerous aspects of parental grief from both individual and couple perspectives. Among them are the process of seeking the good and positive that can come from death and the grieving process; ways in which parents characterize the child; continuing relationships; couples’ communications about the influence of a child’s death on their relationship; use of metaphors by parents in describing death; dying and grief; how baptism, police inquiry, and autopsy are death rituals; and the sexual relationship of grieving parents. In addition to the narratives, Rosenblatt provides analysis and exploration of them. This book is intended for death educators, therapists, clergy, social workers, psychologists, and counselors. Includes extensive references and an appendix detailing the methodology. 614. Rosof, Barbara D. The Worst Loss: How Families Heal from the Death of a Child. New York: Henry Holt, 1994. Rosof is a child psychotherapist and former faculty member at the Indiana University School of Social Work. With this book, she gives a caring and compassionate guide for parents suffering from the disabling loss of a child. She uses stories of families who have experienced such a loss to communicate ideas and suggestions for recovering from this unique grief. Rosof discusses the effects of child death on parents and children; the ways children die and how it seems to be a violation of the natural order; acute grief; how children grieve; barriers to grieving; relationship issues between partners; grief associated with types of losses (terminal illness, murder, suicide, infant death); and moving beyond bereavement and living life again. Includes a list of helpful organizations and a bibliography. 615. Sahler, Ollie Jane Z., ed. The Child and Death. St. Louis: C. V. Mosby, 1978. Includes Hal Lipton’s essay “The Dying Child and the Family: The Skills of the Social Worker.” 616. Sanders, Catherine M. How to Survive the Loss of a Child: Filling the Emptiness and Rebuilding Your Life. Rocklin, CA: Prima Publishing, 1992. 617. Schiff, Harriet Sarnoff. The Bereaved Parent. New York: Penguin Books, 1978. Originally published by Crown Publishers, New York, in 1977. Schiff addresses feelings of grief, fear, guilt, and hopelessness in this guide to dealing with the bereavement following the loss of a child. She discusses powerlessness, marital issues associated with the loss of a child, religious issues, sibling grief, communicating while grieving, the funeral, and moving beyond grief.

90

Chapter 10

The author notes that, “This book is not designed to tug at your heartstrings. It is meant to pull at your bootstraps, to draw you from the quagmire of grief into the land of the living.” Schiff lost her own son at age ten from complications of congenital heart disease. 618. Schowalter, John E., Penelope Buschman, Paul R. Patterson, Austin H. Kutscher, Margot Tallmer, and Robert G. Stevenson, eds. Children and Death: Perspectives from Birth through Adolescence. New York: Praeger, 1987. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series, volume 9. Cover page and title page acknowledge the editorial assistance of Jeanne D. Cole. This book is an interdisciplinary work that notes, “Since the Kennedy assassination, there has been a societal imprimatur for children to participate in funeral services and mourning rituals.” This book discusses children’s interest in and exposure to death-related issues, children’s conceptions of death, and the death of a child and its implications. Margot Tallmer presents the preface with separate commentary on each of the four sections: “Children’s Concepts of Death,” “Emotional Impact of Disease,” “Perspectives on Childhood Death and Dying,” and “Coping with Childhood Death.” Articles address adolescents’ concepts of death and their deadly ramifications, children’s understanding of irreversibility, nonfunctionality and universality, death education, posttraumatic stress disorder in children with cancer, newborn death, communicating about death, teaching medical students the psychological aspects of chronic illness in children, definitions of dying, childhood fear of death, preoccupations with death in normal children, reactions to childhood death, paranormal experiences associated with the death of a child, Candlelighters parents groups, and early stage parental grief. Joanne E. Bernstein presents a short but heavily annotated list of outstanding children’s books about death. Includes an index and brief information about each of the contributors. 619. Schowalter, John E., Paul R. Patterson, and Margot Tallmer, eds. The Child and Death. New York: Columbia University Press, 1983. 620. Schulman, J. L. Coping with Tragedy: Successfully Facing the Problem of a Seriously Ill Child. Chicago: Follett Publications, 1976. 621. Stetson, Brad. Living Victims, Stolen Lives: Parents of Murdered Children Speak to America. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 622. Tengbom, Mildred. Help for Bereaved Parents. St. Louis: Concordia, 1981. Part of the Coping with Trauma Series. 623. Tittensor, John. Year One: A Record. Fitzroy, Victoria, Australia: McPhee Gribble/Penguin, 1984. Tittensor, an Australian writer, tells about his unimaginable grief following the death of his seven- and nine-year-old children in a house fire. Much of this 105-page book is written in a diary format.

The Death of a Child

91

624. Toder, Francine. When Your Child Is Gone: Learning to Live Again. Sacramento, CA: Capital Publishing, 1986. Although this book covers loss of children to causes other than death (custody decisions, kidnapping, disappearances), it is perhaps most useful for those who have experienced the death of a child. Toder, a psychologist, discusses the uniqueness of the pain associated with child loss, feelings of guilt, coping more effectively, the effects of personality type on recovery, and selecting a psychotherapist. Includes a helpful chapter on identifying community resources. 625. Wilkenfeld, Loren. When Children Die. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., 1977. Part of the Topics in Human Behavior Series. Wilkenfeld presents a collection of reprinted articles on childhood death.

11 Dying

626. Aldiss, Brian Wilson, and Margaret Aldiss. When the Feast Is Finished: Reflections on Terminal Illness. London: Little, Brown, 1999. 627. Armstrong, H. G. The American Way of Dying. Hicksville, NY: Exposition Press, 1978. 628. Arvio, Raymond Paavo. The Cost of Dying and What You Can Do about It. New York: Harper & Row, 1974. Beginning his introduction by noting that, “the specter of enlightened consumerism . . . haunts the American funeral today,” Arvio offers a book extremely critical of the funeral industry and its focus on consumerism. He goes on to suggest that, “A gentle flow of public and private criticism over the years has been tolerated by the powerful funeral Establishment [capitalization intended], while Jessica Mitford, Ruth Mulvey Harmer, and Leroy Bowman are dismissed as hopeless radicals.” Intending the book to be an advocacy tool for the development of memorial societies, Arvio focuses his text on their creation, benefits, and business model. An appendix offers a sample form from the Queens Memorial Society to express a person’s wishes for procedures and steps to be taken at the time of their death. 629. Austin, Mary. Experiences Facing Death. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published by BombsMerrill, Indianapolis, IN, in 1931. 630. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Joan Young Gregg. To Listen, to Comfort, to Care: Reflections on Death and Dying. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, 1994.

92

Dying

93

631. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Noreen A. Russell. Death and Dying: Understanding and Care. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, 1994. 632. Basta, Lofty L., and Carole Post. A Graceful Exit: Life and Death on Your Own Terms. New York: Plenum Press, 1996. 633. Bergersen, Betty S., ed. Distance and the Dying Patient. St. Louis: C. V. Mosby, 1967. 634. Boerstler, Richard W. Letting Go: A Holistic and Meditative Approach to Living and Dying. Watertown, MA: Associates in Thanatology, 1982. A psychotherapist and self-described “practitioner in thanatology,” Boerstler presents a 48-page paperback discussing a holistic view of the universe, meditation and death, and comeditation and its use in modern thanatology. Illustrations include a diagram of transpersonal (comeditation) practice in thanatology, the Cosmic Web, Kuan Yin, Yin-Yang, and the Dancing Shiva. The appendix is an abstract of a presentation made by Boerstler at the annual conference of the Forum for Death Education and Counseling in Boston, November 6–8, 1981, titled “Meditation and the Dying Process.” 635. Brauer, Paul H. A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness. New York: National Cancer Foundation, 1958. 636. Bregman, Lucy. Beyond Silence and Denial: Death and Dying Reconsidered. Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox Press, 1999. 637. Bruce, Hank. The Family Caregiver’s Journal: A Guide to Facing the Terminal Illness of a Loved One. Sorrento, FL: Petals & Pages Press, 1998. 638. Burnell, George M. Final Choices: To Live or to Die in an Age of Medical Technology. New York: Insight Books/Plenum Press, 1993. Emphasizing the need to think of death in terms of choices rather than the abstract, Burnell writes about discontinuing life-sustaining machines, extraordinary means to continue life, pain in dying, patient and family disagreements, American Medical Association positions on these issues, bioethics committees, dying as a matter of individual freedom, definitions of death, quantity versus quality of life, organ donation, and hospice. Numerous other matters are explored in sections and chapters titled with questions. Eight appendixes feature a map of state laws governing durable power of attorney, health care agents, and proxy appointments; an example of a living will declaration; information about and an example of a health care proxy; the Hippocratic Oath; the Death with Dignity Act; a directory of organizations; an organ donor criteria chart; and a map of state laws governing surrogate or family decision making for patients without advance directives. Includes a list of titles for suggested reading divided by subject and an index.

94

Chapter 11

639. Byock, Ira. Dying Well: The Prospect for Growth at the End of Life. New York: Putnam/Riverhead, 1997. Also cited as Dying Well: Peace and Possibilities at the End of Life. Through the stories of family members and others, Byock presents this book about “realizing the human potential to grow as individuals and as members of families through the human process of dying.” He discusses how the telling and receiving of stories about a loved one’s dying can be healing acts. He asserts that society’s aversion to discussing death until it is required robs people of incredible opportunities. Byock notes that, “socially we have paid dearly, and culturally we are poorer for failing to explore the inherently human experience of dying.” Includes an index and an appendix on how to write family stories. 640.

Campbell, Karen. Death Descending. London: Collins, 1976.

641. Carlozzi, Carl G. Death and Contemporary Man: The Crisis of Terminal Illness. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1968. 642. Carmody, John Tully. Meditations on the End of Life. Harrisburg, PA: Trinity Press International, 1997. 643. Cartwright, Ann, Lisbeth Hockey, and John L. Anderson. Life before Death. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1973. Part of the Reports of the Institute for Social Studies in Medical Care series. Cartwright is director of the Institute. While the book offers excellent insights and data on death and dying, it is primarily focused on nursing care of the dying. Tables included in the appendixes document symptoms of the dying, the cause of death relative to the institution, and data on deaths at home and deaths alone versus with family and friends. Chapters touch on a broad array of topics from elderly people living alone to laundry needs of the incontinent. Other topics covered are providing relief of common symptoms to the dying, the role of the nurse in varying institutional contexts, family members as caregivers, social class and area variations, coordination of services for the dying, and chiropody. Includes references and an index. 644. Castles, Mary Reardon. Dying in an Institution: Nurse/Patient Perspectives. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1979. 645. Caughill, Rita E., ed. The Dying Patient: A Supportive Approach. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976. This book contains seven originally published articles and one reprint on death, dying, and grieving. It addresses dying with dignity, coping with death in acute care units, supportive care with consideration of the age of the dying patient, the dying child, and grieving as a response to loss. 646. Chambers, Ross. Facing It: AIDS Diaries and the Death of the Author. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1998.

Dying

95

647. Chaney, Earlyne. The Mystery of Death: Initiation at the Moment of Death. York Beach, ME: Samuel Weiser, Inc., 1988. Chaney suggests that death is a passage not worthy of fear and that life will take on new meaning once this is realized. A self-described mystic, Chaney refers to the “art of dying” and notes in the preface that “not only is death a timely subject, but there is an art to doing it—a right way to die just as there is a right way to live.” 648.

Colman, Hila. Hanging On. New York: Atheneum, 1977.

649. Conley, Herbert N. Living and Dying Gracefully. New York: Paulist Press, 1979. 650. Cooke, Hannah. When Someone Dies: A Practical Guide to Holistic Care at the End of Life. Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2000. 651.

Copperman, Harriet. Dying at Home. New York: Wiley, 1983.

652. Crichton, Ian. The Art of Dying. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press International, 1976. 653. Dalai Lama XIV, and Donald S. Lopez. The Joy of Living and Dying in Peace. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1997. 654. Davidson, Glenn W. Living with Dying: A Guide for Relatives and Friends. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1975. 655. Davidson, Marjoe. My Life Is on Hold: One Family’s Struggle with Terminal Illness. Concrete, WA: MDEES Publishing, 1994. 656. de Bosis, Lauro. The Story of My Death. New York: Oxford University Press, 1933. 657. Dempsey, David. The Way We Die: An Investigation of Death and Dying in America Today. New York: Macmillan, 1975. Also published by McGrawHill, New York, in 1977. 658. Dileo, Cheryl, and Joanne Loewy. Music Therapy at the End of Life. Cherry Hill, NJ: Jeffrey Books, 2005. 659. Dobihal, Edward F. Jr., and Charles W. Stewart. When a Friend Is Dying: A Guide to Caring for the Terminally Ill. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1984. 660. Doyle, Derek. Caring for a Dying Relative: A Guide for Families. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994. 662. Draznin, Yaffa. How to Prepare for Death: Your Own or Someone Else’s. New York: Hawthorne Publishing, 1976.

96

Chapter 11

663. Droege, Thomas A. With Open Arms: Receiving Care with Grace and Gratitude. Bloomington, IN: Youth & Family Institute, 2005. 664. Duda, Deborah. Coming Home: A Guide to Dying at Home with Dignity. New York: Aurora Press, 1987. First edition published in March 1982, as A Guide to Dying at Home, by John Muir Publications, Santa Fe, NM. Following Mother Teresa, Duda began studying alternative healing and working with the dying. Her book provides practical advice on facilitating a comfortable death at home. She begins with the stories of three people who died at home. She discusses making the decision to die at home, financial considerations, sources of assistance in the process, transitioning from the hospital, medical considerations, how to be with someone who is dying, children involved in the process, practical home care, emotional issues, legal considerations, preparing for death, funerals, and bereavement. Duda also touches on Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s stages of dying and the Dying Person’s Bill of Rights. Her comments on medical considerations and practical home care are particularly extensive. Fourteen appendixes contain useful addresses, the hospice physicians’ standing order form, the American Medical Association Statement on Life-Prolonging Medical Treatment, the Guidelines for Home Care of Persons Infected by the Virus That Causes AIDS, a sample state living will, a patient’s bill of rights, information on taking a dying person home from the hospital when the staff objects, the Bach Flower Remedies, games to play, reflexology foot and hand charts, holistic healing techniques and terms, the Consumer Guide to the Federal Trade Commission Funeral Rule, and references. There is also biographical information about the author. 665. Edwards, Dan, and M. J. Graves, eds. Death: The Doorway to the Future. LeVale, MD: Excelsior Books, 1977. 666. Elias, Norbert. The Loneliness of Dying. New York: Basil Blackwell, 1985. Translated by Edmond Jephcott. 667. Ellis, Albert, and Michael Abrams. How to Cope with a Fatal Illness: The Rational Management of Death and Dying. New York: Barricade Books, 1994. 668. Evans, Jocelyn. Living with a Man Who Is Dying. New York: Taplinger Publishing Co., 1971. Also published by Blond, London. 669. Feigenberg, Loma. Terminal Care: Friendship Contracts with Dying Cancer Patients. New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1980. 670. Fein, Leonard J. Against the Dying of the Light: A Father’s Journey through Loss. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights Publishing, 2001. 671. Frick, Marlena. All the Days of His Dying. London: Allison & Busby, 1972.

Dying

97

672. Gibbons, Joan Lyon, and Elizabeth Boyden Howes. Come Phoenix Word: An Account of a Woman’s Journey and Struggle for Consciousness during a Terminal Illness: Journal and Writings of Joan Lyon Gibbons, 1924–1987. San Francisco, CA: Guild for Psychological Studies Publishing House, 1989. 673. Glaser, Barney G., and A. L. Strauss. Awareness of Dying. Chicago: Aldine Publishing Co., 1968. Originally published in 1965. Published by Weidenfeld & Nicholson, London, in 1966. 674. Glaser, Barney G., and Anselm L. Strauss. Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Patient. Mill Valley, CA: Sociology Press, 1971. Also cited as Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Trajectory. Also cited as being published by Aldine Publishing Co., Chicago. 675. ———. Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Trajectory. Mill Valley, CA: Sociology Press, 1970. Also cited as Anguish: A Dying Trajectory, published by Aldine Publishing Co., Chicago. 676.

———. Time for Dying. Chicago: Aldine Publishing Co., 1968.

677. Gleason, Edward S. Dying We Live. Cambridge, MA: Cowley Publications, 1990. 678. Gollwitzer, Helmut. Dying We Live: The Final Messages and Records of the Resistance. New York: Pantheon Books, 1956. 679. Graham, Billy. Facing Death and the Life After. Waco, TX: Word Books, 1987. 680. Greinacher, Norbert, and Alois Muller, eds. The Experience of Dying. New York: Herder and Herder, 1974. 681. Griffith, William H. More Than a Parting Prayer: Lessons in Caregiving for the Dying. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2004. Believing that dying patients are the best teachers, Griffith explores the issues of death and dying in the context of faith. He uses personal experiences as well as the stories of the dying and their families to put these issues in context. He served as an on-call chaplain with the Hospice of the Valley in Phoenix, Arizona, and is currently chaplain for the Hospice of South Central Indiana. Griffith discusses denial of death, hope, emotional and spiritual pain, honoring the care receiver’s faith, caring for the dying agnostic, fear of grieving alone, and child death. A lengthy appendix includes thought-provoking questions from each chapter in the book. 682. Grof, Stanislav. Dimensions of Dying and Rebirth. Virginia Beach, VA: ARE Press, 1977.

98

Chapter 11

683. Grof, Stanislav, and Christina Grof. Beyond Death: The Gates of Consciousness. New York: Thames & Hudson, 1980. 684. Grollman, Earl A. In Sickness and in Health: How to Cope When Your Loved One Is Ill. Boston: Beacon Press, 1987. Grollman, noted author and thanatologist, presents poetic meditations for family members and loved ones of those who are terminally ill. Meditations are divided by subject area. 685. Gruman, Gerald J. A History of Ideas about the Prolongation of Life. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1966. 686. Guinness, Howard Wyndham. The Last Enemy: Living with Terminal Illness. London: Church Pastoral Aid Society, 1974. 687. Hablitzel, William E. Dying Was the Best Thing That Ever Happened to Me: Stories of Healing and Wisdom along Life’s Journey. Austin, TX: Sunshine Ridge Publishing/Greenleaf Book Group, 2006. With moving stories from his professional life as a physician, Hablitzel offers inspiring lessons on living and dying. The common theme in the stories is the timelessness of the moment. 688. Hagglund, Tor-Bjorn. Dying: A Psychoanalytic Study with Special Reference to Individual Creativity and Defensive Organization. New York: International Universities Press, 1978. Hagglund focuses on the overwhelming feeling of helplessness experienced by the dying as well as two main problems faced by both the person dying and their loved ones. He defines these problems as the preoccupation with the inconceivable nature of dying and the defense against the anxiety of not understanding. His chapters explore the psychodynamics of the dying patient, children’s reactions to death, psychotherapy of dying adult patients, and a psychoanalytic study of narcissism, phallic defense, and creativity in mourning. Includes references and an index. 689. Hampe, Johann Christoph. To Die Is to Gain: The Experience of One’s Own Death. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1979. 690. Hampton, C. Transition Called Death. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House, 1979. 691. Hanlan, Archie J. Autobiography of Dying. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1979. 692. Hardy, Mark A., Lillian G. Kutscher, Gerald B. Appel, John M. Kiernan, Austin H. Kutscher, Martha L. Orr, Carole Torres, and Lissa Parsonnet. Positive Approaches to Living with End Stage Renal Disease: Psychosocial and Thanatologic Aspects. New York: Praeger, 1986.

Dying

99

693. Harmon, Louise. Fragments on the Deathwatch. Boston: Beacon Press, 1998. Harmon, a professor of law, emphasizes the needs of those caring for the dying and makes her case with several legal arguments. The text is filled with footnotes, quotations, poems, and other tidbits that almost equal the volume of the text itself. Harmon describes her agonizing experience on the deathwatch with her father. Includes thirty-three pages of additional notes at the end of the book. 694. Harper, George Lea. Living with Dying: Finding Meaning in Chronic Illness. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1992. 695. Harrold, Joan K., and Joanne Lynn. A Good Dying: Shaping Health Care for the Last Months of Life. New York: Haworth Press, 1998. 696. Harwell, Amy. Ready to Live, Prepared to Die: A Provocative Guide to the Rest of Your Life. Wheaton, IL: Harold Shaw Publishers, 1995. 697. Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker, and James O. Ballard. Time to Go: Three Plays on Death and Dying, with Commentary on End-of-Life Issues. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1995. 698. Hennezel, Marie de. Intimate Death: How the Dying Teach Us How to Live. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1997. Translated by Carol Brown Janeway. 699. Herhold, Robert M. Learning to Die, Learning to Live. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1976. 700. Hill, Nancy. Living with Terminal Illness. St. Louis: Concordia Publishing House, 1995. 701. Hill, T. Patrick, and David A. Shirley. A Good Death: Taking More Control at the End of Your Life. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1992. Copyright by Choice in Dying, Inc., The National Council for the Right to Die. “A Merloyd Lawrence book.” Hill, director of education at Choice in Dying, and Shirley, former associate director of education at Choice in Dying, present a guidebook for physicians, clergy, attorneys, nurses, and others on individual freedom and compassionate care at the end of life. Strong advocates for living wills and heath care proxies, the authors use case histories to discuss a variety of topics, including artificial nutrition, respirators, and balancing pain relief with the desire to be lucid and able to communicate. They also explore the implications of suicide, assisted suicide, and withdrawal of life support. Right-to-die matters are discussed in the context of major religious traditions. Includes notes, a list of titles for further reading, a list of organizations, a sample will and power of attorney, an appendix featuring state laws governing living wills/declarations and appointment of a health care agent, information about the authors, and an index. Preface by Fenella Rouse, executive director, Choice in Dying, Inc.

100

Chapter 11

702. Hinton, John M. Dying. Baltimore, MD: Penguin Books, 1967. Second edition published in 1972. 703. Horn, Robert C., and C. Everett Koop. How Will They Know If I’m Dead?: Transcending Disability and Terminal Illness. Delray Beach, FL: GR Press/St. Lucie Press, 1997. 704. Howells, W. D., Henry James, John Bigelow, Thomas Wentworth Higginson, Henry M. Alden, William Hanna Thomson, Guglielmo Ferrero, Julia Ward Howe, and Elizabeth Stuart Phelps. In after Days: Thoughts on the Future Life. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published in 1910. 705. Hubbard, David A. Why Do I Have to Die? Glendale, CA: Regal Books, 1978. 706. Hunt, Gladys M. The Christian Way of Death. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1971. 707. Hutschnecker, Arnold A. The Will to Live. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1951. 708. Hyde, Margaret O. Meeting Death. New York: Walker Publishing Co., 1989. 709. Jacobsen, Fay W., Margaret Kindlen, and Allison Shoemark. Living through Loss: A Manual for Those Working with Issues of Terminal Illness and Bereavement. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1997. 710. Johnson, Elizabeth A. As Someone Dies: A Handbook for the Living. Santa Monica, CA: Hay House, 1987. 711. Johnson, Margaret Woods. We Lived with Dying. Waco, TX: Word Books, 1975. 712. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Caring Relationships: The Dying and the Bereaved. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1980. Part of the Perspectives on Death and Dying series, volume 2. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in Human Experience. In this book, Kalish points out the growth in literature on death and dying in recent years and the challenges of “putting this new knowledge and awareness into action in institutional settings.” Contributors’ articles focus on standards of care for the terminally ill, dying versus well-being, the social theory of dying, family communication during a child’s fatal illness, dying and dignity, psychosocial aspects of terminal care, anticipatory grief, reactions of family systems to sudden and unexpected death, SIDS, nursing care of the terminal patient, relationship to death as a source of stress for nurses, medical staff coping mechanisms for death, and attitudes of physicians on disclosing information to and maintaining life for terminal patients. Includes references but no index.

Dying

101

713. ———, ed. The Final Transition. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1984. 714. Kaplan, Louise J. No Voice Is Ever Wholly Lost. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1995. 715. Karnes, Barbara. Gone from My Sight: The Dying Experience. Depoe Bay, OR: Barbara Karnes Publishing, 1986. 716. Kaufman, Sharon R. And a Time to Die: How American Hospitals Shape the End of Life. New York: Scribner, 2005. Kaufman, a medical anthropologist, explores the often unacknowledged tension between medical efforts to extend life and the desire to allow patients to “let go.” Her book insightfully notes that, “In the past thirty years, the advent of medical technology capable of sustaining life without restoring health, the expectation that a critically ill person need not die, and the conviction that medicine should routinely thwart death have significantly changed where, when, and how Americans die and has put us all in the position of doing something about death.” She focuses her analysis on the hospital, where so many deaths occur and where these tensions are always present. Her text discusses hospital culture, heroic intervention, the paradox of resuscitation, financial considerations in medical treatment, and thoughts on the terms suffering, dignity, and quality of life. Two appendixes document the author’s research and provide comments on diversity’s effects on these issues. Includes notes, an extensive bibliography, and an index. 717. Kearney, Michael. A Place of Healing: Working with Suffering in Living and Dying. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. 718.

Keleman, Stanley. Living Your Dying. New York: Random House, 1975.

719. Kellehear, Allan. Dying of Cancer: The Final Year of Life. New York: Harwood Academic Publishers, 1990. This book examines the ways in which the dying organize and choose to live their remaining time and social experiences. Kellehear, a sociology professor at La Trobe University in Melbourne, Australia, discusses preparing for death; physical and social adjustments; saying goodbye; alternative therapies; and communicating with physicians, clergy, and loved ones. He uses interviews with 100 terminally ill cancer patients who expect to live less than one year. The text also explores death attitudes, consumerism, and changing patterns of morbidity and mortality. Includes a bibliography, appendixes with research details, and an index. 720. Kennedy, Patricia H. Dying at Home with Cancer. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1982. 721. Kessler, David. The Needs of the Dying: A Guide for Bringing Hope, Comfort, and Love to Life’s Final Chapter. New York: Quill, 2000.

102

Chapter 11

722. ———. The Rights of the Dying: A Companion for Life’s Final Moments. New York: HarperCollins, 1997. 723. Kolf, June Cerza. Comfort and Care in a Final Illness: Support for the Patient and Caregiver. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1999. Experienced in hospice care, Kolf provides guidance and support for both the patient and caregiver with helpful commentary on medical care, hospital versus homecare decisions, legal and financial issues, saying goodbye, and adjusting emotionally. She also addresses the need for open and honest communication, listening, physical support, alleviation from caregiver burnout, and making final arrangements. The text is interspersed with effective graphics featuring helpful tips, vignettes, statistics, and important highlights from the text. Includes suggestions for further reading; a list of periodical, pamphlet, and online resources; a section on helpful organizations arranged by subject, and an index. 724. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, and Stephen Sorenson. Encounter with Terminal Illness. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1980. Also cited as Terminal Illness. 725. Kothari, M. L., and L. A. Mehta. Death, a New Perspective on the Phenomena of Disease and Dying. New York: M. Boyars, 1986. Distributed by Scribner. 726. Kramp, Erin Tierney, Douglas H. Kramp, and Emily P. McKhann. Living with the End in Mind: A Practical Checklist for Living Life to the Fullest by Embracing Your Mortality. New York: Three Rivers Press, 1998. 727. Krant, Melvin J. Dying and Dignity: The Meaning and Control of a Personal Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1974. A physician who has cared for cancer patients for many years, Krant attempts to bring together thoughts, ideas, theories, and concepts that relate to “pertinent psychological and sociologic information regarding the individual, his family, and the medical care system as they interrelate around the process of fatal illness and experience of dying.” His chapters focus on putting dying into context for the present time, fears surrounding death, indignities of dying, fatal illness and the physician, peaceful death through euthanasia, families of the dying, and his own proposals for education about death for different audiences. Includes references but no index. 728. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. AIDS: The Ultimate Challenge. New York: Macmillan, 1987. 729. ———. To Live Until We Say Goodbye. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1978. Features photographs by Mal Warshaw. Published by Simon & Schuster as a Touchstone edition in 1997. A powerful, moving book, Kübler-Ross shares stories of the dying as she assists them with acceptance of death. Warshaw’s photographs bring Kübler-Ross’s

Dying

103

famous work with the dying to life, giving readers an intimate, touching view of the terminally ill. 730. ———. The Wheel of Life: A Memoir of Living and Dying. New York: Touchstone, 1998. 731. Kurtzman, J., and P. Gordon. No More Dying. Los Angeles: Jeremy P. Tarcher, Inc., 1976. 732. Lamerton, Richard. Care of the Dying. Westport, CT: Technomic Publishing, 1976. Published by Priory Press, London, in 1973. 733. Levine, Stephen. Healing into Life and Death. Garden City, NJ: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1987. 734. ———. Who Dies?: An Investigation of Conscious Living and Conscious Dying. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1982. Reprinted in 1989. 735. ———. A Year to Live: How to Live This Year as If It Were Your Last. New York: Belltower Publishing, 1998. 736. Lifton, Robert J., and Eric Olson. Living and Dying. New York: Praeger, 1974. Published by Bantam, New York, in 1975. 737. Lofland, Lyn H. The Craft of Dying: The Modern Face of Death. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, 1978. In light of the new attitudes adopted toward death and dying during the 1970s, Lofland, associate professor of sociology, explores “modern dying” with chapters on the prolongation, bureaucratization, and secularization of dying; issues surrounding beliefs about death and dying, social organization, and the culture of medical practice; the “happy death movement,” emerging ideologies, and communication about death. Includes a bibliography. 738. Longacre, Christine. Facing Death and Finding Hope: A Guide to the Emotional and Spiritual Care of the Dying. New York: Doubleday, 1997. 739. Lynn, Joanne, and Joan Harrold. Handbook for Mortals: Guidance for People Facing Serious Illness. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999. A publication of the Center to Improve Care of the Dying at George Washington University. Research for the book funded by the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation of New York City. Lynn and Harrold, both physicians, offer a guidebook with practical, comforting information for both the dying and those caring for them. Topics include coping with uncertainty, orchestrating support from teams of caregivers, communicating about death, dying and terminal care with doctors, managing symptoms, pain management, what to expect as various diseases progress, making decisions about foregoing medical treatment, funeral planning, childhood death, and grief and bereavement. Extremely well organized, this book contains numerous

104

Chapter 11

organizational resources, reading lists, illustrations, quotes, acknowledgment notes, and an index. Book sales support Americans for Better Care of the Dying. Foreword by Rosalynn Carter. 740. Madden, Ed. Carpe Diem: Enjoying Every Day with a Terminal Illness. Boston: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 1993. Also cited as being published by the Boston Neighborhood News, Dorchester, MA. 741. Magee, Bryan. Facing Death. London: William Kimber & Co., Ltd., 1977. 742. Martin, Jenny A. The Next Step Forward: Music Therapy with the Terminally Ill. Proceedings from a Symposium for Music Therapists Working in Palliative Care. Bronx, NY: Calvary Hospital, 1989. 743. Martocchio, Benita C. Living While Dying. Bowie, MD: Robert J. Brady Publishers, 1982. Intended for professionals involved in care for the dying, this book focuses on the “social and psychological processes at work among people who are living while dying and those persons interacting with them.” Martocchio has conducted a study of dying patients that centers on human behavior in interaction with the environment during the process of dying. She discusses death as a social problem in the twentieth century, theoretical and sensitizing concepts, her research strategy, and the realities of the dying. The author provides a postscript that surfaces her challenges with working on such a difficult subject and the emotional impact it has. Includes a short list of references, an appendix with nursing care plans, and an index. 744. McNees, Pat. Dying: A Book of Comfort. New York: Warner Books, 1996. 745. Meagher, David K., and R. Debra Shapiro. Death, the Experience. Minneapolis, MN: Burgess Publishing, 1984. 746. Mennes, Marya. Last Rights: A Case for the Good Death. New York: William Morrow, 1974. 747. Metchnikoff, Elie. The Prolongation of Life: Optimistic Studies. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1908. 748. Meyer, Charles. Surviving Death: A Practical Guide to Caring for the Dying and Bereaved. Mystic, CT: Twenty-Third Publications, 1991. Originally published in1988. Also cited as Surviving Death: For Those Caring for the Dying and the Bereaved. 749. Moller, David Wendell. Life’s End: Technocratic Dying in an Age of Spiritual Yearning. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000.

Dying

105

750. ———. On Death without Dignity: The Human Impact of Technological Dying. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1990. Part of the Perspectives on Death and Dying series, Richard A. Kalish, editor. Noting that symbols of dying in U.S. culture are permeated by catastrophic and threatening images, Moller argues that much is to be learned about human responses to mortality by studying the dying and related cultural symbols. He also points out that humanity’s response to suffering, tragedy, and death is “an indispensable measure of the human condition.” Moller addresses varying interpretations of the meaning of death, denial of death, the technocratic physician and technological medicine, dying and loss of fellowship, the social organization of the hospital, patient alienation in hospital environments, the stigma associated with dying, societal forces on the process of dying, and the social isolation of dying. Includes references. 751.

Morduch, Anna. No Screen for the Dying. London: Regency Press, 1964.

752. Mundy, Jon. Learning to Die. Blauvelt, NY: Freedeeds Association, 1976. 753. Nairn, Rob. Living, Dreaming, Dying: Practical Wisdom from the Tibetan Book of the Dead. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 2004. Distributed by Random House. 754. Neale, Robert E. The Art of Dying. New York: Harper & Row, 1973. Neale offers several challenging approaches to considering our own death with the goal of understanding death and dying as a natural part of life and growing from it. 755. Neuhaus, Richard John. As I Lay Dying: Meditations upon Returning. New York: Basic Books, 2002. A prolific writer and religion scholar, Neuhaus is editor of First Things, a publication of the Institute on Religion and Public Life. He is also the organization’s president. His self-help book is a candid collection of meditations in which he muses on the definition of a good death and other common questions about death and dying. 756. Nuland, Sherwin B. How We Die: Reflections on Life’s Final Chapter. New York: Knopf, 1994. Published by Vintage Books, New York, in 1995. 757. Payne, Sheila, and Caroline Ellis-Hill. Chronic and Terminal Illness: New Perspectives on Caring and Carers. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001. 758. Peachey, Mark. Facing Terminal Illness. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1981. Described by Richard Showalter in the foreword as a confession of faith, this is the story of the executive secretary of the Rosedale Mennonite Missions and

106

Chapter 11

his battle with cancer. This 72-page book contains several photos of the author before and during his illness. 759. Plouffe, Rhea Therese. Terminal Illness and the Experience of God: A Qualitative Study of the Transitional Space. Ottawa: National Library of Canada/ Bibliotheque Nationale du Canada, 2001. 760. Poss, Sylvia. Toward Death with Dignity: Caring for Dying People. Boston: Allen & Unwin, 1981. 761. Preston, S. H., Nathan Keyfitz, and Robert Schoen. Causes of Death. New York: Seminar Press, 1972. 762. Priest, Mary Woodward. Diary of Courage: Coping with Life-Threatening Illness. San Francisco, CA: Strawberry Hill Press, 1990. 763. Prunkl, Peter R., and Rebecca L. Berry. Death Week: Exploring the Dying Process. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1989. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 764. Quicksall, Larry E. We Need to Talk: A Practical Guide for Those Facing Terminal Illness. Effingham, IL: FamilyGrowth Publications, 2002. This book is an 82-page handbook offering common sense guidance to those facing death through terminal illness. 765. Quill, Timothy E. A Midwife through the Dying Process: Stories of Healing and Hard Choices at the End of Life. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. 766. Rasberry, Salli. The Art of Dying: Honoring and Celebrating Life’s Passages. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 2001. 767. Reiffel, James, and Lillian G. Kutscher. Psychosocial Aspects of Cardiovascular Disease: The Life-Threatened Patient, the Family, and the Staff. New York: Columbia University Press, 1980. 768. Rinpoche, Sogyal, Patrick Gaffney, and Andrew Harvey. The Tibetan Book of Living and Dying. New York: HarperCollins, 1994. 769. Robbins, Joy, and Janet Moscrop. Caring for the Dying Patient and the Family. New York: Chapman & Hall, 1995. 770. Rock, Lois, and Sheila Moxley. When Goodbye Is Forever. Intercourse, PA: Good Books, 2004. 771. Rodman, F. Robert. Not Dying. New York: Random House, 1977. Subtitle appears on the cover as A Psychoanalyst’s Memoir of His Wife’s Death. Assistant clinical professor of psychology at the University of California, Los Angeles, and a member of the faculty at the Los Angeles Psychoanalytic Institute, Rodman emphasizes the importance of respecting each person’s unique approach

Dying

107

to dying and death. This view comes from his own tragic experience with his wife’s death and denial of her prognosis. He explores feelings of self-hatred, selfreproach, self-pity, guilt, and anger. 772.

Rollin, Betty. Last Wish. New York: Public Affairs Publishing, 1998.

773. Rosen, Elliott J. Families Facing Death: Family Dynamics of Terminal Illness. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1990. A family therapist, Rosen is psychological consultant to the Jansen Memorial Hospice in Tuckahoe, New York. He writes about the disruption of the family system by terminal illness. His first chapters give definitions of the family and discuss the family as a system. Discussing how families psychologically prepare for death, Rosen offers tasks for the grieving family to perform to deal with anticipatory grief and looks at socially unsanctioned grief, the emotional shock wave of death, and anticipated death versus sudden death. His suggestions include the use of literary and cinematic materials, healing through rituals, and coaching. A final chapter examines ethnic perspectives on death and gender roles. Appendixes include an annotated filmography and a suggested reading list. 774. Rosenfeld, Stephen S. The Time of Their Dying. New York: W. W. Norton, 1977. Rosenfeld, an editorial writer and columnist for the Washington Post, writes about the process of dying, dealing with the death of both parents within a short time frame, and coming to terms with mortality and the meaning of death and life. He draws on his own painful experience of losing both parents to cancer. 775.

Rowland, M. How to Die. Hollywood, CA: N.p., 1942.

776. Ryerson, Marjorie. Companions for the Passage: Stories of the Intimate Privilege of Accompanying the Dying. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 2005. 777. Ryndes, True, and Susan Bruno. A Pathway for Patients and Families Facing Terminal Illness. Arlington, VA: The Organization, 1997. 778. Sauer, Herbert I. Geographic Patterns in the Risk of Dying and Associated Factors, United States, 1968–1972. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Office of Health Research, Statistics, and Technology, National Center for Health Statistics, 1980. 779. Saunders, Cicely M., and Mary Baines. Living with Dying: The Management of Terminal Disease. New York: Oxford University Press, 1989. Originally published in 1983. Founder of St. Christopher’s Hospice in 1967, and the hospice movement itself, Saunders, along with coauthor Baines, presents a 74-page volume on clinical treatments for the terminally ill. Chapters include information on terminal pain, the use of analgesics for terminal pain, adjuvant therapy in pain control, the control

108

Chapter 11

of symptoms other than pain, and other components of “total pain.” Other topics covered are severe pain, oral narcotics, opiates, nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs, antibiotics, antispasmodic drugs, anorexia, dry or painful mouth, hiccough, incontinence, insomnia, anxiety, depression, confusion, terminal restlessness, convulsions, and mental pain. Includes charts, a patient’s drawing, references, and an index. 780. Schweibert, Pat, and Paul Kirk. When Hello Means Goodbye. Portland, OR: University of Oregon Health Sciences Center, 1981. 781. Scrimgeour, Elizabeth. Honouring Sacred Spaces: Voicing Stories of Terminal Illness. Pretoria: University of South Africa, 2002. 782. Seeland, Irene B. The Final 48 Hours: Observations on the Last Days of Life. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1991. 783.

Segerberg, Osborn. Living with Death. New York: Dutton, 1976.

784. Seligman, Martin. Helplessness: On Depression, Development, and Death. San Francisco, CA: W. H. Freeman, 1975. Seligman presents a thorough analysis of helplessness as a component of depression, terminal illness, and coping with death. 785. Shane, Thomas W. When Life Meets Death: Stories of Death and Dying, Truth and Courage. New York: Haworth Press, 1998. 786. Shepard, Martin. Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping. Sag Harbor, NY: Permanent Press, 2000. Shepard presents an uplifting, gentle exploration of the process of dying and a guidebook for helping the dying and grieving. The text includes meditations for the dying and grieving, quotes on death and dying, and epitaphs. Also incorporated are poignant sketches by artist and illustrator Mac Shepard, who died in 1972. Shepard served as chief psychiatric resident at Mount Sinai Hospital in New York. 787.

Shuman, Ron. Day by Day. Oakland, CA: Scrimshaw Press, 1977.

788. Singh, Kathleen Dowling. The Grace in Dying: How We Are Transformed Spiritually as We Die. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1998. 789. Smith, Rodney. Lessons from the Dying. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 1998. 790. Smith, Walter J. Dying in the Human Life Cycle: Psychological, Biomedical, and Social Perspectives. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1985. Smith discusses the extensive variety of reactions to death and dying throughout the life cycle. He begins with stillbirth and perinatal death and continues on to the elderly and death. Among the topics he explores are effective management

Dying

109

of grieving parents, photographing the deceased infant, replacement pregnancy, sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS), psychological issues for families of SIDS victims, childhood bereavement, analytical theories of childhood mourning, children’s conceptual awareness of death, childhood and adolescent cancer, etiology of adolescent suicide, catastrophic life-threatening events in adulthood, conjugal bereavement, anticipatory grief, psychiatric morbidity during bereavement, clinical management of the bereaved, communication about death, the patient’s desire to know and the physician’s willingness to tell, palliative versus curative care, polypharmacology of hospice care, bereavement in hospice settings, management of terminal disease, terminal drop theory, the disengagement theory in the context of the elderly, right-to-die issues, active and passive euthanasia, and caring for the dying older person. Includes name and subject indexes as well as bibliographies for each chapter, though each is listed at the end of the book. 791. Spilling, Roy. Terminal Care at Home. New York: Oxford University Press, 1986. Part of the Oxford General Practice Series, volume 10. Spilling offers a guide to improving care of the terminally ill at home and for ensuring that more people are able to make this choice. The contributors discuss issues of communication, tall about inadequate support services for home care, and offer tips to family members for controlling symptoms at home. 792. Stanford, Gene, and Deborah Perry. Death out of the Closet: A Curriculum Guide to Living with Dying. New York: Bantam Books, 1976. 793. Starck, Peter. Last Breath: Cautionary Tales from the Limits of Human Endurance. New York: Ballantine Books, 2001. 794. Staton, Jana, Roger Shuy, and Ira Byock. A Few Months to Live: Different Paths to Life’s End. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press, 2001. The authors present nine terminally ill patients in Missoula, Montana, who are suffering from cancer, heart disease, and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Their ages, diagnoses, and ethnicities vary. The book’s substance is how these patients think and talk about their eventual death, coping with pain, and finding meaning in their lives and situation. The book also focuses on the experience of the caregivers and other support systems that are in place. Other topics discussed include communicating about death and dying, end-of-life decision making, lack of support for caregivers, personal growth, the final stages of life, and memorials at the end of life. An introductory chapter contains detailed profiles of the study participants. Includes a list of references, professional backgrounds of the contributors, and an appendix describing the Missoula Demonstration Project’s baseline research and methodology. 795. Straub, Sandra Helene. Death without Notice. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.

110

Chapter 11

796. Strauss, Anselm L. Chronic Illness and the Quality of Life. St. Louis: C. V. Mosby, 1975. Revised second edition published in 1984. 797. Suszycki, Lee H. Social Work and Terminal Care. New York: Praeger, 1984. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. 798. Tallmer, Margot, ed. Sexuality and Life-Threatening Illness. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. A Foundation of Thanatology text. 799. Thompson, Douglas K. A Refuge from the Storm: A Shelter from the Storm of Caring for a Loved One with a Terminal Illness. Fairfax, VA: Xulon Press, 2003. 800. Tigges, Kent Nelson, and William Matthew Marcil. Terminal and LifeThreatening Illness: An Occupational Behavior Perspective. Thorofare, NJ: Slack, 1988. 801. Twycross, Robert G. The Dying Patient. London: Christian Medical Fellowship, 1975. A Christian Medical Fellowship topic book. 802. United States Congress, Office of Technology Assessment. Institutional Protocols for Decisions about Life-Sustaining Treatments: Special Report. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988. 803. Vaux, Kenneth L., and Sara Anson Vaux. Dying Well. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1996. 804. Vogt, Christopher P. Patience, Compassion, Hope, and the Christian Art of Dying Well. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2004. A Sheed & Ward book. Vogt explores the concept of dying well in the Christian tradition, including the ars moriendi tradition of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. Includes a bibliography. 805. Wahl, Charles W., Robert C. Leslie, and Nathalie E. Kennedy. Helping the Dying Patient and His Family. New York: National Association of Social Workers, 1960. 806. Walker, Alice. To Hell with Dying. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1988. Illustrated by Catherine Deeter. 807.

Wanderer, Zev. Letting Go. New York: Warner Books, 1978.

808. Wass, Hannelore, Felix M. Berardo, and Robert A. Neimeyer. Dying: Facing the Facts. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1995. Originally published by Hemisphere Publishing/Harper & Row, Washington, DC, in 1979, and also by McGraw-Hill, New York, in 1979. Originally part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.

Dying

111

809. Waterhouse, Michael. Staying Close: A Positive Approach to Dying and Bereavement. London: Constable, 2003. Motivated by his own experience with his mother’s debilitating illness and eventual death, Waterhouse’s goal for the book is to initiate discussion on a topic he considers taboo. He explores the changing views of the dying process and new approaches to bereavement and funerals. Includes a brief list of recommended titles and a list of useful contacts, mostly in London. 810. Watson, David. Fear No Evil: One Man Deals with Terminal Illness. Wheaton, IL: H. Shaw Publishers, 1984. 811.

Watts, Alan W. Death. Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1975.

812. Weeks, O. Duane, and Catherine Johnson. When All the Friends Have Gone: A Guide for Aftercare Providers. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 813. Weenolsen, Patricia. The Art of Dying: How to Leave This World with Dignity and Grace, at Peace with Yourself and Your Loved Ones. New York: St. Martin’s Griffin, 1996. Also published and cited with the title The Art of Dying: The Only Book for Persons Facing Their Own Death. Using case histories, exercises, and her own gently delivered advice, Weenolsen presents a compassionate guidebook to the “good death.” A psychologist, she helps the dying and their loved ones understand the process with chapters on preparing for death, telling others that a loved one has died, how to discuss death with young children, legal and financial issues, medical concerns, psychospiritual guidance, coping positively with daily life, the stigma associated with disability and disfigurement, how to exert power over pain, support groups, the emotional roller coaster, retaining identity, aid-in-dying, forgiveness, creating meaning from despair, rituals and myths for the end of life, and specifics on what it is like to die. Includes a subject bibliography. 814. Weingarten, Violet. Intimations of Mortality. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1978. Weingarten provides a novelist’s account of her experiences as a cancer patient. The memoir includes criticisms of books and information about death. 815. Wheeler, David R. Journey to the Other Side. New York: Ace Books, 1976. Includes an introduction by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross. 816. Winter, Arthur. Moment of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1969. 817. Worth, Richard. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross: Encountering Death and Dying. Philadelphia: Chelsea House Publishers. Part of the Women in Medicine series.

112

Chapter 11

Appropriate for younger audiences, this short biography of Elisabeth KüblerRoss includes many personal stories, family photographs, and vignettes of her work with dying patients. Includes a timeline of her life and accomplishments, a short bibliography, and a thorough index. 818. Zorza, Victor, and Rosemary Zorza. A Way to Die. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1980.

12 Eschatology

819. Adams, Jay Edward. Realized Millennialism: A Study in Biblical Eschatology. St. Louis: Adams, 1959. Later editions cited with the titles I Will Tell Thee the Mystery and The Time Is at Hand. 820. Arendzen, John Peter. What Becomes of the Dead?: A Study of Eschatology. 2nd ed. New York: Sheed & Ward, 1951. 821. Brandon, Samuel G. Judgment of the Dead: Life after Death in Major Religions. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1969. 822. Dehejia, Vidya. Living and Dying: An Inquiry into the Enigma of Death and Afterlife. Chicago: Advent Books, 1979. Originally published by Vikha in New Delhi in 1979. 823. Doss, Richard W. The Last Enemy: A Christian Understanding of Death. New York: Harper & Row, 1974. Also cited as The Last Enemy: A Theology of Death. This book is an examination of Christian attitudes and theology surrounding death. 824. Ducasse, Curt John. A Critical Examination of the Belief in a Life after Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1962. 825. Eliade, Mircea. Death, Afterlife, and Eschatology. New York: Harper & Row, 1967. Reprinted in 1974. 826.

———. The Myth of Eternal Return. New York: Pantheon Books, 1954.

113

114

Chapter 12

827. Godin, Andre, ed. Death and Presence: Studies in the Psychology of Religion. Brussels, Belgium: Lumen Vitae Press, 1972. Also cited as Death and Presence: The Psychology of Death and the Afterlife. 828. Greely, Andrew M. Death and Beyond. Chicago: Thomas More Press, 1976. 829. Guardini, Romano. The Last Things Concerning Death, Purification after Death, Resurrection. New York: Pantheon Books, 1954. Translated by Charlotte E. Forsyth and Grace B. Branham. 830. Hanley, E. Life after Death. New York: Norton Publishers, Leisure Books, 1977. 831. Henderson, Joseph L., and Maud Oakes. Wisdom of the Serpent: The Myths of Death, Rebirth, Resurrection. New York: Macmillan, 1971. 832. Hick, John H. Death and Eternal Life. New York: Harper & Row, 1976. Providing a thorough survey and analysis of the afterlife, Hick’s work examines religious traditions and philosophical theories to firmly conclude that there is the existence of life beyond death. Hick suggests that the best hypothesis is a blending of Eastern and Western approaches to the subject. The text explores the concepts of global theology, reincarnation, purgatory, humanism, parapsychology, epiphenomenalism, universalism, karma and vedantic philosophies, rebirth in the Buddhist tradition, pareschatology, nirvana, spiritualism, and Christian mysticism. Includes a bibliography and an index. 833.

Kantonen, T. A. Life after Death. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1962.

834. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Life after Death. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 1991. In this 96-page paperback, the acclaimed thanatologist discusses her thoughts and feelings on the afterlife. Includes four essays: “Living and Dying”; “There Is No Death”; Life, Death, and Life after Death”; and “Death of a Parent.” 835. Mayer, Gladys. Behind the Veils of Death and Sleep. New York: Krishna Press, 1973. Also published by New Knowledge Books, East Grinstead, Sussex, England. In this 44-page paperback booklet, Mayer focuses on death and resurrection. She muses on existing knowledge about life beyond death, spiritual knowledge versus knowledge one looks for, the loss of imagination in the development of intellect, definitions of death, and the etheric body. Includes discussions of purgatory, kama loca, and the Sun Sphere. 836. Moltmann, Jurgen. Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implications of a Christian Eschatology. New York: Harper & Row, 1967. First English edition translated by James W. Leitch and published by SCM Press, London, in 1967.

Eschatology

115

837. Shatte, Howard Alexander. Time and Its End: A Comparative Existential Interpretation of Time and Eschatology. New York: Vantage Press, 1962. 838. Simpson, Michael. Death and Eternal Life. Notre Dame, IN: Fides Publishers, 1971. 839. Strothmann, Maynard Herman. Eschatology and the Mission of Christianity. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms, 1956. Publication No. 16,825. 840. Tompkins, Susan E. Is Death the End? London: Christian Education Movement, 1979. 841. Toynbee, Arnold et al. Life after Death. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1976.

13 Ethical Issues

842. Alters, Sandra. Death and Dying: Who Decides? Detroit, MI: Thomson Gale, 2005. 843. Baird, Robert M., and Stuart E. Rosenbaum. Euthanasia: The Moral Issues. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1989. 844. Battin, Margaret Pabst. Ending Life: Ethics and the Way We Die. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005. Intended as a sequel to Battin’s The Least Worst Death: Essays in Bioethics on the End of Life, this work explores the rapidly changing landscape of bioethics in the context of death and dying issues. This collection of essays examines such expected end-of-life issues as suicide in old age, death with dignity, and hospice but also topics that have received less treatment in the literature, for example global justice as it relates to the supposed duty to die, genetic prognostication, serpent-handling and other religious practices that pose a death risk, and suicide bombings. She also explores the refusal of medical treatment, the ethical aspects of increased life span, and terminal procedure. An interesting chapter is incorporated on the same-day deaths of John Adams and Thomas Jefferson (July 4, 1826) and possible implications for bioethics. Includes a thorough index and numerous references. Battin is a noted bioethicist and distinguished professor of philosophy and adjunct professor of internal medicine in the Division of Medical Ethics at the University of Utah. 845. ———. The Least Worst Death: Essays in Bioethics on the End of Life. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994. Battin’s text focuses on end-of-life issues, specifically withdrawing or withholding care. She explores the “duty to die” concept and how other countries and cultures address these issues sociologically. This book is an excellent review of 116

Ethical Issues

117

the politics of dying and the cultural issues surrounding death. Battin is professor of philosophy and adjunct professor of internal medicine at the University of Utah’s Division of Medical Ethics. 846. Bayles, Michael D. Medical Treatment of the Dying: Moral Issues. Cambridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1978. 847. Beauchamp, Tom L., and Seymour Perlin, eds. Ethical Issues in Death and Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978. Published by Prentice-Hall, Saddle River, NJ, in 1996, with Robert M. Veach as coauthor. Includes Peter M. Black’s “Definitions of Brain Death.” 848. Bender, David L., and Richard Hagen. Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints. St. Paul, MN: Greenhaven Press, 1985. Published in 1974 and 1981 as Problems of Death: Opposing Viewpoints. William Dudley was the book editor for the 1992 edition. This book is a collection of articles on controversial issues surrounding death. It is ideal for high school and college audiences. Major areas covered are euthanasia, abortion, suicide, and the funeral industry. Articles presented are from both individuals and organizations. Includes bibliographies of periodical articles for each subject, an appendix of organizations, and discussion activities. Bender is the editor of the Opposing Viewpoints series and has authored most of the titles. 849. Berger, Arthur S. Dying and Death in Law and Medicine: A Forensic Primer for Health and Legal Professionals. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1993. Berger reviews legal and medical issues as well as important decisions that come before and after death. He examines right-to-die issues, advanced directives, defining and determining death, anatomical gifts, and sources of legal information along with appropriate forms. Appendixes include death-related statutes and common law doctrines and a guide to the law library, which also serves as a helpful glossary. A bibliography and table of cases are incorporated. Medical foreword by David V. Schapira and legal foreword by Judge Raphael Steinhardt. Berger is director of the International Institute for the Study of Death and vice president of cross-cultural affairs for the Foundation of Thanatology at the Columbia-Presbyterian Medical Center in New York City. 850. Brodie, Howard. Ethical Decisions in Medicine. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1976. 851. Brown, Judy. The Choice: Seasons of Loss and Renewal after a Father’s Decision to Die. Berkeley, CA: Conari Press, 1995. This book is an exploration of family relationships when someone is terminally ill and focusing on decisions to continue treatment. The death of Brown’s father, Stanley Ball, was a suicide assisted by Dr. Jack Kevorkian, the pathologist in Michigan often associated with the subject of assisted suicide. Ball was Kevorkian’s tenth assisted suicide. Includes an extensive bibliography.

118

Chapter 13

852. Cutler, Donald R. Updating Life and Death: Essays in Ethics and Medicine. Boston: Beacon Press, 1969. 853. Dodder, Clyde, and Barbara Dodder, eds. Suicide. Boston: Beacon Press, 1970. 854. Doka, Kenneth J., and Bruce Jennings. Ethical Dilemmas at the End of Life. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2005. 855. Dyck, Arthur J. Life’s Worth: The Case against Assisted Suicide. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 2002. 856. Freeman, Eugene. Bioethical Problems: Death and Social Responsibility. LaSalle, IL: Open Court Publishing, 1978. 857. Gervais, Karen Grandstrand. Redefining Death. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1986. Gervais, associate professor of philosophy at Illinois Wesleyan University, makes the point that the “morally relevant notion of human life necessarily involves existence as a person and that such an existence is present only when the brain allows for the possibility of consciousness.” She uses this theory to suggest that people who are demonstrably in persistent vegetative states are clearly dead in the same manner that brain-dead patients are. Gervais advocates for a public policy that defines death as the “permanent cessation of consciousness,” still allowing for patients and their families to choose something less for their own treatment. In the book, she discusses the conceptual problems with death, definitions of death, and an analysis of the Uniform Declaration of Death Act. Includes extensive notes and references. 858. Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, Symposium No. 12. The Right to Die: Decision and Decision Makers. New York: Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, 1973. This book is a collection of writings on the debate over the right to die and euthanasia. 859. Guroian, Vigen. Life’s Living toward Dying: A Theological and Medical– Ethical Study. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1996. 860. Hafen, Brent Q., and Kathryn J. Frandsen. Faces of Death: Grief, Dying, Euthanasia, Suicide. Englewood, CO: Morton Publishing, 1983. 861. Hardwig, John, and Nat Hentoff. Is There a Duty to Die?: And Other Essays in Bio-Ethics. New York: Routledge, 2000. 862. Hillyard, Daniel, and John Dombrink. Dying Right: The Death with Dignity Movement. New York: Routledge, 2001.

Ethical Issues

119

863. Horan, Dennis J., and David Mall, eds. Death, Dying, and Euthanasia. Washington, DC: University Publications of America, 1977. Also published by Alethia Books, Frederick, MD, in 1980. 864. Humber, James M., and Robert F. Almeder. Is There a Duty to Die? Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, 2000. 865. Humphry, Derek. Final Exit: The Practicalities of Self-Deliverance and Assisted Suicide for the Dying. Eugene, OR: Hemlock Society, 1991. Humphry, founder of the Hemlock Society in 1980, in California, offers a controversial book on the practicalities of euthanasia. The book jacket notes that it is “intended to be read by a mature adult who is suffering from a terminal illness and is considering the option of rational suicide if and when suffering becomes unbearable.” Topics covered include selecting a doctor, legal issues, hospice options, cyanide, self-starvation, storing drugs, insurance, autopsies, and physicianassisted dying. Also includes the grizzly chapter “Bizarre Ways to Die,” which includes sections on electrocution, drowning, shooting, ovens, car exhausts, and poisonous plants, among others. Includes a list of recommended titles and information about both the author and the society. 866. ———. Let Me Die before I Wake: Hemlock’s Book of Self-Deliverance for the Dying. New York: Dell Publishing Co., 1992. Originally published in 1981 and sold only to members of the Hemlock Society. Referred to as the “Bible of Euthanasia” on 60 Minutes, in this book Humphry tells the true stories of those who have chosen to end their lives in the face of terminal illness. Includes information about laws governing assisted suicide and euthanasia in several states. 867. Jatz, Jay, and Alexander Morgan Capron. Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides What? New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1975. 868. Kilner, John F., and Arlene B. Miller. The Center for Bioethics and Human Dignity Presents Dignity and Dying: A Christian Appraisal. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1996. 869. Kleespies, Phillip M. Life and Death Decisions: Psychological and Ethical Considerations in End-of-Life Care. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association, 2004. 870. Kung, Hans, and Walter Jens. Dying with Dignity: A Plea for Personal Responsibility. New York: Continuum, 1995. Includes contributions by Dietrich Niethammer and Albin Eser. Translated by John Bowden from the original German edition published by R. Piper GmbH & Co., Munich, in 1995. First British edition published by SCM Press, London, in 1995. Controversial German theologian Kung argues that “there should be no compulsion to die but there should be no compulsion to live either.” A Christian who

120

Chapter 13

advocates giving the dying the responsibility to make a conscientious decision about the manner and time of their death, Kung discusses the experience of dying, definitions of death, attitudes toward dying, and mercy killing. In separate sections, Jens offers several case studies on the dignity and indignity of dying. 871. Lamb, David. Death, Brain Death, and Ethics. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1985. Published by Taylor & Francis in 1988. 872. Landes, Alison, and Cornelia Blair. Death and Dying: Who Decides? Wylie, TX: Information Plus, 1996. Published with coauthors Cornelia Blair and Carol D. Foster in 1992, and with Allison Landes and Carol D. Foster in 1994. 873. Lasagna, Louis. Life, Death, and the Doctor. New York: Knopf, 1968. With chapters titled as questions, Lasagna explores the difficult issues of physician preparedness, outdated medical school teaching, life-or-death decision making, law as the possible enemy of patients, and preparing for death. Other topics unrelated to death are also covered. 874. Loewy, Erich H., and Roberta Springer Loewy. The Ethics of Terminal Care: Orchestrating the End of Life. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Press, 2000. 875. Martin, J. Paul. Symposium: Death as an Ethical Issue for the Professions. New York: Columbia University, 1975. 876. Mills, Liston O. Perspectives on Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1969. Mills offers perspectives on death from the Old Testament and New Testament as well as from church interpretation. He also includes sections on ethical issues surrounding the dying and those grieving, the psychology of death, and death as a theme in contemporary literature. 877. Misbin, Robert I. Euthanasia: The Good of the Patient, the Good of Society. Frederick, MD: University Publishing Group, 1992. 878. Morgan, John D. An Easeful Death?: Perspectives on Death, Dying, and Euthanasia. Sydney, Australia: Federation Press, 1996. 879. Nevins, M. A Bioethical Perspective on Death and Dying. Rockville, MD: Information Planning Associates, 1977. 880. Oden, Thomas C. Should Treatment Be Terminated? New York: Harper & Row, 1976. In this 93-page book, Oden explores the inherent conflict between the “sanctity of life” and the “easy death.” The introduction focuses on the dilemma of life support, and the remaining text addresses the questions of “Who decides?” and “By what guidelines?” The book closes with an essay on the respect for life and acceptance of death. Oden explores matters of bodily self-determination; heroic

Ethical Issues

121

treatment; benevolent crisis acquiescence; absolute discontinuance; and resource availability, both physical and financial. Preface by Drew Forest. 881. Petrinovich, Lewis. Living and Dying Well. New York: Plenum Press, 1996. Part of the Critical Issues in Social Justice series, Melvin J. Lerner and Riel Vermunt, editors. Published in association with the International Center for Social Justice Research, Department of Psychology, Washington University, St. Louis, MO. Petrinovich argues that developments in biotechnology and the medical sciences require a reevaluation of moral issues regarding life and death. He believes the new evaluation should be multidisciplinary and puts each of the issues in the context of social, psychological, and biological realities. Petrinovich examines genetic screening; the Human Genome Project; death and the social contract; organ transplantation; suicide; euthanasia; capital punishment; end-of-life policy issues; medical ethics and hospital review boards; general health care policy issues, including rationing; and responsibilities of physicians. Includes references and name and subject indexes. 882. Pojman, Louis P. Life and Death: Grappling with the Moral Dilemmas of Our Time. Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 1992. 883. Poor, Belinda, and Gail Poirrier. End of Life Issues. Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2001. 884. Ramsey, P. Ethics at the Edges of Life: Medical and Legal Intersections. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1978. 885. Risley, Robert L. Death with Dignity: A New Law Permitting Physician Aid-in-Dying. Eugene, OR: Hemlock Society, 1989. 886. Roberts, Harry. Euthanasia and Other Aspects of Life and Death. London: Constable & Co., Ltd., 1936. 887. Scherer, Jennifer M., and Rita James Simon. Euthanasia and the Right to Die: A Comparative View. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1999. 888. Schneider, Carl. Law at the End of Life: The Supreme Court and Assisted Suicide. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2000. 889. Schuklenk, Udo. Access to Experimental Drugs in Terminal Illness: Ethical Issues. New York: Pharmaceutical Products Press, 1998. Also published by Haworth, Binghamton, NY, in 1998. 890. Shannon, Thomas A. Death and Dying: A Reader. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2004. Shannon presents a collection of reprinted articles that focus on ethical issues around death and dying. The articles explore palliative care, physician-assisted suicide, tube feeding in the context of advance progressive dementia, euthanasia,

122

Chapter 13

Catholic teachings on prolonging life, consciousness, and the definition of death. Includes brief information about the contributors and an index. 891. Shavelson, Lonny. A Chosen Death: The Dying Confront Assisted Suicide. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1995. 892. Sherlock, Richard, and C. Mary Dingus. Families and the Gravely Ill: Roles, Rules, and Rights. New York: Greenwood Press, 1988. Part of the Contributions in Medical Studies series, number 23. Using the well-known story of Karen Ann Quinlan as an introduction, the authors begin an exploration of the ethics of care for the terminally or gravely ill and the implications for families. Psychosocial issues, communication with the dying, family decision making, legal issues, and public policy are all covered. Includes references with each chapter, a bibliography, an index, and an excellent appendix that offers sections of various state statutes dealing with death issues. 893. Slater, E., Anthony G. M. Flew, and A. B. Downing. Death with Dignity: A Reply to “On Dying Well.” London: Voluntary Euthanasia, 1976. 894. Snyder, Carrie. Death and Dying: Who Decides? Detroit: Gale Group, 2001. Published with author Barbara Wexler in 2003. 895. Steinberg, Maurice D., and Stuart J. Youngner. End-of-Life Decisions: A Psychosocial Perspective. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1998. In ten articles, contributors address the challenging questions and issues that arise for health care professionals involved in end-of-life care. Articles discuss competence to refuse life-sustaining treatment, depression in the context of refusal of life-sustaining treatment, family dynamics in decisions to withhold or withdraw treatment, obstacles to doctor–patient communication, consultation for end-of-life treatment decisions for children, issues with AIDS, evaluating patient requests for euthanasia and assisted suicide in terminal illness, and legal and ethical issues. Foreword by Paul S. Appelbaum. 896. Thielicke, Helmut. The Doctor as Judge of Who Shall Live and Who Shall Die. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1976. 897. Thomasma, Davis C., and Thomasine Kimbrough Kushner. Birth to Death: Science and Bioethics. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996. 898. Thompson, Ian, ed. Dilemmas of Dying: A Study in the Ethics of Terminal Care. Edinburgh, UK: Edinburgh University Press, 1979. 899. Uhlmann, Michael M. Last Rights?: Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia Debated. Washington, DC: Ethics and Public Policy Center, 1998. Also published by William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., Grand Rapids, MI. 900. United States Senate. Death with Dignity: An Inquiry into Related Public Issues. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1972.

Ethical Issues

123

901. Vaux, Kenneth L. Will to Live—Will to Die: Ethics and the Search for a Good Death. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg, 1978. 902. Veatch, Robert M. Death, Dying, and the Biological Revolution: Our Last Quest for Responsibility. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1976. Revised edition published in 1989. Veatch’s scholarly book explores issues of morality and ethics surrounding death and dying. He muses on whether death is moral in a technological age, the ethics of choosing not to prolong dying, and the notion of a “good death.” He suggests possible definitions of death and offers insights into the matters of stopping versus not starting treatments, direct versus indirect killing, and allowing to live versus allowing to die. He also explores decisions to refuse treatment, surrogates in decision making, public policy issues of dying morally, and organ donation. Includes a bibliography and list of legal cases pertinent to the book accompanied by a description of what issue each case addresses. 904. Walton, Douglas N. Brain Death: Ethical Considerations. West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University Press, 1980. 905. Weir, Robert F., ed. Ethical Issues in Death and Dying. New York: Columbia University Press, 1977. Second edition published in 1986. Weir, a philosophy professor at Oklahoma State University, presents thirty-six articles on various ethical issues surrounding death and dying. They are divided into sections on truth telling with the terminally ill patient, problems of defining death and determining when death has occurred, selective nontreatment of handicapped newborns, physicians’ responsibilities to critically ill and dying patients, euthanasia, and suicide. Contributors include Robert M. Veatch, M. Pabst Battin, and Edwin S. Shneidman. 906. ———, ed. Physician-Assisted Suicide. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1997. 907. Williams, Mary E. Do the Terminally Ill Have a Right to Die? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. 908. ———. Should Physicians Be Permitted to Hasten the Deaths of Terminally Ill Patients? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. 909. Williams, Robert H., ed. To Live and to Die: When, Why, and How. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1973. Williams, a former faculty member at Harvard Medical School, and numerous well-published contributors explore compelling questions surrounding death and other topics. They discuss ethics of organ donation and transplantation and its implications on identity, care of dying patients, major goals in promoting life or death, and lessons from the dying.

124

Chapter 13

910. Yount, Lisa. Physician-Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia. New York: Facts on File, 2000. 911. Zucker, Marjorie B. The Right to Die Debate: A Documentary History. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1999.

14 Fear of Death

912. Arnold, Johann Christoph. Be Not Afraid: Overcoming the Fear of Death. Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 2003. Arnold, a pastoral counselor, tells the stories of people who have courageously greeted death without fear. He uses several anecdotes from Tolstoy, Dickens, and others to show how life can be lived without the anxieties and fears associated with death and dying. He suggests that death can be met with confidence. The book is written from a Christian perspective and includes numerous biblical references. 913. Becker, Ernest. The Denial of Death. New York: Free Press, 1973. Published by Peter Smith in 1998. With the premise that man’s innate fear of death is a principal source of his activity throughout life, Becker presents a thorough and original examination of the fear and frequent denial of death. He investigates and illustrates how humans attempt to transcend death through religion, narcissism, heroism, charisma, and neurosis. Becker won the Pulitzer Prize for this book in 1974 and died the same year. Includes extensive references and an index. 914. Berger, Arthur S., and Joyce Berger. Fear of the Unknown: Enlightened Aid-in-Dying. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1995. 915. Bermann, Eric. Scapegoat: The Impact of Death-Fear on an American Family. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1973. Also cited as being published by Greenhaven Press in 1974. In this scholarly analysis of death fear and its effects, Bermann explores themes of death-terror, fear as an organizing theme, defenses against “knowing” and “feeling,” thanatophobic countermeasures, cognitive dysfunction as a family style, and fate and dissipation of anger. A concluding chapter includes a 125

126

Chapter 14

discussion of clinical research and death. Includes a selected bibliography and an index. 916. Bondeson, Jan. Buried Alive: The Terrifying History of Our Most Primal Fear. New York: W. W. Norton, 2001. The author offers a serious examination of a notable element in the fear of death. Thorough and engaging discussions of this fear are presented in chapters on both real-life and literary burials of the living. Includes extensive references and an index. Bondeson is a professor at the University of Wales College of Medicine and also holds a doctorate in experimental medicine. 917. Carrington, Hereward. Death Deferred: How to Live Long and Happily, Defer Death, and Lose All Fear of It. Whitefish, MT: Kessinger Publishing, 1997. 918. Feldman, Marvin J., Paul J. Handal, and Hyman S. Barahal. Fears Related to Death and Suicide. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974. 919. Frazer, Sir James George. The Fear of the Dead in Primitive Religion. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published in three volumes in 1933, 1934, and 1936. Also published in a single volume by Biblo and Tannen, New York, in 1966. In this book an anthropologist examines how the dead are feared in many cultures through William Wyse Foundation Lectures given at Trinity College in Cambridge, United Kingdom, from 1932–33. 920. Gordon, David Cole. Overcoming the Fear of Death. New York: Macmillan, 1970. 921. Johns, Fran Moreland. Dying Unafraid. San Francisco, CA: Synergistic Press, 1999. A journalist and hospice volunteer, Johns presents touching and inspiring stories of people who have died without fear. In doing so, she addresses issues of self-deliverance, physician-hastened death, and individual rights in the face of death. One of her stories is about Jessica Mitford, author of The American Way of Death. 922. Langner, Thomas S. Choices for Living: Coping with Fear of Dying. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Press, 2002. Part of the PATH in Psychology series. Langner addresses attitudes toward death and dying, causes of the fear of dying, counterphobic behaviors, mementos and monuments, denial of death, and suicide. 923. Ligouri, Alphonsus St. A. How to Face Death without Fear. Ligouri, MO: Ligouri Press, 1976.

Fear of Death

127

924. McCarthy, J. Fearful Living: The Fear of Death. New York: Halsted Press, 1979. 925. Noys, Benjamin. The Culture of Death. New York: Berg, 2005. Pointing out Western culture’s obsession with death, Noys examines death in the new millennium with fears of terrorism and other sudden threats. He notes that societies today live in an “age of panic” and discusses the politicization of death, bioethics, and the meaning of death. Includes a bibliography, filmography, and list of Internet sites. 926. Williams, Tom A. Dreads and Besetting Fears. Boston: Little, Brown, 1923. 927. Worden, J. William, and W. Proctor. PDA (Personal Death Awareness): Breaking Free of Fear to Live a Better Life Now. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1976.

15 General Works

928. Agee, James. A Death in the Family. New York: Bantam, 1985. Originally published in 1957. 929. Aiken, Lewis R. Dying, Death, and Bereavement. 4th ed. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2001. Published by Allyn & Bacon, Boston, in 1985 and 1991. This textbook provides general information on mortality and thanatology and explores causes and circumstances of death, cultural beliefs and customs, human development and death, and dying and surviving. Some treatment of aging, accidental death, suicide and homicide, legal issues, fears of death, and hospice are also included. Appendixes include a list of organizations concerned with death and dying; a short bibliography of books for children and adolescents on death and dying; and instruments for assessing fears, anxiety, and attitudes toward death. The chapter on children and death contains a verbatim conversation between a father and his ten-year-old daughter from Robert Jay Lifton’s The Broken Connection: On Death and the Continuity of Life and a brief section on children’s games and sayings about death. An instructor’s manual for this text is available from the publisher. 930. Alden, Henry M. A Study of Death. St. Clair Shores, MI: Scholarly Press, 1976. 931. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Noreen A. Russell. Death and Dying: Individuals and Institutions. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1982. Attempting to provide a framework for organizing disparate research on thanatology, the authors offer a proposed integration of the thanatological literature. As noted in the preface, they “identify patterns and responses to death and dying in American society; discuss problems related to the termination of life; and 128

General Works

129

examine the structure and processes of interaction among the terminally ill, their families, and helping professionals.” Emphasizing the caring aspects of health care for the dying rather than curing aspects, the authors offer their underlying principle of insisting that caregivers be “exposed to a humanistic approach to counterbalance the industrialization of health care in the United States.” Topics covered include death attitudes, effects of forbidden death, perceptions of death, dying as a process, fear of death and dying, stigma, the evolution of hospital care, caregivers’ responses to dying patients, communication about death, pain control, children’s concepts of death, parental loss, infant death, a definition of death, redefining death, the right to refuse treatment, euthanasia, suicide, funeral functions and history, pathological grief reactions, therapeutic intervention with the bereaved, cross-cultural perspectives, grief reactions, the milieu of death, the death movement, and society’s response to death and dying. Sections include summaries, learning exercises, audiovisual material lists, and references. An appendix provides addresses of audiovisual distributors. Includes an index. 932. Bertman, Sandra L. Facing Death: Images, Insights, and Interventions: A Handbook for Educators, Healthcare Professionals, and Counselors. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Acknowledging the significant achievements of thanatological research during the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s, Bertman points out that much of the contribution to the knowledge base has been in the biological and behavioral sciences. She attempts to remedy this with explorations into the arts and humanities. Herman Feifel notes in his foreword that Bertman “underscores how the arts not only can provide a vital adjunct in teaching and counseling for the thanatologist but also how they can serve as an avenue for self-discovery.” According to Bertman, “The arts cannot stay the flights of the birds of sorrow, but they can help us to better appreciate and endure them.” Her text discusses the use of the arts to stimulate dialogue, reveal concerns, enable grieving, and provide consolation. All in the context of arts and humanities, she addresses views of mortality and immortality, existential aloneness, the art of dying, tolerance for ambivalence, and responses to death images among various audiences. A separate chapter focuses on guidelines for using the arts in this context and new approaches to counseling. Appendixes feature a nine-question, multiple-choice death attitudes questionnaire; a presentation evaluation form for “Facing Death: A Most Memorable Image”; and a first-year course syllabus for “Medical Humanities: On Dissection, Dying and Death.” Includes numerous images and illustrations as well as a bibliography. Bertman directs the program in medical humanities at the University of Massachusetts Medical Center in Worcester. 933.

Blackwell, Roger D. Living with Death. Old Tappan, NJ: Revell, 1978.

934.

Bland, Olivia. The Royal Way of Death. London: Constable, 1986.

130

Chapter 15

935. Bleckman, Isaac A., and Kurt J. Guggenheimer. Death and Dying, A to Z: A Loose-Leaf Encyclopedic Handbook on Death and Dying and Related Subjects. Queens Village, NY: Croner Publications, 1980. Bleckman and Guggenheimer offer an extensive directory on all things deathrelated, including U.S. and foreign hospices, suicide prevention centers and agencies, universities and national organizations offering gerontology studies, and V.A. national cemeteries. The book also includes information on Medicare reimbursement for hospice care, right-to-die issues and laws by state, narrative on religion and death, taxes, the philosophy of death, body donation, and the funeral industry. An extensive bibliography is also included. 936. Bloch, Maurice, and Jonathan Parry, eds. Death and the Regeneration of Life. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1982. 937. Bloom, Shalom. Death, Dying, and Terminal Illness. Lexington, MA: Xerox College Publishing, 1973. 938.

Boros, Ladislaus. Mystery of Death. New York: Seabury Press, 1973.

939. Bradley, Buff. Endings: A Book about Death. Reading, MA: AddisonWesley, 1979. 940. Bregman, Lucy, and Sara Thiermann. First Person Mortal: Personal Narratives of Dying, Death, and Grief. New York: Paragon House, 1995. 941. Brouardel, Paul, and F. Lucas Benham. Death and Sudden Death. New York: William Wood, 1902. A translation of Brouardel’s La mort et la mort subite. 942. Bryant, Clifton D., ed. Handbook of Death and Dying. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 2003. 943. Bugen, Larry A., ed. Death and Dying: Theory, Research, and Practice. Dubuque, IA: William C. Brown Company, 1979. 944.

Bultmann, Rudolph. Life and Death. New York: Fernhill, 1965.

945. Burland, C. A. Myths of Life and Death. New York: Crown Publishers, 1974. 946. Carey, Gabrielle, and Rosemary Lee Sorensen. The Penguin Book of Death. New York: Penguin Books, 1996. 947. Carr, Thomas K. Introducing Death and Dying: Readings and Exercises. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2005. 948. Cassell, Dana K., Robert C. Salinas, and Peter S. Winn. The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying. New York: Facts on File, 2005.

General Works

131

From abandonment of the dying to wrongful death, the authors present an extensive encyclopedic treatment of death and dying for all audiences. In addition to a lengthy bibliography and an index, the volume contains thirteen appendixes. They include an advance care plan document from Project GRACE (Guidelines for Resuscitation and Care at End-of-Life); odds on death due to injury from the National Safety Council (includes numbers of deaths, one-year odds, and lifetime odds); death and mortality statistics from the Centers for Disease Control; information on end-of-life care at home from the National Cancer Institute; text on where to write for death certificates in the United States, including cost and other pertinent information; U.S. war death statistics; a checklist for end-of-life planning; information on what to know for funeral preplanning; a list of organization and help groups; a listing of death care industry and consumer organizations; a compilation of websites offering resources and help; and a section of museums of funeral customs and history. The introduction includes a brief cultural history of death and dying and information about death and funeral practices in modern times. A special section on Native American burial customs is also included. 949. Chaney, Patricia S., ed. Dealing with Death and Dying. Horsham, PA: Intermed Communications, 1980. Chaney is also author of Dealing with Death and Dying—Nursing Skillbook, published by Intermed in 1976. 950. Chidester, David. Patterns of Transcendence: Religion, Death, and Dying. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Group, 1990. 951. Choron, Jacques. Death and Modern Man. New York: Collier Books, 1971. Originally published as Modern Man and Mortality by Macmillan, New York, in 1964. 952.

———. Suicide. New York: Scribner, 1972.

953. Clark, David. The Sociology of Death: Theory, Culture, Practice. Oxford, UK; Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers/Sociological Review, 1993. 954. Clemens, Christopher, and Mark Smith. Death: Grim Realities and Comic Relief. New York: Delacorte Press, 1982. 955. Cope, Gilbert, ed. Dying, Death, and Disposal. London: Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge, 1970. 956. Corless, Inge B., and Barbara B. Germino. A Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement. Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1995. Also published by Springer as Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living in 2003. 957. ———. Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living. New York: Springer, 2003. Published by Jones and Bartlett, Boston, in 1995, as A Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement.

132

Chapter 15

958. ———. Dying, Death, and Bereavement: Theoretical Perspectives and Other Ways of Knowing. Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1994. 959. Corr, Charles A., and John D. Morgan. Statements on Death, Dying, and Bereavement. London, Ontario: International Work Group on Death, Dying, and Bereavement through King’s College, 1994. 960. Corr, Charles A., Clyde M. Nabe, and Donna M. Corr. Death and Dying, Life and Living. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole, 1994. The fifth edition was published in 2005 by Wadsworth Publishing Co., Belmont, CA. 961. Cox, Gerry R., and Timothy B. Gongaware. Sociology of Death and Dying: A Teaching Resource. Washington, DC: American Sociological Association, 2004. 962. D’Arcy, Martin Cyril, and Basil Gurrin. Death and Life. London: Longmans, Green, and Company, 1942. 963. Dastre, Albert. Life and Death. London: Walter Scott Publishing Company, 1911. Translated by W. I. Greenstreet. 964. de Beauvoir, Simone. A Very Easy Death. Burnsville, NC: Celo Press, 1965. Also published by Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, UK, in 1969, and Warner Paperback Library, New York, in 1973. 965. de Vries, Brian, ed. End of Life Issues: Interdisciplinary and Multidimensional Perspectives. New York: Springer, 1999. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. The author, associate professor of gerontology at San Francisco State University, has assembled eighteen articles divided into four parts: “Individual/ Personal Issues,” “Interpersonal/Microsystem Issues,” “Social/Exosystem Issues,” and “Cultural and Institutional/Macrosystem Issues.” Article topics include patient preferences for place of death, age cohort differences in perceptions of funerals, grief and the self-concept, facilitating perceived control in the dying process, palliative counseling, the impacts of bereavement on families, perceptions of recovery from bereavement, grandparent participation in family bereavement, animals as neglected members of the family in studies of death and dying, communication about death, financial considerations for families facing a death, widowhood, physician-assisted suicide, the sociocultural meaning of dying, death education in churches and temples, and cemeteries in cyberspace. 966. DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, and Albert Lee Strickland. The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying. 3rd ed. Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield Publishing Co., 1987. Sixth edition published by McGraw-Hill Higher Education in 2001. Intended for undergraduate audiences, this college textbook provides an overview of thanatology. As the study of death is interdisciplinary, so is this textbook,

General Works

133

covering the health professions, social sciences, and humanities. Each chapter offers a reading list. Photographs, illustrations, graphs, quotes, and anecdotes accompany the text. 967. ———. The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying. Mountain View, CA: Mayfield Publishing Co., 1995. 968. Dickenson, Donna L., Malcolm Lewis Johnson, and Jeanne Samson Katz. Death, Dying, and Bereavement. 2nd ed. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, in association with the Open University, 2000. Originally published in 1993. In this revised and updated version of the popular first edition, the editors present a collection of articles covering a broad spectrum of issues related to death, dying, and bereavement. The articles are divided into the sections “Life and Death,” “Caring for Dying People,” “Dilemmas and Decisions at the End of Life,” and “Bereavement: Private Grief, Collective Responsibility.” A great diversity of writings, the book includes research, valuable information, stories, personal reflections, and poems. Topics covered include the concept of the good death, approaches to death in Hindu and Sikh communities, palliative care, living with muscular sclerosis, complementary medicine for the dying, communicating with dying children, dying trajectories, Jewish perspectives on death, intimacy and terminal care, do not resuscitate decisions, right-to-die issues, resource allocation and palliative care, cross-cultural perspectives on bereavement, single parents losing only children, gay and lesbian bereavement, and epitaphs. References are included for each article. 969. Doka, Kenneth J., and John D. Morgan. Death and Spirituality. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1993. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 970.

Donne, John. Death and Dying. New York: Arno Press, 1977.

971. Donnelly, John. Language, Metaphysics, and Death. New York: Fordham University Press, 1978. Reprinted in 1994. 972. Dublin, Louis I. Factbook on Man from Birth to Death. New York: Macmillan, 1965. 973. Ducasse, Curt John. Nature, Mind, and Death. La Salle, IL: Open Court Publishing, 1951. 974. Durkheim, Emile. Suicide. New York: Free Press, 1966. Translated by John A. Spaulding and George Simpson. 975. Eckert, William G., ed. Introduction to Forensic Sciences. 2nd ed. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, 1997. 976. ———. On Death. Wichita, KS: International Reference Organization in Forensic Medicine, 1967.

134

Chapter 15

In this book, Eckert assembles numerous articles on the forensic sciences. Topics include forensic psychiatry, the role of the forensic laboratory, pathology and toxicology, bloodstain pattern interpretation, legal issues, and scientific evidence in court. 977. Elliot, Gil. Twentieth Century Book of the Dead. New York: Scribner, 1972. 978. Enright, D. J. The Oxford Book of Death. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002. Enright presents a compilation of quotes, writings, poems, and essays about death divided by subject to include the hour of death, suicide, views and attitudes, mourning, graveyards and funerals, resurrections and immortalities, hereafters, revenants, war, plague, persecution, love and death, children and death, epitaphs, requiems, and last words. 979. Evans, W. E. D. The Chemistry of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1963. 980. Evans-Wentz, W. E., ed. The Tibetan Book of the Dead. New York: Oxford University Press, 1927. 981. Ezell, G., D. J. Anspaugh, and J. Oaks. Death and Dying: From a Health and Sociological Perspective. Scottsdale, AZ: Gorsuch Scarisbrick, 1987. 982. Farrell, James J. Inventing the American Way of Death, 1830–1920. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1980. Part of the American Civilization series, Allen F. Davis, editor. Treating death as a cultural event, Farrell illustrates how societies and civilizations reveal themselves in their attitudes and approaches to death, dying, and bereavement. Farrell looks at the cosmological contexts of death, scientific naturalism, the development of the modern cemetery, modernization of the funeral service, and the meaning and management of death in an Illinois county. Includes notes and an index. 983. Flew, Anthony, ed. Body, Mind, and Death. New York: Macmillan, 1964. 984. Flumiani, Carlo M. Life and Death. Albuquerque, NM: American Classical College Press, 1972. 985. Forbes, John Douglas. Death Warmed Over. Elizabeth, NJ: Pageant Press International/Poseidon Press, 1975. 986. Forrai, Maria S., and Rebecca Anders. A Look at Death. Minneapolis, MN: Lerner Publications, 1977. Part of the Lerner Awareness Series. Forrai’s black-and-white photographs help convey the concept of death, importance of grief, and customs of mourning followed by young people. Includes

General Works

135

images of ill seniors, cemeteries, grave markers, funeral ceremonies, caskets, and people grieving. The text is written by Anders. Biographical information is provided on Forrai. Foreword by Robert C. Slater, professor and director in the Department of Mortuary Science at the University of Minnesota. 987. Fruehling, James A., ed. Sourcebook on Death and Dying. Chicago: Marquis Professional Publications, 1982. This book is a compilation of articles along with a directory of associations, self-help groups, hospices, and memorial societies. 988. Fulton, Gere B., and E. K. Metress. Perspectives on Death and Dying. Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1995. This is a general guide on the philosophical, psychological, sociological, anthropological, legal, medical, and ethical aspects of dying. 989. Fulton, Robert, ed. Death and Dying: Challenge and Change. Rev. ed. San Francisco, CA: Boyd & Fraser, 1981. Originally published by Addison-Wesley, Reading, PA, in 1978. Revised edition also cited as being published by Heinle & Heinle, San Francisco, CA, in 1981. 990. ———. Death and Identity. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1965. Second revised edition published with Robert Bendiksen by Robert J. Brady, Bowie, MD, in 1976. Also published with Robert Bendiksen by Charles Press, Philadelphia, in 1994. A classic text in thanatology, Fulton’s book explores death and dying in twentyseven articles divided into sections on theoretical discussions of death; attitudes and responses to death; grief and mourning; and ceremony, social organization, and society. Topics include the sociology of death, attitudes toward death and dying, responses to the concept of death in children and early adolescents, religious conviction and fear of death, acute grief, bereavement and mental health, mourning processes, childhood bereavement, psychosocial aspects of terminal care, social uses of funeral rites, widowhood, and a sociological analysis of funeral expenditures. Contributors include David Sudnow, Robert Bendiksen, Felix Berardo, Anselm L. Strauss, Herman Feifel, Barney G. Glaser, Robert J. Lifton, Avery D. Weisman, and Vanderlyn Pine. Includes a bibliography arranged by subject, brief information about the contributors, and an index. 991. Garrison, Webb. Strange Facts about Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1978. 992. Gattegno, Caleb. On Death: An Essay. New York: Educational Solutions, 1978. Restricted printing. This book is sixty-six pages in length. 993. Gilbert, Sandra M. Death’s Door: Modern Dying and the Ways We Grieve. New York: W. W. Norton, 2006.

136

Chapter 15

Gilbert provides a 580-page examination of society’s relationship with death through literature, history, poetry, and everyday societal practices. She explores views toward death and how those views may have changed as a result of war and terrorism. Other topics discussed include the psychology of grief, All Soul’s Day, widowhood, caring for the dead, communicating with the dead, changes in dying and mourning in the twentieth century, the effects of technology on dying, the detachment of physicians, and collective society mourning. Includes an extensive 28-page bibliography. 994. Gorostiza, Jose. Death without End. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1969. 995. Greenstock, David L. Death: The Glorious Adventure. Westminster, MD: Newman Press, 1956. 996. Grollman, Earl A. Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for the Living. Boston: Beacon Press, 1974. 997. ———. Suicide: Prevention, Intervention, Postvention. Boston: Beacon Press, 1971. 998. Haley, James. Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego: Thomson Gale, 2003. 999. Hamner, James E., and Barbara J. Sax Jacobs, eds. Life and Death Issues. Memphis: University of Tennessee, 1986. Based on presentations at the Sixth Annual Frank M. Norfleet Forum for the Advancement of Health, convened November 4–5, 1985, at the Frank S. Groner Education Center of Baptist Memorial Hospital in Memphis, TN. 1000. Hardt, Dale V. Death: The Final Frontier. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1979. Also cited as being published by Simon & Schuster in 1979. 1001. Harrison, Robert Pogue. The Dominion of the Dead. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003. An original exploration into the world of death, this book addresses the very close relationship between the living and the dead. Harrison ponders why the dead are buried, how the living maintain relationships with the dead, and why this maintain of relationships occurs. The publisher describes the book as a “profound meditation of how the thought of death shapes the communion of the living.” Includes an extensive bibliography of works cited. 1002. Hawke, Sharryl. Death and Dying: A Living Study. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, National Institute of Education, 1974. 1003. Heilman, Samuel C., ed. Death, Bereavement, and Mourning. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Publishers, 2005.

General Works

137

This book is a collection of essays on death and dying in the context of a post– 9/11 society. Family grief, traumatic grief, terrorism, and collective reintegration are major themes. A special essay is incorporated titled “The 9/11 Firehouse Project.” Includes biographical information on the fourteen contributors. 1004. 1973.

Hendin, David. Death as a Fact of Life. New York: W. W. Norton,

1005. Hickman, Tom. Death: A User’s Guide. New York: Delta/Bantam Dell, 2003. Ebury Press edition published in 2002. Hickman puts forth a bizarre collection of stories, factoids, explanations, anecdotes, and historical references about death. Amidst the humor and unusual presentation, he offers some interesting facts and narratives on death attitudes, cultural variations on death and dying, and views toward burial practices. Includes a useful index. 1006. Hockey, Jennifer Lorna. Experiences of Death: An Anthropological Account. Edinburgh, Scotland: Edinburgh University Press, 1990. Distributed in North America by Columbia University Press, New York. 1007. Houghton, Peter. On Death, Dying, and Not Dying. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2001. 1008. Howarth, Glennys, and Oliver Leaman. Encyclopedia of Death and Dying. London: Routledge, 2001. 1009. 1995.

Hughes, Richard. The Radiant Shock of Death. New York: P. Lang,

1010. Jackson, Charles O. Passing: The Vision of Death in America. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1977. 1011. Jones, Constance. R.I.P.: The Complete Book of Death and Dying. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1997. 1012. Jones, William Tudor. Metaphysics of Life and Death. New York: George H. Doran, 1924. 1013. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Death, Dying, Transcending. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1979. Part of the Perspectives on Death and Dying series, volume 3. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in Human Experience. Through fifteen articles from various contributors, Kalish gives a survey of perspectives on dying and the transcendence of death. Articles examine meanings of death, attitudes toward death, and bereavement. Topics include the onset of the dying process, clinical research and the stages of dying, slow death, a psychosocial analysis of cancer deaths, differences in bereavement due to type of death, social organization and death, and attitudes toward the right to die among older people. The final section features two odd essays. One discusses the experience

138

Chapter 15

of dying from falls using a study undertaken by Zurich geology professor Albert Heim, who collected the subjective observations of survivors of falls in the Alps. Another titled “The Coffin” muses on dying, being placed in a coffin after having clothes removed, and then transcending back to a birth state. 1014. ———. Death, Grief, and Caring Relationships. Monterey, CA: Brooks/ Cole Publishing Co., 1981. Reprinted in 1985. While this book is organized like a textbook, the author’s intent, as noted in his preface, is to “write for people who want one book to give [them] the most understanding of death, the process of dying, and grief.” Kalish discusses the meaning of death, definitions of death, near-death experiences, attitudes toward death, awareness of death, religion and immortality, death anxiety, childhood death and bereavement, causes of death, the dying trajectory, what “dying” means, the stages of dying, denial, grieving processes, normal responses to death, the concept of a broken heart, bereavement roles and rituals, funerals, caring relationships in health care settings, mental health issues, and caring organizations. Includes references and name and subject indexes. 1015. Karim, Abul Bashr Mohammed Fazlul. Death: Medical, Spiritual, and Social Care of the Dying. Amsterdam, Netherlands: VU University Press, 1998. 1016. Kastenbaum, Robert J. Between Life and Death. New York: Springer. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, volume 1, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. 1017. ———. The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the Dead. New York: Arno Press, 1977. 1018. ———, ed. Death and Dying. New York: Arno Press, 1977. A total of 40 volumes. 1019. ———. Death and the Visual Arts: An Original Arno Press Anthology. New York: Arno Press, 1977. 1020. ———. Death as a Speculative Theme in Religious, Scientific, and Social Thought: An Original Anthology. New York: Arno Press, 1977. 1021. ———. Death, Society, and Human Experience. 4th ed. Columbus, OH: Merrill, 1991. Second edition published by C. V. Mosby, St. Louis, in 1977. Published by Allyn & Bacon, Boston, in 2000. Kastenbaum, professor of psychology at the University of Massachusetts, Boston, provides an overview of issues surrounding death and dying and how society deals with death. With a textbook approach, Kastenbaum discusses definitions of death, the death system, death and disaster, issues in dying, care of the dying, and bereavement. In his chapter on the positions between life and death, he presents a thought-provoking list of images that illustrate the possibilities for the reader’s own life-death trajectories. He also offers an overview of Kübler-Ross’s five

General Works

139

stages as well as some of his criticisms of the stages approach. Includes a list of suggested readings. 1022. ———. Macmillan Encyclopedia of Death and Dying. New York: Macmillan Reference USA, 2003. 1023. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Ruth Aisenberg. The Psychology of Death. New York: Springer, 1972. Also published by Duckworth, London, in 1974. Concise edition by Springer, New York, in 1976. Second edition published by Springer, New York, in 1992. In this important classic of thanatological literature, Kastenbaum explores the changing conceptions of death. He writes about death attitudes and perceptions, constructing death, death anxiety, grief and mourning, and deathbed scenes. Includes notes and an index. For the 1992 edition, Kastenbaum provides a preface that provides a chronology of each edition with narrative about each one. 1024. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Beatrice Kastenbaum, eds. Encyclopedia of Death. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press, 1989. Published with the subtitle Myth, History, Philosophy, Science, by Avon Books, New York, in 1993. 1025. Kauffman, Jeffrey. Awareness of Mortality. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1026. Kearl, Michael C. Endings: A Sociology of Death and Dying. New York: Oxford University Press, 1989. An appropriate textbook for a college course on death, Kearl’s book explores death’s revelations of life, meanings of death in cross-cultural and historical perspectives, cemeteries as cultural institutions, impacts of death on society, social stratifications, death and religion, secular perspectives, death and work, politics of death, death and the military, death as a theme in popular culture, the medical system’s approach to death, and the social psychology of dying and surviving. He also addresses AIDS and the effects of mass death on the social order, suicide and homicide, funeral rituals and obituaries, death fears, desacralization of death, abortion, genocide, capital punishment, war, terrorism, and death in cinema and television. Includes quotes, photographs, charts, short news clips, extensive references, and a thorough index. 1027. Keizer, Bert. Dancing with Mr. D: Notes on Life and Death. New York: Nan A. Talese/Doubleday, 1997. Translated from Dutch by the author. A bestseller in the Netherlands, Keizer’s book is an autobiographical journey through his experiences with the terminally ill. A physician who has training in philosophy, he offers insights into the placebo effect, physician attitudes toward alternative medicine, the overestimated power of medicine, the strangeness of the phrase “to die,” and euthanasia, a legal practice in the Netherlands. This is a

140

Chapter 15

notable work for medical students and others in the helping professions. Includes several stories from Keizer’s experience in nursing homes. 1028. Kellehear, Allan. Eternity and Me: The Everlasting Things in Life and Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1029. Knox, Jean McBee. Death and Dying. New York: Chelsea House Publishers, 1989. Intended for juvenile audiences, Knox gently discusses death from a historical perspective, dying with dignity, and grief. Introduction by C. Everett Koop. 1030. Koop, C. Everett. The Right to Life, the Right to Die. Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House Publishers, 1976. 1031. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death: The Final Stage of Growth. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1986. Several reprints. Originally published by Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, in 1975. Perhaps the scholar and author most associated with death and dying in both popular and scholarly communities, Kübler-Ross offers this important collection of essays that explore a death as a personal experience, a common theme in Kübler-Ross’s writings. Articles discuss the organizational context of dying, the notion of choice in dying among Alaskan Indians, Jewish views of death and mourning, death in Hindu and Buddhist contexts, terminal illness, grief and growth through funerals, and dying as the last stage of growth. Includes several personal essays by Kübler-Ross and other contributors. Also includes references and an appeal to contribute to the CARE World Hunger Fund. 1032. ———. The Tunnel and the Light: Essential Insights on Living and Dying. New York: Marlowe & Co., 1999. 1033. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, and David Kessler. Life Lessons: Two Experts on Death and Dying Teach Us about the Mysteries of Life and Living. New York: Scribner, 2000. 1034. Kushner, Harold S. When Bad Things Happen to Good People. New York: Avon Books, 1981. 1035. Kutscher, Austin H., ed. Death and Bereavement. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1969. 1036. Lack, Sylvia A., and Richard Lamerton, eds. The Hour of Death. London: G. Chapman, 1974. 1037. Langue, John. Death Is a Noun: A View of the End of Life. Boston: Little, Brown, 1972. 1038. 1974.

———. Vital Signs (The Way We Die in America). Boston: Little, Brown,

General Works

141

1039. Lawton, M. Powell, ed. Focus on the End of Life: Scientific and Social Issues. New York: Springer, 2001. Part of the Annual Review of Gerontology and Geriatrics, volume 20. Contributors offer articles on ethics and spirituality, medical decision making, quality-of-life trajectories of elders in the end of life, measuring quality of medical care for dying persons, comfort in older adults at the end of life, friendship in dying, healthy elders’ early decisions for end-of-life living and dying, hospice, nursing homes, ethnography at the end of life, and clinical issues. 1040. Leming, Michael R., and George E. Dickinson. Understanding Death, Dying, and Bereavement. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1985. Cited as Understanding Dying, Death, and Bereavement in 2nd edition in 1990. Sixth edition published by Wadsworth in 2006. 1041. Lepp, Ignace. Death and Its Mysteries. New York: Macmillan, 1968. Translated by Bernard Murchland. 1042. Leviton, Daniel, ed. Horrendous Death, Health, and Well-Being. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Leviton presents a collection of articles covering a broad scope of horrendous death issues. Death types included are those resulting from war, homicide, genocide, terrorism, assassination, political torture, environmental destruction, unemployment and poverty as correlates of morbidity/mortality, malnutrition and starvation, accidents, nuclear winter, and general violence. The contributors also explore young adults’ responses to types of horrendous death, horrendous death as a community health problem, the economics of terrorism, fear of death, and the root of violence. Articles include references, resources pertinent to the topic, sources for further study, and exercises appropriate for the classroom. Includes an index. 1043. Lewis, C. S. A Grief Observed. London: Faber & Faber, 1961. Also published by Seabury Press, New York. 1044. Lindholm, Dorothy. Death Is a Miracle. Norris, TN: Exposition, 1977. Also cited as being published in Hicksville, NY. 1045. Lofland, Lyn H. Toward a Sociology of Death and Dying. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, 1976. Part of Sage Contemporary Social Science Issues, volume XXVIII. 1046. Maeterlinck, Maurice. Before the Great Silence. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of The Literature of Death and Dying series. Translated by B. Miall. First edition published in 1937. 1047. 1912.

———. Death. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Originally published in

142

Chapter 15

1048. Marrone, Robert L. Death, Mourning, and Caring. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole Publishing Co., 1997. Marrone’s textbook, appropriate for college audiences, begins with an introduction to thanatology and a review of changing U.S. attitudes toward death and dying. Several cross-cultural vignettes, statistics, charts, pop culture references, and photographs make the coverage extremely thorough for a lay audience. Among the numerous facets of death and dying explored are dying trajectories; death and the media; invisible death; death denial and avoidance; disease; homicide and suicide; near-death experiences; Kübler-Ross’s stage model; accidental death; coping models; visiting and communicating with the dying; grief and mourning; children and death; parental and sibling bereavement; psychological reintegration and coping strategies; adolescent issues; fear of death; anticipatory grief; tragic death; disenfranchised grief; psychospiritual transformation; caregiving; hospice; death anxiety; right-to-die issues; and funerals and rituals, including details on various religious rites (Muslim, Baha’I, Judaic, Mormon, Unitarian Universalist, Catholic, Hindu, and Buddhist). Also includes sections on attitudes toward death in African American, Hispanic American, Asian American, and Native American communities. A lengthy chapter focused on additional resources features websites, annotated reading lists arranged by death-related topic, worksheets, and a 54-page list of references. Includes subject and name indexes. 1049. Mehta, Rohit. The Journey with Death. Mystic, CT: Verry, 1977. Also published by Motilal Banarsidass Indological Publishers & Booksellers, Delhi, India. Mehta’s book is an exploration of the mystery of death that addresses the common questions about death, including What is death? Why does it come? Can we communicate with the dead? Is death the end of existence? Mehta discusses the “interval between lives” and entertains reincarnation. Includes several literary references. Introduction by Joy Mills. 1050. Mims, Cedric. When We Die: The Science, Culture, and Rituals of Death. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1999. Mims presents a surprisingly successful attempt at providing a comprehensive look at the facts of death. He covers the definition of death, biological perspectives, causes of death, burial and cremation practices from around the world, organ transplantation, embalming, funeral rites and ceremonies, emotional issues that surround death and the corpse, mourning and grieving customs, care of the dying, pathology and criminal investigations, attitudes toward death and immortality, and mythology of death. Includes a section of rather macabre photographs, references, and an index. 1051. Mitford, Jessica. The American Way of Death. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1963.

General Works

143

Generally considered an expose on American funeral practices, Mitford’s book is a tongue-in-cheek factual analysis of the funeral industry. This book was a bestseller when it was originally published and is intended to educate the public in American mortuary practices. It accomplished that goal. Mitford discusses at length funeral costs, “artifacts” or items associated with the funeral service, profitability of the funeral home, cremation, funeral fashion, funeral directing as a profession, the role of clergy, and attitudes of the press toward funeral service. It includes a chapter entitled “New Hope for the Dead.” If anyone can make mortuary science humorous and give it popular appeal, Mitford certainly can and did. Appendixes include a directory of memorial societies and related organizations, information on how to organize a memorial society, text on eye banks, and a section on body donation for medical science. Despite its humorous approach, this title can certainly be helpful to those anticipating a death and the bereaved. Includes a comprehensive index and bibliography of books, pamphlets, and magazine articles. 1052. Moller, David Wendell. Confronting Death: Values, Institutions, and Human Mortality. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. Moller advocates for replacing attitudes of avoidance and denial with those of understanding and compassion. He uses the American Cancer Society’s refusal of a request to include some of their materials in the book (quoting a representative) to illustrate how individuals and organization avoid and disassociate themselves from the subject. Moller’s text covers dying within various historical contexts, the modern organization of death, the medicalization of death, trajectories of dying, suffering, funerals, grief as a social concept, widowhood beyond feminism, children and death, parental bereavement, violent deaths and suicide, holocaust and genocide, and mechanized death. Includes an extensive bibliography, various photographs, and an image of the transi, the prevailing image of death. 1053. Natural Death Centre. The Natural Death Handbook. London: Natural Death Centre, 2003. 1054. Nelson, Leonard J., ed. The Death Decision. Ann Arbor, MI: Servant Books, 1984. Nelson’s book covers various religious and ethical perspectives on issues surrounding death and dying. Medical ethics, euthanasia, right-to-die issues, and physician-assisted suicide are addressed, along with other topics. 1055. Newnes, Craig, ed. Death, Dying, and Society. East Sussex, United Kingdom: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1991. Articles also published in a special issue of Changes: An International Journal of Psychology and Psychotherapy, December 1990. Newnes offers a collection of articles that address death and dying across ages, cultures, families, and institutions. Some of the articles in the book were

144

Chapter 15

papers presented at the Death and Dying Conference of the Committee of the Psychology and Psychotherapy Association in Liverpool, England, on November 5, 1990. They were subsequently published in a special issue of Changes, as noted above. Other authors contributed articles afterward. Topics include helping children whose parents die of AIDS, death awareness, youth suicide, Turkish genocide of the Armenians, death and dying in AIDS psychology, euthanasia trends in Britain and Europe, loss and societal perspectives, disaster issues using the Lockerbie tragedy as context, living with AIDS, old age and death, childhood cancer, bereavement among those with learning difficulties, the impact of HIV/AIDS on the African community, preparing toddlers for the death of a parent, and organizational pressures and role stresses in the lives of social work teams. Includes notes, references, and a poem titled “Someone All Alone,” by Sarah Joseph. 1056. Ogg, Elizabeth. Facing Death and Loss. Lancaster, PA: Technomic Books, 1985. Ogg’s book is based on two previously published public affairs pamphlets and includes some reprinted passages from them. It is a general discussion of death as a taboo topic, the notion of choosing death, the good death, hospice, terminal care, children and death, grief and bereavement, and moving on. She includes numerous references to others’ experiences with death and bereavement and books on these subjects. Chapters begin with quotes pertinent to the topics. 1057. Oliviere, David, and Barbara Monroe, eds. Death, Dying, and Social Differences. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004. 1058. Pardi, Marco M. Death: An Anthropological Perspective. Washington, DC: University Press of America, 1977. 1059. Parrish-Harra, Carol E. The New Age Handbook on Death and Dying. Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1989. 1060. Pattison, E. Mansell. The Experience of Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1977. Pattison is a professor of psychiatry and human behavior, social science, and social ecology at the University of California, Irvine. Through his own articles and those of twenty-three other contributors, he offers many perspectives on dying. Topics covered include death attitudes, the will to live and the expectation of death, faith and healing, meningomyelocele infants, accidents and trauma, hemophilia, the burned child, childhood cancer, leukemia, euthanasia, partial grief, and styles of dying. Includes an interview with a twenty-eight-year-old dying mother and a bibliography arranged by subject. 1061. Pearson, Leonard S., ed. Death and Dying: Current Issues in the Treatment of the Dying Person. Middletown, NY: UPBS, 1977. Originally published

General Works

145

by the Press of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, in 1969. Also cited as being published by Aronson, New York, in 1969. Respected clinical thanatologists contribute articles to this collection on the treatment of the dying patient. Articles address psychological death, the effects of death on the family, psychotherapy and the dying patient, clinical care, and awareness of dying. The contributors include Richard A. Kalish, Robert J. Kastenbaum, Lawrence LeShan, Cicely Saunders, and Anselm L. Strauss. The author includes a lengthy selected bibliography. 1062. Peck, Rosalie, and Charlotte Stefanics. Learning to Say Goodbye: Dealing wth Death and Dying. Muncie, IN: Accelerated Development, 1987. The authors, with backgrounds in social work and mental health clinical nursing, present more of an academic treatment of death and dying than the self-help guide suggested by the title. The book covers historical and cultural attitudes, the care and treatment of terminal patients, patient advocacy, and death. Includes an extensive section on developing thanatology programs and guidelines for health professionals, clergy, and so forth. Offers a pre-test on myths surrounding death, particularly cancer, as well as thoughts on changing attitudes toward death, dying, and bereavement. 1063. Pegg, Patricia F., and Erno Metze. Death and Dying: A Quality of Life. London: Pitman Publishing, 1981. 1064. Raab, Robert A. Coping with Death. New York: Rosen Press, 1978. Revised edition published in 1989. 1065. Rinpoche, Tulku Chagdud. Life in Relation to Death. 2nd ed. Cottage Grove, OR: Padma Publishing, 2000. 1066.

Sanders, Pete. Death and Dying. New York: Gloucester Press, 1991.

1067.

Saunders, Cicely M. Care of the Dying. London: Macmillan, 1960.

1068. Schulz, Richard. The Psychology of Death and Dying. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1978. Also cited as The Psychology of Death, Dying, and Bereavement. 1069. Scott, Nathan A., ed. The Modern Vision of Death. Richmond, VA: John Knox Press, 1967. 1070. Segraves, Kelly L. When You’re Dead, You’re Dead. San Diego, CA: Beta, 1975. 1071. Selzer, Richard. Mortal Lessons: Notes on the Art of Surgery. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1974. Reprinted in 1975 and 1976. Often humorous and sarcastic, the author, on the faculty of the Yale School of Medicine, describes death from a surgeon’s perspective. Edward Hoagland

146

Chapter 15

comments, “A careening, passionate book of knowledge, open-eyed about death and life, and even reaching toward faith.” 1072. Shaler, Nathaniel Southgate. The Individual: A Study of Life and Death. New York: D. Appleton & Co., 1901. 1073. Sherlock, William. A Practical Discourse Concerning Death. London: R. Chiswell, 1696. 1074. Sherr, Lorraine. Death, Dying, and Bereavement: An Insight for Carers. London: Blackwell Scientific, 1989. 1075. Shneidman, Edwin S. Death: Current Perspectives. 3rd ed. Mountain View, CA: Mayfield Publishing Co., 1984. Other editions published in 1976 and 1980, and with John B. Williamson in 1995. Shneidman is professor of thanatology and director of the Laboratory for the Study of Life-Threatening Behavior at the University of California at Los Angeles School of Medicine. Appropriate for a college textbook, this title explores current topics related to death and dying through thirty-nine articles and essays, many by such noted professionals as Cicely Saunders, Hannelore Wass, Avery Weisman, Jacques Choron, Robert Jay Lifton, Robert M. Veatch, David Sudnow, Phillippe Aries, Ernest Becker, Geoffrey Gorer, and Lily Pincus. The contributors explore ethical debates, clinical issues, and theoretical discussions. The book is divided into four parts: “Cultural Perspectives on Death,” “Societal Perspectives on Death,” “Interpersonal Perspectives on Death,” and “Personal Perspectives on Death.” The third edition offers perspectives on the topics of legal/ethical/moral aspects of death and dying, causes and effects of suicide, lifespan views of the survivors of death, the growing sense of urgency about twentieth century “megadeath,” and the growing interest in the quality of life during the dying phases and the criticality of quality care for the dying. Includes a short annotated bibliography, a list of bibliographies, and name and subject indexes. 1076. ———. Death and the College Student. New York: Behavioral Publications, 1972. 1077.

———. Voices of Death. New York: Harper & Row, 1980.

1078. Short, Robert. A Time to Be Born—A Time to Die. New York: Harper & Row, 1973. 1079. Simpson, Michael A. The Facts of Death. New York: Spectrum/PrenticeHall, 1979. 1080.

Spurgeon, C. H. Death. New York: Pilgrim, 1978.

1081. Steinfels, Peter, and Robert M. Veatch, eds. Death Inside Out: The Hastings Center Report. New York: Harper Forum Books/Harper & Row, 1975. Also published by Fitzhenry & Whiteside, Canada.

General Works

147

1082. Stephenson, John S. Death, Grief, and Mourning: Individual and Social Realities. New York: Free Press, 1985. From sociological, psychological, historical, and literary perspectives, Stephenson provides this comprehensive, interdisciplinary approach to the processes, practices, and experiences concerning death and dying in the United States. He surveys and analyzes death attitudes, the hospice model, bereavement as both a personal reaction and social convention, the denial of death, ceremonies of death, suicide, and the implications of euthanasia. This book is intended for sociologists, social workers, religious leaders, psychologists, nurses, and caregivers. 1083. Ulanov, Barry. Death: A Book of Preparation and Consolation. New York: Sheed & Ward, 1959. Widely regarded as an expert on jazz, Ulanov presents a book of reflections on death. He draws upon biblical scriptures and poets to “console loved ones and help us prepare for our own [death].” Includes an index and notes on writers and books referenced. 1084. Van Zeller, Hubert. Death in Other Words. Springfield, IL: Templegate Publishing Co., 1975. 1085. 1975.

Voysey, M. A Constant Burden. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul,

1086. Warner, W. Lloyd. The Living and the Dead. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1959. 1087. 1957.

Wertenbaker, Lael T. Death of a Man. New York: Random House,

1088. When Death Comes. Corvallis, OR: Oregon State University, 1963. Extension Bulletin 809. 1089. Wilcox, Sandra Galdieri, and Marilyn Sutton, eds. Understanding Death and Dying: An Interdisciplinary Approach. Port Washington, NY: Alfred Publishing Co., 1977. Published by Mayfield, Palo Alto, CA, in 1985. Also cited as published in Sherman Oaks, CA. 1090. Williams, Mary E. Terminal Illness: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. The author of the 2005 edition is Andrea C. Nakaya. Part of the Opposing Viewpoints series. An excellent resource for high school and college students, this book explores the many issues surrounding terminal illness. Topics include hospice care, dying at home, patients’ rights and having control over decisions regarding dying and death, treatments for pain, euthanasia, marijuana use for the terminally ill, physician-assisted suicide, living wills, and the “duty to die” argument. A bibliography of periodical articles follows each section. Includes questions and issues for

148

Chapter 15

further discussion, a list of organizations with descriptions and contact information, and a brief bibliography. 1091. Winters, Paul A. Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 1998. 1092. Worcester, Alfred. The Care of the Aged, Dying, and Dead. New York: Arno Press, 1950. Part of The Literature of Death and Dying series. Second edition cited as The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the Dead, published by Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, in 1961. Also cited as being published by Charles C. Thomas in 1935. 1093.

Wright, H. T. The Matthew Tree. New York: Pantheon Books, 1975.

1094. Wyschogrod, Edith, ed. The Phenomenon of Death: Faces of Mortality. New York: Harper & Row, 1973. Wyschogrod presents a collection of articles by leading scholars and thanatologists on death and dying. She divides them into three sections: “The Dying Person and His World,” “Mass Death,” and “The Death Throes of Culture.” Article subjects include psychotherapy and the terminally ill patient, the stages of death, anticipatory grief, bereavement, death symbolism, resurrection, and the process of dying. Contributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Lawrence LeShan, Eda LeShan, and Austin H. Kutscher. Includes a selected bibliography of books, articles, and unpublished material.

16 Grief and Mourning

1095. Adams, Christine A., and John D. Morgan. The ABCs of Grief: A Handbook for Survivors. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1096. Adler, Charles S. We Are But a Moment’s Sunlight: Understanding Death. New York: Washington Square Press, 1976. 1097. Aldrich, Sandra Picklesimer. Living through the Loss of Someone You Love: One Woman’s Story of Loss, Grief, and New-Found Hope. Ventura, CA: Regal Books, 1990. A counselor and associate editor of Christian Herald magazine, Aldrich tells the story of losing her husband and how she recovered from bereavement. The text is based on the author’s seminars on grief recovery and addresses the shock of death, anger at God, prayer, dealing with holidays, viewing grief as healthy, financial issues for widows, how to help the bereaved, abnormal grief, talking to children about death, depression, and survival. Includes several scriptural references. 1098. Alexander, Helen Mae. Experiencing Bereavement. 3rd ed. Boston: Pauline Books & Media, 2002. An effort to help those bereaved understand the grieving process, Alexander’s book recounts numerous personal stories as she suggests that sharing common feelings and reactions can lead to healing and recovery. Written from a Catholic perspective, though not entirely religious in tone, chapters deal specifically with facing terminal illness, acknowledging the reality of death, sudden death, hidden bereavement, taboo deaths and the associated difficult circumstances, befriending the bereaved, dealing with feelings of helplessness and hopelessness, and finding

149

150

Chapter 16

meaning in death. Includes a list of organizations that offer information and other resources as well as a brief bibliography. 1099. Allen, Charles Livingstone. When You Lose a Loved One. Westwood, NJ: F. H. Revell Co., 1959. 1100. 1974.

Anderson, Colena M. Joy Beyond Grief. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan,

1101. Archer, John. The Nature of Grief: The Evolution and Psychology of Reactions to Loss. New York: Routledge, 1999. The author suggests that grief is a “common experience throughout all human cultures that has evolved from simpler versions in animals.” He argues that grief is not, as many psychiatric and psychoanalytic perspectives would indicate, an illness or disorder but rather a natural reaction to a variety of losses. Archer references Darwinian and attachment theory in his analysis. He presents a thorough historical background on grief research, offers definitions and varying understandings of grief, and discusses the biological context of grief. Holistic and analytical approaches are explored. The effects of specific relationships, gender, and age on bereavement are also examined. Includes extensive references and author and subject indexes. Several literary references and photographs are also included. 1102. Aries, Philippe. The Hour of Our Death: The Classical History of Western Attitudes toward Death over the Last One Thousand Years. New York: Oxford University Press, 1991. 1103. ———. Western Attitudes toward Death: From the Middle Ages to the Present. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1974. Reprinted in 1991. 1104. Armstrong, O. V. Comfort for Those Who Mourn. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1978. Published by Cokesbury in 1930. 1105. Ascher, Barbara Lazear. Landscape without Gravity: A Memoir of Grief. Harrison, NY: Delphinium Books, 1992. A gay man’s heterosexual sister presents a memoir of grief following his death at age thirty-one of AIDS. Ascher examines her own feelings of grief and the alienation of her brother when he was alive and her coming to terms with it. Her grief is described as overwhelming and unmanageable, yet she finds her way out of the darkness. Commenting on the book, Richard Selzer notes that “grief emanates like a vapor from the pages.” The book is a moving narrative with many lessons about grief, bereavement, and acceptance. 1106. Attig, Thomas. The Heart of Grief: Death and the Search for Lasting Love. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002.

Grief and Mourning

151

1107. ———. How We Grieve: Relearning the World. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. Though appropriate for professionals in the field, Attig intends this book for a broad audience, including those who are grieving. According to Attig, the book contains “one philosopher’s reflections on grieving as the centrally important human experience that it is.” As with other scholars, Attig stresses that his teaching, writing, analysis, and theoretical discussions are rooted in listening to people’s stories of grief and bereavement. Using these individual vignettes, he discusses how grieving is active; respecting loss in others; and relearning the world, ourselves, and relationships with the deceased. Notably, Attig offers contrasting definitions of bereavement, mourning, grieving, and loss. In one chapter, he notes with its title, “Bereavement is Choiceless, But Grieving Is Not.” Includes notes and an index. 1108. Auz, Martin M., and Maureen Lyons Andrews. Handbook for Those Who Grieve: What You Should Know and What You Can Do During Times of Loss: A Resource for Family, Friends, Ministers, Caregivers, and Colleagues. Chicago: Loyola Press, 2002. Auz and Andrews present a resource guide that is intended to serve as the “path to grief recovery.” Auz is a writer who has extensively studied organizational grief therapy, and Andrews has developed bereavement programs for many organizations. The book includes tips for planning funerals and wakes; breaking difficult news; supporting those who are grieving; understanding different kinds of grief; helping children deal with death and grief; and addressing special issues associated with death by suicide, murder, and accidents. Also includes sample sympathy letters, lists of pertinent planning details, and a list of publications and organizations providing grief support. 1109. Bauman, Harold. Grief’s Slow Work. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1960. Bauman’s work is a 15-page booklet for Christian clergy and mourners. Using biblical references throughout the text, Bauman covers the process of grief and factors affecting grief work. 1110. Bedard, Kathryn. Compassion and Courage in the Aftermath of Traumatic Loss: Stones in My Heart Forever. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Press, 2006. This book is an emotional collection of September 11th stories of the author’s work at the New Jersey Family Assistance Center. 1111. Berkus, Rusty. To Heal Again: Toward Serenity and the Resolution of Grief. Los Angeles: Red Rose Press, 1984. 1112. Bernstein, Joanne E. Loss and How to Cope with It. New York: Seabury, 1977. Published by Houghton Mifflin, Boston, in 1976.

152

Chapter 16

1113. Bertman, Sandra L. Grief and the Healing Arts: Creativity as Therapy. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1999. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1114. Blank, Jeanne Webster. The Death of an Adult Child: A Book for and about Bereaved Parents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1115. Boss, Pauline. Ambiguous Loss: Learning to Live with Unresolved Grief. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999. 1116. Bouvard, Marguerite Guzman, and Evelyn Gladu. The Path through Grief: A Compassionate Guide. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 1998. A thorough guide to grief recovery, this text examines the many varieties of grief, phases of grief, and coping methods. The authors write about grief as a personal crisis and how it differs depending on personality traits, the manner of death, and the relationship of the deceased to the person grieving. They offer special guidance for those who have lost a loved one to homicide, murder, or AIDS. Specific suggestions are also included for friends and coworkers to help others grieve. Includes an excellent list of organizations and information centers as well as an annotated bibliography. Foreword by Sandra L. Bertman. 1117. Bowlby, John. Attachment and Loss: Loss, Sadness, and Depression (Volume 3). New York: Basic Books, 1980. Originally published as Attachment and Loss in 1969. 1118. Bozarth, Alla Renee. A Journey through Grief: Gentle Specific Help to Get You through the Most Difficult Stages of Grieving. Minneapolis, MN: CompCare Publications, 1990. Published by Hazelden in 1994. 1119. ———. Life Is Goodbye, Life Is Hello: Grieving Well through All Kinds of Loss. Minneapolis, MN: CompCare Publications, 1982. 1120. Brabant, Sarah. Mending the Torn Fabric: For Those Who Grieve and Those Who Want to Help Them. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1996. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1121. Bright, Ruth. Grieving: A Handbook for Those Who Care. St. Louis, MO: MMB Music, 1986. 1122. Brokhoff, John R. If Your Dearest Should Die. Iowa Falls, IA: CSS Publishers, 1975. Also cited as being published by CSS Publishers, Lima, OH. 1123. Brooke, Jill. Don’t Let Death Ruin Your Life: A Practical Guide to Reclaiming Happiness after the Death of a Loved One. New York: Plume, 2002. A former television correspondent and print journalist, Brooke attempts to provide “solutions that can transform grief into practical motivation.” Her focus is on the growth that can come from the loss of a loved one. She includes

Grief and Mourning

153

details of her personal experiences with loss, tips on how to preserve memories, information on compiling family histories, and ideas on how to reach out to friends during the challenging time of bereavement. Includes a bibliography and an odd but interesting appendix listing achievers who lost a parent early in life. This list includes dozens of names with the person’s age at the time they lost their parent. 1124. Brooks, Anne M. The Grieving Time: A Year’s Account of Recovery from Loss. Garden City, NY: Dial Press, 1985. Published as The Grieving Time: A Month by Month Account of Recovery from Loss by Delapeake, Wilmington, DE, in 1982. 1125. Brown, Erica. Loss, Change, and Grief: An Educational Experience. London: D. Fulton Publishers, 1999. 1126. Brown, Reg. Surviving the Loss of a Loved One: Living through Grief. Grantham, MA: Autumn House Publications, 1999. 1127. Bruce, Elizabeth J., and Cynthia L. Schultz. Nonfinite Loss and Grief: A Psychoeducational Approach. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes Publishing, 2001. 1128. Buckingham, Robert W., and Sandra K. Huggard. Coping with Grief. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1991. 1129. Canfield, Jack, and Mark Victor Hansen. Chicken Soup for the Grieving Soul: Stories about Life, Death, and Overcoming the Loss of a Loved One. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, 2003. Part of the popular Chicken Soup series, this book offers several stories to help those grieving. Stories address matters of faith, final gifts, death and children, memories, coping with grief, and healing and recovery from bereavement. Includes a list of organizations that support those grieving, including Web addresses, as well as information about Compassionate Friends, an international self-help bereavement organization. Also includes extensive information about the authors and contributors. 1130. Caplan, Sandi, and Gordon Lang. Grief’s Courageous Journey. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1995. 1131. Carr, Arthur C., Bernard Schoenberg, David Peretz, Austin H. Kutscher, and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Grief: Selected Readings. New York: Health Sciences Publishing, 1975. Part of the Journal Reprint Series. This book is part of a series of article reprints from the Foundation of Thanatology intended to bring together mandatory readings for scholars and students on each death-related subject. This collection, focusing on grief and bereavement, includes articles and essays on contemporary theoretical views on mourning; descriptive and empirical studies on bereavement (including works by Colin

154

Chapter 16

Murray Parkes and Erich Lindemann); text on grief in childhood, pathological grief, and anticipatory grief; and a review of grief literature. 1132. 1964.

Champagne, Marian. Facing Life Alone. New York: Bobbs-Merrill Co.,

1133. Churchill, Dorothy. From Mourning to Morning: Six Years Later. Astoria, OR: S Dot S Publishing, 1997. 1134. Cleiren, Marc. Bereavement and Adaptation: A Comparative Study of the Aftermath of Death. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing/Taylor & Francis, 1993. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Cleiren provides an extensive academic investigation into adaptation following bereavement. He explores other theories including those by John Bowlby, Colin Murray Parkes, Peter Marris, Ronald W. Ramsay, J. Gauthier, and W. L. Marshall. Cleiren also presents empirical research on bereavement; the author’s Leiden Bereavement Study; and the mode of death, kinship, and functioning after bereavement. Research is illustrated in several graphs and charts. Includes a bibliography. 1135. Cochran, Larry, and Emily Claspell. The Meaning of Grief. New York: Greenwood Press, 1987. 1136. Collick, Elizabeth. Through Grief: The Bereavement Journey. London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1988. Foreword by Claire Rayner. 1137. Collins, Vincent J. Grief: How to Life with Sorrow. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1966. 1138. Cornils, Stanley P. The Mourning After: How to Manage Grief Wisely. 7th ed. Saratoga, CA: R&E Publishers, 1990. Also published in 1995. Formerly published as Managing Grief Wisely in 1967, 1971, 1974, 1977, and 1983. During the writing of this book, Cornils was pastor emeritus at the First Baptist Church of Vallejo, California. The work is a 91-page booklet on dealing with and managing grief. Includes chapters on manifestations of grief, feelings of guilt, anger, abnormal grief, the work of mourning, acceptance, readjustment, and ambivalence. 1139. ———. Your Healing Journey through Grief: A Practical Guide to Grief Management. San Francisco, CA: Robert D. Reed Publishers, 2003. 1140. Coryell, Deborah Morris. Healing through the Shadow of Loss. Rochester, VT: Healing Arts Press, 2004. Published by Shiva Foundation, Santa Fe, NM, in 1997.

Grief and Mourning

155

1141. Cox, Gerry R., Robert A. Bendiksen, and Robert G. Stevenson. Complicated Grieving and Bereavement: Understanding and Treating People Experiencing Loss. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2001. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1142. Crenshaw, David A. Bereavement: Counseling the Grieving throughout the Life Cycle. New York: Continuum, 1990. Part of the Continuum Counseling Series. Crenshaw examines grief from the perspective of the life cycle. Chapters offer guidance on helping children, adolescents, adults, and seniors with grief. Crenshaw presents the seven tasks of mourning: acknowledging the reality of the loss, identifying and exploring the emotions of grief, commemorating the loss, acknowledging ambivalence, resolving ambivalence, letting go, and moving on. Consequences of unresolved grief, normal and pathological bereavement, and giving permission to not grieve by loved ones are also discussed. Includes an appendix of associations and organizations that help the bereaved. Foreword by William Van Ornum, editor of the Continuum Counseling Series. 1143. Curley, Terence P. Six Steps for Managing Loss: A Catholic Guide through Grief. New York: Alba House Publishers, 1997. 1144. Cutler, William, and Richard Peace. Dealing with Grief and Loss: Hope in the Midst of Pain. Littleton, CO: Serendipity House, 1990. 1145. Dane, Barbara O., and Carol Levine. AIDS and the New Orphans: Coping with Death. Westport, CT: Auburn House, 1994. 1146. Dane, Barbara O., and Samuel O. Miller. AIDS: Intervening with Hidden Grievers. New York: Auburn House, 1992. 1147. Danto, Bruce L., and Austin H. Kutscher. Suicide and Bereavement. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1977. Distributed by Arno Press. 1148. Davidson, Glenn W. Understanding Mourning: A Guide for Those Who Grieve. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1984. 1149. Davidson, Joyce, and Kenneth J. Doka. Living with Grief: At Work, at School, at Worship. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1999. Also published by Brunner/Mazel, Levittown, PA. 1150. Davies, Phyllis. Grief: Climb toward Understanding, Self-Help When You Are Struggling. New York: Carol Communications, 1988. Also published by Sunnybank Publishers, San Luis Obispo, CA, in 1987. 1151. Dawson, Ann. A Season of Grief: A Comforting Companion for Difficult Days. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 2002.

156

Chapter 16

A newspaper columnist, Dawson offers a collection of stories, prayers, quotes, and poems to help those recovering from a significant loss. Dawson also writes about the death of her teenage son. 1152. DeBellis, Robert. Suffering: Psychological and Social Aspects in Loss, Grief, and Care. New York: Haworth Press, 1986. Also cited as Suffering the Psychological and Social Aspects in Loss, Grief, and Care. 1153. DeLone, Susan Talia. Love, Loss, and Healing: A Woman’s Guide to Transforming Grief. Portland, OR: Sibyl Publishing, 1998. 1154. Dockrey, Karen. Will I Ever Feel Good Again?: When You’re Overwhelmed by Grief and Loss. Grand Rapids, MI: F. H. Revell, 1993. 1155. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Challenges, and Strategies for Practice. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2002. 1156. ———. Living with Grief after Sudden Loss: Suicide, Homicide, Accident, Heart Attack, Stroke. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1996. Distributed by Taylor & Francis, Bristol, CT. 1157. Doka, Kenneth J., and John Breaux. Living with Grief: Loss in Later Life. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2002. 1158. Doka, Kenneth J., and Joyce D. Davidson. Caregiving and Loss: Family Needs, Professional Responses. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2001. 1159. ———. Living with Grief: Who We Are, How We Grieve. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1998. Also published by Brunner/Mazel, Philadelphia. 1160. ———. Living with Grief When Illness Is Prolonged. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1997. Originally published in 1977. 1161. Doyle, Polly. Grief Counseling and Sudden Death: A Manual and Guide. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1980. 1162. 1978.

Dunlop, Richard S. Helping the Bereaved. Bowie, MD: Charles Press,

1163. Ellard, John, and Vamik D. Volkan. Normal and Pathological Responses to Bereavement. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974. 1164. Ellis, Thomas M. This Thing Called Grief: New Understandings of Loss. Minneapolis, MN: Syren Book Company, 2006. Ellis, a licensed marriage and family therapist and executive director of the Center for Grief, Loss, and Transition, offers a collection of stories about loss along with suggestions for transforming grief into a method of healing. He refers to grief as a “crazy-making, complicated process [that] affects every dimension

Grief and Mourning

157

of the self.” In addition to stories, this 106-page paperback includes several inspirational poems, a list of organizations, and a bibliography divided by subject. 1165. Engram, Sara. Mortal Matters: When a Loved One Dies. Kansas City, MO: Andrews McMeel Publishing, 1990. Engram’s book is one for comforting the soul but also dealing with the practical issues following the death of a loved one. Engram also writes a nationally syndicated column called Mortal Matters about death topics. Among the topics are helping children understand death, acknowledging grief, using stories to explain death, recalling memories, learning to survive, healthy mourning, guilt and grieving, unexpected death, living wills, disposition issues, funerals, rites and rituals, financial issues, and organ and tissue donation. 1166. Ericsson, Stephanie. Companion through the Darkness: Inner Dialogues on Grief. New York: HarperCollins, 1993. In a book for the grieving, Ericsson defines grief as the “constant reawakening that things are now different.” She includes excerpts from her journal, along with short essays on loss. The journal began after the loss of her husband while she was pregnant with their only child. An acclaimed excerpt from the book was published in the Utne Reader. 1167. Figley, Charles R. Traumatology of Grieving: Conceptual, Theoretical, and Treatment Foundations. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. 1168. Figley, Charles R., and Brian E. Bride. Death and Trauma: The Traumatology of Grieving. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1997. 1169. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Mourning Handbook: The Most Comprehensive Resource Offering Practical and Compassionate Advice on Coping with All Aspects of Death and Dying. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1995. First Fireside edition. 1170. Freeman, Lucy. The Sorrow and the Fury: Overcoming Hurt and Loss from Childhood to Old Age. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978. Appropriate for both professionals and those seeking guidance for coping with loss, Freeman’s text features case studies that illuminate her gain-through-loss theory. She discusses the sense of loss, the mourning process, first losses, the rewards of loss, combating loss through creativity, using laughter to deal with loss, loss during early years and later in life, and tools for facing losses. Includes a bibliography arranged by chapter. 1171. Freeman, Stephen J. Grief and Loss: Understanding the Journey. Belmont, CA: Thomson/Brooks/Cole, 2005. With both practical and theoretical information, Freeman provides a general exploration of grief and loss. He also writes about the many emotions around grief and mourning experienced by those in the helping professions. The text is

158

Chapter 16

appropriate for a high school or college level course on bereavement. Includes numerous references. 1172. Freese, Arthur S. Help for Your Grief: Turning Emotional Loss into Growth. New York: Schocken Books, 1977. 1173. Frigo, Victoria, Diane Fisher, and Mary Lou Cook. You Can Help Someone Who’s Grieving: A How-To Healing Handbook. New York: Penguin Books, 1996. The authors offer insights and practical advice for friends, family, and coworkers of the bereaved. Chapters discuss grief support groups, organizing memorial services, funerals, writing sympathy notes, the spectrum of feelings following a death, special considerations with the death of a child or a suicide, journals, and communicating with the bereaved. A general theme is the importance of grieving. 1174. Froman, Paul Kent. After You Say Goodbye: When Someone You Love Dies of AIDS. San Francisco, CA: Chronicle Books, 1992. 1175. Ganeri, Anita. Journey’s End: Death and Mourning. New York: Peter Bedrick Books, 1998. Also published by Evans Brothers, London. 1176. Gary, Juneau Mahan, and Linda Remolino. Coping with Loss and Grief through Online Support Groups. Greensboro, NC: ERIC Clearinghouse on Counseling and Student Services, 2000. 1177. Gaughen, Shasta. Coping with Death. San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2003. Also published by Thomson Gale, Detroit. 1178. Gentles, Ian. Care for the Dying and the Bereaved. Toronto, Ontario: Anglican Book Center, 1982. 1179. Gerber, Irwin, Alfred Wiener, Austin H. Kutscher, Delia Battin, Arthur Arkin, and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Perspectives on Bereavement. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Published by Arno Press, New York, in 1979, as a volume in the Foundation of Thanatology series and the Continuing Series on Thanatology. The editors have compiled articles that address bereavement from sociological, pediatric, personal, religious, and therapeutic perspectives. General and future perspectives are also included. Subjects discussed include widowhood, grief work, mourning among children, pastoral issues, the grief work cycle in Judaism, suggestions for office nurses, psychoanalytic therapy, parental loss, nursing care for the family of the terminally ill, sympathy calls, death-related communication, and the concept of a model counseling center for the bereaved. Appendixes include surveys on advice of the bereaved for others who are grieving and a comparison of psychiatrists to nonpsychiatrists in their attitudes toward death

Grief and Mourning

159

and bereavement. Includes a selected bibliography by Daniel J. Cherico, Martin L. Kutscher, and Austin H. Kutscher. 1180. Glasscock, Geoffrey, and Megan Gressor. Coping with Loss and Grief. London: Robinson Publishing, 1995. 1181. Glick, Ira O., Robert S. Weiss, and Colin Murray Parkes. The First Year of Bereavement. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1974. Published under the Wiley-Interscience imprint. This title is a research report sometimes referred to as the Harvard Bereavement Study, which was developed from work at the Harvard Laboratory of Community Psychiatry. It offers two theoretical advances: a realization that Erich Lindemann’s early conceptualization of bereavement as a typical life crisis was an oversimplification and an “increased understanding of the ‘normality’ and benign predictive significance of many of the strange individual reactions of widows previously thought to be unhealthy.” The authors discuss the impact of death, early emotional and physical reactions to bereavement, the availability and use of help, ceremonies of leave-taking, grieving, widowhood, changing relationships, the recovery process, patterns of recovery, and dealing with loss. A summary of the research and methods used is included at the front of the book. 1182. Golden, Thomas R., and James E. Miller. When a Man Faces Grief: Twelve Practical Ideas to Help You Heal from Loss. Fort Wayne, IN: Willowgreen Press, 1998. Also cited as When a Man Faces Grief: A Man You Know Is Grieving. 1183. Gordon, Albert I. In Times of Sorrow. New York: United Synagogues of America, 1949. 1184. Gorer, Geoffrey. Death, Grief, and Mourning. New York: Doubleday, 1965. Also published by Arno Press, New York, in 1976, as part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. 1185. Goulding, Mary McClure. Time to Say Goodbye: Moving beyond Loss. Watsonville, CA: Papier-Mache Press, 1996. 1186. Grainger, Roger. The Social Symbolism of Grief and Mourning. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1998. 1187. Graves, Sandra L. Expressions of Healing: Embracing the Process of Grief. North Hollywood, CA: Newcastle Publishing Company, 1994. 1188. Griffin, Mary, and Carol Felsenthal. Cry for Help. New York: Doubleday, 1983. 1189. Grollman, Earl A. Living When a Loved One Has Died. Boston: Beacon Press, 1977. Reprint in 1987.

160

Chapter 16

1190. ———, ed. What Helped Me When My Loved One Died. Boston: Beacon Press, 1981. 1191. Guntzelman, Joan. Blessed Grieving: Reflections on Life’s Losses. Winona, MN: St. Mary’s Press, 1994. 1192. Hafer, W. Keith. Coping with Bereavement from Death or Divorce. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1981. 1193. Hansen, James C., and Thomas T. Frantz. Death and Grief and the Family. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation, 1984. Part of the Family Therapy Collections, volume 8. 1194. Harris, Audrey Jane Axelrod. Why Did He Die? Minneapolis, MN: Lerner Publications, 1965. Illustrated by Susan Sallade Dalke. 1195. Hartnett, Johnette. Different Losses, Different Issues: What to Expect and How to Help. South Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993. 1196. Harvey, John H. Embracing Their Memory: Loss and the Social Psychology of Storytelling. Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1996. 1197. ———. Give Sorrow Words: Perspectives on Loss and Trauma. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 2000. 1198. ———. Perspectives on Loss: A Sourcebook. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1998. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. 1199. Harvey, John H., and Eric D. Miller. Loss and Trauma: General and Close Relationship Perspectives. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. 1200. Heegaard, Marge Eaton. Grief: A Natural Reaction to Loss. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 2002. 1201. ———. When Someone Very Special Dies. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1988. 1202. Henry, DeWitt. Sorrow’s Company: Writers on Loss and Grief. Boston: Beacon Press, 2001. 1203. Hickey, Tom. Loss Reaction and Grief Management. University Park, PA: Gerontology Center, Pennsylvania State University, 1976. 1204. Hickman, Martha Whitmore. Healing after Loss: Daily Meditations for Working through Grief. New York: Avon Books, 1994. 1205. Howard, Deborah. Sunsets: Reflections for Life’s Final Journey. Wheaton, IL: Crossway Books, 2005.

Grief and Mourning

161

Howard, a certified hospice and palliative care nurse, offers words of encouragement from a Christian perspective for those who have lost a loved one. She discusses the denial of death, the afterlife, and preparing for death. Includes an appendix of frequently asked questions about hospice. 1206. Huber, Jim. A Thousand Goodbyes: A Son’s Reflection on Living, Dying, and the Things That Matter Most. Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson, 2001. An Emmy Award–winning CNN sports journalist, Huber tells the story of the redeemed relationship between himself and his father that developed during his father’s final days. This book is a poignant exploration of dying and the ensuing grief of a son. 1207. Hughes, Marylou. Bereavement and Support: Healing in a Group Environment. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1995. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 1208. Hughs, Hugh Llewelyn. Peace at the Last. London: Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation, 1960. 1209. Ironside, Virginia. You’ll Get over It: The Rage of Bereavement. London: Hamish Hamilton/Penguin, 1996. Ironside’s book moves through all the emotions and physical effects of bereavement from shock to the practical needs of grieving. She discusses fear, powerlessness, guilt, rage, misery, wills and other legal matters, communicating about death, spiritual matters, and potential benefits from a period of bereavement. Includes a list of British organizations for support and suggestions for further reading. A postscript describes the author’s own emotions following her father’s death. 1210. Jackson, Edgar N. The Many Faces of Grief. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1977. 1211. ———. Understanding Grief: Its Roots, Dynamics, and Treatment. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1957. In this major and early work on grief, Jackson provides both an introduction to and a scholarly analysis of grief and bereavement. He discusses the definition of grief, the dynamics of grief, the expression of grief feelings, dynamic comprehension of death’s significance, grief communication, building healthful attitudes toward grief, how religious practices can sustain the grief-stricken, grief manifestations, abnormal grief, death attitudes, grief precipitating a deep disturbance, and funeral sermons. He also examines the roles of identification, substitution, and guilt in relation to grief. Includes notes, a selected bibliography, and an index. 1212. ———. You and Your Grief. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1962. Originally published by Channel Press, New York, in 1961.

162

Chapter 16

1213. Jacobs, Selby. Pathologic Grief: Maladaptation to Loss. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1993. 1214. ———. Traumatic Grief: Diagnosis, Treatment, and Prevention. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. 1215. James, John W., and Frank Cherry. The Grief Recovery Handbook: A Step-by-Step Program for Moving beyond Loss. New York: Harper & Row, 1988. Revised edition entitled The Grief Recovery Handbook: The Action Program for Moving beyond Death, Divorce, and Other Losses, with John W. James and Russell Friedman as authors, published by HarperPerennial, New York, in 1998. 1216. Jeffreys, J. Shep. Coping with Workplace Grief: Dealing with Loss, Trauma, and Change. Boston: Thomson/Course Technology, 2005. 1217. ———. Helping Grieving People—When Tears Are Not Enough: A Handbook for Care Providers. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2005. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Jeffreys, a licensed psychologist and certified thanatologist, offers a guide for the helping professions and other caregivers. He emphasizes that the book is written to meet both the clinical needs of health care professionals but also clergy, volunteers, and family caregivers. The narrative attempts to assist the reader with understanding the three aspect of “exquisite witness,” the “heart” dimension (self-awareness), the “head” dimension (understanding the human grief response), and the “hands” dimension (supportive and clinical interventions). Jeffreys covers a broad spectrum of topics, including the social and cultural context of grief, cultural diversity considerations, psychospiritual aspects of healing grief, death-related rituals, definitions of grief, the three conditions of grief, the seven principles of human grief, loss and death in the family, the family loss genogram, healing tasks, childhood bereavement, sibling loss, self-help support groups, older adult grief, terminal illness, medical dilemmas, patient rights, bioethical considerations, and patient dignity. Includes a provider self-assessment tool; case studies; and an epilogue discussing life, loss, and grief along with “reflections of a grief psychologist’s wife.” Appendixes feature an extensive list of additional readings, organization resources with contact information and websites, and a sample advance medical directive. Also includes an index. 1218. Jenkins, Bill. What to Do When the Police Leave: A Guide to the First Days of Traumatic Loss. Richmond, VA: WBJ Press, 2001. 1219. 1995.

Jensen, Amy Hillyard. Healing Grief. Redmond, WA: Medic Publishing,

1220. Jozefowski, Joanne T. The Phoenix Phenomenon: Rising from the Ashes of Grief. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1999.

Grief and Mourning

163

Jozefowski refers to the bereaved individuals whose stories she shares in the book as “Phoenix Grievers” for their courage and resiliency. She offers the grieving assistance with understanding their familiarity with grief, adjusting to the five developmental stages of grief, using resources and tools to survive and grow through each phase of grieving, learning how the bereaved can grow and find inspirational strength, indentifying the potential for personal growth, learning metaphors for each stage, and understanding grief’s opportunities to create meaning and honor a loved one’s life and death. In doing so, she discusses the anatomy and physiology of grief, bereavement through both natural and catastrophic causes, shock and denial, anxiety and fear, grief work, creative atonement, forgiveness, self-actualization, and moving beyond mourning. Includes an appendix offering two sources of additional material on the subject, a brief bibliography, and a list of titles labeled “supportive literature.” Foreword by Therese A. Rando, the Institute for the Study and Treatment of Loss in Warwick, Rhode Island. 1221. Kalish, Richard A. Midlife Loss: Coping Strategies. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, 1989. 1222. Kast, Verena. A Time to Mourn: Growing through the Grief Process. Einsiedeln, Switzerland: Daimon Verlag, 1988. Translated from the 1982 German edition Trauern: Phasen und Chancen des psychischen Prozesses, published by Kreuz Verlag, Stuttgart. A professor of psychology at the University of Zurich, Kast explains the role of mourning in the therapeutic process in this text developed from her doctoral dissertation. She emphasizes how mourning can empower individuals and foster personal growth. Referring to mourning as a time for renewal, introspection, and incubation, Kast notes that without this important process during bereavement, depressive illness and other issues can develop. Includes notes and a bibliography. 1223. Katafiasz, Karen. Grief Therapy: Out of Pain Can Come Profound Transforming Healing. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1993. 1224. Kennedy, Eugene C. Cardinal Bernardin’s Stations of the Cross: Transforming Our Grief and Loss into New Life. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2003. 1225. Keogh, Martin J. As Much Time as It Takes: A Guide for the Bereaved, Their Family, and Friends. Charlottesville, VA: Hampton Roads Publishing Co., 2005. 1226. Kissane, David, and Sidney Bloch. Family Grief Therapy. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. 1227. Klass, Dennis. Parental Grief: Solace and Resolution. New York: Springer, 1988. Volume 9 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor.

164

Chapter 16

Klass, a professor at Webster University in St. Louis, discusses the process and resolution of parental grief and also illustrates the progression in four contexts. These include the anatomy of social support through a look at The Compassionate Friends, a worldwide family of bereaved parents; rage experienced by parents of murdered children; ways the bereaved help the dying; and the psychotherapeutic process. Appendixes include a narrative explaining the author’s perspective on parent grief and John Bowlby’s Model of Grief and the Problem of Identification. Includes references and an index. 1228. Klass, Dennis, Phyllis R. Silverman, and Stephen L. Nickman, eds. Continuing Bonds: New Understandings of Grief. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1996. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. Noting in their preface that the continuing bond with the deceased in the resolution of grief has been “overlooked or undervalued” in much of the scholarly and clinical literature, the authors and contributors surface a new model of grief in the analyses and critiques of the current model of grief. Topics discussed include historical perspectives, grief recurrence, children’s construction of deceased parents, husband sanctification in widowhood, the sometimes triadic relationship of widowed persons’ new marriages, adolescent sibling bereavement, parental bereavement, retroactive loss in adopted persons, grief and birth origin fantasies of adopted women, ongoing attachment issues, adult child loss, and the deceased child in the psychic and social worlds of bereaved parents during the resolution of grief. The editors conclude with a definition of the continuing bond, the paradox of letting go and remaining involved, legitimization of old grief, problem behaviors, and implications for therapeutic intervention. Contact information and brief biographical narrative on each of the nineteen contributors is included. Also contains a limited index, given the scope of material covered. 1229. Klein, Sandra Jacoby. Heavenly Hurts: Surviving AIDS-Related Deaths and Losses. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1230. Kolf, June Cerza. How Can I Help?: How to Support Someone Who Is Grieving. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1999. 1231. ———. When Will I Stop Hurting?: Dealing with a Recent Death. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 1987. 1232. Koolman, Gladys. After the Flowers Have Gone. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1973. 1233. Kouri, Mary K. Keys to Dealing with the Loss of a Loved One. Hauppauge, NY: Barron’s, 1991. 1234. Krauss, Pesach, and Morrie Goldfischer. Why Me?: Coping with Grief, Loss, and Change. New York: Bantam Books, 1988.

Grief and Mourning

165

Noting in his introduction that “too many people make the mistake of judging life by its length rather than its depth,” Krauss emphasizes the need for the grieving to use their emotional and spiritual resources to transform grief into self-discovery. A rabbi and chaplain at the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center in New York, Krauss discusses achieving self-awareness, life as a series of entrances and exits, thinking positively, growing during a time of trouble, and the drive for meaning. Chapters begin with selected quotes. 1235. Kreis, Bernadine, and Alice Pattie. Up from Grief: Patterns of Recovery. Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1982. Published by Seabury Press, New York, in 1969. 1236. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, and David Kessler. On Grief and Grieving: Finding the Meaning of Grief through the Five Stages of Loss. New York: Scribner, 2005. Published after Kübler-Ross’s death in 2004, this book includes Kessler’s account of his own bereavement following her death. It reviews Kübler-Ross’s five stages of grief; explores the “inner and outer worlds of grief”; and discusses grief under such special circumstances as multiple losses through death, Alzheimer’s disease, suicide, sudden death, and disasters. Comments on childhood death are also included. 1237. Kuehn, Eileen. Loss: Understanding the Emptiness. Mankato, MN: LifeMatters, 2001. 1238. Kuenning, Delores. Helping People through Grief. Minneapolis, MN: Bethany House Publishers, 1987. In his foreword, Granger Westberg, author of Good Grief, notes that this is a textbook for “teaching caring people how to help helpfully.” Covering almost every imaginable kind of grief, Kuenning presents a handbook for assisting the bereaved. While focusing on various kinds of grief, she also suggests commonalities among all who grieve. Other topics discussed include talking with children about death, grief following a catastrophic death or suicide, dealing with lifethreatening or terminal illness, the death of a spouse, death as release, questions about God’s will in matters of death and dying, and unique bereavement issues associated with death following Alzheimer’s disease. All subjects are approached from a Christian perspective. Includes several lists of tips in each chapter as well as an extensive bibliography. 1239. Kumar, Sameet M. Grieving Mindfully: A Compassionate and Spiritual Guide to Coping with Loss. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2005. Defining grief as a personal journey, Kumar, a psychologist, provides a guide to loss from a Buddhist perspective. He discusses definitions of grief and mindfulness, the first year after a death, closure and transformation, the transformative search for meaning in grief, depression, learning from grief, and channeling grief. Includes a brief bibliography.

166

Chapter 16

1240. Kutscher, Austin H. But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort for Those Bereaved. New York: Frederick Fell, 1969. Also published and distributed by MSS Information Corp., New York. 1241. ———. For the Bereaved: The Road to Recovery. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1990. 1242. ———. For Those Bereaved: But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort. New York: Arno Press, 1980. 1243. Kutscher, Austin H., and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. For the Bereaved. New York: Frederick Fell, 1971. 1244. ———, eds. Religion and Bereavement. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1972. Also cited with the subtitle Counsel for the Physician/Advice for the Bereaved/Thoughts for the Clergyman. This work is an anthology of essays and quotations by clergy from various faith backgrounds, including Jewish, Catholic, Episcopal, Baptist, Lutheran, Presbyterian, Disciples of Christ, and Unitarian. 1245. Lamm, Maurice. Consolation: The Spiritual Journey beyond Grief. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society, 2004. 1246. Larson, Dale G. The Helper’s Journey: Working with People Facing Grief, Loss, and Life-Threatening Illness. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1993. 1247. Lawrenz, Mel, and Daniel Green. Life after Grief: How to Survive Loss and Trauma. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 1995. 1248. 1994.

Lee, Carol. Good Grief: Experiencing Loss. London: Fourth Estate,

1249. Leech, Peter, and Zeva Singer. Acknowledgment: Opening to the Grief of Unacceptable Loss. Laytonville, CA: Wintercreek Publications, 1988. 1250. Leick, Nini, and Marianne Davidsen-Nielsen. Healing Pain: Attachment, Loss, and Grief Therapy. New York: Routledge, 1991. 1251. Lendrum, Susan, and Gabrielle Syme. Gift of Tears: A Practical Approach to Loss and Bereavement Counseling. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1992. Published by Brunner-Routledge, New York, in 2004. 1252. Levang, Elizabeth, and Sherokee Ilse. Remembering with Love: Messages of Hope for the First Year. Minneapolis, MN: Deaconess Press, 1993. 1253. 1994.

Levine, Aaron. To Comfort the Bereaved. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson,

1254. 1989.

Levine, Stephen. A Gradual Awakening. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press,

Grief and Mourning

167

1255. ———. Unattended Sorrow: Recovering from Loss and Reviving the Heart. Emmaus, PA: Rodale Books, 2005. 1256. Leviton, Daniel, ed. Horrendous Death and Health: Toward Action. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. While intended to address the various “types of people-caused, premature deaths” that could terminate life “at any moment,” Leviton’s book essentially deals with such horrendous death as nuclear war and nuclear annihilation. A companion volume to Horrendous Death, Health, and Well-Being, this title discusses the treatment of the survivors of horrendous death and “action approaches from the grass roots.” Twelve articles focus on survivor-victims of homicide and nuclear war; survivor-victims of war and holocaust; the psychology of survival-directed action; educational approaches for helping young children cope with nuclear annihilation; the establishment of the Consortium on Peace, Research, Education, and Development; peace education; prevention of war; citizen diplomacy programs; and theories of children’s love and peace behaviors. 1257. 1946.

Liebman, Joshua Loth. Peace of Mind. New York: Simon & Schuster,

1258. Lightner, Candy, and Nancy Hathaway. Giving Sorrow Words: How to Cope with Grief and Get on with Your Life. New York: Time Warner, 1990. 1259. Lintermans, Gloria, and Marilyn Stolzman. The Healing Power of Grief: The Journey through Loss to Life and Laughter. Belgium, WI: Champion Press, 2006. 1260. Linzer, N., ed. Understanding Grief and Bereavement. New York: Yeshiva University Press and KTAV Publishing House, 1977. 1261. Littlewood, Jane. Aspects of Grief: Bereavement in Adult Life. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1992. Littlewood, a lecturer in social policy and administration at Loughborough University of Technology, begins her comprehensive study of adult bereavement and the process of grieving with a review of Western attitudes toward death and dying. She illustrates how these attitudes form the foundation of the way in which adults typically grieve today. She also focuses on death rituals and funeral rites and their effects on grieving. Littlewood looks at adult relationships and their connection with complicated and uncomplicated grief; special circumstances surrounding individuals’ deaths, and differences in grieving based on the relationship to the deceased. Includes a bibliography and name and subject indexes. 1262. Lord, Janice Harris. No Time for Goodbyes: Coping with Grief, Anger, and Injustice after a Tragic Death. Ventura, CA: Pathfinder Publishing, 1987.

168

Chapter 16

1263. Lund, Dale A. Men Coping with Grief. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1264. Mack, Stanley. Janet and Me: An Illustrated Story of Love and Loss. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2004. 1265. MacNab, Francis A. Life after Loss: Getting over Grief, Getting on with Life. Philadelphia: Millenium, 1989. Also published in Newtown, Australia. 1266. Malkinson, Ruth, and Simon Rubin. Traumatic and Nontraumatic Loss and Bereavement: Clinical Theory and Practice. Madison, CT: Psychosocial Press, 2000. 1267. Manning, Doug. Comforting Those Who Grieve: A Guide for Helping Others. San Francisco, CA: Harper & Row, 1985. 1268. ———. Don’t Take My Grief Away from Me. Hereford, TX: Insight Books, 1979. Published by Harper & Row, San Francisco, CA, in 1984, as Don’t Take My Grief Away. 1269. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, Austin H. Kutscher, Eric R. Marcus, Howard C. Raether, Vanderlyn R. Pine, Irene B. Seeland, Daniel J. Cherico, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Grief and the Loss of an Adult Child. New York: Praeger, 1988. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. The editors provide a collection of articles on the grief that follows the loss of an adult child as well as other relationships. Articles are grouped into sections on the loss of an adult child; grief in selected loss relationships, for example, in-laws, widowers, grandparents, and the elderly widowed; interdisciplinary approaches to bereavement; and funeral service concepts in dealing with loss and grief. Subjects receiving some treatment include acute grief; children with cancer; grandparent grief for an adult child; and grief in nontraditional relationships, including extramarital affairs, cohabitating couples, and homosexuals. Includes an index and brief information on the contributors. 1270. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, and Lillian G. Kutscher. Loss, Grief, and Bereavement: A Guide for Counseling. New York: Praeger, 1985. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. 1271. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, Howard C. Raether, Austin H. Kutscher, J. Bruce Powers, Irene B. Seeland, Robert DeBellis, and Daniel J. Cherico, eds. Acute Grief: Counseling the Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press, 1981. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. The editors present numerous articles that provide an overview of loss, grief, and bereavement; review experiences of grief and bereavement; discuss counseling the bereaved; and explore survivor expectations associated with acute grief.

Grief and Mourning

169

Notable chapter topics include the type of death as a determinant in acute grief, emotional involvement of the family immediately preceding death, facilitation of mourning after a natural disaster, grief and bereavement in the military, SIDS, murder in schools, rescaling therapy, the role of the funeral director as a counselor of the bereaved, clergy and mourning, biochemistry of acute grief with regard to neoplasia, and the psychosocial value of a home funeral. Oddly, most of the articles on acute grief and survivor expectations are about the funeral ritual and the role of the funeral director. On the acknowledgments page, the editors offer a definition of thanatology as a “new subspecialty of medicine . . . involved in scientific and humanistic inquiries and the application of the knowledge derived there to the subjects of the psychological aspects of dying; reactions to loss, death, and grief; and recovery from bereavement.” Includes an index and information about each contributor. 1272. Markham, Ursula. Element Guide to Bereavement: Your Questions Answered. Boston: Element Books, 1996. 1273.

Marris, Peter. Loss and Change. New York: Pantheon Books, 1974.

1274. Marshall, George N. Facing Death and Grief: A Sensible Perspective for the Modern Person. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1981. 1275. Martin, John D., and Frank D. Ferris. I Can’t Stop Crying: It’s So Hard When Someone You Love Dies. Toronto, Ontario: Key Porter Books, 1992. 1276. Martin, Sheila. Saying Goodbye with Love: A Step-by-Step Guide through the Details of Death. New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1999. 1277. Martin, Sherry Hendricks. Beginning Again: Tools for the Journey through Grief. Edmond, OK: Greystone Press, 2006. 1278. Martin, Terry L., and Kenneth J. Doka. Men Don’t Cry . . . Women Do: Transcending Gender Stereotypes of Grief. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 2000. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Acknowledging that there is “substantial knowledge about the stimulus (i.e., loss, death), the generic response (i.e., grief, mourning), and many of the influencing variables” in responding to the death of a loved one, the authors aim to focus their research on the “major mediator between all these, that is, the mourner himself or herself.” Their book examines gender differences during bereavement with discussion on patterns of grief, dissonant responses, personality as a shaper of patterns, culture as a shaping agent, the implications of adaptive strategies for counselors, and strategies for self-help and intervention. The authors’ research tools, including the grief pattern inventory; extensive references; a bibliography; and an index are incorporated.

170

Chapter 16

1279. Matse, Jan, H. Faber, and Marc-Armand-Jean-Marie Nevejan. Bereavement: Three Aspects of Mourning for the Bereaved and for Those Who Want to Help Them. London: Butterworth Press, 1971. 1280. Mayfield, James L. Discovering Grace in Grief. Nashville, TN: Upper Room Books, 1994. 1281. McCabe, Marilyn. The Paradox of Loss: Toward a Relational Theory of Grief. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2003. 1282. McCarthy, Sarah. A Voice for Those Bereaved by Suicide. Dublin, Ireland: Veritas Publications, 2001. While telling the tragic story of her husband’s suicide, McCarthy offers a compassionate guide for those coping with the same unique grief. She also discusses the challenges of dealing with such a tragedy when she was left with four children under the age of ten. Their grief and her long road to recovery are detailed. She discusses feelings of guilt, blame, anxiety, depression, of being defeated by life, anger, alienation, forgiveness, hate, letting go, stress, and ultimate healing. A short list of suggested titles is included; however, they deal with grief in general and not the grief that follows suicide. 1283. McCormack, Jerusha Hull. Grieving: A Beginner’s Guide. Brewster, MA: Paraclete Press, 2006. Originally published by Darton, Longman and Todd, Ltd., London, in 2005. In this short guidebook for those grieving the death of a loved one, McCormack suggests that grief is a path of suffering through which many unexpected discoveries may occur. She points out the “signposts” where these discoveries may exist and where they may ultimately guide the reader to a new life. She notes that the book is “less of a consolatory piece than a tour guide.” Written from a Christian perspective, the text includes lots of practical advice along with quotes and poems. McCormack is a member of the Anglican Church of Ireland. 1284. 1998.

McIlwraith, Hamish. Coping with Bereavement. London: Oneworld,

1285. Menten, Ted. After Goodbye: How to Begin Again after the Death of Someone You Love. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1994. 1286. Metzgar, Margaret. A Time to Mourn, a Time to Dance. Appleton, WI: Aid Association for Lutherans/Quality Life Resources, 2000. Metzgar’s work is a comforting book with Bible verses, stories, photographs, and suggestions for coping with different kinds of loss. Includes an annotated bibliography and an excellent list of national support resources with descriptions, websites, email addresses, and hours of operation. Metzgar is founder of and primary therapist at the Transition and Loss Center in Seattle, Washington.

Grief and Mourning

171

1287. Miller, Jack Silvey. The Healing Power of Grief. New York: Seabury Press, 1978. A Crossroad book. 1288. Miller, James E. A Pilgrimage through Grief: Healing the Soul’s Hurt after Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1995. Includes photographs by the author. 1289. ———. Seasons of Grief and Healing: A Guide for Those Who Mourn. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 2000. Originally published as Winter Grief, Summer Grace in 1995. Focusing on how natural the grief process is, Miller validates the reader’s feelings of loss. He uses numerous quotations, Bible verses, and passages from literature in this 63-page book. Miller is an Indiana grief counselor and clergyman. 1290. Miller, Jolanda. You Can Become Whole Again: A Guide to Christians in Grieving. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1981. 1291. Miller, Robert J., and Stephen J. Hrycyniak. Grief Quest: Reflections for Men Coping with Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1996. Also cited as Grief Quest: Men Coping with Loss. Miller, a priest, offers ideas for men dealing with loss and grief. 1292. Miller, Sally Downham. Mourning and Dancing: A Memoir of Grief and Recovery. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, 1999. Miller’s memoir tells the story of her family’s bereavement and ultimate recovery following the death of her husband, Robert, from reticulum sarcoma. He died nine days after his diagnosis. Through her personal experience and work with grieving families, she has become a consultant, speaker, and writer on the subjects of grief and loss. 1293. Minamide, Elaine. How Should One Cope with Death? Farmington Hills, MI: Greenhaven Press, 2006. 1294. Minear, Paul Sevier. To Die and to Live: Christ’s Resurrection and Christian Vocation. New York: Seabury Press, 1977. Minear presents a book of comfort from a Christian perspective. 1295. Mitsch, Raymond R., and Lynn Brookside. Grieving the Loss of Someone You Love: Daily Meditations to Help You through the Grieving Process. Ventura, CA: Regal Books, 1993. Regal Books is a ministry of Gospel Light, a Christian publisher. Originally published by Servant Publications in 1993. A series of daily devotions, this book intends to help the reader work through the emotions of anger, guilt, fear, and depression. It offers guidance for coming to terms with loss from a Christian perspective. Includes quotes and Bible verses.

172

Chapter 16

1296. Mitscherlich, Alexander, and Margarete Mitscherlich. The Inability to Mourn: Principles of Collective Behavior. New York: Grove Press, 1975. Distributed by Random House. 1297. Moffat, M. J. In the Midst of Winter: Selections from the Literature of Mourning. New York: Vintage Books, 1982. 1298. Mogensen, Greg. Greeting the Angels: An Imaginal View of the Mourning Process. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1992. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1299. Moltmann, Jurgen. In the End, the Beginning: The Life of Hope. Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press, 2004. Also cited as being published by SCM Press, London. 1300. Montgomery, Herb, and Mary Ann Montgomery. Beyond Sorrow: Reflections on Death and Grief. Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1977. Features photographs by the authors. 1301. Moody, Raymond A. Jr., and Dianne Arcangel. Life after Loss: Conquering Grief and Finding Hope. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 2001. Arcangel is a former hospice chaplain and former director of the Elisabeth Kübler-Ross Center of Houston. Moody is the author of Life after Life, a bestselling classic on death and dying. He is also an authority on near-death experiences. This book discusses the stress of grief, emotions associated with grief, different types of grieving associated with varying kinds of loss, receiving sympathy, functional versus dysfunctional grief, adjusting to loss, transcending loss, blessings received from loss, and near-death experiences. Interesting sections are included on the effect of the Kennedy assassination and Princess Diana’s death on our perceptions of loss. Includes an extensive list of print and Internet resources, a directory of associations and organizations, and a glossary. 1302. Moore, James W. When Grief Breaks Your Heart. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1995. 1303. Moorey, James. Living with Grief and Mourning. New York: Manchester University Press, 1995. Distributed in the United States and Canada by St. Martin’s Press, New York. 1304. Morgan, John D. Death 101: A Workbook for Educating and Healing. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1305. ———. Personal Care in an Impersonal World: A Multidimensional Look at Bereavement. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1993. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.

Grief and Mourning

173

1306. Moriarty, David M., ed. The Loss of Loved Ones: The Effects of a Death in the Family on Personality Development. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1967. Originally published by Dutton, New York, in 1946. Foreword by Bardwell H. Flower. Contributions from Timothy Harrington. 1307. Morris, Sarah. Grief and How to Live with It. New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1972. 1308. Mundy, Linus. Grief Therapy for Men: How to Grieve Like a “Real” Man. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1997. 1309. Neimeyer, Robert A. Lessons of Loss: A Guide to Coping. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Published by Brunner-Routledge, Philadelphia, in 2001. 1310. ———. Meaning Reconstruction and the Experience of Loss. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association, 2001. 1311. Noel, Brook. Grief Steps: Ten Steps to Regroup, Rebuild, and Renew after Any Life Loss. Fredonia, WI: Champion Press, 2004. 1312. Noel, Brook, and Pamela D. Blair. I Wasn’t Ready to Say Goodbye: Surviving, Coping, and Healing after the Sudden Death of a Loved One. Belgium, WI: Champion Press, 2000. 1313. Nolen-Hoeksema, Susan, and Judith Larson. Coping with Loss. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999. Part of the LEA Series in Personality and Clinical Psychology, Irving B. Weiner, editor. Based on a long-term study of several hundred people who lost a loved one, called the Bereavement Coping Project, this book offers a scholarly exploration of the variety of ways in which people cope with the death of someone they love. Utilizing more than 300 bereavement experiences, the authors discuss different perspectives on loss, the special challenges of different types of losses, the effect of personality on coping, children and grief, growth and resilience following loss, and interventions. The book includes real-life stories, and it is highlighted by a section at the end titled “Voices,” in which grieving people talk about coping in their own words. Though important for researchers and scholars, the book is especially appropriate for hospice workers, clergy, and other caregivers. Includes extensive references and author and subject indexes. Nolen-Hoeksema is professor of psychology and director of the Gender and Mental Health Program at the University of Michigan. Larson is a private practice therapist in California. 1314. Nouwen, Henri J. M. The Wounded Healer. Garden City, NJ: Image Books, 1972. 1315. O’Connor, Nancy. Letting Go with Love: The Grieving Process. Tucson, AZ: La Mariposa Press, 1985.

174

Chapter 16

1316. O’Toole, Donna R. Healing and Growing through Grief. Burnsville, NC: Rainbow Connection, 1987. 1317. Oaks, Judy. Leaders Guide for Grief Recovery Support Groups. 2nd ed. Berea, KY: Center for Personal Recovery, 1994. 1318. Oates, Wayne Edward. Your Particular Grief. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1981. 1319. Osmont, Kelly. More Than Surviving: Caring for Yourself While You Grieve. Portland, OR: Nobility Press, 1990. 1320. Osmont, Kelly, and Marilyn McFarlane. Parting Is Not Goodbye: Coping with Grief in Creative, Healthy Ways. Portland, OR: Nobility Press, 1986. 1321. Osterweis, Marian, Fredric Solomon, and Morris Green, eds. Bereavement: Reactions, Consequences, and Care. Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1984. 1322. Parkes, Colin Murray. Bereavement: Studies of Grief in Adult Life. 2nd American ed. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1987. Originally published by the Tavistock Institute of Human Relations in 1972. Also published by International Universities Press in 1973. Published by Penguin Books, London, in 2004. This book is a scholarly text widely used in the training of health professionals, social workers, lawyers, clergy, and funeral directors. Parkes, senior lecturer in psychiatry at the London Hospital, Whitechapel, discusses anger and guilt following a death, atypical grief, determinants of grief, mitigation, and the gaining of a new identity. Foreword by John Bowlby. 1323. ———. Love and Loss: The Roots of Grief and Its Complications. New York: Routledge/Taylor & Francis, 1996. Dubbed a “doyen of bereavement research” by Margaret S. Stroebe, Parkes offers another important text on grief and bereavement. He focuses on the links between love and loss. He notes in his introduction that, “For most people love is the most profound source of pleasure in our lives, while the loss of those who we love is the most profound source of pain. Hence, love and loss are two sides of the same coin.” He goes on to point out that, “It is the very intransience of life that enhances love.” Based on a research project, Parkes explores these connections with discussion on attachment and love, patterns of attachment and patterns of grief, other influences on attachment and loss, and disorders of attachment and other psychiatric problems. Twenty-seven appendixes present and illustrate Parkes’s research. Includes a brief list of organizations concerned with attachment and loss, extensive references, and an index. 1324. Parkes, Colin Murray, and Robert S. Weiss. Recovery from Bereavement. New York: Basic Books, 1983.

Grief and Mourning

175

As with The First Year of Bereavement (Glick, Weiss, and Parkes, 1974), this book, considered a classic of thanatological literature, also is based on the Harvard Bereavement Study, which documented how widows and widowers under forty-five years of age coped with bereavement. This work, unlike the first, examines why some in the study had significant challenges to recovery when they suffered immediate, unexpected grief, the reasons for intense anger and guilt, and why some had lasting difficulties in adjustment. Includes tables and an index. 1325. Payne, Sheila, Sandra Horn, and Marilyn Relf. Loss and Bereavement. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 1999. Part of the Health Psychology series, Sheilla Payne and Sandra Horn, editors. In an effort to provide students with an understanding of specific models of adaptation to loss and important theoretical perspectives, the authors discuss how conceptual models have been used in clinical and community interventions and critique them. This comprehensive text examines the many variations to approaching loss and bereavement. Special attention is given to loss and bereavement in social and cultural contexts, emphasizing the significant diversity of approaches. Includes extensive references. 1326. Peacock, Carol Antoinette. Death and Dying. Portland, OR: Green Earth Books, 2005. Peacock, a child psychologist, presents this text on grieving as a guidebook with specific steps for dealing with the pain of loss. 1327. Pearson, Althea. Growing through Loss and Grief: Dealing with Life’s Tough Times. London: Marshall Pickering, 1998. 1328. Pike, Diane Kennedy. Life Is Victorious!: How to Grow through Grief. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1976. Also published by Pocket Books, New York, in 1977. This book is a positive, cheery approach to dealing with grief. 1329. Pincus, Lily. Death and the Family: The Importance of Mourning. New York: Pantheon Books, 1974. Also published by Vintage Paperbacks in 1976, and Random House, New York, in 1976. A frequently cited classic of bereavement literature, Pincus’s book uses personal stories gleaned from her work as a psychotherapist and social worker to relay the critical importance of the bereavement process. She examines the effects of grief on marriages, widowhood, repressed mourning, and effective methods and tools for helping the bereaved. Pincus founded the Institute for Marital Studies at the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations in London. She notes in her preface that she was seventy-five years old when she began writing this book. 1330. Pollock, George H. The Mourning-Liberation Process. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1989. Published in two volumes.

176

Chapter 16

In this extensive investigation into the mourning-liberation process, Pollock discusses mourning and adaptation, parent and sibling loss in childhood, abandonment, the vulnerability associated with loss, manifestations of abnormal mourning, issues associated with anniversaries and time, Freudian psychotherapy, abandoning parents and abusive caretakers, and mourning and memorialization through music. Pollock also gives general commentary on loss and creativity. Includes references and name and subject indexes. 1331. Prend, Ashley Davis. Transcending Loss: Understanding the Lifelong Impact of Grief and How to Make It Meaningful. New York: Berkley Books, 1997. A psychotherapist and grief counselor, Prend suggests that death offers an opportunity for a new type of relationship based on memory, spirit, and love rather than physical presence. She discusses the shock of death and the ensuing grief journey, the lifelong impact of grief, and “roadblocks and detours” to transcendence of loss and grief. Detailing her solution for making loss meaningful, Prend offers the acronym SOAR: spirituality, outreach (helping others), attitude (healthy thinking), and reinvestment (embracing life). Includes a brief list of titles for suggested reading. 1332. Price, Eugenia. Getting through the Night: Finding Your Way after the Loss of a Loved One. New York: Random House, 1986. 1333. Ramsay, Ronald W., and Rene Noorbergen. Living with Loss: A Dramatic New Breakthrough in Grief Therapy. New York: William Morrow, 1981. 1334. Rando, Therese A., ed. Clinical Dimensions of Anticipatory Mourning: Theory and Practice in Working with the Dying, Their Loved Ones, and Their Caregivers. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2000. 1335. ———. How to Go on Living When Someone You Love Dies. New York: Bantam Books, 1991. Reprint. Originally published as Grieving, by Lexington Books, Lexington, MA, in 1988. 1336. ———, ed. Loss and Anticipatory Grief. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1986. In this classic text, the contributors provide specific techniques for dealing with impending loss. Rando notes that advances in medicine have profoundly changed the nature of terminal illness and extended the dying process. Her book addresses the resulting issue of anticipatory grief. Topics covered include adaptive anticipation of bereavement; anticipatory grief and reinvestment; the effects of this grief on patients, family members, and caregivers; the clergy perspective; meditation; creating and therapeutically utilizing anticipatory grief in survivors of sudden death; strategies for the classroom; an older person’s anticipation of their own death; and anticipating the death of an elderly parent. Practical matters addressed are funeral preplanning, legal and ethical issues for both individuals

Grief and Mourning

177

and institutions, and financial planning. Brief professional background information is provided for each contributor. Includes a document and asset planning form as part of financial and estate planning recommendations. 1337. Raphael, Beverly. The Anatomy of Bereavement. New York: Basic Books, 1983. In this comprehensive treatment of bereavement for academicians, the helping professions, and those grieving, Raphael describes the various stages of mourning and healing and examines how bereavement is different at each stage of life. A professor of psychiatry at the University of Newcastle in New South Wales, Australia, she begins with a look at human bonds and death and the experience of bereavement with separation then mourning. She moves on to the bereaved child; adolescent grief and mourning; and other types of grief, including the death of a spouse and the death of a child. Raphael also discusses the unique dynamics of bereavement when brought about by death associated with disaster. She offers suggestions for caring for the bereaved and how to live with loss. Extensive references and a thorough index are included. 1338. Rapoport, Nessa. A Woman’s Book of Grieving. New York: William Morrow, 1994. Linocuts by Rochelle Rubinstein Kaplan. Rapoport provides a book of poems and meditations on grieving and loss. 1339. Reinsmith, A. M. Brady. Surviving Grief: Thirty Questions and Answers for a Time of Loss. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2001. 1340. Rhea, Carolyn. When Grief Is Your Constant Companion: God’s Grace for a Woman’s Heartache. New Hope, AL: New Hope Publishers, 2003. 1341. Rich, Phil. Grief Counseling Homework Planner. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2001. 1342. ———. A Healing Journey through Grief: Your Journey for Reflection/Recovery and Clinician’s Guide to a Healing Journey through Grief. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2000. The second title is the title of the accompanying booklet. 1343. Roach, Sally S., and Beatriz C. Nieto. Healing and the Grief Process. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, 1997. Part of the Nurse as Healer Series, Lynn Keegan, series editor. Intended for nurses and other health care professionals, this book surfaces and discusses various situations that deal with death and dying. The text includes alternative healing strategies, resources for caregivers and the bereaved, and personal stories of grief and loss. Roach and Nieto, both assistant professors in the health sciences, discuss a consensus definition of grief and the role of the nurse in the grieving process. Definitions of various terms, grief theories, and attributes of grief are explored. Chapters also focus on anticipatory grief, the role of hospice care, surviving the loss of a loved one, helping children cope with grief, grieving

178

Chapter 16

in the context of AIDS, traumatic loss, chronic sorrow, caregiving, bereavement care, the role of “nurse-healers,” and growing through grief. The authors comment on bibliotherapy, journal writing, relaxation therapy, and imagery as coping methods during bereavement. Includes references and an index. 1344. Rochlin, Gregory. Griefs and Discontents: The Focus of Change. Boston: Little, Brown, 1965. 1345. Romanyshyn, Robert. The Soul in Grief: Love, Death, and Transformation. Berkeley, CA: North Atlantic Books, 1999. 1346. Roos, Susan. Chronic Sorrow: A Living Loss. New York: BrunnerRoutledge, 2002. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. In this work, the author achieves her goal of establishing a place for chronic sorrow in the larger multidisciplinary field of loss and bereavement. She writes extensively on the definition and parameters of chronic sorrow, while acknowledging that it was Simon Olshansky, a rehabilitation counselor, who used the term in the 1960s to describe the various grief responses of parents following the diagnosis of a child’s mental retardation. Part of Roos’s historical treatment of the subject of chronic sorrow is a captivating review of the historical mistreatment and abuse of the mentally ill and physically disabled throughout human history. She discusses interpreting loss; living with chronic sorrow; existential issues of disillusionment, aloneness, vulnerability, inequity, insignificance, and mortality; complicating factors; professional support and treatment; and implications and directions for research. She also includes commentary on loss themes in fictionalized works. A final chapter discusses trends in professional education, the shift toward depathologizing grief, psychotherapy, and the increasing prevalence of chronic sorrow. Includes a poem entitled “Words,” by Roos; extensive references; and an index. 1347. Rose, Ada Campbell. Acquainted with Grief. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1972. 1348. Rosenblatt, Paul C. Bitter, Bitter Tears: Nineteenth-Century Diarists and Twentieth-Century Grief Theories. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1983. During a 1977 to 1978 school year sabbatical, Rosenblatt researched unpublished nineteenth-century diaries containing material on close relationships. A professor in the department of family social science at the University of Minnesota, he had been doing scholarly work on romantic love and was looking to develop a bibliography and set of research notes on diaries. He discovered that while diaries dealt with many elements of close relationships, there was a significant volume of material on deaths, grief, and separations. He describes the incredibly intense, personal, and emotional experiences of reading people’s

Grief and Mourning

179

accounts of loss and bereavement. In this book, Rosenblatt explores many facets and nuances of the diarists and their grief. Topics covered include the truthfulness of diarists in communicating their grief, their understanding of when the loss occurred, patterning of grief, theories of grief work and its stages, anticipation of death and separations, infant and maternal deaths, terminal care, changes over time in mentions of loss, sibling and spousal loss, controlling grief, grief and family symptoms, spiritism, heavenly reunions, substitutions for the lost, childnaming and the seeking of a substitute, symbolic interaction theory, and widowhood. Three appendixes discuss working with diaries, the diarists the author researched, and statistics. Includes a bibliography and name and subject indexes. 1349. Ross, E. Betsy. Life after Suicide: A Ray of Hope for Those Left Behind. New York: Insight Books, 1997. 1350. Roth, Deborah. Stepping Stones to Grief Recovery. New York: Borgo Press, 1988. Published with the Center for Help in Times of Loss. Also cited as being published by IBS Press, Santa Monica, CA, in 1988. 1351. Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus. Death and Mourning. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1995. 1352. 1975.

Russell, Robert A. Dry Those Tears. Santa Monica, CA: DeVorss & Co.,

1353. Rynearson, Edward K. Retelling Violent Death. Philadelphia: BrunnerRoutledge, 2001. Emphasizing that a violent death is more than a death in that it is caused by external action, Rynearson writes about how the drama of violent dying is most commonly retold as a story, and the compulsive replaying of this story “often eclipses the retelling of [the person’s] living—the way they died takes precedence over the way they lived.” He notes that the continuous replaying of this story becomes unbearable, as it can only end in terror. Through the book, appropriate for both clinicians and family members, Rynearson endeavors to help the reader achieve a retelling that is restorative. He defines this as the “narrative reframing of a violent dying story to include the teller as participant, rather than a horrified witness, and to reconnect the teller with the living memories of the deceased.” Among the topics explored are reenactment stories, resilient retelling, moving from incoherent to coherent retelling, the incoherence of intense distress, illustrations of restorative retelling, retelling for children and adolescents, a model of restorative retelling, specialized interventions, retelling the literature of death and dying, and foretelling clinical challenges. An appendix features screening and interventions for violent dying support, including support group guidance and structures. Includes references and an index. Rynearson is a clinical professor of psychiatry at the University of Washington and medical director of the Homicide Support Project at the Virginia Mason Medical Center in Seattle, Washington.

180

Chapter 16

1354. Salem, Harry, and Cheryl Salem. From Grief to Glory: Rediscovering Life after Loss. New Kensington, PA: Whitaker House, 2003. 1355. ———. From Mourning to Morning: Discovering the Healing Power of God’s Love to Take You from Grief to Glory. Tulsa, OK: Harrison House Publishers, 2001. 1356. Sanders, Catherine M. Grief: The Mourning After, Dealing with Adult Bereavement. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1989. Part of the Wiley Series on Personality Processes, Irving B. Weiner, editor. Intended for caregivers and health professionals, this book is a clinical examination of loss and grief. It offers practical suggestions for those who care for the bereaved. Sanders presents her “Integrative Theory of Bereavement,” which describes the phases of grief following the death of a loved one and provides the basis for interventions during the grieving period. The phases include shock, awareness of loss, conservation/withdrawal, healing, and renewal. She includes a review of the evolution of bereavement theories and a discussion of complicated grief, personality variables, social-situational variables, and death and the “family constellation.” She also reviews the differences between the deaths of children, spouses, and parents. A list of references as well as author and subject indexes are included. A clinical practitioner in Charlotte, North Carolina, Sanders was founder and coordinator of the Loss and Bereavement Resource Center at the University of South Florida in Tampa. 1357. 1992.

———. Surviving Grief and Learning to Live Again. New York: Wiley,

1358. Sanders, Catherine M., P. A. Mauger, and P. N. Strong. A Manual for the Grief Experience Inventory. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologist Press, 1977. 1359. Schatz, William H. Healing a Father’s Grief. Redmond, WA: Medic Publishing Co., 1984. 1360. Schiff, Harriett Sarnoff. Living through Mourning: Finding Comfort and Hope When a Loved One Has Died. New York: Viking Press, 1986. 1361. Schleifer, Jay. Everything You Need to Know When Someone You Know Has Been Killed. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1998. 1362. Schmitt, Abraham. Turn Again to Life: Growing Old through Grief. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1987. 1363. Schneider, John. Stress, Loss, and Grief: Understanding Their Origins and Growth Potential. Baltimore, MD: University Park Press, 1984. Also published by Aspen Systems Corporation, Rockville, MD, in 1984.

Grief and Mourning

181

Intended for those in the helping professions, Schneider’s book touches on two primary themes—death and stress—noting that the latter when associated with the former can have a profound impact on both mental and physical health. Schneider discusses the implications of loss, the dimensions of loss, developmentally related loss, a model for grieving, various processes for grieving, and facilitating the grieving process. He also offers a comparison of theories of mourning using a holistic model. Chapters begin with familiar quotes. References are located at the conclusion of each chapter. Includes author and subject indexes. 1364. Schneider, John M. Finding My Way: Healing and Transforming through Loss and Grief. Colfax, WI: Seasons Press, 1994. Schneider’s book is about the types of transformations that occur when individuals recognize loss and allow themselves to grieve. He notes in his preface that grief is a “process of mending the breaks in our stories, moving beyond our success and peak experiences to integrating the broken parts.” Topics include grieving as a discovery process; recognizing and validating losses; coping with awareness; healing and perspective; and integrating losses through remembering, restoring, and recreating. He offers a life change inventory, responses to the loss inventory instrument, models of loss and grief, and information about INTEGRA (Association for Integrative and Transformative Grief) in three appendixes. Includes references and recommended reading in a single bibliography, a glossary for terms used in the book, and an index. 1365. Schneiderman, G. Coping with Death in the Family. Oakville, Ontario: Chimo Publishing, 1979. 1366. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, Austin H. Kutscher, David Peretz, and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Anticipatory Grief. New York: Columbia University Press, 1974. The Foundation of Thanatology is acknowledged in the preparation of this volume. The editors bring together an amazing fifty-nine contributors, many noted thanatologists, in this important text on anticipatory grief. Numerous facets of anticipatory grief are explored, including societal responses, dynamics of anticipatory grief, psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy as enablers, clinical aspects and observations, initiatory grief, ritual and therapy, and terminology in this arena. The contributors also extensively explore anticipatory grief in such varied audiences as parents, siblings, health care professionals, social workers, and caregivers. Includes references and an index. 1367. Schoeneck, Therese S. Hope for the Bereaved: Understanding, Coping, and Growing through Grief. Syracuse, NY: Hope for the Bereaved, 2001. This book is a collection of articles written for the bereaved by those who have experienced a loss. Hope for the Bereaved, founded in 1978, is an independent, not-for-profit community organization dedicated to providing hope, support, and services to the bereaved.

182

Chapter 16

1368. Scrutton, Steve. Bereavement and Grief: Supporting Older People through Loss. London: E. Arnold, 1995. 1369. Seale, Clive. Constructing Death: The Sociology of Dying and Bereavement. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1998. Seale examines death in social and material worlds. He discusses social aspects of death, embodiment and the social structure, and experiencing and representing the body. He also covers awareness and control of dying, grief and resurrective practices, reporting death, revival of death awareness, and death in the context of modern medicine. Includes tables on the distribution of hospice and palliative care services worldwide and a comparison of people receiving hospice services with others, views about dying earlier, and requests for euthanasia. Includes extensive references and an index. 1370. Selder, Florence, Mary Kachoyeanos, Mary Jo Baisch, and Mary Gissler, eds. Enduring Grief: True Stories of Personal Loss. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1994. With the aim of helping people “learn how to pull their lives together after suffering a terrible loss,” Selder and her fellow editors attempt to give practical advice rather than a theoretical discussion of loss. The text is rooted in the experiences of 100 people interviewed by the editors. Topics addressed include maintaining hope, seeking help from a hospice nurse, sibling loss, miscarriage, death in a school setting, infant death, survivor guilt, AIDS, and parental grief. Includes the names of many of those who told their stories. Selder is a practicing psychotherapist and professor of nursing at the University of Wisconsin at Milwaukee. 1371. Shapiro, Ester R. Grief as a Family Process: A Developmental Approach to Clinical Practice. New York: Guilford Press, 1994. Shapiro notes that much of the critical writing about death typically advocating for a “more direct cultural confrontation with the reality of death” has focused on the individual’s struggle with mortality and restoring control of one’s own dying. In this book, she attempts to involve and direct attention to the painful experiences of family members into society’s understanding of death and dying. The book is for professionals who provide counseling to the bereaved of all ages. In her fourteen chapters, Shapiro discusses a systemic developmental approach to family bereavement, grief in adulthood, widowhood, childhood bereavement, stories of grieving children, models of family bereavement, adaptation to the crisis of grief, enhancing strategies for stable reorganization of bereaved families, childhood death and its impact on adult and family development, cultural and social factors, the sociocultural context of grief, circumstances of death and the structure of grief, and grief therapy in the context of family development. Includes references and an index.

Grief and Mourning

183

1372. Shaw, Eva. What to Do When a Loved One Dies: A Practical and Compassionate Guide to Dealing with Death on Life’s Terms. Irvine, CA: Dickens Press, 1993. Published by Writeriffic Publishing Group, Carlsbad, CA, in 2005. In this thorough guide and sourcebook for those dealing with the death of a loved one, Shaw offers suggestions for dealing with news of a death in the hours immediately following notification, with specifics depending on the location and manner of death. She discusses hospice, death in a care facility/at home/at work, death certificates, autopsies, religious views of varying treatments of the body following death, contacting family members, disposition, embalming, rituals, funerals, memorial and committal services, memorial societies, death announcements, and death etiquette. Additional chapters focus on loss; stages of grief; coping with traumatic death; homicide and suicide; euthanasia; differences in bereavement between genders, sexes, and age groups; support groups; recovery through twelve-step programs; wills; legal issues; and benefits. She continues on to include suggestions for such special situations as the death of a travel companion, talking with the press when a death becomes a media event, when death occurs abroad, and the public ordeal of a violent crime. The text includes numerous quotes in the margins. Includes hundreds of listings of resources, support groups, and other places to seek assistance. Also offers information about the Dougy Center for Grieving Children in Portland, Oregon. Although there is no bibliography, excellent references are scattered throughout the book. 1373. Sheepshanks, Mary. The Bird of My Loving: A Personal Response to Loss and Grief. London: M. Joseph, 1997. 1374.

Sherr, Lorraine. Grief and AIDS. New York: Wiley, 1995.

1375. Shoshanna, Brenda. Embarkations: A Guide to Dealing with Death and Parting. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1982. 1376. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Helping Women Cope with Grief. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, 1981. 1377. Silverman, William B., and Kenneth M. Cinnamon. When Mourning Comes: A Book of Comfort for the Grieving. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1982. Also cited as being published by Nelson-Hall, Chicago. A book of comfort for the grieving, this text includes several literary, historical, and religious references. Each chapter concludes with a page entitled “One Step at a Time!” and offers suggestions for coping with bereavement. Also includes several inspirational quotes. A bit melodramatic at times, the book’s introduction notes it is “written for you with a pen dipped in tears.” 1378. Singer, Lilly, Margaret Sirot, and Susan Rodd. Beyond Loss: A Practical Guide through Grief to a Meaningful Life. New York: Dutton, 1988.

184

Chapter 16

1379. Smith, Harold Ivan. Death and Grief: Healing through Support. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1995. 1380. ———. A Decembered Grief: Living with Loss While Others Are Celebrating. Kansas City, MO: Beacon Hill Press, 1999. 1381. ———. Friendgrief: An Absence Called Presence. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2001. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1382. 2002.

———. The Grief Care Guide. Kansas City, MO: Beacon Hill Press,

1383.

Smith, Kathleen. Help for the Bereaved. London: Duckworth, 1978.

1384. 1978.

———. The Stages of Sorrow. Totowa, NJ: Biblio Distribution Centre,

1385. Smolin, Ann, and John Guinan. Healing after the Suicide of a Loved One. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993. 1386. Soder-Alderfer, Kay. With Those Who Grieve: Twenty Grief Survivors Share Their Stories of Loss, Pain, and Hope. Elgin, IL: Lion Publishing, 1994. 1387. Spall, Bob, and Stephen Callis. Loss, Bereavement, and Grief: A Guide to Effective Caring. Cheltenham, England: Stanley Thorne, 1997. 1388.

Spiegel, Yorick. The Grief Process. London: SCM Press, 1978.

1389. ———. The Grief Process: Analysis and Counseling. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1977. 1390. Spies, Karen Bornemann. Everything You Need to Know about Grieving. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1990. 1391. Sprang, Ginny, and John S. McNeil. The Many Faces of Bereavement: The Nature and Treatment of Natural, Traumatic, and Stigmatized Grief. New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1995. Beginning with a theoretical overview of traditional models of grief, the authors explore typical grief responses, parental and spousal grief, and death among the elderly. They then move on to an in-depth analysis and discussion of traumatic grief and stigmatized grief. The section on traumatic grief examines bereavement following death by murder, drunk driving, community disaster, and critical incident. The section on stigmatized grief offers the same treatment for bereavement associated with suicide and an AIDS-related death. As with many books on thanatological subjects, this one notes the significant research on bereavement of recent decades, particularly in the more specialized areas of traumatic and stigmatized grief. Includes an appendix with a list of organizations for survivors and victims, a bibliography, and name and subject indexes.

Grief and Mourning

185

1392. Staudacher, Carol. Beyond Grief: A Guide for Recovering from the Death of a Loved One. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1987. Staudacher offers an extremely detailed guide for the bereaved. The text is full of specific suggestions for coping and dealing with a multitude of feelings following the death of a loved one. She discusses the grief experience; disbelief and numbness; the need for ritual; feelings of guilt, anger, fear, anxiety, and despair; specific issues associated with the loss based on relationship to the deceased; and issues related to the manner of death. These chapters address accidental death, suicide, and murder. Staudacher offers guidelines for support groups, ways to reach out for help, and suggestions for helping others grieve. She also includes tips for assessing progress through bereavement. Her suggestions are easily located in bulleted lists. A list of references is included. 1393. ———. Men and Grief: A Guide for Men Surviving the Death of a Loved One: A Resource for Caregivers and Mental Health Professionals. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1991. 1394. ———. A Time to Grieve: Meditations for Healing after the Death of a Loved One. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1994. This book is a collection of meditations for those who have lost a loved one. 1395. Stein, Diane. On Grief and Dying: Understanding the Soul’s Journey. Freedom, CA: Crossing Press, 1996. The author of several books on natural healing and spirituality, Stein presents a guide to grieving and death from this perspective. She incorporates resources from Greek mythology, psychic healing, and the contemporary Goddess movement. She discusses death and rebirth; psychic contact with the dead; understanding bereavement; acceptance of one’s own death; helping loved ones grieve; reincarnation; and learning to accept, trust, and let go. 1396. Stroebe, Margaret S., Wolfgang Stroebe, and Robert O. Hansson, eds. Handbook of Bereavement: Theory, Research, and Intervention. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1993. Revised edition published in 1999. Published in 2001 as Handbook of Bereavement Research: Theory, Research, and Intervention. Fifty-one contributors provide twenty-nine articles arranged into eight parts. The articles focus on the phenomenology and measurement of grief; current theories of grief, mourning, and bereavement; physiological changes following bereavement; psychological, social, and health impacts of conjugal bereavement; grief reactions to different types of loss; and coping, counseling, and therapy. The editors also provide a framework for the book with an introductory article on bereavement research and theory and a conclusory article discussing contemporary themes and controversies in bereavement research. Includes forty-six pages of references as well as author and subject indexes.

186

Chapter 16

1397. Switzer, David K. The Dynamics of Grief: Its Sources, Pain, and Healing. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1970. 1398. Tagliaferre, Lewis, and Oary L. Harbaugh. Recovery from Loss: A Personalized Guide to the Grieving Process. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, 1990. 1399. Tallmer, Margot. Women Facing Loss: Disease, Bereavement, and Emotional Response. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1996. 1400. Tanner, Dennis C. Aphasia: The Family’s Guide to the Psychology of Loss, Grief, and Adjustment. Tulsa, OK: Modern Education Corp., 1984. 1401. Tanner, I. J. The Gift of Grief: Healing the Pain of Everyday Losses. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1976. Tanner addresses the stages of grief, morbid grief, substance abuse associated with grief, and feelings of isolation in this overview of loss and bereavement. 1402. Tarlow, Sarah. Bereavement and Commemoration: An Archeology of Mortality. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, 1999. 1403. Tatelbaum, Judy. The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living, Recovery, and Growth. New York: Lippencott & Crowell, 1980. Published by Harper-Collins, New York, in 1984. Also published by William Heinemann, London, in 1990, as The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living, Recovery, and Growth through Grief. Noting that grief is a natural, inevitable human experience, Tatelbaum provides a self-help book focused on grief following the death of a loved one. She explores the many emotions that accompany this grief, including sorrow, guilt, confusion, despair, resentment, and loneliness. She offers advice on coping with the immediate experience of death as well as moving through the stages of bereavement. Tatelbaum includes helpful information on understanding the unique nature of grief among children. She counters the theory that grief never ends and offers specific techniques for “finishing” or completing grief. Appendixes include “The Dying Person’s Bill of Rights” and “Things to Be Done after a Death Occurs,” a 19-item list of specific actions to take following a death. Includes a brief bibliography. A psychiatric social worker at the Payne Whitney Clinic of New York/Cornell Medical Center, she also worked at the Massachusetts Mental Health Center and the Columbia University School of Social Work. 1404. Temes, Roberta. Living with an Empty Chair: A Guide through Grief. New York: Irvington Publishers, 1984. Also published by Mandala Press, Amherst, NY, in 1977. 1405. Tengbom, Mildred. Grief for a Season. Minneapolis, MN: Bethany House Publishers, 1989.

Grief and Mourning

187

1406. Thompson, Neil. Loss and Grief: A Guide for Human Services Practitioners. New York: Palgrave, 2002. 1407. Thornton, V. K. The Survivor’s Guide. Los Angeles: Silver Lake Publishing, 2004. 1408. 1933.

Tis’Ney, Carol. Mourner, Come to My Bosom. Los Angeles: De Vorse,

1409. Treadway, David C. Dead Reckoning: A Therapist Confronts His Own Grief. New York: Basic Books, 1996. 1410. 1975.

Tuck, William P. Facing Grief and Death. Nashville, TN: Broadman,

1411. Vail, Elaine. A Personal Guide to Living with Loss. New York: Wiley, 1982. Vail, a professor and radio host, uses her research and personal experiences to provide a layperson’s guide to bereavement. 1412. Valentine, Bill. A Season of Grief. Binghamton, NY: Harrington Park Press, 2006. Through this memoir about the loss of his partner, Valentine offers guidance on recovering from devastating grief. It is both a love story and a narrative about a journey through grief. 1413. Van Praagh, James. Healing Grief: Reclaiming Life after Any Loss. New York: Dutton, 2000. Van Praagh, an internationally known medium who claims to communicate with spiritual realms, offers this self-help book for the bereaved. He advocates grieving in personal ways rather than conforming to societal norms. He includes many stories from his work as a medium. The book is filled with specific suggestions on dealing with grief. A list of groups and associations as well as a brief bibliography are included. 1414. Volkan, Vamik D., and Elizabeth Zintl. Life after Loss: The Lessons of Grief. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1993. Arranged in sections on complicated and uncomplicated mourning, this text explores not only the process of grieving and its many forms but also the lifechanging effects of bereavement and the lessons it offers. Volkan, a psychiatrist and psychoanalyst, discusses the work of mourning and letting go, using loss as a vehicle for growth (a chapter he calls “Brutal Gifts”), circumstances that complicate mourning, denial, when loss has no resolution, depression resulting from grief, and differences between parents and children in bereavement. A final section addresses possible resolutions, including therapy. Zintl is a journalist. Includes a bibliography.

188

1415.

Chapter 16

Vredevelt, Pam W. Empty Arms. Portland, OR: Multnomah Press, 1984.

1416. Walsh, Froma, and Monica McGoldrick, eds. Living beyond Loss: Death in the Family. New York: W. W. Norton, 1995. Originally published in 1991. Second edition paperback published by W. W. Norton, New York, in 2004. 1417. Walter, Carolyn Ambler. The Loss of a Life Partner: Narratives of the Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press, 2003. Walter presents a broad review of various types of life partner loss, offers suggestions for the helping professions, and describes possible clinical interventions. Chapters address losses related to spouses, opposite-sex partners, gay partners, and lesbian partners. She provides discussion on similar and diverse themes among bereaved partners, including ambivalence regarding existing ties with bereaved partners, discrimination experienced by surviving partners, using memories and continuing bonds in coping with grief, developing new relationships, and making meaning from loss. Several intervention models are offered. A brief discussion of clinical implications for response to the events of September 11, 2001 is included. Also includes references and an index. 1418. Walter, Tony. On Bereavement: The Culture of Grief. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 1999. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. Colin Murray Parkes referred to this book as a “tour de force” on the social position of the bereaved, a place between the living and the dead, with many judgments from society on how to grieve. Walter discusses how the bereaved have their grief inappropriately pathologized and policed. He covers historical views on death and bereavement, current popular culture, politics of gender, and an analysis of bereavement care. Includes an appendix detailing the author’s research and an extensive list of references. 1419. Walton, Charlie. When There Are No Words: Finding Your Way to Cope with Loss and Grief. Ventura, CA: Pathfinder Publishing, 1996. 1420. Weisman, Avery D. The Coping Capacity: On the Nature of Being Mortal. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1984. 1421. Weizman, Savine Gross, and Phyllis Kamm. About Mourning: Support and Guidance for the Bereaved. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1985. Filled with personal stories and vignettes, this practical guide for the bereaved discusses ritualized mourning through the funeral, the process of mourning, dreams and expressions of grief, the return of grief during holidays and anniversaries, the death of a mate, the family as a support network, children and grief, children and death, issues with adolescents, parental death, complicated mourning, the importance of memories in mourning, and contemporary ethical wills. The authors offer advice on how others can help those grieving. Includes references and a brief index.

Grief and Mourning

189

1422. Welshons, John E. Awakening from Grief: Finding the Way Back to Joy. Makawao, Maui, HI: Inner Ocean, 2003. Distributed by Publishers Group West. Originally published by Open Heart Publications, Little Falls, NJ, in 2000. In 1981, Welshons founded Open Heart Seminars, an organization “dedicated to enhancing spiritual education and awareness in our society.” In this book, he offers uplifting stories and vignettes to help people recover from grief. He also gives suggestions for coping with anger, loving and living again after a death, finding inner peace, healing relationships, rediscovering joy, learning to forgive, and helping others to grieve. Includes a list of recommended reading. Foreword by Wayne W. Dyer, author of Ten Secrets for Success and Inner Peace. 1423. Wengerd, Sara. A Healing Grief: Walking with Your Friend through Loss. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 2002. Foreword by Larry Kehler. 1424. Wertheimer, Alison. A Special Scar: The Experiences of People Bereaved by Suicide. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1991. 1425. Westberg, Granger E. Good Grief: A Constructive Approach to the Problem of Loss. Rock Island, IL: Augustana Press, 1962. Also published by Fortress Press, Philadelphia. 1426. Whitaker, Agnes, ed. All in the End Is Harvest: An Anthology for Those Who Grieve. London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 1984. Introduction by Colin Murray Parkes. 1427. White, James R. Grieving: Our Path Back to Peace. Minneapolis, MN: Bethany House Publishers, 1997. White, a counselor and hospital chaplain, offers a Christian-based approach to healing the hurt of grief in this 87-page paperback. 1428. Wilson, Antoine. You and a Death in Your Family. New York: Rosen Central, 2001. Wilson presents a general book about death and grief for young people. It contains several photographs depicting children dealing with the emotions associated with losing a loved one. Wilson deals frankly with the subject, explaining cremation and donations of bodies to science. Topics covered include talking about death, feelings about death, emotional stages of grieving, and funerals. Includes a very limited glossary with poorly selected terms; names, websites, and addresses of organizations to go to for help; and a list of six books for further reading. 1429. Wolfe, Thomas. From Death to Mourning. New York: Charles Scribner & Sons, 1958. 1430. Wolfelt, Alan D. Healing a Friend’s Grieving Heart: One Hundred Practical Ideas for Helping Someone You Love through Loss. Fort Collins, CO:

190

Chapter 16

Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt offers ideas for compassionately helping a friend through their bereavement. Through these numbered ideas, he teaches the fundamentals of grief and mourning. 1431. ———. Healing Grief at Work: One Hundred Practical Ideas after Your Workplace Is Touched by Loss. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2005. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 1432. ———. Healing the Grieving Heart: Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1998. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 1433. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart: One Hundred Practical Ideas. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1998. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. Wolfelt offers 100 ideas on how to help yourself mourn, encouraging the reader to take small steps toward recovering from grief. 1434. ———. The Journey through Grief: Reflections on Healing. 2nd ed. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2003. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 1435. ———. Understanding Grief: Helping Yourself Heal. Muncie, IN: Accelerated Development, Inc., 1992. 1436. Wong, Mary M. Understanding Your Grieving Heart after a Loved One’s Death. Longwood, FL: ADM Publishing, 2001. Wong, editor of the National Directory of Bereavement Support Groups and Services, provides a sourcebook for those grieving the death of a loved one. The work contains helpful suggestions on dealing with anger, fear, stress, loneliness, regrets, and depression. She writes about myths behind the grieving process; the stages of grief; and such manifestations of grief as emotional, physical, intellectual, spiritual, and financial challenges. Wong also covers the effects of grief on marriage and children as well as relationships with family, friends, and coworkers. She offers several suggestions on how to honor a loved one’s memory and how to get through holidays, birthdays, and anniversaries. Much of the book is devoted to helpful resources, including extensive information about hotlines and support organizations. A selected bibliography divided by subject is also incorporated. 1437. Worden, J. William, ed. Dealing with Grief. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1996. Part of the IN SESSION: Psychotherapy in Practice series, Marvin R. Goldfried, editor in chief. In this serial for professionals, therapists address how grief is both similar to and different from clinical depression, the characteristics of complicated

Grief and Mourning

191

bereavement, successful therapeutic interventions for the bereaved, and treating survivors of homicide and sudden death. Includes twenty-four questions for continuing education credits. 1438. Wray, T. J., and Ann Back Price. Grief Dreams: How They Help Heal Us after the Death of a Loved One. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2005. Reviewing dreams of visitation, messages, reassurance, trauma, and faith, Wray and Price suggest that these grief dreams can be instrumental in the healing after the death of a loved one. Using stories, the authors offer step-by-step guidance on understanding and interpreting dream messages for the bereaved. Earl A. Grollman and Kenneth J. Doka provide endorsements of the book. Includes suggested readings and an extensive bibliography. 1439. Wright, Bob. Loss and Grief. New York: Churchill Livingstone, 1992. Part of the Skills for Caring series, Susan Bird and David Rennie, editors. A clinical nurse specializing in crisis intervention, Wright presents an excellent though very general text on death and loss for those in the caring professions. Chapters titles are “Separation and Loss,” “Grief, Dying, and Bereavement,” and “Loss.” Appropriate for a short course on the topic, this 42-page book includes case studies and exercise separate from the text. Includes a brief list of references as well as titles for suggested reading. 1440. Wroblieski, Adina. Suicide Survivors: A Guide for Those Left Behind. Minneapolis, MN: A. Wroblieski, 1994. 1441. Wylie, Betty Jane. New Beginnings: Living through Loss and Grief. Toronto, Ontario: Key Porter Books, 1991. 1442. Young, Dennis. Mourning Journey: Spiritual Guidance for Facing Grief, Death, and Loss. Billerica, MA: Discipleship Publications International, 2003. Writing from a pastoral and biblical perspective, Young presents a thoughtful guide on dealing with process of grieving. He includes information and suggestions for both those grieving and those assisting the bereaved. Young discusses complicated grief and mourning, wakes and funerals, and “multicultural mourning.” Includes a list of organizations and support groups and a bibliography. Young is a minister and grief counselor. 1443. Zeitlin, Steven J., and Ilana Beth Harlow. Giving a Voice to Sorrow: Personal Responses to Death and Mourning. New York: Perigee Books, 2001. Referred to by the publisher as an “intimate grief support group in book form,” this paperback provides several creative and personal ways to deal with death, celebrate life, and remember loved ones. Storytelling, rituals, and memorials are among the methods explored through personal stories. The authors stress the need for balance between remembrance and letting go. Includes extensive notes. 1444. Zelenka, Linda. An Untimely Loss: A Passage to the Gentle Side of Grief. New York: Paulist Press, 1996.

192

Chapter 16

Associated with The Compassionate Friends, an international self-help bereavement organization, Zelenka shares her own story of the loss of a child in this 41-page paperback. Through letters to God, she poses questions about untimely loss and discusses what she calls the “gentle side of grief.” 1445. Zimmerman, Susan. Writing to Heal the Soul: Transforming Grief and Loss through Writing. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2002. Through true stories of Zimmerman and others, the author offers writing exercises to assist in dealing with the pain of loss with the goal of transforming the grief into hope and healing. Using writing as a tool for healing became a theme for Zimmerman after her daughter developed a neurological disorder that left her physically disabled and unable to speak. Each chapter begins with an inspirational quote. Includes an annotated list of recommended titles. 1446. Zinner, Ellen S., and Mary Beth Williams. When a Community Weeps: Case Studies in Group Survivorship. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. 1447.

Zisook, Sidney. Grief and Bereavement. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1987.

17 Historical Views of Death and Dying

1448. Bardis, Panos Demetrios. History of Thanatology: Philosophical, Religious, Psychological, and Sociological Ideas Concerning Death from Primitive Times to the Present. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1981. Bardis, editor of social science and professor of sociology at the University of Toledo, notes in the preface that this book evolved from a paper he presented at the Conference Internationale de Sociologie Religieuse in Venice, Italy, in August 1979. It is an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, and sociohistorical study of death. His introduction indicates the book’s purpose is to “explain, evaluate, and synthesize the most important ideas, from primitive times to the present, about death.” In the text, Bardis offers a definition of death, historical views on death from the Far East to Ancient Egypt and Ancient Greece and Rome. He includes narrative on attitudes and views toward death in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam. Includes a brief bibliography and a general index. 1449. Barley, Nigel. Grave Matters: A Lively History of Death around the World. New York: Henry Holt, 1997. Originally published as Dancing on the Grave in Great Britain. British anthropologist Barley views death as a mirror to civilization in this witty tour of death customs around the world. 1450. Boase, Thomas Sherrer Ross. Death in the Middle Ages: Mortality, Judgment, and Remembrance. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972. Part of the Library of Medieval Civilization, Joan Evans and Christopher Brooke, editors. In the General Editor’s Preface, Brooke notes that this text is part of a “revival and revision” of the 1966 Thames & Hudson book The Flowering of the Middle Ages, in which each chapter has been converted into a volume such as this one. Boase expands the original work into an exploration of death themes in the Middle Ages, mostly through an examination of Medieval art and architecture. 193

194

Chapter 17

Includes the foreword to the original edition, a select bibliography, and an extensive list of illustrations. 1451. Bremer, J. M., Theo P. J. Van Den Hout, and Rudolph Peters. Hidden Futures: Death and Immortality in Ancient Egypt, Anatolia, the Classical, Biblical, and Arabic-Islamic World. Amsterdam, Netherlands: Amsterdam University Press, 1994. 1452. Colman, Penny. Corpses, Coffins, and Crypts: A History of Burial. New York: Henry Holt and Company, 1997. 1453. Comper, Frances M. M., ed. Ars Morendi: The Book of the Craft of Dying and Other Early English Tracts Concerning Death. New York: Arno Press, 1976. The tracts are taken from manuscripts and printed books in the British Museum and Bodleian Library. First edition published by Longmans, Green & Company, London, in 1917. 1454. Curl, James Stevens. The Victorian Celebration of Death. New York: Gale, 1972. Also published by David & Charles, London, and Partridge Press, Detroit, in 1972. With this survey of Victorian approaches and attitudes toward death, Curl writes about funeral rites and ceremonies during this period as well as tombs, mausoleums, cemeteries, and gravestones. 1455.

Davey, Richard. A History of Mourning. London: Jay’s, 1890.

1456. Davies, Douglas James. A Brief History of Death. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing, 2005. Davies notes that our interest in death is “infused with emotion, whether that of the experience of bereavement or of its anticipation, or of the thought of our own mortality” and that his book “seeks to capture some of these moods as reflected within the kaleidoscope of the history, religion, and culture of many societies.” Great emphasis is placed on how death in its many interpretations manifests itself in various societies. Death rituals are explored and several photographs are included. These images include the interior and exterior of a Stockholm crematorium; an Auschwitz memorial; religious symbolism at a crematorium in Bordeaux; Memorial Day in rural Utah; a Hungarian gravestone; a communal memorial in South Wales; and an exhibit in Amsterdam featuring eco-friendly funeral products, including a backpack coffin. Includes a bibliography and an index. 1458. Duckett, Eleanor Shipley. Death and Life in the Tenth Century. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1967. 1459. Fedden, Henry Romilly. Suicide: A Social and Historical Study. London: P. Davies, Ltd., 1938.

Historical Views of Death and Dying

195

1460. Filene, Peter G. In the Arms of Others: A Cultural History of the Rightto-Die in America. Chicago: Ivan R. Dee, 1998. 1461. Frenay, Adolph Dominic. The Suicide Problem in the United States. Boston: R. G. Badger, 1927. 1462. Gardiner, Alan H. The Attitude of Ancient Egyptians to Death and the Dead. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1935. 1463. Gittings, C. Death, Burial, and the Individual in Early Modern England. London: Routledge, 1988. 1464. Greene, Carlton. Death and Sleep: Their Analogy Illustrated by Examples. London: Elliot Stock, 1904. 1465. Holck, Frederick H., ed. Death and Eastern Thought: Understanding Death in Eastern Religions and Philosophies. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1974. Holck, professor of religious studies and coordinator of Asian studies at Cleveland State University, presents a comparative study of death traditions in various Eastern cultures through eight articles, two of which he himself has authored. He considers the subject with the assumption that Western approaches to death and dying and the awakening to its complexity can be much informed by Eastern thought. He addresses ideas on diet, caste systems, artifacts, reincarnation, heaven and hell, and proper lifestyle. Includes notes. 1466. Homans, Peter, ed. Symbolic Loss: The Ambiguity of Mourning and Memory at Century’s End. Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 2000. Part of the Studies in Religion and Culture series, Frank Burch Brown, Gary L. Ebersole, and Edith Wyschogrod, editors. Homans, professor of psychology and religious studies at the University of Chicago, and his fellow writers examine loss in the historical and anthropological context of mourning, specifically the decline of mourning practices in the West. Among the topics explored are inherited mourning, “sorrow songs” in Harlem Renaissance thought, the ambiguity of remembrance, melancholia, and a theory of symbolic loss. Articles include references and suggestions for further reading. Includes an excellent, extensive index. 1467. Houlbrooke, Ralph A., ed. Death, Ritual, and Bereavement. New York: Routledge, in association with the Social History Society of the United Kingdom, 1989. Houlbrooke provides a social history of death in Britain through a series of articles. Themes include the significance of death in Victorian Britain; individual responses to death in seventeenth-century Britain; the concept of the good death

196

Chapter 17

in seventeenth-century England; cremation and death celebrations in nineteenthcentury Britain; treatment of death in children’s magazines in the nineteenth century; and upper-class death, grief, and mourning in the early twentieth century. A brief bibliography and background on each of the contributors is included. 1468. Isenberg, Nancy, and Andrew Burstein, eds. Mortal Remains: Death in Early America. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2003. An assemblage of articles on various aspects of death and the death ritual in early America, this book examines the death attitudes, concepts of mortality, the politics of death, issues with physical remains, and thoughts on the afterlife. Specific subjects include dismemberment, burial and rebelliousness in slave societies, death in the early American novel, excesses of public eulogy in immortalizing the founding fathers, death and satire, the roots of American crime literature, and epidemics and rituals of death in Boston and Philadelphia in the eighteenth century. Includes twenty-four illustrations, extensive notes, brief biographical information on each contributor, and an index. 1469. Jupp, Peter C., and Glennys Howarth, eds. The Changing Face of Death: Historical Accounts of Death and Disposal. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1997. 1470. Kapleau, Philip. The Wheel of Death: A Collection of Writings from Zen Buddhists and Other Sources on Dying, Death, Rebirth. New York: Harper & Row, 1971. Author assisted by Paterson Simons. In this 110-page hardback, Kapleau assembles writings by both ancient and contemporary minds reflecting a Zen Buddhist perspective on death matters. The work was developed from a series of articles that first appeared in Zen Bow, the publication of the Zen Center of Rochester, New York. Includes a superb glossary and an index. 1471. Laderman, Gary. Rest in Peace: A Cultural History of Death and the Funeral Home in America. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003. Through a history of funeral homes and mortuary practices, Laderman provides a unique perspective on death, death attitudes, and how Americans think about and deal with the subject. He notably takes issue with many of Jessica Mitford’s accusations about the funeral industry in The American Way of Death, and his book is considered a long-awaited rebuttal of her book and a defense of the industry. 1472. Lerner, E. and J. Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation. New York: Dover Publications, 1971. This book is a collection of writings from the Medieval and Renaissance periods on death, demons, and the world beyond.

Historical Views of Death and Dying

197

1473. Llewellyn, Nigel. The Art of Death: Visual Culture in the English Death Ritual, c. 1500–1800. London: Reaktion Books, 1991. Published in association with the Victoria and Albert Museum in London. Llewellyn presents a fascinating exploration of the meanings behind various artifacts used in preindustrial English death rituals. Noting that people would surround themselves with momento mori and that “this continual confrontation with death was enhanced by a rich culture of visual artifacts,” he provides commentary on and description of wax effigies; mourning rings and fans; death’s head spoons; church monuments; Dance of Death prints; funeral invitations and ephemera; jewels and swords; and the art of William Blake, Hans Holbein, and William Hogarth, among others. 1474. Mack, Arien, ed. Death in American Experience. New York: Schocken Books, 1973. 1475. Morley, John. Death, Heaven, and the Victorians. Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1971. 1476. O’Connor, Mary Catherine. The Art of Dying Well: The Development of Ars Moriendi. New York: Columbia University Press, 1942. 1477. Pelikan, Jaroslav. The Shape of Death, Life, and Immortality in the Early Fathers. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1961. 1478. Reynolds, Frank E., and Earle H. Waugh, eds. Religious Encounters with Death: Insights from the History and Anthropology of Religions. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1977. 1479. Shively, Charles. A History of the Conception of Death in America, 1650–1860. New York: Garland Publishing, 1988. Part of Harvard Dissertations in American History and Political Science, Frank Freidel and Ernest May, editors. Shively devotes much of the preface to recommending other titles of interest on his topic. This book began as his doctoral dissertation and explores the taboo of death in early American life. He writes about Puritan ideas of death, early attitudes toward death and dying, enlightened ideas of death, Quakers and Shakers and their views, death and the imagination, and rituals. Shively includes ten photographs, mostly images of paintings featuring death themes and photographs of cemeteries and tombstones. He includes an interesting section on garden cemeteries that features a list of cemeteries with their locations and year of commencement. Includes notes and a list of primary and secondary sources. 1480. Stannard, David E. The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in Religion, Culture, and Social Change. New York: Oxford University Press, 1977.

198

Chapter 17

1481. Taylor, Timothy. The Buried Soul: How Humans Invented Death. Boston: Beacon Press, 2002. Taylor explores how humans have viewed and related to death throughout history. He examines the mystery of death, how early humans amazingly divided the physical body from the spirit that animated it, cannibalism, vampirism, modern mummification, human sacrifice, near-death experiences, and the bewilderment of death. Extensive notes and a lengthy bibliography are included. Taylor is a member of the archeological faculty at the University of Bradford in the United Kingdom. 1482. Toynbee, Jocelyn M. C. Death and Burial in the Roman World. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996. Also cited as being authored by Arnold Toynbee and published by Cornell University Press, Ithaca, NY, in 1970. 1483. Tromp, Nicholas J. Primitive Conceptions of Death and the Nether World in the Old Testament. Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1969. The title is also cited as Biblica et Orietalia (Sacra Scriptura Antiquitatibus Orientalibus Illustrata) 21. Also published by Loyola Press, Chicago, in 1969. This text is Tromp’s dissertation with additional bibliographical references. A scholarly treatment of death themes and conceptions in the Old Testament, the book is heavily cited with scripture and includes indexes to Ugaritic, Hebrew, and Acadian references and words. Includes subject and author indexes. 1484. Wells, Robert V. Facing the “King of Terrors”: Death and Society in an American Community, 1750–1990. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2000. Wells explores American views toward death and their roles in communities. He provides insights on how Americans’ communications about death have changed over the past three centuries as well as causes of death and how this has shaped death attitudes. Includes photographs of funeral embroidery, cemeteries, tombstones, and other death artifacts. 1485. Whaley, Joachim, ed. Mirrors of Mortality: Studies in the Social History of Death. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1981. Whaley has assembled a collection of essays that offer commentary on death themes in history. Essays included are Christiane Sourvinou-Inwood’s “To Die and Enter the House of Hades: Homer, Before and After”; R. C. Finucane’s “Sacred Corpse, Profane Carrion: Social Ideals and Death Rituals in the Later Middle Ages”; Paul S. Fritz’s “From Public to Private: The Royal Funerals in England, 1500–1830”; J. Whaley’s “Symbolism for the Survivors: The Disposal of the Dead in Hamburg in the Late Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries”; John McManners’s “Death and the French Historians”; David Irwin’s “Sentiment and Antiquity: European Tombs, 1750–1830”; C. A. Bayly’s “From Ritual to Ceremony: Death Ritual and Society in Hindu North India since 1600”; and David

Historical Views of Death and Dying

199

Cannadine’s “War and Death, Grief and Mourning in Modern Britain.” Includes notes and an index. 1486. Zandee, Jan. Death as an Enemy According to Ancient Egyptian Conceptions. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1960.

18 Hospice

1487. Abbott, John W., ed. Hospice Resource Manual for Local Churches. New York: Pilgrim Press, 1988. This book is a 90-page guide for both pastors and lay ministers who find themselves in a hospice setting. 1488. 1964.

Abel-Smith, Brian. The Hospice: 1800–1948. London: Heinemann,

1489. Amenta, Madalon O’Rawe, and Claire B. Tehan. AIDS and the Hospice Community. New York: Haworth Press, 1991. Also cited as being published by Harrington Park Press, New York, in 1991. 1490. Andreae, Christine. When Evening Comes: The Education of a Hospice Volunteer. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000. 1491. Appleton, Michael. Good End: End-of-Life Concerns and Conversations about Hospice and Palliative Care. Tucson, AZ: Hats Off Books, 2005. 1492. Appleton, Michael, and Todd Henschell. At Home with Terminal Illness: A Family Guide to Hospice in the Home. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall Career & Technology, 1995. 1493. Armstrong-Dailey, Ann, and Sarah F. Zarbock. Hospice Care for Children. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993. Reprinted in 2001 1494. Bencala, Rose, Elaine McIntosh, and Cynthia Salzman. Hospice Care Demonstration Project: A Study of Two Models of Hospice Home Care Delivery. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Office of Human Development Services, Administration on Aging, Model Projects in Aging Program, 1982. 200

Hospice

201

1495. Beresford, Larry. The Hospice Handbook: A Complete Guide. Boston: Little, Brown, 1993. 1496. Bernard, Jan Selliken, and Miriam Schneider. The True Work of Dying: A Practical and Compassionate Guide to Easing the Dying Process. New York: Avon Books, 1996. Bernard and Schneider offer an exceptionally touching and sensitive guide for the dying and those who care for them. With a hospice-oriented theme, the authors present information on “home deathing,” the development of the hospice movement in the twentieth century, spiritual matters with death, parallels between birth and death, pain management, rituals for remembering, and death as a healing experience. Includes a list of references used, recommended readings arranged by subject, and helpful organizations. Also includes information about Angels’ Work, the consultant business of the authors. Both are registered nurses with experience in hospice environments. Foreword by Bernie Siegel. 1497. Buckingham, Robert W. Among Friends: Hospice Care for the Person with AIDS. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1992. 1498.

———. The Complete Hospice Guide. New York: Harper & Row, 1983.

1499. ———. The Handbook of Hospice Care. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 1996. Buckingham, professor of public health at New Mexico State University and noted thanatologist, is one of the founders of the hospice movement in the United States. With this book, he offers information and resources on hospice care. He reviews the history of hospice and the philosophy behind hospice care. He addresses the basics of hospice and end-of-life palliative care but also examines the practical issues that patients and their loved ones must often face, for example, appropriateness of hospice for children and AIDS patients, cost-effectiveness of hospice care, and transitioning medical providers. Buckingham also discusses hospice administration, grief management, how to start a hospice, and the future of hospice care. Kate S. Mahoney offers a chapter on contemporary issues in hospice care, in which she discusses equity in the provision of hospice care, lack of access to Medicaid among children and the resulting lack of hospice access, disproportionate use of services by Caucasians, problems with benefits offered by the U.S. Veterans Administration, access to hospice care in rural areas, reimbursement for care, recruitment issues for hospice staff, staff stress and burnout, awareness to perceptions of good care, and education of the medical staff. Includes a directory of hospice organizations in the United States and a thorough list of references. Notes are included at the end of each chapter. Foreword by Rosemary Johnson Hurzeler, chairman of the Hospice Association of America and president and chief executive officer of the Connecticut Hospice, Inc., the first American hospice.

202

Chapter 18

1500. Care of the Terminally Ill: The Hospice Concept. Rockville, MD: ProjectShare, 1980. 1501. Carey, Deborah Allen. Hospice Inpatient Environments: Compendium and Guidelines. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Publishing, 1986. 1502. Chase, Deborah. Dying at Home with Hospice. St. Louis, MO: C. V. Mosby Co., 1986. Chase, editor of the University of California, Berkeley, Wellness Letter, comments on American perceptions of and reactions to death and the dying process and then provides practical guidance on dying at home with hospice care. She discusses the hospice movement, hospice in action, the dynamics of dying, families and children in the hospice context, final hours, grieving with hospice, and legal and financial considerations. She provides a helpful 47-page chapter featuring hospice resources in the United States arranged by state. A short bibliography and two-page glossary are also included. There is no index. 1503. Clark, David, Michael Wright, and Jacek Luczak. Transitions in End-ofLife Care: Hospice and Related Developments in Eastern Europe and Central Asia. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2003. 1504. Cohen, Kenneth P. Hospice, Prescription for Terminal Care. Germantown, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation, 1979. Cohen offers both an introduction to hospice care and a sourcebook for the terminally ill and those who care for them. He begins with a discussion of hospice versus hospital care and continues with a history of the hospice movement, noting its origins in the Middle Ages. Other topics covered include dignity in death and quality of life for terminally ill patients, attitudes toward death, death fear, grief and bereavement, right-to-die issues, hospice models, elements of a successful hospice program, cost considerations in care of the terminally ill, symptom control, health insurance issues, legislation surrounding death issues, definitions of death, and roadblocks to the hospice movement. Includes a description of notable U.S. and Canadian hospices in chapter 11. Appendixes include a list of hospices; a descriptive list of organizations dealing with death issues; guidelines and directives for the California Natural Death Act; and various surveys for insurance companies, hospitals, and hospices. Includes an index and a bibliography of books and articles. 1505. Collett, Merrill. At Home with Dying: A Zen Hospice Approach. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 1999. 1506. Connor, Stephen R. Hospice: Practice, Pitfalls, and Promise. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1998. 1507. Corless, Inge B., and Zelda Foster. The Hospice Heritage: Celebrating Our Future. New York: Haworth Press, 1999.

Hospice

203

1508. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr, eds. Hospice Care: Principles and Practice. New York: Springer, 1983. Volume 5 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. Also published by Faber, London. 1509. Cundiff, David E. Euthanasia Is Not the Answer: A Hospice Physician’s View. Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, 1992. 1510. Davidson, Glenn W. The Hospice: Development and Administration. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1978. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 1511. Delfosse, Renee. Hospice and Home Health Agency Characteristics: United States, 1991. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Health Statistics, 1995. 1512. Doyle, Derek. Volunteers in Hospice and Palliative Care: A Handbook for Volunteer Service Managers. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002. 1513. Du Boulay, Shirley. Cicely Saunders, Founder of the Modern Hospice Movement. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1984. 1514. DuBois, Paul M. The Hospice Way of Death. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1980. Appropriate for general audiences, DuBois presents an easy-to-read overview of hospice and the hospice movement when it was still developing in the United States. He offers a definition of hospice, commentary on the quality of dying in the United States, information on the components of hospice care, text regarding the hospice movement and the federal response, and case studies with St. Christopher’s Hospice, Hospice, Inc., and Strong Memorial Hospital. The latter is an example of the failure to start a hospice. Includes notes, a bibliography, and an index. 1515. 1979.

———. Hospices: A New Way to Die. New York: Human Services Press,

1516. ———. Hospital-Based Palliative Care Teams: The Hospital–Hospice Interface. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998. 1517. ———. Terminal Care Support Teams: The Hospital–Hospice Interface. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990. 1518. Ewens, James, and Patricia Herrington. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Josefina B. Magno Present Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing Terminal Illness. Santa Fe, NM: Bear & Co., 1982. 1519. ———. Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing Terminal Illness. Santa Fe, NM: Bear & Co., 1983.

204

1520. 1999.

Chapter 18

The Family Book of Hospice Care. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press,

1521. Frozena, Cynthia L., and Maryann Hurtt. Hospice Care Planning: An Interdisciplinary Guide. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers, 1999. 1522. Gallagher-Allred, Charlette R., and Madalon O’Rawe Amenta. Nutrition and Hydration in Hospice Care: Needs, Strategies, Ethics. New York: Haworth Press, 1993. 1523. Glavan, Denise, Cindy Longanacre, and John Spivey. Hospice, a Labor of Love. St. Louis, MO: Chalice Press, 1999. 1524. Goldberg, Jim, Dena Andre, Philip Brookman, Jane Livington, and Nan Goldin, Sally Mann, Jack Radcliffe, and Kathy Vargas. Hospice: A Photographic Inquiry. Boston: Little, Brown, in association with the Corcoran Gallery of Art and the National Hospice Foundation, 1996. 1525. Halporn, Roberta, ed. The Hospice Concept. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1977. First publication in the Thanatology Service Series. This work is a compilation of reprinted essays by Joan Kron, Robert Buckingham III, Sylvia Lack, and Donna D. Bettes on hospice design, living with the dying, and applying the hospice concept. The book includes a selected bibliography compiled by Halporn, which includes books and articles written by professionals Robert Lamerton, Barbara McNulty, Colin Murray Parkes, and Robert G. Twycross working at St. Christopher’s Hospice in England. Also includes titles under the categories “Other Materials of Relevance,” “Tools for Working with Volunteers,” “Self-Help Groups,” “Audiovisual Material,” and “Books in Preparation.” Kron’s essay on hospice design, which was first published in New York Magazine in 1976, includes interior renderings and floor plans for a proposed hospice facility in New Haven, Connecticut. All this is contained in nineteen pages. 1526. Hamilton, Michael Pollock, and Helen F. Reid. A Hospice Handbook: A New Way to Care for the Dying. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing, 1980. 1527. Harris, Marilyn D., Elissa Della Monica, and Pamela Boyd. Handbook of Hospice Policies and Procedures. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers, 1999. 1528. Hastings Center. Access to Hospice Care: Expanding Boundaries, Overcoming Barriers: A Special Supplement to the Hastings Center Report. Garrison, NY: Hastings Center, 2003. 1529. Haupt, Barbara J. Development of the National Home and Hospice Care Survey. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Health Statistics, 1994.

Hospice

205

1530. Hayslip, Bert, and Joel Leon. Hospice Care. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, 1992. Part of the Geriatric Case Practice Training Series, Joel Leon, editor. The authors offer an academic exploration of hospice care likely intended for health care practitioners working with older adults. Chapters focus on working with patients and families, special knowledge needed for the hospice environment, the educational role of hospice, communication and assessment skills in hospice, and the importance of the interdisciplinary team. An introduction to hospice care is also provided and includes some historical background. Includes an appendix with model fieldwork assignments, references, and an index. 1531. Health Care Financing Administration, United States Government. Medicare Hospice Benefits: A Special Way of Caring for People Who Have a Terminal Illness. Baltimore, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Health Care Financing Administration, 1999. 1532. Hill, D., and D. Penso. Opening Doors: Improving Access to Hospice and Specialist Care Services by Members of Black and Ethnic Minority Communities, Occasional Paper 7. London: National Council for Hospice and Specialist Palliative Care Services, 1995. 1533. Hilliard, Russell E. Hospice and Palliative Care Music Therapy: A Guide to Program Development and Clinical Care. Cherry Hill, NJ: Jeffrey Books, 2005. 1534. Hospice as a Social Health Care Institution: Report of the Pre-Forum Institute of the 105th Annual Forum of the National Conference on Social Welfare. Tacoma, WA: Hillhaven Foundation, 1979. Also published by the National Conference on Social Welfare, Columbus, OH. 1535. Huber, M. Clinical Protocols for Care of Hospice Patients: An Interdisciplinary Approach. Detroit: Hospice of Michigan Programs, 1994. 1536. Indiana Health Planning and Agency Support Bureau, Plan Development Section. The Hospice: Care for People with Terminal Illness. Indianapolis: Indiana State Board of Health, 1977. 1537. Infeld, Donna Lind, and Nadine Reimer Penner. Bereavement: Client Adaptation and Hospice Services. New York: Haworth Press, 1996. 1538. Jaffe, Carolyn, and Carol H. Ehrlich. All Kinds of Love: Experiencing Hospice. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1997. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1539. Jennings, Bruce. Ethics in Hospice Care: Challenges to Hospice Values in a Changing Health Care Environment. New York: Haworth Press, 1997.

206

Chapter 18

1540. Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals. Hospice SelfAssessment and Survey Guide. Chicago: Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals, 1983. 1541. ———. Hospice Standards Manual. Chicago: Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals, 1986. 1542. Kalina, Kathy. Midwife for Souls: Spiritual Care for the Dying: A Guide for Hospice Care Workers and All Who Live with the Terminally Ill. Boston: St. Paul Books & Media, 1993. 1543. Kircher, Pamela M. Love Is the Link: A Hospice Doctor Shares Her Experience of Near-Death and Dying. Burdett, NY: Larson Publications, 1995. Published for the Paul Brunton Philosophic Foundation by Larson Publications. 1544. Koff, Theodore H. Hospice: A Caring Community. Cambridge, MA: Winthrop Publishers, 1980. Koff, a consultant to Hillhaven Hospice, notes in the preface that this book is written for the student of hospice, whether that person is a classroom student or working in health care; however, the text not only provides an introduction to the hospice movement and its values but also gives guidance and direction on developing and administering a hospice program. Topics include palliative versus curative care, eliminating isolation in dying, death with dignity, childhood death, pain management, the continuum of care, the organization of hospice care, privacy, hospice staff issues, hospice environments, multidisciplinary team approaches, funding and licensure in the administration of a hospice program, accreditation, confidentiality, and methodological considerations in evaluating hospice programs. Contributors include Betty Koff, Sister Teresa M. McIntier, John A. Hackley, and Robert W. Buckingham. Includes references, a bibliography, and an index. Foreword by John A. Hackley, president of the Hillhaven Foundation. 1545. Kohut, Jeraldine Marasco, and Sylvester Kohut. Hospice: Caring for the Terminally Ill. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. Author also cited in cataloging data as Jeraldine Joanne Kohut. The authors, both professors at Tennessee Technological University, have extensive personal and professional experience in hospice environments and offer this book as the first comprehensive reference book regarding communitysupported hospices. The book is a practitioners’ guide for “[people] who want to establish and/or maintain a quality community-based hospice program for the terminally ill; for [people] who want to start other kinds of hospices, either as free standing facilities, hospital-supported [facilities], or nursing home programs; or for undergraduate or graduate students in allied health fields.” Most of the text is focused on clinical concerns, though there is notable treatment of insurance issues, grief and bereavement counseling, and ethical and legal issues. Appendixes include bylaws of a hospice in Marshall, Alabama; an affiliate manual; and help-

Hospice

207

ful hints to friends of hard of hearing people. Organization contact information is included throughout the book. Includes an index. Forewords by Albert Gore Jr, congressman from Tennessee, and Iris A. Kozil, executive director of Alive Hospice in Nashville, Tennessee. 1546. Kutscher, Austin H., Samuel C. Klagsbrun, Richard J. Torpie, Robert DeBellis, Mahlon S. Hale, and Margot Tallmer, eds. Hospice U.S.A. New York: Columbia University Press, 1983. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. The editors have assembled thirty-four articles that consider the evolution of the hospice movement and muse on where it might be headed in the decades to come. Comment is provided on how cost considerations and rising costs for new medical innovations have an impact on the development of hospice and how hospice imposes limitations on therapeutic interventions. Contributors address the acceptance of death in the hospice environment, the politics of expanding hospice care, management concerns with hospice, right-to-die issues, humanistic care of the dying, death with dignity, patient rights, the right to choose a place to die, preserving personhood, sexuality and privacy among the chronically ill and dying, humor and laughter, spiritual care, group therapy, senior volunteering in hospice, a physical alternative to hospice, integrating care, the death of a hospice in a tertiary hospital, hospice home care, and patient support. This title also contains significant content on clinical issues and care. Includes an index and brief information on each contributor. Preface by Austin H. Kutscher and Lillian G. Kutscher. 1547. Lack, Sylvia A., and Robert W. Buckingham. First American Hospice: Three Years of Home Care. New Haven, CT: Hospice, Inc., 1978. 1548. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia E., and Jane Marie Kirschling. Bereavement Care: A New Look at Hospice and Community-Based Services. New York: Haworth Press, 1989. 1549. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia E., John J. Mahoney, and Galen W. Miller. The Hospice Choice: In Pursuit of a Peaceful Death. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1998. The cover subtitle also appears A National Hospice Organization Guide to Hospice Care. Intended to answer questions about hospice care for general audiences, this guide from the National Hospice Organization discusses the many services hospice can provide and how they can help families deal with the many issues faced by the dying and their loved ones. The book addresses physician and nursing services, counseling services, respite services for caregivers, bereavement counseling, financial issues, cultural concerns, and special problems raised by sudden death. Lattanzi-Licht is a hospice nurse and psychotherapist who cofounded the Boulder County Hospice in Colorado. Mahoney and Miller are both affiliated with the National Hospice Organization. Includes a special hospice question and answer guide, notes, consumer information and resources, resource groups,

208

Chapter 18

additional reading suggestions, and an index. Also includes a history of the National Hospice Organization logo. 1550. Lerman, Dan, and Claire B. Tehan. Hospital–Hospice Management Models: Integration and Collaboration. Chicago: American Hospital Publishing, 1995. 1551. Lewis, Martyn. Tears and Smiles: The Hospice Handbook. London: O’Mara, 1989. 1552. Ley, D., and Harry Van Bommel. The Heart of Hospice. Toronto, Ontario: NC Press Limited, 1994. 1553. Lutheran Welfare Service of Northeastern Pennsylvania, Hospice Saint John, and Model Projects in Aging Programs (United States). Hospice Saint John: A Three-Year Demonstration of Hospice Care. Kingston, PA: Hospice, Inc., 1982. Supported, in part, by a grant, HHS #03AD201, from the Model Projects in Aging Program, Administration on Aging, Office of Human Development Services; Department of Health and Human Services. 1554. Manning, Margaret. The Hospice Alternative: Living with Dying. London: Souvenir Press, 1984. 1555. Marrelli, Tina M. Hospice and Palliative Care Handbook: Quality, Compliance, and Reimbursement. St. Louis, MO: Mosby-Year Book, Inc., 1999. Second edition published in 2004. 1556. ———. Mosby’s Home Care and Hospice Drug Handbook. St. Louis, MO: Mosby, 1999. 1557. Martocchio, Benita C., and Karin Dufault. Symposia on Hospice, Compassionate Care, and the Dying Experience. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1985. 1558. Maryuma, Terence Chikako. Hospice Care and Culture: Comparison of the Hospice Movement in the West and Japan. Brookfield, VT: Ashgate Publishing, 1999. 1559. McCann, Barbara A., and Karen Liffring Hill. The Hospice Project Report. Chicago: Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals, 1985. 1560. McDonnell, Alice. Quality Hospice Care: Administration, Organization, and Models. Owings Mills, MD: National Health Publishing, 1986. 1561. McNulty, Elizabeth G., and Robert A. Holderby. Hospice, a Caring Challenge. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983. 1562. Mojtabai, A. G. Soon: Tales from Hospice. Cambridge, MA: Zoland Books, 1998.

Hospice

209

1563. Mor, Vincent, and David S. Greer. The Hospice Movement. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988. 1564. Mor, Vincent, and Susan Masterson-Allen. Hospice Care Systems: Structure, Process, Costs, and Outcome. New York: Springer, 1987. Volume 8 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. On the acknowledgments page, the author notes that “this document was prepared, in part, in connection with contract #500-85-0024 from the Health Care Financing Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services to Abt Associates, Inc., with a subcontract to Brown University, Center for Health Care Research.” Mor, associate professor of community health at Brown University and project director of the National Hospice Study, offers a thorough exploration of the hospice organization and operational structure in the United States. He examines the historical development of the hospice movement, noting its initiation in the United States in 1974. Mor looks at social trends, legal and ethical issues, policy matters, governmental roles in hospice settings, and the potential for organizational change. Other topics covered include the distribution and size of hospices; hospice ownership and leadership structure; provision and range of services; patient eligibility; demographics of hospice patients; a summary of case mix studies; stress and burnout for caretakers of the terminally ill; attitudes toward death; hospice roles; standards of care in the context of the hospice philosophy; clinical control of care; pain and symptom management protocols; bereavement counseling; nutritional support; alternative therapies; pediatric hospice programs; quality of life outcomes; hospice cost issues, including overall health care cost savings due to hospice; and hospice on the international scene. Includes lengthy references and an index. 1565. Morrissey, Paul F. Let Someone Hold You: The Journey of a Hospice Priest. New York: Crossroads Publishing Co., 1994. 1566. Munley, Anne. The Hospice Alternative: A New Context for Death and Dying. New York: Basic Books, 1983. Munley, director of apostolic planning for the congregation of the Immaculate Heart of Mary in Scranton, Pennsylvania, offers a thorough overview of the hospice model and the hospice movement. Unlike Kübler-Ross, who theorizes about a series of stages leading to death, Munley believes dying is a “complex process filled with contradictions and conflicting tensions.” She discusses how hospice is about caring for the terminally ill, not curing them. In 349 pages, Munley explores the segregation of death; death as an age-old problem; dying as a social problem; the history of hospices; inpatient hospice care and its components and processes; the pains of the dying; interpretations of hospice; hospice principles; patient’s dialectics; hospice staff issues; spiritual support in a hospice and

210

Chapter 18

caregiving context; the future of the hospice movement; and hospice in light of such broad countercultural trends as the “back to nature” trend, self-help trend, and quest for transcendence. Includes three appendixes featuring standards of a hospice program, how to find hospice care, and a bibliography arranged by subject. Includes extensive notes and an index. 1567. Munro, Susan. Music Therapy in Palliative/Hospice Care. St. Louis: Magnamusic-Baton, Inc., 1984. 1568. National Conference on Social Welfare. Hospice as a Social Health Care Institution. Columbus, OH: National Conference on Social Welfare, 1978. 1569. Paradis, Lenora Finn. Hospice Handbook: A Guide for Managers and Planners. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corp., 1985. 1570. Petrosino, Barbara M. Nursing in Hospice and Terminal Care: Research and Practice. New York: Haworth Press, 1986. 1571. Putnam, Constance E. Hospice or Hemlock?: Searching for Heroic Compassion. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2002. Putnam contrasts right-to-die and physician-assisted suicide issues with the hospice model. She uses profiles of Cicely M. Saunders, founder of the hospice movement; Timothy Quill; Derek Humphry; Jack Kevorkian; Herbert Cohen; and Joanne Lynn to illustrate her points. Putnam discusses pain and dignity-oflife arguments, life trajectories, doctor–patient dialogue, and ideas for common ground in the debate. Includes suggestions for further reading and an index. 1572. Ray, M. Catherine. I’m Here to Help: A Guide for Caregivers, Hospice Workers, and Volunteers. New York: Bantam, 1997. 1573. Resnick, David B. Dying Declarations: Notes from a Hospice Volunteer. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2005. 1574. Rhinehart, Emily, and Mary M. Friedman. Infection Control in Home Care and Hospice. Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2006. 1575. Rivera, Michelle A. Hospice Hounds: Animals and Healing at the Borders of Death. New York: Lantern Books, 2001. 1576. Rose, Charles Spencer. In the Midst of Life: A Hospice Volunteer’s Story. Montgomery, AL: NewSouth Books, 2004. 1577. Rossman, Parker. Hospice: Creating New Models of Care for the Terminally Ill. New York: Association Press, 1977. Published by Fawcett Columbine, New York, in 1979 with the cover subtitle: A New Approach to Humane and Dignified Care for the Dying. Foreword by Edmund D. Pellegrino, professor of medicine at Yale University. Rossman, associated with the New Haven Hospice, provides a general introduction and overview of the hospice model in the United States. He reviews the

Hospice

211

hospice concept in England and how the New Haven Hospice is an American adaptation. He discusses palliative care, facility design, roles of various members of the hospice caregiving team, advice to communities starting a hospice, financial issues, hospice within hospital environments, and home care for the dying. An appendix features materials used in volunteer orientation. 1578. Saunders, Cicely M., and David Clark. Cicely Saunders: Founder of the Hospice Movement, Selected Letters, 1959–1999. Oxford, UK: Clarendon, 2002. 1579. Saunders, Cicely M., and Dorothy H. Summers. Hospice: The Living Idea. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1981. Also published by Saunders, London, in 1981. 1580. Scott, Patricia Cumin. Some Information for Those Caring for Patients. London: St. Christopher’s Hospice, 1974. 1581. Sendor, Virginia F., and Patrice M. O’Connor. Hospice and Palliative Care: Questions and Answers. Lanham, MD: Scarecrow Press, 1997. 1582. Sharp, Anne Wallace, and Susan Handle Terbay. Gifts: Two Hospice Professionals Reveal Messages from Those Passing On. Far Hills, NJ: New Horizon Press, 1997. 1583. Sheehan, Denice C., and Walter B. Forman. Hospice and Palliative Care: Concepts and Practice. Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 1996. 1584. Siebold, Cathy. The Hospice Movement: Easing Death’s Pains. New York: Twayne, 1992. 1585. Smith, Doug. Caregiving: Hospice-Proven Techniques for Healing Body and Soul. New York: Macmillan USA, 1997. 1586. Stoddard, Sandol. The Hospice Movement: A Better Way of Caring for the Dying. New York: Stein & Day, 1978. The prepublication title is cited as Hospice. Revised edition published by Random House, New York, in 1991. Also published by Vintage Books, New York, in 1992. Later editions also cited as The Hospice Movement: Updated and Expanded, A Better Way of Caring for the Dying. 1587. Taylor, Joan Leslie. In the Light of Dying: The Journals of a Hospice Volunteer. New York: Continuum, 1989. 1588. Torrens, Paul R. Hospice Programs and Public Policy. Chicago: American Hospital Publishing, 1985. 1589. United States General Accounting Office. Hospice Care, a Growing Concept in the United States: Report to the Congress. Washington, DC: U.S. General Accounting Office, 1979.

212

Chapter 18

1590. ———. Medicare: Program Provisions and Payments Discourage Hospice Participation: Report to the Subcommittee on Health, Committee on Way and Means, House of Representatives. Washington, DC: U.S. General Accounting Office, 1989. 1591. United States Senate, Special Committee on Aging. Barriers to Hospice Care: Are We Shortchanging Dying Patients: Hearing before the Special Committee on Aging, United States Senate, One Hundred Sixth Congress, Second Session, Washington, DC, September 18, 2000. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, 2001. 1592. Volicer, Ladislav, and Ann Hurley. Hospice Care for Patients with Advanced Progressive Dementia. New York: Springer, 1998. 1593. Wentzel, Kenneth B. To Those Who Need It Most: Hospice Means Hope. Boston: Charles River Books, 1981. 1594. Williams, Elaine K. A Regulatory Handbook for Hospice Social Workers: The Heart of Healing. Southgate, MI: Elaine K. Williams Associates, 1998. 1595.

Winn, Denise. The Hospice Way. London: Macdonald & Co., 1987.

1596. Worswick, Jacqueline. A House Called Helen: The Development of Hospice Care for Children. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. First edition published in 1993. This book is an account of Helen House, the first children’s hospice. Worswick discusses the philosophy of children’s hospice care and recent international developments in pediatric palliative care. In addition to detailing services provided by Helen House, she also outlines its operational framework. The new edition notes the growth of the concept in the United States since the first edition was published. 1597. Zimmerman, Jack McKay. Hospice: Complete Care for the Terminally Ill. Baltimore, MD: Urban & Schwarzenberg, 1986. Originally published in 1981.

19 Immortality

1598. Adams, J. Robert. Prospects for Immortality: A Sensible Search for Life after Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1599. Bauman, Zygmunt. Mortality, Immortality, and Other Life Strategies. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 1992. Also published by Polity Press, Oxford, in 1993. In the introduction, Bauman notes that this book is “not a study in the sociology of death and dying,” as this has received significant treatment in a growing body of literature. The purpose is to “unpack and to open up to investigation, the presence of death (i.e., of the conscious or repressed knowledge of mortality) in human institutions, rituals and beliefs which, on the face of it, explicitly and self-consciously serve tasks and functions altogether different, unrelated to the preoccupations normally scrutinized in studies dedicated to the ‘history of death and dying.’” He writes about the existential ambivalence of being and coping with it, the ambition of immortality, immortality as the “great de-equalizer,” and how death really cannot be perceived. Includes references and an index. 1600. Carrington, Hereward, and John R. Meader. Death: Its Causes and Phenomena with Special Reference to Immortality. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published as Death: Its Causes and Phenomena, by Dodd, Mead and Co., New York, in 1921. Reprint published by Ayer Co. Publishing, Salem, NH, in 1976. 1601. Duhring, Nathan. Immortality: Physically, Scientifically, Now: A Reasonable Guarantee of Bodily Preservation, a General Discussion, and Research Targets. Washington, DC: Twentieth-Century Books Foundation, 1962.

213

214

Chapter 19

1602. Ettinger, Robert C. W. The Prospect of Immortality. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1964. Published by McFadden-Bartell, New York, in 1966. 1603. Frazer, James G. Belief in Immortality and the Worship of the Dead. London: Macmillan, 1913. 1604. Harrington, Alan. The Immoralist: An Approach to the Engineering of Man’s Divinity. New York: Random House, 1969. 1605. Hocking, William Earnest. The Meaning of Immortality in Human Experience, Including Thoughts on Life and Death. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1957. Hocking’s Thoughts on Life and Death was originally published in 1937. Revised edition published by Greenwood, Westport, CT, in 1973. 1606. ———. Thoughts on Death and Life. New York: Harper, 1937. This book consists of the “Ingersoll Lecture on the Immortality of Man,” delivered at Harvard University in 1936, and the Hiram W. Thomas lecture “Meanings of Death and Meanings of Life,” delivered at the University of Chicago in 1936. 1607. Kan, S. Symbolic Immortality. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1989. 1608. Maeterlinck, Maurice. Our Eternity (Extension of Essay on Death). London: Methuen Publishing, 1913. 1609. Moore, Marvin. Life after What? Huntsville, AL: Southern Publishing Association, 1977. This book is a 31-page booklet exploring immortality and attitudes toward death. 1610. Obayashi, Hiroshi, ed. Death and Afterlife: Perspectives of World Religions. New York: Praeger, 1992. 1611. Osler, William. Science and Immortality. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. 1612. Penelhum, Terence, ed. Immortality. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1973. Part of the Basic Problems in Philosophy Series, A. I. Melden and Stanley Munsat, editors. Penelhum, professor of philosophy and religious studies at the University of Calgary, offers a discussion of the belief in life after death through nine articles from various contributors. Articles center on the Christian theology of death and discuss immortality of the soul, the notion of “another world,” resurrection of the body, reincarnation, evidence of psychical research, questions of survival, and religious beliefs and the afterlife. Includes a bibliography arranged by subject and content information on other titles in the series.

Immortality

215

1613. Perrett, Roy W. Death and Immortality. Boston: Kluwer Academic/Martinus Nijhoff, 1987. Part of the Studies in Philosophy and Religion series, volume 10. In this book, Perrett, a New Zealand professor, discusses a number of philosophical issues related to death and immortality. The text is divided into two parts, the first approaching the philosophical issues with death and immortality that are true for everyone, regardless of their religious thoughts or opinions on immortality, and the second focusing on the concept of immortality and major traditional accounts of it. In addition to literary and theological works, the author also incorporates Indian philosophical traditions into his arguments. Includes an appendix entitled “Karma and the Problem of Suffering,” a selected bibliography, and an index. 1614. Phillips, D. Z. Death and Immortality. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1970. This 83-page book provides a general overview of immortality as a concept and attitudes toward death. 1615. Pieper, Josef. Death and Immortality. New York: Herder & Herder, 1969. In the opening chapter, Pieper refers to death as an “especially philosophical subject.” He goes on to discuss the vocabulary of death and the problematic aspect of euphemism, the meaning of the phrase “separation of body and soul,” natural event versus punishment, the notion of there being no untimely death, death and freedom, and definitions of immortality and eternal life. Includes notes. 1616. 1977.

Scott, D. H. Is There Life after Death? New York: Bantam Books,

1617. 1974.

Segerberg, Osborn. The Immortality Factor. New York: E. P. Dutton,

1618. Stephens, C. S. Natural Salvation: The Message of Science, Outlining the First Principles of Immortal Life on Earth. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published in 1905. 1619. Tuccille, Jerome. Here Comes Immortality. New York: Stein & Day, 1973. Tuccille presents a positive, sometimes humorous compendium of lifeextension methods to include cryonics, reanimation, and cloning.

20 Legal and Financial Issues

1620. Aid Association for Lutherans. Step by Step: Your Guide to Making Practical Decisions When a Loved One Dies. Appleton, WI: Aid Association for Lutherans, 2000. 1621. Anderson, Patricia. Affairs in Order: A Complete Resource Guide to Death and Dying. New York: Macmillan, 1991. Divided into sections entitled “Planning Ahead,” “Death Care,” and “In the Aftermath,” this thorough guide covers dozens of topics related to death, dying, and bereavement. Topics discussed include wills, probate, estate planning, letters of instruction, funeral preplanning, cremation, embalming, the Federal Trade Commission funeral rule, services and ceremonies, memorial societies, laws governing disposition, right-to-die issues, ethics surrounding death and dying issues, determination of death, institutional dying, organ donation, health care versus death care, hospice, death certificates, guardians for minor children, and death in a foreign country. Only one chapter focuses on grief and bereavement. Each chapter in the book ends with a list of resources and support. These include annotated reading lists, organizations with addresses, and government agencies and their contact information. A lengthy bibliography is included. 1622. Berger, Arthur S. When Life Ends: Legal Overviews, Medicolegal Forms, and Hospital Policies. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1995. 1623. Bernard, Hugh Y. The Law of Death and Disposal of the Dead. New York: Oceana Publications, 1966. 1624. Camp, Marcia, and Clarissa Willis. You Can’t Leave Till You Do the Paperwork: Matters of Life and Death. Philadelphia: Xlibris Corp., 1999.

216

Legal and Financial Issues

217

1625. Cantor, Norman L. Legal Frontiers of Death and Dying. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987. 1626. Connelly, Robert Joseph. Last Rights: Death and Dying in Texas Law and Experience. San Antonio, TX: Corona Publishing Co., 1982. Revised paperback edition published in 1992. 1627. Dinsmore, J. S., ed. Death and Dying: An Examination of Legislative and Policy Issues. Washington, DC: Georgetown University, Health Policy Center, 1977. 1628. Doudera, A. Edward, and J. Douglas Peters. Legal and Ethical Aspects of Treating Critically and Terminally Ill Patients. Ann Arbor, MI: AUPHA Press, in cooperation with the American Society of Law and Medicine, 1982. 1629. Gatov, Elizabeth Smith. Widows in the Dark: Rescuing Your Financial Position. Bolinas, CA: Common Knowledge Press, 1985. Also cited as being published by Warner Books, New York, in 1986. 1630. Herbeck, David J. An Act of Love: Preparing Your Spouse for Life without You, a Financial Guide. Edina, MN: Beaver’s Pond Press, 2004. 1631. Kaplan, Karen Orloff, and Christopher Lukas. Staying in Charge: Practical Plans for the End of Your Life. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2004. Kaplan and Lukas offer a practical guide for preparing for a loved one’s death. They discuss living wills, do not resuscitate orders, medical powers of attorney, marshalling the support of friends and family, communicating about death, palliative care, advance directives, nursing homes, and financial matters. Hospice and, as the authors say, “learning to live in the midst of dying” are extensively explored. Personal family stories are included to convey the messages. Includes a suggested reading list and a lengthy and thorough list of resources divided by subject with descriptions of each organization or website. 1632. Karnes, Barbara. The Final Act of Living. Vancouver, WA: Barbara Karnes Books, 2003. Based on her lectures, Karnes, a registered nurse, offers a simple guide to approaching death from disease and the associated grieving process. Such practical end-of-life matters as durable powers of attorney and living wills are also addressed. 1633. Katz, Jay, and Alexander Morgan Capron. Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides What? A Psychosocial and Legal Analysis of the Problems Posed by Hemodialysis and Organ Transplantation. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1975. 1634. Lee, Robert G., and Derek Morgan. Death Rites: Law and Ethics at the End of Life. New York: Routledge, 1996.

218

Chapter 20

1635. Maxwell, Katie. No Lifetime Guarantee: Dealing with the Details of Death. Crozet, VA: Betterway Publications, 1988. Maxwell provides practical information and resources for loved ones following a death in the family. Topics addressed include wills, probate, autopsies, body disposition, anatomical gifting, and many others. 1636. McHugh, James T. Death, Dying, and the Law. Huntington, IN: Our Sunday Visitor Press, 1976. 1637. McLean, Sheila. Death, Dying, and the Law. Brookfield, VT: Dartmouth Publishing Co., 1996. 1638. Meyers, David W. Medicolegal Implications of Death and Dying: A Detailed Discussion of the Medical and Legal Implications Involved in Death and/or Care of the Dying and Terminal Patient. Rochester, NY: Lawyers Cooperative Publishing Co., 1981. Also published by Bancroft-Whitney Co., San Francisco. 1639. Moraczewski, Albert S. Determination of Death: Theological, Medical, Ethical, and Legal Issues. St. Louis, MO: Catholic Health Association of the United States, 1982. 1640. Muth, Annemarie. Death and Dying Sourcebook: Basic Consumer Health Information for the Layperson about End-of-Life Care and Related Ethical and Legal Issues. Detroit, MI: Omnigraphics, 2000. 1641. President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral Research. Deciding to Forego Life-Sustaining Treatment: A Report on the Ethical, Medical, and Legal Issues in Treatment Decisions. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1983. 1642. ———. Defining Death: Medical, Legal, and Ethical Issues in the Determination of Death. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1981. 1643. Prettyman, Barrett. Death and the Supreme Court. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1961. 1644. Robertson, John A. The Rights of the Critically Ill: The Basic ACLU Guide to the Rights of Critically Ill and Dying Patients. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger Publishing Co., 1983. An American Civil Liberties Union Handbook. Also published by Bantam Books, New York, in 1983. 1645. Rosner, Gerald. Dying and Death: Perspectives on the Role of the Financial and Estate Planner: A New Compensable Service. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1988. 1646. Scott, Milton Berry. What to Do When Someone Dies: A Legal, Financial, and Practical Guide. 2nd ed. Alamo, CA: Pere Bruin Press, 2004. First edition published in 1997.

Legal and Financial Issues

219

Scott, a California attorney specializing in estate planning and probate law, offers a guidebook for decisions loved ones may face when someone dies. He discusses anatomical gifts, autopsy, choosing a funeral home or crematory, making arrangements, obituaries, wills, probate, wrongful death action, the continuation of a business after death, safe deposit boxes, medical insurance, social security, retirement and annuity benefits, pensions, profit-sharing plans, IRAs, life insurance, workers’ compensation benefits, and various tax issues. A form for consolidating important information is included in the back of the book, along with a list of Internet resources. 1647. Shaffer, Thomas L. Death, Property, and Lawyers: A Behavioral Approach. New York: Dunellen Publishing, 1970. 1648. Shipley, Roger R. The Consumer’s Guide to Death, Dying, and Bereavement. Palm Springs, CA: ETC Publications, 1982. 1649. Smith, Curtis A. Help for the Bereaved: What the Family of the Deceased Should Know. Chicago: Adams Press, 1972. Also cited as being published by the Educational Development Association, Hazel Crest, IL. This book is a guide for the bereaved with details on funeral planning, legal issues, financial affairs, and much more. 1650. St. John-Stevas, Norman. Life, Death, and the Law. Cleveland, OH: World Publishing Co., 1961. 1651. Urofsky, Melvin I. Letting Go: Death, Dying, and the Law. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1994. Published by Charles Scribner’s Sons, New York, in 1993. 1652. Wolk, Gloria Grening. Ca$h for the Final Days: A Financial Guide for the Terminally Ill and Their Advisors. Laguna Hills, CA: Bialkin Books, 1997.

21 Mental Health Issues

1653. Akhtar, Salman, ed. Three Faces of Mourning: Melancholia, Manic Defense, and Moving On. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 2001. All but two of the chapters were originally presented as papers at the 32nd Annual Margaret S. Mahler Symposium on Child Development held April 28, 2001, in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. The symposium was associated with the Margaret S. Mahler Psychiatric Research Foundation. Topics include Oedipal and separationindividuation issues in a woman’s loss of her mother, defenses evoked by early childhood loss and their impact on life-span development, technical problems in analyzing the mourning patient, child analysis, object loss in childhood, and interrupted mourning. Includes bibliographical references, information on contributors, and an index. 1654. Bloom-Feshbach, Jonathan, and Sally Bloom-Feshbach. The Psychology of Separation and Loss: Perspectives on Development, Life Transitions, and Clinical Practice. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1987. Part of the Jossey-Bass Social and Behavioral Science Series. Sixteen articles comprise this 587-page tome on separation and loss. The articles are divided into three sections: “The Role of Separation in Development,” “Separation and Loss in Major Life Transitions,” and “Separation, Loss, and Psychopathology: Implications and Treatment.” An afterword comments on converging themes in the psychology of separation and loss. Topics covered include psychoanalytic views of separation in infancy and early childhood, the attachment theory, cultural identity and mourning, and parental and sibling death. Several chapters are devoted to topics not related to death and dying. Includes name and subject indexes. 1655. Canine, John D. The Psychosocial Aspects of Death and Dying. Stamford, CT: Appleton & Lange, 1996. First edition published by McGraw-Hill Medical in 1996. 220

Mental Health Issues

221

1656. Cook, Alicia Skinner, and Daniel S. Dworkin. Helping the Bereaved: Therapeutic Interventions for Children, Adolescents, and Adults. New York: Basic Books, 1992. Written for mental health professionals, Cook and Dworkin’s book intends to provide knowledge and skills to help them work successfully with the bereaved. Stressing that the “practice of grief therapy is based on an in-depth understanding of grieving and its manifestations, and like other specialized areas of therapy, it requires expertise in assessment, diagnosis, intervention,” the authors provide guidance on the assessment process and criteria for differential diagnosis. They address both group and individual therapeutic interventions and include examples. Topics include models of grief resolution; theoretical explanations of the pain of loss; counseling/support services versus grief therapy; complicated/pathological grieving; therapeutic issues with specific types of loss; positive outcomes of bereavement; clinical considerations; grief and clinical depression; bereavement scales and inventories; special considerations for children and adolescents, including nonverbal communication; therapeutic techniques; self-help and therapy groups; psychotherapy for young people; cultural considerations in grief therapy; the resolution of grief and termination of therapy; socioeconomic influences; and the effects of a therapist’s cultural background. Includes references and an index. 1657. Dietrich, David R., and Peter C. Shabad, eds. The Problem of Loss and Mourning: Psychoanalytic Perspectives. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1989. 1658. Eissler, Kurt R. The Psychiatrist and the Dying Patient. New York: International Universities Press, 1955. Reprinted in 1970. A classic of thanatological literature, Eissler reviews the history of Sigmund Freud’s thanatology, individualism, attitudes toward death, death and the pleasure principle, death and ego formation, self-preservation, death as a psychologically determined event, and euthanasia. Includes three case histories, concluding remarks on the problems of countertransference, information about death and the biological sciences, and text on death as a psychic event. Eissler also offers commentary on orthothanasia, or passive death. Includes a bibliography. 1659. Finn, William F., and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Women and Loss: Psychobiological Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1985. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. 1660. Garfield, Charles A., ed. Psychosocial Care of the Dying Patient. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978. Includes E. W. Young’s “Reflections on Life and Death.” 1661. Kauffman, Jeffrey. Guidebook on Helping Persons with Mental Retardation Mourn. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2005. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.

222

Chapter 21

1662. Kennedy, Elizabeth A. The Impact of Cognitive Development and Socialization Factors on the Concept of Death among Adults with Mental Retardation. Akron, OH: University of Akron, 2000. Author’s doctoral dissertation at the University of Akron, May, 2000. 1663. Klagsbrun, Samuel C., Ivan K. Goldberg, Marilyn M. Rawnsley, Austin H. Kutscher, Eric R. Marcus, and Mary-Ellen Siegel, eds. Psychiatric Aspects of Terminal Illness. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1988. The editors present a collection of articles exploring a multitude of mental health topics and their relevance to the care of terminal patients. Topics include confronting terminal illness, physician attitudes toward dying patients, communicating with the patient, issues of control and passivity, psychiatric assessment, death anxiety, perceptions of life-threatening illness, treating patients with AIDS, dementia, and home care. Includes references and a subject index. 1664. Kutscher, Austin H. Living under the Sword: Psychosocial Aspects of Recurrent and Progressive Life-Threatening Illness. Lanham, MD: Scarecrow Press, 2004. 1665. Kutscher, Austin H., Ivan K. Goldberg, and Sidney Malitz, eds. Psychopharmacological Agents in the Care of the Terminally Ill and the Bereaved. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, Columbia University Press, 1973. 1666. Lindenberg, Steven Phillip. Group Psychotherapy with People Who Are Dying. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983. 1667. Luchterhand, Charlene, and Nancy Murphy. Helping Adults with Mental Retardation Grieve a Death Loss. Philadelphia: Accelerated Development, 1998. 1668. Meyer, Joachim E. Death and Neurosis. New York: International Universities Press, 1975. Translated by Margarete Nunberg. Originally published by Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, Gottingen, in 1973. As with many books published in the early 1970s, Meyer’s text notes with amazement the growing fascination with death and dying. He writes about the waning themes of avoidance, suppression, and denial of mortality; however, he points out that this altered approach is too new for interpretation and quotes Sigmund Freud saying, “The wanderer who sings in the dark denies his fears, but his singing does not lighten the darkness.” Themes in the book include fear of death as a determinant in the origin of neuroses, death dreams, death anxiety during various life phases, psychodynamic aspects, current conscious attitudes toward death and dying, mourning, religious and philosophical considerations, and modern medicine in the context of aging and death. Includes references. 1669. Rogers, W. F. The Place of Grief Work in Mental Health. Madison, WI: Microcard Foundation for the American Theological Library Association, 1956.

Mental Health Issues

223

1670. Schaverien, Joy. The Dying Patient in Psychotherapy: Desire, Dreams, and Individuation. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2002. Intended for mental health professionals, this book reveals the process of individuation through an “account of love and death within a therapeutic relationship.” Schaverien, a Jungian analyst and professor of psychology at the University of Sheffield, discusses the therapeutic relationship, dreams and the erotic transference and countertransference, mourning, hospice, medications, and bereavement. Includes a list of thirty dreams and where they can be found in the text, references, and an index. 1671. Schoenberg, Bernard S., and Arthur C. Carr. Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care of Oral Cancer. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976. 1672. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, and Austin H. Kutscher. Contributions to Psychiatry, Education of the Health Professional, Thanatology, and Ethical Values. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1984. 1673. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, David Peretz, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care. New York: Columbia University Press, 1972. 1674. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Irwin Gerber, Alfred Wiener, Austin H. Kutscher, David Peretz, Arthur C. Carr, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Bereavement: Its Psychosocial Aspects. New York: Columbia University Press, 1975. The editors, noted authorities on thanatology who are associated with the nonprofit Foundation of Thanatology, have assembled a collection of articles on the fundamental concepts of bereavement, the bereavement process, family issues associated with grief, the role of the health care professional, and therapeutic intervention. Specific topics addressed include uses of ethnography in understanding grief and mourning, hallucinations among the bereaved, weight loss and sleep disturbance, attitudes toward death, pathological bereavement, parental grief, withdrawal in bereaved children, vulnerability among the aged bereaved, and the role of the nurse. Includes professional information for each of the contributors. The index is attributed to Lucia Bove. 1675. Shabad, Peter C. Despair and the Return of Hope: Echoes of Mourning in Psychotherapy. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 2001. 1676. Weisman, Avery D. On Dying and Denying: A Psychiatric Study of Terminality. New York: Behavioral Publications, 1972. Part of the Gerontology Series, Sheldon R. Roen, series editor. Also cited as Death and Denial. Weisman, a psychiatrist at Massachusetts General Hospital and Harvard Medical School, presents a study of denial and death that includes clinical examples of the terminally ill. Chapters focus on the practical significance of mortality, common misconceptions about death and denial, death from terminal old age, indications on impending death, counterparts of death, illusion and incipient death,

224

Chapter 21

denial and acceptance in myocardial infarction and cancer, and case material and methods. Includes a bibliography and an index. Foreword by Herman Feifel. 1677. Weisman, Avery D., and Robert J. Kastenbaum. The Psychological Autopsy: A Study of the Terminal Phase of Life. New York: Behavioral Publications, 1968. Part of the Gerontology Series, Sheldon R. Roen, series editor. Community Mental Health Journal Monograph number 4. Reprinted by Human Sciences Press in 1972. 1678. Zisook, Sidney. Biopsychosocial Aspects of Bereavement. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1987. Part of the Progress in Psychiatry Series.

22 Miscellaneous

1679. Aries, Philippe. Images of Man and Death. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1985. Translated by Janet Lloyd. 1680. Bataille, Georges. Death and Sensuality: A Study of Eroticism and the Taboo. New York: Walker Publishing Co., 1962. Published by Arno Press, New York, in 1976 as part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. 1681. Berridge, Kate. Vigor Mortis: The End of the Death Taboo. London: Profile Books, 2002. 1682. Bryant, Clifton D., and D. J. Shoemaker. Death and the Dead for Fun and Profit: Thanatological Entertainment as Popular Culture. Blacksburg, VA: Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, 1977. 1683. Ebon, Martin. The Evidence for Life after Death. New York: Signet-New American Library, 1977. This book is a simple examination of extrasensory perception (ESP), the elements of witchcraft, exorcism, and other phenomena. 1684. Fahy, Thomas Richard. Considering Alan Ball: Essays on Sexuality, Death, and America in the Television and Film Writings. Jefferson, NC: McFarland & Co., 2006. 1685. Green, Mary Lou Johnson. The Image of Death as Portrayed in Fiction for Children. Bethlehem, PA: Lehigh University. 1975. The author’s doctoral dissertation. 1686. Harris, Raymond I. Outline of Death Investigation. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1973. 1687.

Jones, Barbara. Design for Death. New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1967. 225

226

Chapter 22

1688. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, ed. Images of Growth and Death. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976. A Spectrum book. This is an edition of the well-known title Death: The Final Stage of Growth. Includes an index. 1689. Liechty, Daniel. Death and Denial: Interdisciplinary Perspectives on the Legacy of Ernest Becker. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2002. 1690. Mason, Edward A. Films on Death and Dying. New York: Education Film Library Association, 1973. Mason presents a 40-page booklet listing approximately forty death-related films. 1691. Merkeley, Donald K. The Investigation of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1957. 1692. Piaget, Jean. The Child’s Conception of Physical Casualty. London: Kegan Paul, 1930. 1693. Whiter, Walter. Dissertation on the Disorder of Death: The State of the Frame under the Signs of Death Called Suspended Animation. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1819. 1694. Wolfenstein, Martha. Disaster: A Psychological Essay. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published by Free Press, Macmillan, New York, in 1957.

23 Near-Death Experiences

1695. Anderson, J. Kerby. Life, Death, and Beyond. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1980. Anderson presents a review of near-death phenomena, including out-of-body experiences among terminally ill patients and after-life experiences of patients who have experienced “clinical death.” Includes a bibliography. 1696. Atwater, P. M. H., and David H. Morgan. The Complete Idiot’s Guide to Near-Death Experience. Indianapolis, IN: Alpha Books/Penguin, 2000. Using the popular publishing format of “The Complete Idiot’s Guide to . . .,” Atwater offers a lengthy overview of near-death topics, which include types of experiences, historical references, empathic experiences, guided visualizations, childhood experiences, suicide enigmas, spiritual and religious issues, psychological and physiological aftereffects, synesthesia and electrical sensitivity, hallucinations, spontaneous recall, formal research into near-death experiences, scientific naysayers, interpreting storylines, otherworldly journeys, alternate realities, transformations of consciousness, and enlightenment. Includes an excellent glossary, information on the International Association for Near-Death Studies, a list of publications for further reading, websites, and contact and background information on individuals and organizations mentioned in the text. 1697. Bayless, Raymond. The Other Side of Death. New Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1971. Using a “sternly critical scientific method,” Bayless offers an extensive examination of the after-death state. Through a review of mediumistic communications and out-of-body experiences, he openly and candidly discusses errors, ridiculous elements, and false information contained in them. He also provides a historical overview of theories of the after-death state. Other paranormal topics referenced or explored include cross-correspondences, communications 227

228

Chapter 23

with and from the dead, deathbed observations, apparitions, astral projection, telekinesis, and materialization. 1698. Bayly, Joseph. The View from a Hearse. Rev. ed. Elgin, IL: David Cook Publishing Co., 1973. Bayly offers short essays on near-death experiences. 1699. Bulkeley, Kelly, and Patricia Bulkley. Dreaming beyond Death: A Guide to Predeath Dreams and Visions. Boston: Beacon Press, 2005. The authors offer an extensive treatment of predeath dreams and believe they are therapeutic for the dying in that they offer solace and peace. They suggest that dreams experienced by those on the verge of death can be categorized under three themes: dreams in which death is represented as a journey; dreams in which a guide appears, and dreams involving obstacles that parallel concerns of the dying in real life. They address visitations, near-death experiences, religion and spirituality, metaphors and dreaming, the anticipatory function in dreaming, life reviews, family and faith, visions and dementia, and reconciliation through dreaming. An appendix offers general caregiving resources for the terminally ill. Bulkeley is a visiting scholar at the Graduate Theological Union in Berkeley, California. Bulkley is a Presbyterian minister who served as the spiritual services provider at the Hospice of Marin in California. 1700. Foos-Graber, Anya. Deathing: An Intelligent Alternative for the Final Moments of Life. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1984. Also published by Nicolas-Hays, Inc., York Beach, ME, in 1989. Foos-Graber, who herself has had a near-death experience, illustrates a “new way of dying” with deathing or conscious and purposeful dying. Includes a manual of deathing, experiences with this approach, an extensive section of additional resources with an annotated bibliography, some black-and-white drawings illustrating various techniques, and an index. 1701. Green, H. Leon. If I Should Wake Before I Die: The Medical and Biblical Truth about Near-Death Experiences. Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 1997. 1702. Greyson, Bruce, and Chuck Flynn, eds. The Near-Death Experience: Problems, Prospects, Perspectives. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. 1703. Lundahl, Craig R., ed. A Collection of Near-Death Research Readings: Scientific Inquiries into the Experiences of Persons Near Physical Death. Chicago: Nelson-Hall Publishing, 1982. Includes work by Karlis Osis, Erlendur Haraldsson, Kenneth Ring, Raymond A. Moody Jr., Russell Noyes, and Michael Grosso. 1704. Matson, Archie. Afterlife: Reports from the Threshold of Death. New York: Harper & Row, 1977. Originally published under the title The Waiting World.

Near-Death Experiences

229

Matson presents an entertaining and provocative look at near-death experiences and afterlife musings. He includes personal stories and discusses ghosts, the “thrill” of dying, and concepts of heaven and hell. The second section looks at scientific and doctrinal objections, including biblical interpretations. While humorous at times, Matson does offer an intelligent discussion of the case for the belief in a life after death. Matson describes the afterlife as one of eternal peace, happiness, and contentment. 1705. ———. The Waiting World: What Happens after Death. New York: Harper & Row, 1975. This book is an exploration of parapsychology and collection of near-death experiences. 1706. Montague, William P. The Chances of Surviving Death (Ingersall Lecture, 1932). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1934. 1707. Moody, Raymond A. Jr. Life after Life: The Investigation of a Phenomenon—Survival of Bodily Death. New York: Bantam Books, 1975. 1708. Morse, Melvin, and Paul Perry. Closer to the Light: Learning from the Near-Death Experiences of Children. New York: Random House, 1991. 1709. ———. Transformed by the Light: The Powerful Effect of Near-Death Experiences on People’s Lives. New York: Villard Books, 1992. 1710. Nouwen, Henri J. M. Beyond the Mirror: Reflections on Death and Life. New York: Crossroads Publishing Co., 1990. This 74-page book is Nouwen’s personal account of an accident and resulting near-death experience. He offers interesting perspectives on death and the afterlife from a Catholic point of view. He notes, “My accident brought me to the portal of death and led me to a new experience of God.” 1711. Piper, Don, and Cecil Murphey. 90 Minutes in Heaven: A True Story of Death and Life. Grand Rapids, MI: Revell, 2004. Written with Cecil Murphey. An ordained minister, Piper recounts surviving a horrifying automobile accident and his near-death experience. The book offers encouragement to those recovering from injuries and those dealing with the loss of a loved one. 1712. Ring, Kenneth. Heading toward Omega: In Search of the Meaning of Near-Death Experience. New York: William Morrow, 1984. Ring’s book, as he notes in the preface, is about awakening and is not simply a collection of near-death experiences or stories. He includes both near-death and clinical-death experiences. In the foreword, Elisabeth Kübler-Ross writes, “Thank you, Kenneth, for your masterful work and for the objectivity and openness of this new book.” Includes a bibliography and an index.

230

Chapter 23

1713. ———. Life at Death: A Scientific Investigation of the Near-Death Experience. New York: Coward, McCann and Geoghegan, 1980. Published by Morrow, New York, in 1982. Ring, professor of psychology at the University of Connecticut, offers a study of the near-death experience. He explores stages of the near-death experience, qualitative aspects, attitudes toward death, possible interpretations of such experiences, and decisions to return to life. He includes a compelling essay entitled “Beyond the Body: A Parapsychological-Holographic Explanation of the NearDeath Experience.” Appendixes include a narrative on creating a Center for the Dying Person and information on the Association for the Scientific Study of Near-Death Phenomena. Introduction by Dr. Raymond A. Moody Jr. 1714. Ring, Kenneth, Sharon Cooper, and Charles Tart. Mindsight: Near-Death and Out-of-Body Experiences in the Blind. Palo Alto, CA: William James Center for Consciousness Studies at the Institute of Transpersonal Psychology, 1999. 1715. Ring, Kenneth, and Evelyn Valarino. Lessons from the Light: What We Can Learn from the Near-Death Experience. Portsmouth, NH: Moment Point Press, 2000. 1716. Sabom, Michael. Light and Death: One Doctor’s Fascinating Account of Near-Death Experiences. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing Co., 1998. 1717. Vince, Ken R. Visions of God: From the Near Death Experience. Burdett, NY: Larson Publications, 1994. 1718. Wilkerson, R. Beyond and Back: Those Who Died—and Lived to Tell about It. Anaheim, CA: Melodyland Productions, 1977.

24 Nursing

1719. American Nurses Association. Standards and Scope of Hospice Nursing Practice. Kansas City, MO: American Nurses Association, 1987. 1720. Browning, Mary H., and Edith Patton Lewis, compilers. The Dying Patient: A Nursing Perspective. New York: American Journal of Nursing Company, 1972. Part of the Contemporary Nursing Series. This work contains thirty-seven articles on death and dying from the American Journal of Nursing, Nursing Research, and Nursing Outlook, published from 1962 to 1972. Contributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Anselm L. Strauss, Barney G. Glaser, Margaret Mead, Jeanne C. Quint, Cicely M. Saunders (founder of the hospice movement), and Frances Mervyn. Topics covered include teaching students to work with the dying, children’s awareness of fatal illness, needs of terminally ill adolescents, thoughtful care for the dying, the plight of dying patients in hospitals, obstacles to overcome to helping the dying, awareness of death, the composure of nurses, student reactions to children’s deaths, the right to die, patient concerns, and the social loss of dying patients. 1721. Charles-Edwards, Allison. The Nursing Care of the Dying Patient. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield Publishing, 1983. 1722. Earle, Ann M., Nina T. Argondizzo, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. The Nurse as Caregiver for the Terminal Patient and His Family. New York: Columbia University Press, 1976. Also cited as The Nurse as Caregiver for the Dying Patient and Family. This book contains twenty-two papers from a symposium on thanatology and the role of nurses in caring for dying patients and their families. Subjects covered include coping with staff grief, personal perspectives on death and dying, working through feelings surrounding death, pediatric nurses’ dreams about death, the 231

232

Chapter 24

nurse as crisis intervener, terminally ill children, continuing and discontinuing care, and the existential meaning of death. Also contains three articles addressing gender and how it is viewed in thanatology nursing, stereotyped sex-role ranking of caregivers and quality of care for dying patients, female chauvinism in nursing, and the nurse in thanatology and what she can learn from the women’s liberation movement. 1723. Epstein, Charlotte. Nursing the Dying Patient: Learning Processes for Interaction. Reston, VA: Reston Publishing, 1975. 1724. Hector, Winifred, and Sarah Whitfield. Nursing Care for the Dying Patient and the Family. London: Heinemann Medical Books, 1982. The authors discuss death attitudes and the nurse’s role in terminal care in this 142-page text. 1725. Hospice and Palliative Nurses Association. Scope and Standards of Hospice and Palliative Nursing Practice. Washington, DC: American Nurses Publishing, 2002. 1726. Hurst, Noonan. Dealing with Death and Dying: A Nursing Skillbook. Jenkintown, PA: Intermed Communications, 1977. 1727. Kutscher, Lillian G., and Elsa Poslusny. Nursing and Thanatology. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Published by MSS Information Corp., New York, in 1978. 1728. Matzo, Marianne, and Deborah Witt Sherman. Palliative Care Nursing: Quality Care to the End of Life. New York: Springer, 2001. 1729. O’Connor, Andrea. Dying and Grief: Nursing Interventions. New York: American Journal of Nursing Co., 1976. Part of the Contemporary Nursing Series. 1730. Olson, Melodie. Healing the Dying. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, Inc., 2001. Part of the Nurse as Healer Series, Lynn Keegan, series editor. 1731. Padilla, Geraldine V., Veronica E. Baker, and Vikki A. Dolan. Interacting with Dying Patients: An Interhospital Nursing Research and Nursing Education Project. Duarte, CA: City of Hope National Medical Center, Division of Nursing, 1975. 1732. Payne, Sheila, Jane Seymour, and Christine Ingleton. Palliative Care Nursing. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2004. 1733. Poor, Belinda, and Gail P. Poirrier. End of Life Nursing Care. Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2001. 1734. Quint, Jeanne C. The Nurse and the Dying Patient. New York: Macmillan & Co., 1967. Also published in 1973.

Nursing

233

Quint details the experiences of a student nurse working with terminally ill patients and gives practical advice for coping and handling problems related to death and dying. 1735. Schraff, Sylvia H., ed. Hospice: The Nursing Perspective. New York: National League for Nursing, 1984. Publication no. 20-1967. Schraff, executive director of a home nursing agency, presents chapters from twelve fellow nurses on the role and function of nursing in the hospice movement. Schraff emphasizes the distinction between hospice and traditional care for the dying. Chapters cover the uniqueness of hospice, philosophies of the hospice movement, hospice administration, reimbursement issues, the hospice team of providers, stress management for staff members, the roles of nurses and volunteers, bereavement programs, and future issues and directions. Several case examples are included at the end of the book. Also includes notes, references, and biographical information on each author. There is no index. 1736. Selder, Florence. Nursing Education in Thanatology: A Curriculum Continuum. New York: Haworth Press, 1990. 1737. Steele, Shirley, ed. Nursing Care of the Child with Long-Term Illness. 2nd ed. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1977. This text is a classic of pediatric nursing and the care of terminally ill children. 1738. Ufema, Joy. Insights on Death and Dying. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. This collection of articles was previously published in Nursing magazine. Topics include deathbed experiences, surviving spouses, aggressive comfort care, unique grieving needs, ancillary staff members as partners in care of the terminally ill, and issues surrounding hospice care. 1739. Wald, Florence S., and Martha E. Russell. Hospice Education Program for Nurses. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Health Resources Administration, Bureau of Health Professions, Division of Nursing, 1981. 1740. Wiscniak, Debra. A Qualitative Study Exploring the Quality of Life of Informal Caregivers Caring for Someone with a Terminal Illness. Ottawa, Ontario: National Library of Canada/Bibliotheque Nationale du Canada, 2004. 1741. Zerwekh, Joyce V. Nursing Care at the End of Life: Palliative Care for Patients and Families. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Co., 2006.

25 Palliative Care

1742. Ajemian, Ina, and Balfour M. Mount. The R.V.H. Manual on Palliative/Hospice Care: A Resource Book. New York: Arno Press, 1980. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on Thanatology. 1743. Aldridge, David, ed. Music Therapy in Palliative Care: New Voices. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999. 1744. Barnard, David, Anna M. Towers, Patricia Boston, and Yanna Lambrinidou. Crossing Over: Narratives of Palliative Care. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. 1745. Blues, Ann G., and Joyce V. Zerwekh. Hospice and Palliative Care Nursing. New York: Grune & Stratton/Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984. In this nursing textbook, the authors explore patient care in hospice and palliative care settings. Topics covered include the hospice philosophy of appropriate care, understanding the patient experience, assessment and goals of care, the stucture and makeup of the hospice team, principles and standards of hospice care, symptom control, control of pain, final days, grief and bereavement, social decisions and social support, the family as a care unit, establishing a community hospice, professional stress and distress, and the integration of hospice into the acute care system. Blues also offers a chapter on understanding one’s own feelings about death. Includes appendixes with a list of common nursing diagnoses and the document “Standards and Principles of a Hospice Program of Care,” adopted by the National Hospice Organization’s board of directors in February 1979. Includes an index. 1746. Bruera, Eduardo, and Robin L. Fainsinger. Palliative Care Medicine: Patient-Based Learning. Edmonton: University of Alberta, 1995.

234

Palliative Care

235

This book is a 171-page manual based on thirty-one different clinical problems in end-of-life care, each presented in a case presentation format. The main text is followed by discussion, references, and multiple choice questions. 1747. Cairnes, Moira, Marney Thompson, and Wendy Wainwright. Transitions in Dying and Bereavement: A Psychosocial Guide for Hospice and Palliative Care. Baltimore, MD: Health Professions Press, 2003. 1748. Central Service for the Chronically Ill. Terminal Care for Cancer Patients. Chicago: Institute of Medicine of Chicago, 1950. 1749. Chen, Pauline. Final Exam. New York: Knopf, 2007. Chen, a young surgeon, writes graphically about surgery and death and advocates for doctors to take a more personal interest in their patients, particularly those who are terminally ill. 1750. Clark, David, and Jane Seymour. Reflections on Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 1999. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. 1751. Clark, David, Jo Hockley, and Sam Ahmedzai, eds. New Themes in Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. 1752. Cobb, Mark. Special Issues in Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. 1753. Coberly, Margaret. Sacred Passage: How to Provide Fearless, Compassionate Care for the Dying. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 2002. A nurse educator and director of research and development for Hospice Hawaii, Coberly divides her book into the sections “Death in Western Health Care,” “Resources from the Tibetan Buddhist Tradition,” and “Practical Applications for Care Providers.” She presents practical advice on the many dimensions of caring for the dying. Coberly discusses the prevailing medical paradigm for dealing with death, death denial, emergency room practice, Kübler-Ross and her writings on dying, palliative care, and facing death. Drawing upon Tibetan traditions, she reviews the eight stages of dissolution and discusses the truth of impermanence and the enlightened mind. She also comments on the Tibetan Book of the Dead. Includes excellent notes with narrative for most and an annotated bibliography. 1754. Cohen, Cynthia B. Casebook on the Termination of Life-Sustaining Treatment and the Care of the Dying. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1988. A Hastings Center publication. 1755. Davy, John, and Susan Ellis. Counseling Skills in Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2000. Part of the Counseling Skills series.

236

Chapter 25

1756. Dillard, James, and Leigh Ann Hirschman. The Chronic Pain Solution: The Comprehensive, Step-by-Step Guide to Choosing the Best of Alternative and Conventional Medicine. New York: Bantam Books, 2002. 1757. Doyle, Derek, ed. Palliative Care: The Management of Far-Advanced Illness. Beckenham, UK: Croom Helm, 1983. 1758. Doyle, Derek, and Geoffrey W. C. Hanks. Oxford Textbook of Palliative Medicine. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993. 1759. Doyle, Derek, David Jeffrey, and Kenneth Calhan. Palliative Care in the Home. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. 1760. Fallon, Marie, and Geoffrey W. C. Hanks, eds. ABC of Palliative Care. 2nd ed. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing, 2006. The authors present a detailed overview and exploration of palliative care, covering principles and clinical solutions. They examine respiratory issues, oral health, communication issues, community palliative care, anorexia, constipation, fatigue, emergencies, care for children, complementary therapies, the last fortyeight hours, and bereavement. Social and psychological aspects of palliative care are thoroughly examined. 1761. Faull, Christina, and Yvonne Carter. Handbook of Palliative Care. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing, 2005. 1762. Field, David, David Clark, Jessica Corner, and Carol Davis, eds. Researching Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. 1763. Field, Marilyn J., and Christine K. Cassel, eds. Approaching Death: Improving Care at the End of Life. Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1997. Published with the Division of Health Care Services, Institute of Medicine, Committee on Care at the End of Life. In broad overview, this title looks at current knowledge of end-of-life care, what remains to be learned, and what is known but not adequately applied. With guidance for policymakers and practitioners, the editors offer thoughts on quality measurement and improvement, cost concerns, legal and ethical issues, and the role of practice guidelines. They seek to counter the notion that there are patients for whom “nothing can be done.” Appendixes total more than 100 pages and include agendas; participant lists and workshop titles from the Institute of Medicine’s Feasibility Study on Care at the End of Life (August 1993–February 1994) and the institute’s public meetings; examples of initiatives to improve care at the end of life; prognosis and clinical predictive models for critically ill patients; information on cultural diversity in decision making about care at the end of life; text discussing measuring care at the end of life; excerpts from the Guidelines for Determining Prognosis in Selected Noncancer Diseases; informa-

Palliative Care

237

tion on the American Board of Internal Medicine Clinical Competence in End-ofLife Care; examples of medical education curricula; and committee biographies. Includes an index. 1764. Fins, Joseph. A Palliative Ethic of Care: Clinical Wisdom at Life’s End. Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2006. 1765. Firth, Pam, Gill Luff, and David Oliviere, eds. Loss, Change, and Bereavement in Palliative Care. New York: Open University Press, 2005. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. Integrating theory, research, practice, and service, the editors bring together a broad variety of chapters on current thinking in the areas of loss, change, and bereavement. In thirteen chapters, contributors discuss changing views of mourning; illness and loss within the family; life review with the terminally ill; the death of a child; interventions with bereaved children; involving service users in palliative care; excluded and vulnerable groups of service users; current research and developments regarding caregivers; group work in palliative care; cultural perspectives on loss and bereavement; and the context of loss, change, and bereavement in palliative care. Includes references and an index. Foreword by Barbara Monroe of St. Christopher’s Hospice. 1766. Ford, Gillian, and Ian G. Lewin. Managing Terminal Illness. London: Royal College of Physicians of London, 1996. From the Interfaces in Medicine Conference in 1995. 1767. Goldberg, Ivan K., S. Malitz, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Psychopharmacological Agents for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press, 1973. Includes Tamara Ferguson’s article “Decision Making and Tranquilizers in Widowhood.” 1768. Hanratty, J. F., and Irene Higginson. Palliative Care in Terminal Illness. New York: Radcliffe Medical Press, 1994. 1769. Hockley, Jo, and David Clark, eds. Palliative Care for Older People in Care Homes. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2002. 1770. Jennings, Bruce, and Gregory E. Kaebnick. Improving End-of-Life Care: Why Has It Been So Difficult? Garrison, NY: Hastings Center, 2005. 1771. Katz, Jeanne Samson, and Sheila M. Peace. End of Life in Care Homes: A Palliative Approach. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003. The authors examine opportunities for improving care of the elderly in nursing homes and other care facilities. They discuss changes in palliative care approaches during recent decades and highlight new choices for end-of-life care. Also explored are the “disadvantaged dying,” people who are disenfranchised due to mental health issues or physical disabilities. Includes references and an index.

238

Chapter 25

1772. Kaye, Peter. Notes on Symptom Control in Hospice and Palliative Care. Essex, CT: Hospice Education Institute, 1990. 1773. Kinzbrunner, Barry M., Neil J. Weinreb, and Joel S. Policzer. Twenty Common Problems: End-of-Life Care. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001. 1774. Kuebler, Kim K., Mellar P. Davis, and Crystal Dea Moore. Palliative Practices: An Interdisciplinary Approach. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Mosby, 2005. 1775. Lantos, John D. The Lazarus Case: Life-and-Death Issues in Neonatal Intensive Care. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001. 1776. Lawton, Julia. The Dying Process: Patients’ Experiences of Palliative Care. New York: Routledge, 2000. This book seems as much about Lawton’s own emotional journey of becoming more and more familiar with the realities of death and dying as it is an examination of Western society’s notions of death; end-of-life care; and our romanticized images of peaceful, good death. The shock of death’s reality affects Lawton’s understanding and perceptions of hospice care, which she becomes critical of in the book. This comfort-focused end-of-life care is a mask for bodily deterioration, she asserts in one chapter. Lawton looks at the transition from “body-subject” to “body-object,” inpatient hospice care and the sequestration of the unbounded body, “dirty dying,” and invisible suffering in the social death. Appendixes include a hospice floor plan and a list of duties of in-house hospice volunteers. Includes notes, a bibliography, and name and subject indexes. 1777. Lipman, Arthur G., Kenneth C. Jackson II, and Linda S. Tyler. EvidenceBased Symptom Control in Palliative Care: Systemic Reviews and Validated Clinical Practice Guidelines for Fifteen Common Problems in Patients with Life Limiting Disease. New York: Haworth Press, 2000. 1778. MacDonald, Neil, Marcel Boisvert, and Deborah Dudgeon. Palliative Medicine: A Case-Based Manual. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998. 1779. MacPherson, Myra. She Came to Live Out Loud: An Inspiring Family Journey through Illness, Loss, and Grief. New York: Scribner, 1999. This guide to dealing with illness, coping with loss, and recovering from grief is the product of the author’s three years with the family of Anna, a young, wise, and witty woman suffering from breast cancer. Through this story, MacPherson offers insight on how families with children cope with terminally ill parents, how friends and loved ones provide better support for the dying, the value of feelings of all kinds, why doctors avoid the issue and subject of death, and differences in grieving between men and women. It is a moving tribute. 1780. McDermott, R., and J. Russell. Palliative Care: A Shared Experience. London: Accell Printers, 1994.

Palliative Care

239

1781. Monroe, Barbara, and David Oliviere. Patient Participation in Palliative Care: A Voice for the Voiceless. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003. This title stresses the importance of patient participation in their own health care decisions, particularly palliative, end-of-life care. It discusses bereavement issues, awareness of cultural differences, and the interdisciplinary nature of palliative care. Includes material from the patients themselves. 1782. O’Brien, Joanne. Pain Management in Terminal Illness. Independence, MO: Graceland University, 2002. 1783. O’Reilly, Karen, and Max S. Watson. Pain and Palliation. New York: Oxford University Press, 2006. 1784. Owens, Michael R. Primary Care Issues for End-of-Life Care. Premiere edition. Newtown, PA: Handbooks in Health Care, 2003. Owens presents a core curriculum focused on essential areas of palliative care that he notes are too often omitted from medical training programs. He begins with narrative on the current state of dying in the United States. He continues with chapters on dying, pain management, gastrointestinal and respiratory symptoms, neurologic care, fatigue at the end of life, hospice and palliative care, and end-of-life decision making. An appendix lists organizations that may be helpful to both medical professionals and their patients. 1785. Preston, Thomas A. Final Victory: Taking Charge of the Last Stages of Life, Facing Death on Your Own Terms. Roseville, CA: Forum/Prima Publishing, 2000. Preston, professor of medicine for more than twenty years at the University of Washington, is a fierce patients’ rights advocate. In this concise and clearly written guide, he describes end-of-life options, alternative treatments that can reduce suffering, and legal limitations of doctors in reducing pain. The book is intended for the dying and their loved ones to help them make decisions that will allow the patient to take charge of the dying process and “set the stage for a peaceful, dignified death.” Preston provides details on withdrawing life-sustaining therapy, terminal sedation, living wills, durable powers of attorney, coping with a diagnosis, planning in the “world of curative therapy,” legal methods of assisted dying, physician-assisted suicide, issues with terminally ill children, dealing with symptoms during the terminal phase of illness, and pain control. Appendixes include a sample living will and durable power of attorney as well as a list of organizations and Internet sites. A brief, annotated list of suggested readings is also included. 1786. Quill, Timothy E., and Margaret Pabst Battin. Physician-Assisted Dying: The Case for Palliative Care and Patient Choice. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2004. 1787. Regnard, C., and J. Hockley. A Clinical Decision Guide to Symptom Relief in Palliative Care. Abingdon, Oxford: Radcliffe Medical Press, 2003.

240

Chapter 25

1788. Saunders, Cicely M. Beyond All Pain: A Companion for the Suffering and Bereaved. London: SPCK Publishing, 1983. 1789. ———. Hospice and Palliative Care: An Interdisciplinary Approach. Sevenoaks, UK: Edward Arnold, 1990. 1790. Saunders, Cicely M., Mary Baines, and R. J. Dunlop. Living with Dying: A Guide to Palliative Care. New York: Oxford University Press, 1995. 1791. Sheldon, Frances, and Jo Campling. Psychosocial Palliative Care: Good Practice in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved. Cheltenham, UK: S. Thornes Ltd., 1997. 1792. Smith, Doug. The Tao of Dying: A Guide to Caring. Rev. ed. Washington, DC: Caring Publishing, 1997. Photographs by Marilu Pittman. Inspired by Lao Tzu’s Tao Te Ching, Smith presents a moving book of poems and touching photographs with messages about dying. He offers a simple definition of palliative care as “caring for people without trying to change or cure them.” Smith is executive director of Kanawha Hospice Care in Charleston, West Virginia, and he presents workshops on patient care for hospices nationwide. Proceeds from the book’s sales go to the Caring Institute, a nonprofit organization seeking to promote the social values reflected in community service. 1793. Smith, Shirley Ann. Hospice Concepts: A Guide to Palliative Care in Terminal Illness. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2000. 1794. Storey, Porter. Primer of Palliative Care. Glenview, IL: American Academy of Hospice and Palliative Medicine, 1994. This book is a 57-page guide to assessment and treatment of common physical and psychological symptoms in end-of-life care. 1795. Tobin, Daniel R., and Karen Lindsey. Peaceful Dying: The Step-by-Step Guide to Preserving Your Dignity, Your Choice, and Your Inner Peace at the End of Life. Reading, MA: Perseus Books, 1999. Tobin, a palliative care physician and hospice consultant, created the FairCare Health System and the FairCare program for peaceful dying, a 26-step approach (A through Z) to making death a peace-centered process. The book discusses and outlines these steps. Includes appendixes containing living wills, health proxy forms, a summary of FairCare concepts, a list of hospice organizations, and additional resources and reading. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross called the book a “major contribution to the field.” 1796. Twycross, Robert G., and V. Ventifridda, eds. The Continuing Care of Terminal Cancer Patients. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1980. 1797. Walter, Tony. The Revival of Death. New York: Routledge, 1994. Noting that traditional religion and modern medical procedures do little to address the personal experience of the dying and bereaved, Walter proposes that

Palliative Care

241

society has turned to new ways of talking about death—a sort of revival of death. He suggests that people are seeking ultimate authority on death in the individual self. The new death, Walter says, is personal and facilitated by institutions and such practices as hospice, palliative care, life-focused funerals, and bereavement counseling. Includes an excellent glossary, an extensive bibliography, and questions appropriate for students following each chapter. Walter is a lecturer in sociology. 1798. Williams, Mary E. How Can Care of the Terminally Ill Be Improved? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. 1799. ———. How Should the Physical and Emotional Pain of Terminal Illness Be Addressed? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. 1800. Woodruff, R. Palliative Medicine. Melbourne, Australia: Asperula Pty Ltd. Publishers, 1993. Woodruff’s book is a 421-page manual covering all aspects of end-of-life care. The book is divided into seven sections: “Introduction to Palliative Care,” “Pain,” “Other Physical Symptoms and Clinical Problems,” “Psychological Aspects of Care,” “Alternative and Complementary Medicine,” “AIDS,” and “The Practice of Palliative Care.”

26 Parental Loss and Grief

1801. Abrams, Rebecca. When Parents Die: Learning to Live with the Loss of a Parent. 2nd ed. London: Routledge, 1999. Originally published by Charles Letts & Co., London, in 1992. Second impression published by HarperCollins, New York, in 1995. Reprinted in 2000 and 2001. 1802. Ainley, Rosa, ed. Death of a Mother: Daughters’ Stories. San Francisco, CA: Pandora/HarperCollins, 1994. Ainley presents a collection of thirty-two nonfiction essays written by female writers, including May Sarton, Marilyn Hacker, and Barbara James. Each piece is different in its emotions, use of humor, and experience. Includes brief biographical information on each writer as well as a list of books and helpful organizations. 1803. Ajjan, Diana, ed. The Day My Father Died: Women Share Their Stories of Love, Loss, and Life. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1994. This book brings together a group of twenty-five women who share stories of their fathers and how they coped and continue to cope with their loss. Ajjan’s book is about the special bond between fathers and daughters and how these women exhibited strength and courage in overcoming their grief. Among the contributors are Bebe Moore Campbell and Sophia Loren. The contributors come from a variety of professional backgrounds, many of them writers. Biographical information on each of them is included. 1804. Akner, Lois F. How to Survive the Loss of a Parent: A Guide for Adults. New York: William Morris and Co., 1993. Akner, a psychotherapist, has turned her popular workshops that help adults cope with the death of a parent into a book. She guides the reader through group sessions with twelve participants who discuss issues and feelings experienced 242

Parental Loss and Grief

243

as adult orphans. She discusses the mysteries of grief, family secrets, how being sad requires a large amount of energy, saying goodbye, and opening up a family dialogue. The book concludes with a wonderful epilogue entitled “A Year Later.” Sample coping exercises are incorporated as well as extensive narrative and discussion between workshop participants. A brief reading list is also included. 1805. Angel, Marc D. The Orphaned Adult: Confronting the Death of a Parent. New York: Insight Books/Human Sciences Press, 1987. Angel, a rabbi and scholar of Jewish history and culture, offers an in-depth look at how adults deal with the death of their parents. He highlights issues often avoided or denied in Western cultures and discusses processes of adult orphanhood, including anticipating the death of a parent, mourning the parent, and internalizing the reality of the parent’s death. Angel offers personal stories from his own life and work, incorporating Jewish, Christian, Buddhist, Hindu, and Freudian philosophies. Includes a bibliography. 1806. Bartocci, Barbara. Nobody’s Child Anymore: Grieving, Caring, and Comforting When Parents Die. Notre Dame, IN: Sorin Books, 2000. Also cited as Nobody’s Child Anymore: Reclaiming Purpose and Passion. 1807. Becker, Marilyn R. Last Touch: Preparing for a Parent’s Death. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1992. 1808. Berlinsky, Ellen B., and Henry B. Biller. Parental Death and Psychological Development. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books/D. C. Heath, 1982. Berlinsky, a practicing psychologist, and Biller, professor of psychology at the University of Rhode Island, offer a scholarly analysis of the effects of parental death on children and their psychological development. The authors provide a review of existing literature, family and situational variables related to parental death, and characteristics of the child related to behavior subsequent to parental bereavement. Biographical information on the authors is provided. Extensive tables and illustrations of the authors’ research and methodology are also incorporated. Includes a list of references as well as subject and name indexes. 1809. Birtchnell, John, and Ian C. Wilson. The Effects of Early Parent Death. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1973. 1810. Blauner, Bob, ed. Our Mothers’ Spirits: On the Death of Mothers and the Grief of Men. New York: Regan Books/HarperCollins, 1997. Blauner provides a collection of narratives and poems on the momentous event of a mother’s death from the perspective of sons. He notes in the introduction how much of the literature on death and loss focuses on childhood death or the death of a spouse, but little is written about the effects of and reactions to the loss of a elderly parent. The contributors, however, focus on the loss of a mother at any age. The collection is divided into parts on the aged mother, the young mother, good deaths and bad deaths, suicide and euthanasia, regret, alienation,

244

Chapter 26

reconceiving the mother, and sustaining the mother’s spirit. A section of photos of the contributors’ mothers is incorporated. Also includes biographical information on each contributor. Contributors include John Updike, Kirk Douglas, Wallace Stegner, Henry Louis Gates Jr., John Cheever, Henry Miller, and Art Buchwald. 1811. Bratman, Fred. Everything You Need to Know When a Parent Dies. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1995. Originally published in 1992. 1812. Brooks, Jane. Midlife Orphan: Facing Life’s Changes Now That Your Parents Are Gone. New York: Berkeley Books, 1999. Noting that the word orphan often suggests a child, Brooks writes about the pain of orphanhood that adults experience. She argues that adults who lose parents in their thirties, forties, and fifties often underestimate the emotional impact of the death. Brooks discusses changes in self-image, unresolved issues with deceased parents, feelings of anger and guilt, loneliness and fear, the good and bad aspects of a financial inheritance, grieving, and shifting roles within the family. Includes a bibliography. 1813. Butler, Shari. Becoming Myself: Living Life to the Fullest after the Loss of Your Parents. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003. Butler, a psychotherapist, provides a guide to coping with parental loss. She presents the death of a parent as not only a “catalyst for feelings of mourning, grief, and even helplessness” but an opportunity for “enormous positive change and growth.” She discusses the nature of parental relationships, reclaiming the self, rediscovering internal depths, where to turn for nurturing and other forms of support, integrating traditions and personality characteristics of parents following their deaths, and forming identity in the years following parental loss. Includes a bibliography. 1814. Chatman, Delle. The Death of a Parent: Reflections for Adults Mourning the Loss of a Father or Mother. Chicago: ACTA Publications, 2001. 1815. Curry, Cathleen L. When Your Parent Dies: A Concise and Practical Source of Help and Advice for Adults Grieving the Death of a Parent. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1993. 1816. Davenport, Donna S. Singing Mother Home: A Psychologist’s Journey through Anticipatory Grief. Denton: University of North Texas Press, 2003. Davenport tells her story of dealing with anticipatory grief and parental loss. 1817. Davidman, Lynn. Motherloss. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000. Through personal narratives provided as part of her research, Davidman explores the condition and experience of motherloss as a biographical disruption. She examines the psychological effects and ramifications of losing a mother to death and offers possibilities for biographical repair and coming to terms with this special loss. The book is appropriate for both professionals and those who

Parental Loss and Grief

245

have experienced motherloss. An appendix provides the entire 74-question interview guide the author used in her research. A list of references is also included. 1818. Diamond, Jonathan. Fatherless Sons: Healing the Legacy of Loss. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2006. Diamond, a psychotherapist, uses stories and events told as composites from his years as a psychotherapist to convey the special nature of men’s grief, particularly when associated with the loss of a father. He explores loss and abandonment, anger and forgiveness, love and acceptance, emptiness and despair, violence and redemption, teaching sons about death and dying, and spiritual approaches to grief. Includes a touching epilogue, a list of recommended reading titles, and an index. 1819. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Parent. New York: Dodd, Mead & Company, 1987. Focusing on those grief symptoms that many adult children do not associate with the loss of a parent, Donnelly presents an in-depth look at parental loss. She discusses the experiences of bereaved adult children, highlighting the emotions of grief; dealing with anger; guilt trips; suffering from caretaker syndrome; the trauma associated with holidays and anniversaries; and characteristics of normal grieving. She also addresses differing attitudes toward death and religion, coping with a surviving parent, sibling conflicts, returning to the workplace, remembrances and recollections, and finding hope. A separate section focuses on such “helping hands” as a bereavement support program, organizations that help bereaved families, and suggested reading. Includes a list of division presidents by state of the American Association of Marriage and Family Therapy with contact information. Also includes an index. 1820. Edelman, Hope. Motherless Daughters: The Legacy of Loss. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1994. Published by Delta Trade Paperbacks, New York, in 1995, and by Da Capo Press, Cambridge, MA, in 2006. Edelman, who lost her mother at the age of seventeen, presents a moving and consoling bestseller examining the grief and life-changing effects of maternal loss on daughters. She looks at the unique grief experience with this type of loss as well as the effects on identity, personality, self-awareness, family structures and roles, and life choices going forward. The book is based on the author’s speeches to motherless women of all ages, research, focus groups, and consultations with practicing mental health professionals and experts on grieving. Includes the motherless daughters’ survey, a bibliography, and extensive notes. 1821. ———. Motherless Mothers: How Mother Loss Shapes the Parents We Become. New York: HarperCollins, 2006. Author of the 1994 bestseller Motherless Daughters, Edelman presents another book focused on the loss of a mother. This text, however, discusses how this loss affects the way women raise their own children. She explores the unique

246

Chapter 26

issues and anxieties encountered by mothers who have no maternal guidance. Including information from more than 1,000 women she surveyed, she discusses motherhood and mourning, the absent grandmother, explaining death to children, and raising children without the guidance of a mother. Appendixes include the motherless mother and control group surveys. A list of helpful organizations and a brief bibliography are also incorporated. 1822. Erickson, Beth M. Longing for Dad: Father Loss and Its Impact. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, Inc., 1998. 1823. Harris, Maxine. The Loss That Is Forever: The Lifelong Impact of the Early Death of a Mother or Father. New York: Plume, 1996. 1824. Holland, John. Understanding Children’s Experiences of Parental Bereavement. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2001. 1825. Kennedy, Alexandra. Losing a Parent: Passage to a New Way of Living. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1991. Through her own experience of losing a parent, Kennedy offers guidance and strategies for moving through the anguishing feelings of parent loss and coping with grief. Her focus is transformation through bereavement. Shamanism is explored. 1826. Klug, Ron. When Your Parent Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 2001. Part of the Hope and Healing Series. 1827. Koolman, Gladys. When Death Takes a Father. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Book House, 1968. 1828. Krementz, Jill. How It Feels When a Parent Dies. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1982. Reprinted in 1988. 1829. Levy, Alexander. The Orphaned Adult: Understanding and Coping with Grief and Change after the Death of Our Parents. Reading, MA: Perseus Books, 1999. A psychologist, Levy notes that society assumes parental loss to be a relatively minor event when if fact it is “almost always more difficult than we imagined it to be.” He includes his own experiences of losing parents as well as those of people he has counseled in private practice. Aspects of parental loss covered include the impact on personal identity, ongoing relationships with parents after they die, changes in relationships with others after parents die, religious turmoil following parental loss, techniques for dealing with grief, and lessons to be learned. In the chapter entitled “Our Father, Who Art in Heaven: Parental Death, the Eternal, and the Divine,” Levy discusses the religious turmoil that often follows the death of a parent. He recalls a woman who was grieving the loss of her parents and said to him, “Now, for the first time, there is no one standing between me and God.” He explores the various interpretations of that comment. Noted thanatolo-

Parental Loss and Grief

247

gist and author Earl A. Grollman grandly comments on the book, “I have never been more moved than by reading this extraordinary, personal, inspirational, and helpful book.” 1830. Lieberman, Alicia F. Losing a Parent to Death in the Early Years: Guidelines for the Treatment of Traumatic Bereavement in Infancy and Early Childhood. Washington, DC: Zero To Three Press, 2003. 1831. Marshall, Fiona. Losing a Parent: Practical Help for You and Other Family Members. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1993. Reprinted in 2000. 1832. Miller, Nancy K. Bequest and Betrayal: Memoirs of a Parent’s Death. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. Although Miller puts forth a memoir about the death of both of her parents, she also presents a book about parental death and autobiography as a tool for rethinking lives. She notes in her prologue that, “Memoirs about the loss of parents show how enmeshed in the family plot we have been and the price of our complicity in its stories.” She goes on to point out that, “We read for what we need to find. Sometimes, we also find what we didn’t know we needed.” Includes a list of works cited. 1833. Moss, Miriam S., and Sidney Z. Moss. The Death of a Parent in Midlife: Coping Strategies. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, 1977. Edited by Richard A. Kalish. 1834. Myers, Edward. When Parents Die: A Guide for Adults. Rev. ed. New York: Penguin Books, 1997. Published by Viking/Penguin, New York, in 1986. 1835. Norlander, Linda, and Kerstin McSteen. Choices at the End of Life: Finding Out What Your Parents Want before It’s Too Late. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 2001. 1836. Schaper, Donna. Mature Grief: When a Parent Dies. Cambridge, MA: Cowley Publications, 2003. 1837. Secunda, Victoria. Losing Your Parents, Finding Yourself: The Defining Turning Point of Adult Life. New York: Hyperion Press, 2000. 1838. Simon, Clea. Fatherless Women: How We Change after We Lose Our Dads. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2001. Simon begins the book with, “Writing about my father is about as easy as wading through wet cement.” She warmly writes about the special bond between a father and a daughter and how death profoundly affects that bond. Her writing is about both the grief and growth associated with this type of parental death. In addition to her own story, she shares the stories of several women who have lost their fathers and have been forced to greet the question of what happens next. Includes a bibliography and recommended reading list.

248

Chapter 26

1839. Simon, Leslie, and Jan Johnson. A Music I No Longer Heard: The Early Death of a Parent. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1998. 1840. Smith, Harold Ivan. On Grieving the Death of a Father. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1994. 1841. Umberson, Debra. Death of a Parent: Transition to a New Adult Identity. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2003. Umberson, professor and chair of sociology at the University of Texas, examines issues surrounding adult bereavement associated with the loss of a parent. She discusses this loss as a turning point for adults and explores the psychological and social factors that determine the effects of the loss. She reveals the unusual juxtaposition between an expected loss and the extraordinary change it can bring. Umberson also discusses unexpected crisis, symbolic loss, the turning point in adulthood, the parent left behind, and sibling relationships. An appendix provides details on the author’s research methods and data. 1842. Wakerman, Elyce. Father Loss: Daughters Discuss the Man Who Got Away. New York: Henry Holt and Company, 1987. 1843. Ware, Shirley Gerald. The Final Goodbye: The Struggle to SelfAwareness. Santa Barbara, CA: Fithian Press, 1996. This book is a narrative of an African American woman’s path to selfawareness through the grief that followed her father’s death.

27 Pastoral Care

1844. American Association of Retired Persons. Grief Support Training for Clergy and Congregations: Training Manual. Washington, DC: American Association of Retired Persons, 1989. 1845. Anderson, Ray S. Theology, Death, and Dying. New York: Basil Blackwell, 1986. In this discussion of Christian perspectives on death, Anderson addresses the Christian response to death, a theology of human death, divine judgment and life after death, and the human ecology of death and dying. He offers various pastoral approaches to dying and examines philosophical and historical perspectives. Includes a select bibliography and an index. 1846. 1970.

Asquith, Glenn H. Death Is All Right. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,

1847. Autton, Norman. The Pastoral Care of the Dying. London: SPCK Publishing, 1966. Also published by Alec R. Allenson, Inc., Naperville, IL, in 1967. 1848. Bachmann, Charles C. Ministering to the Grief-Sufferer. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1967. Originally published by Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, in 1964. This book focuses on pastoral care of the bereaved and the ministry of a funeral. 1849. Bailey, Richard M. Empowering the Laity in a Local Church to Minister to the Dying. Dayton, OH: Consortium for Higher Education Religion Studies, United Theological Seminary, 1977.

249

250

Chapter 27

1850. Bailey, Robert W. The Minister and Grief. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1976. From a pastoral perspective, Bailey shares his experiences with death, dying, and bereavement as a Baptist minister in North Carolina. He includes suggestions and resources for making funeral arrangements and focuses on the important relationship between the pastor and families dealing with death. 1851. Bane, J. Donald. Death and Ministry: Pastoral Care of the Dying and the Bereaved. New York: Seabury Press, 1975. 1852. Blackwood, Andrew W. The Funeral: Sourcebook for Ministers. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Book House, 1972. Originally published by Westminster Press, Philadelphia, in 1942. 1853. Bowman, George W. Dying, Grieving, Faith, and Family: A Pastoral Care Approach. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1998. 1854. Brandon, S. G. F. The Judgment of the Dead. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1967. 1855. Cobb, Mark. The Dying Soul: Spiritual Care at the End of Life. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2001. 1856. Congdon, Howard. The Pursuit of Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1977. 1857. Cox, Gerry R., and Ronald J. Fundis, eds. Spiritual, Ethical, and Pastoral Aspects of Death and Bereavement. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1992. Revised edition published as Making Sense of Death: Spiritual, Ethical, and Pastoral Aspects of Death, Dying, and Bereavement, with Gerry R. Cox and Robert Bendikson in 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1858. Droege, Thomas A. Guided Grief Imagery: A Resource for Grief Ministry and Death Education. New York: Paulist Press, 1987. 1859. Dulany, Joseph P. We Can Minister with Dying Persons. Nashville, TN: Discipleship Resources, 1986. Dulany describes meditation and relaxation techniques to be used by those who care for the terminally ill. He approaches this from both spiritual and psychological perspectives. 1860. Dunne, Tad. We Love You, Matty: Meeting Death with Faith. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1861. Eshelman, Byron. Death Row Chaplain. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1962.

Pastoral Care

251

1862. Griffith, William H. Death and Dying from the Perspective of the Caring Professions: A Curriculum Model for the Local Church. Philadelphia: Eastern Baptist Theological Seminary, 1975. 1863. Groves, Richard F., and Henriette Anne Klauser. The American Book of Dying: Lessons in Healing Spiritual Pain. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 2005. The book is thoughtfully divided into three parts: the history, the stories, and the tool chest. The first part focuses on hospice and the concept of dying well as well as on ancient books of the dead and spiritual pain. The second part is a compendium of personal stories from varying personality types—the perfectionist, helper, achiever, dreamer, thinker, loyalist, adventurer, asserter, and peacemaker. Groves concludes the section with a review of the story archetypes. The final part focuses on tools than can be used for coping, including art therapy, breath work, dream work, guided visualization, healing religious abuse, intercessory prayer, journaling, music therapy, and several others. Includes a bibliography with print and audiovisual resources divided by subject. 1864. Gusmer, Charles W. And You Visited Me: Sacramental Ministry to the Sick and Dying. New York: Pueblo Publishing, 1984. 1865. Holden, Douglas T. Death Shall Have No Dominion. St. Louis, MO: Bethany House Publishers, 1970. 1866. Irion, Paul E. The Funeral and the Mourners: Pastoral Care of the Bereaved. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1954. 1867. ———. Hospice and Ministry. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1988. Irion, professor emeritus of pastoral theology at Lancaster Seminary in Lancaster, Pennsylvania, offers a guide for helping hospice and the church understand how both can work together to serve the dying and their families. He discusses how hospice has made a difference for pastors as well as patients and the role of spiritual care in a hospice environment. Using the holistic context of hospice, he notes the importance of the pastor as a member of the interdisciplinary team in a hospice environment. Irion also emphasizes openness in dealing with death. Other topics covered include biomedical ethics issues, home care, control issues and self-determination in decision making, blending professional and lay caregivers, values and problems of shared pastoral caregiving in hospice, anticipatory grief, funerals, and pastoral care of bereaved hospice families. Includes a brief bibliography. 1868. Jupp, Peter C., and Tony Rogers, eds. Interpreting Death: Christian Theology and Pastoral Practice. Washington, DC: Cassell, 1997. Title page notes that book was written “on behalf of The Churches’ Group on Funeral Services at Cemeteries and Crematoria.” A survey of contemporary Christian beliefs about death and eternal life, this book examines the various roles of the church in addressing the needs of the

252

Chapter 27

dying, the dead, and those bereaved. Intended for those “professionally concerned with Christian funerals” or those ministering to the dying or those bereaved, articles discuss the theology of the funeral, theologies of disposal, loss and pain, faith and bereavement, nonstandard funerals, and liturgies. Significant treatment is given to changes in funeral practices and views toward death and disposal in Britain over the past fifty years. Includes biographical notes on each contributor. 1869. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, and Stephen Sorenson. When Someone You Love Is Dying: A Handbook for Counselors and Those Who Care. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House/Ministry Resources Library, 1980. 1870. Levering, Matthew Webb. On Christian Dying: Classic and Contemporary Texts. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2004. 1871. McCall, Junietta Baker. Bereavement Counseling: Pastoral Care for Complicated Grieving. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2004. An ordained minister of the United Church of Christ, McCall presents a guide for the assessment and treatment of complicated grief responses. Issues are approached from a pastoral counseling perspective. McCall makes a case for incorporating a loss and grief assessment into any patient encounter. She discusses universal grief processes and responses, management of the normal grieving process, a loss and recovery model of grief, defining complicated grief and what makes it more complex, dysfunctional grieving and those particularly at risk for it, spiritual issues with grief and loss, subjectivity and professional bias, grief therapies and treatment priorities, strategies for helping and interventions, and reorganizing and reclaiming one’s life following loss. Appendixes include a list of possible complications surrounding significant loss, information on risk factors that may lead to complicated or dysfunctional grieving, a grief trajectory worksheet, the grief response service wheel, and a compilation of symptoms and behaviors that can suggest dysfunctional grieving. Includes a bibliography and thorough index. 1872. Mitchell, Kenneth R., and Herbert Anderson. All Our Losses, All Our Griefs: Resources for Pastoral Care. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1983. 1873. Nelson, Jan C., and David A. Aaker. The Bereavement Ministry Program: A Comprehensive Guide for Churches. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1998. Designed for churches and their ministers, this title provides guidance for dealing with various encounters with death, dying, grief, and bereavement that a clergy person might experience. 1874. O’Connor, Brian, and Daniel J. Cherico. The Role of the Minister in Caring for the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno Press.

Pastoral Care

253

1875. O’Connor, Brian, and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Pastoral Role in Caring for the Dying and Bereaved: Pragmatic and Ecumenical. New York: Praeger, 1986. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. 1876. Oates, Wayne Edward. Grief, Transition, and Loss: A Pastor’s Practical Guide. Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press, 1997. 1877. ———. Pastoral Care and Counseling in Grief and Separation. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1976. 1878. Oliver, Samuel Lee. What the Dying Teach Us: Lessons on Living. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1998. 1879. Oraison, Mark. Death and Then What? Paramus, NJ: Paulist-Newman Press, 1969. 1880. Phipps, William E. Death: Confronting the Reality. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1987. 1881. Platt, Larry A., and Roger G. Branch, eds. Resources for the Ministry in Death and Dying. Nashville, TN: Broadman Press, 1988. 1882. Reeves, Robert B., Robert E. Neale, and Austin H. Kutscher. Pastoral Care of the Dying and the Bereaved: Selected Readings. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1973. Published for the Foundation of Thanatology. 1883. Richards, Larry O., and Paul Johnson. Death and the Caring Community. Portland, OR: Multnomah Press, 1980. Author also cited as Lawrence O. Richards. Written from a Christian pastoral counseling perspective, this text provides guidance for and insights to ministers and parishioners who visit terminal patients. The chapters are divided into sections on the needs of the terminally ill, the response of the caring community, and training for caring. Topics covered include the needs of the family, isolation of terminal patients, thoughts on death and dying from a Christian perspective, death fear, reactions to dying, pressures on medical personnel and the family, expectations of caregivers, hopelessness, communicating with the dying and the bereaved, and models of care in a hospice setting. This volume can be used as a textbook, as the information is presented with discussion questions, assignments, and suggested exercises. Includes an excellent resource review with general comments on the literature as well as annotated listings of materials in all formats arranged by subject. Also includes scripture and subject indexes. 1884. Rogers, William F. Ye Shall Be Comforted. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1950. This book is a consoling text for both the bereaved and those counseling and supporting them. Divided into two sections, “When Grief Comes” and “Words of

254

Chapter 27

Comfort,” Rogers first puts death into context and then offers comforting Bible verses, prayers, and inspirational thoughts for those mourning the loss of a loved one. This work is more substantive than many books in the genre, with thoughtful discussions of death, funerals, mourning, and recovery from bereavement. Includes numerous literary references. 1885. Rogness, A. N. Appointment with Death. Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1972. 1886. 1977.

Rogo, D. S. Man Does Survive Death. Secaucus, NJ: Citadel Press,

1887. Rumbold, Bruce D. Helplessness and Hope: Pastoral Care in Terminal Illness. London: SCM Press, 1986. 1888.

Rupp, Joyce. Praying Our Goodbyes. New York: Random House, 1992.

1889. Scherzer, Carl J. Ministering to the Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1963. 1890. Smith, William A. Reflections on Death, Dying, and Bereavement: A Manual for Clergy, Counselors, and Speakers. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. 1891. Soulen, Richard N., ed. Care for the Dying: Resources of Theology. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1975. Soulen offers a guide to pastoral counseling for the dying and bereaved. Includes a bibliography. 1892. Spencer, Glenn M. Jr. Blessed Are Those Who Mourn: Comforting Catholics in Their Time of Grief. Huntington, IN: Our Sunday Visitor, 1999. 1893. Stanworth, Rachel. Recognizing Spiritual Needs in People Who Are Dying. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004. Stanworth listened to the stories of twenty-five patients of St. Christopher’s Hospice in South London for the study presented in this book. She also conducted a period of participant observation. Principally, Stanworth explores the question, Beyond the limits broached by medicine, psychology, or the humanities, is there a further and all-encompassing horizon that gives meaning to human life and its finitude? She presents the patients’ stories while exploring metaphors in the storytelling, how spirituality is mediated in the here and now, regrets and mistakes from the past, the archetypal hero, the mother and stranger, and the implications for spiritual care. She also points out how patients often use a nonreligious “language of spirit” to express spiritual concerns. This is an important text in palliative care. Includes a very helpful and necessary glossary at the beginning of the book, color charts and images, extensive references, and an index. Foreword by Cicely M. Saunders, founder and president of St. Christopher’s Hospice.

Pastoral Care

255

1894. Starenko, R. C. God, Grass, and Grace: A Theology of Death. St. Louis, MO: Concordia Publishing House, 1975. 1895. Stuart, Friend. How to Conquer Physical Death. San Marcos, CA: Dominion Press, 1968. 1896. Sullender, R. S. Grief and Growth: Pastoral Resources for Emotional and Spiritual Growth. New York: Paulist Press, 1985. 1897. Switzer, David K. The Minister as Crisis Counselor. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1974. Switzer discusses unresolved grief, the various stages of grief, and how problems in dealing with grief can lead to emotional disorders. 1898. Taylor, Jeremy. The Rules and Exercises of Holy Dying. London: Bell & Daldy, 1857. Later published by Arno Press as part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. 1899. Taylor, Jeremy, and P. G. Stanwood. Holy Living and Holy Dying. New York: Oxford University Press, 1989. 1900. Tengbom, Mildred. Help for the Terminally Ill. St. Louis, MO: Concordia Publishing House, 1983. 1901.

Thielicke, Helmut. Death and Life. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1970.

1902. Turnage, Anne Shaw, and Mac N. Turnage. More Than You Dare Ask: The First Year of Living with Cancer. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1976. 1903. VanDuivendyk, Tim P. The Unwanted Gift of Grief: A Ministry Approach. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2006. Offering methods of embracing grief, this book aims to talk people “through their pain to make them heal better using ministry and counseling conversations with real people to identify what really happens in loss and grief.” Several theological references are used to help the bereaved transcend grief. 1904. 1968.

Wagner, J., ed. Reforming the Rights of Death. New York: Paulist Press,

1905. Waters, Brent. Dying and Death: A Resource for Christian Reflection. Cleveland, OH: United Church Press, 1996. 1906. Weatherhead, Leslie. Life Begins at Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1970. 1907. Weidner, Halbert. Grief, Loss, and Death: The Shadow Side of Ministry. New York: Haworth Press, 2006. 1908. Wiersbe, Warren W., and David Wiersbe. Ministering to the Mourning: A Practical Guide for Pastors, Church Leaders, and Other Caregivers. Chicago: Moody Publishers, 2006.

256

Chapter 27

1909. Williams, Donna Reilly, and JoAnn Sturzl. Grief Ministry: Helping Others Mourn. San Jose, CA: Resource Publications, 1990. Williams, a hospice grief counselor and teacher at the Center for Pastoral Studies of Loyola Marymount University, and Sturzl, a licensed personality and human relations educator, present a guide for those ministering to the bereaved and those grieving the death of a loved one. They discuss the denial of death, the dynamics and phases of grief, person-to-person skills in making pastoral visits expressing empathy and sympathy, religious rituals, spiritual journeys, prayer, issues surrounding children and death, suicide, ministry discernment, gifts of ministry, and funeral planning. Includes a short bibliography. 1910. Williams, P. W. When a Loved One Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Publishing House, 1976. 1911. Wolfelt, Alan D. Death and Grief: A Guide for Clergy. Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Association, 1990. Published by Accelerated Development, Levittown, PA, in 1988, and by Taylor & Francis, London, in 1998.

28 Philosophical Studies

1912. Barry, Vincent E. Philosophical Thinking about Death and Dying. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2006. 1913. Berg, David W., and George G. Daugherty. The Individual, Society, and Death. DeKalb, IL: Educational Perspectives Associates, 1972. 1914. Bolen, Jean Shinoda. Close to the Bone: Life-Threatening Illness and the Search for Meaning. New York: Touchstone Publishing, 1996. Bolen, a Jungian analyst and clinical professor of psychiatry at the University of California, San Francisco, examines how serious illness can bring one closer to the soul’s needs or “close to the bone.” She talks about how facing one’s own mortality can be a life-transforming process. The narrative is about patients and their loved ones on a journey of discovery, from the trauma of diagnosis and the challenges of illness and treatment to making meaning out of the process through prayer, meditation, rituals, sharing stories, and more intense and honest communication with others. Includes a brief bibliography and an index. 1915. Brock, Dan W. Life and Death: Philosophical Essays in Biomedical Ethics. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1993. 1916. Brooke, Tal. The Other Side of Death: Does Death Seal Your Destiny? Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House Publishers, 1979. Written following his conversion to Christianity, this book is Brooke’s effort to call into question the typical near-death story. A former follower of Hinduism and a former disciple of Sai Baba, he notes the similarities of many near-death stories to Eastern mysticism, Indian philosophy, astral projection, and spiritism. He also questions the work of Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Raymond Moody, noting their experiences with psychics. Includes numerous biblical references

257

258

Chapter 28

and Christian perspectives on death and dying as well as a brief list of titles for further reading. 1917. Choron, Jacques. Death and Western Thought. New York: Collier, 1963. Published by Macmillan, New York, in 1973. 1918. Derrida, Jacques. The Gift of Death. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995. 1919. Dietrich, Bernard C. Death, Fate, and the Gods: The Development of a Religious Idea in Greek Popular Belief and in Homer. London: Athlone Press, 1967. Part of the University of London Classical Studies series, volume 3. 1920. 1968.

Farber, Maurice L. Theory of Suicide. New York: Funk & Wagnalls,

1921. 1959.

Feifel, Herman, ed. The Meaning of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill,

1922.

———, ed. New Meanings of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977.

1923. Ferrater, Mora Jose. Being and Death. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1965. 1924. Fingerarette, Herbert. Death: Philosophical Soundings. Chicago: Open Court Press, 1996. Fingerarette presents a narrative on the meaning of death using metaphors and literary and religious references. He references Sigmund Freud, Marcus Aurelius, Albert Camus, Chuang Tzu, Bertrand Russell, Leo Tolstoy, Blaise Pascal, Miguel de Unamuno, David Human, and others. Includes an index. 1925. Fischer, John Martin, ed. The Metaphysics of Death. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 1993. Part of the Stanford Series in Philosophy. Fischer brings together a collection of papers, metaphysical and perhaps sometimes normative, discussing issues associated with death and dying. Contributors explore answers to the questions Can death be a bad thing for the individual who dies? What is the nature of the evil of death, if it is an evil? If death can harm a person, who is the subject of the harm, and when does the harm occur? And, if death can be a bad thing for a person, would immortality be good? While most of the contributors are professors of philosophy, the first chapter is an excerpt from a play by Woody Allen. Includes a bibliography, an index, and a list of contributors with title and institutional affiliations. 1926. Flammarion, Camille. Death and Its Mystery before Death. New York: The Century Co., 1922. 1927. Flumiani, Carlo M. The Philosophy of Life and the Philosophy of Death. Albuquerque, NM: American Classical College Press, 1974.

Philosophical Studies

259

1928. Foss, Martin. Death, Sacrifice, and Tragedy. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1966. Foss explores philosophical issues of death in this 125-page hardback. He discusses the process of life and its immediacy, the mythological implications of death, the evasive experience of death, sacrifice and death, mortality, inspiration and value, intercession and the tragic element, and what he terms the Great Tragic Drama. Includes a bibliography with nine citations, all cited within the work. 1929. Freud, Sigmund. Mourning and Melancholia. Standard ed. London: Hogarth Press, 1957. 1930. 1918.

———. Reflections on War and Death. New York: Moffat, Yard and Co.,

1931. Fry, Christopher. Death Is a Kind of Love. Cranberry Isles, ME: Tidal Press, 1979. Drawings by Charles E. Wadsworth. Calligraphy by Lance Hidy. Fry offers his thoughts and philosophies on death as a “part of our landscape” in this small hardcover. The words are from a talk that was one of three lectures given under the title “Our Basic Concerns” in November 1977, in Chichester Cathedral. 1932. Gatch, Milton M. Death: Meaning and Mortality in Christian Thought and Contemporary Culture. New York: Seabury Press, 1969. 1933. Gavin, William Joseph. Cuttin’ the Body Loose: Historical, Biological, and Personal Approaches to Death and Dying. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1995. At the core of Gavin’s book is the definition of death. He explores historical contexts from both the East and West, biological context, and personal contexts entertaining the notion of death versus dying and overall implications of acceptance versus denial. In the preface, he notes that the book stems from comments by Paul Ramsey who “noted that the more the uniquely individual and the bodily are emphasized, the more a ‘denial’ or ‘rebellious’ attitude toward death is cultivated; and conversely, the more they are deemphasized, the more an ‘acceptance’ model is put forth as normal or desirable.” Gavin also tells us that the title Cuttin’ the Body Loose comes from Kalamu ya Salaam, Banana Republic: Black Street Life and Culture in New Orleans, quoted in “Rituals: Six Ways Americans Deal with Death,” Utne Reader 47, (September–October 1991), p. 78. Includes notes and an index. 1934. Hallam, Elizabeth, Jennifer Lorna Hockey, and Glennys Howarth. Beyond the Body: Death and Social Identity. New York: Routledge, 1999. 1935. Hertz, Robert. Death and the Right Hand. Glencoe, IL: Free Press, 1960. Translated by Rodney and Claudia Needham.

260

Chapter 28

Includes the essay “A Contribution to the Study of the Collective Representation of Death,” by Robert Hertz. 1936. Herzog, Edgar. Psyche and Death. New York: G. P. Putnam & Sons, 1967. Originally published by Hodger & Stoughton, Ltd., London, in 1966. Translated by David Cox and Eugene Rolfe. 1937. Hessler, Florence M., and J. P. Carse, eds. Philosophical Aspects of Thanatology, Volumes I and II. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976. 1938. Hoffman, Frederick J. The Mortal No: Death and the Modern Imagination. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1964. 1939. Howes, Elizabeth, ed. And a Time to Die. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1961. 1940. Jungel, Eberhard. Death: The Riddle and the Mystery. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1975. 1941. Kamath, M. V. Philosophies of Death and Dying. Honesdale, PA: Himalayan Institute Press, 1978. 1942. Kapleau, Philip. The Zen of Living and Dying: A Practical and Spiritual Guide. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 1998. 1943. Kastenbaum, Robert J., ed. Return to Life: Two Imaginings of the Lazarus Theme. New York: Arno Press, 1976. 1944. Killilea, Alfred G. The Politics of Being Mortal. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1988. Killilea argues that the pain and tragedy of death does nothing to extinguish or minimize the meaning of a person’s life and their value to loved ones. He notes that their physical death cannot prevent their life from having a ripple effect on others and throughout time. He offers commentary and analysis on death as a paradox, surmounting the denial of death, accepting death and vulnerability, death and politics, accepting morality, and the limits of self-interest. He includes a moving afterword in which he reflects on his teenage daughter’s death, which occurred only seven weeks after he completed the revised manuscript for the book. He compares his arguments, assertions, and theories with his personal experience. Includes extensive notes and a useful index. 1945. Kluge, Eike-Henner W. The Practice of Death. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1975. Kluge offers a philosophical treatise on issues of morality related to death. He notes that, “our society has failed to understand the moral nature and consequences of the actions variously advocated; and that as a result of this, it is presently embarking upon a course of action that is dangerous.” The text is divided

Philosophical Studies

261

into sections addressing abortion, suicide, euthanasia, infanticide, senicide, and the morality and practice of death. Includes a thorough index. 1946. Koestenbaum, Peter. Is There an Answer to Death? Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall/Spectrum, 1976. Part of the Spectrum Books in Humanistic Psychology series, Rollo May and Charles Hampden-Turner, general editors. Professor of philosophy at San Jose State University, Koestenbaum discusses various philosophical problems associated with death under the three headings “Death and the Individual,” “Consciousness and the Individual,” and “Immortality and the Individual.” Topics addressed include the search for meaning, the structure of anxiety, death as an answer to pain and evil, inventing death, suicide, death exercises, consciousness and the brain, the experience of immortality, and the symbolism of the proof of immortality. Includes appendixes featuring essays on how philosophy can be of assistance to the problem of aging and the role of the physician in this context and thoughts on the management of death in the elderly. 1947. ———. Vitality of Death: Essays in Existential Psychology and Philosophy. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1971. 1948. Lamont, Corliss, ed. Man Answers Death. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1936. 1949. Landsberg, Paul-Louis. The Experience of Death: The Moral Problem of Suicide. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Translated by Cynthia Rowland from the French edition published in 1951, by Editions du Soleil, Paris, under the title Essai sur l’experience de la mort suivi de le probleme moral du suicide. First English edition published by Rockliff, London, in 1953. Landsberg, professor of philosophy who left Germany four days before Hitler assumed power, writes beautiful and frequently cited essays on death and suicide in this 102-page volume. He notes in the first essay that, “We constituted a ‘we’ with the dying man, and it is through this ‘we,’ through the very strength of this community, which constitutes, as it were, a new order of persons, that we are led into an experiential knowledge of our own mortality.” Foreword by Martin Jarrett-Kerr. 1950. Lifton, Robert J. The Broken Connection: On Death and the Continuity of Life. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1979. 1951. Metchnikoff, Elie. The Nature of Man: Studies in Optimistic Philosophy. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1910. 1952. Miller, Randolph Crump. Live Until You Die. Philadelphia: United Church Press, 1973. Publisher also cited as Pilgrim Press, Philadelphia.

262

Chapter 28

Miller, professor of Christian Nurture, discusses the psychological and social implications of dying and grief as well as preparing for death morally and spiritually. 1953. Montgomery, Mary. Death: End of the Beginning? Toronto, Ontario: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1972. 1954. 1965.

Nagy, Marie H. The Meaning of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill,

1955. Nugent, Christopher. Mysticism, Death, and Dying. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1994. 1956. Ochs, Robert J. The Death in Every Now. New York: Sheed & Ward, 1969. Ochs, a Catholic priest and professor of fundamental and systematic theology at Bellarmine School of Theology in North Aurora, Illinois, notes in this personal essay that Christian theology has focused too much on biological death and has failed to recognize that death can be “absurd” and “impersonal.” Based on Karl Rahner’s theology, Ochs discusses the freedom of death, death as act, trustful dying, overcoming death, and Christian hope. Includes a bibliography limited to Rahner’s works. 1957. Orbach, Ann. Life, Psychotherapy, and Death: The End of Our Exploring. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999. Orbach explores various philosophical approaches to death, noting its two inescapable truths: certainty and unknowing. From AIDS to sudden death to slow death, she analyzes death themes in modern culture, seeking roots in tradition, literature, and even mythology. An appendix discusses the Guild of Psychotherapists’ Summer Conference in July 1998, with the theme Love and Death in Psychoanalysis. Includes references and name and subject indexes. 1958. Ostheimer, N. C., and J. M. Ostheimer. Life or Death—Who Controls? New York: Springer, 1976. 1959. Park, James. An Existential Understanding of Death: A Phenomenology of Ontological Anxiety. Minneapolis, MN: Existential Press, 1975. 1960. Piven, Jerry S., ed. The Psychology of Death in Fantasy and History. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2004. With the fourteen articles in this book, Piven seeks to achieve a psychological understanding of death in fantasy and history. He notes in the introduction that he wants readers to “ponder these ideas, as it seems essential to the history of the psyche that death has always lingered as an immanent source of terror and despair.” Includes information about the editor and contributors, references, and an index. 1961. Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus, ed. The Interpretation of Death. New York: Jason Aronson, 1969. Title also cited as Death: Interpretations by Dell.

Philosophical Studies

263

1962. Schur, Max. Freud: Living and Dying. New York: International Universities Press, 1972. In this work, Freud’s personal doctor compares Freud’s philosophies about death with his life and final years. 1963. Shibles, Warren. Death: An Interdisciplinary Analysis. Whitewater, WI: Language Press, 1974. The approach, method, and sources used in this book were developed from a class Shibles taught at the University of Wisconsin, Whitewater. Shibles provides bits and pieces from various disciplines, but the primary focus of the work is on death themes in literature and philosophical perspectives on death. He does, however, offer an analysis of Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s Death and Dying and comments on Jessica Mitford and other authors. Incorporates a student questionnaire with results and quotations regarding the instrument. Also includes an excellent glossary entitled “Definitions and Etymologies” and an extensive bibliography. Illustrated with historical death-themed images. 1964. Shneidman, Edwin S. The Deaths of Man. Baltimore, MD: Penguin Books, 1974. First published by Quadrangle/New York Times Book Co., New York, in 1973. Nominated for a National Book Award, this text by renowned thanatologist Edwin S. Shneidman is a philosophical exploration of death. Seeing the dying process as a “complicated clustering of intellectual and affective states,” Shneidman does not see the stages of dying that Elisabeth Kübler-Ross puts forth in her books. In this text, he explores death work, postvention and the survivor-victim, the deromanticization of death, somatic and temporal aspects, equivocal death, medico-legal aspects, death certificates, psychological autopsy, and dimensions of death. Includes an afterword on initial reactions to the book’s topics, an appendix featuring a national survey of attitudes toward death, a bibliography, and name and subject indexes. Foreword by Arnold Toynbee of the Royal Institute of International Affairs. 1965. Strack, Stephen, ed. Death and the Quest for Meaning: Essays in Honor of Herman Feifel. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1997. Strack has assembled seventeen articles on various aspects of death and dying in honor of noted thanatologist and father of the modern death movement, Herman Feifel. Contributors include Robert A Neimeyer, Barry Fortner, Jeanne Quint Benoliel, Florence S. Wald, Elliot N. Dorff, Alan W. Friedman, Balfour M. Mount, S. Robin Cohen, Laurens P. White, Sandra L. Bertman, Hannelore Wass, Charles A. Corr, Kenneth J. Doka, Therese A. Rando, Avery D. Weisman, Daniel Leviton, Robert Fulton, John D. Morgan, and Robert J. Kastenbaum. Topics covered are death attitudes, death and gender, hospice, Judaism and end-of-life issues, quality of life of the terminally ill, physician-assisted death, childhood death and bereavement, vicarious bereavement, horrendous death, the quest for

264

Chapter 28

immortality, knowledge of death as a stimulus to creativity, and thoughts on the future of death studies. Includes images of Herman Feifel, a chronology with highlights of his career, a print bibliography of Herman Feifel, and an index. 1966. Taylor, Michael J. The Mystery of Suffering and Death. Staten Island, NY: Alba House Publishers, 1973. 1967. Thielicke, Helmut. Living with Death. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1983. Translated from the German edition, Leben mit dem Tod, by Geoffrey W. Bromiley. Thielicke, a world-renowned theologian and professor emeritus of systematic theology at the University of Hamburg in Germany, examines death as something that is with humans throughout their life rather than something that is approached in the final stages of life. Among the topics explored are the personal nature of human dying, awareness of death, natural and unnatural death, the connection between the view of humanity and the understanding of death in philosophy, death as the end of a journey, biblical understandings of death, and the ineluctability of death. Appendixes include remarks on the problem of death in the writings of Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, the concept of palingenesis in romanticism, death in the cosmos, and a letter to a soldier on death. Includes a bibliography and subject index. 1968. Vernon, Glenn M., ed. Death Meanings. Salt Lake City, UT: Association for the Study of Religion, 1973. 1969. Wagner, August H., ed. What Happens When You Die?: TwentiethCentury Thought on Survival after Death. New York: Abelard-Schuman, 1968. This fascinating volume is a compilation of letters collected by the author over a period of thirty years. The letters are from noted intellectuals and are responses to a questionnaire titled “On the Meaning of Death.” The letter, sent to more than 800 of the “foremost thinkers of the twentieth century,” is included along with 98 responses. Among the respondents are H. L. Mencken, Upton Sinclair, and David Ben-Gurion. The copy of the book examined included the following inscription by the author: “To help in man’s search for the meaning of his existence. August H. Wagner, 1980.” 1970. Walton, Douglas N. On Defining Death: An Analytic Study of the Concept of Death in Philosophy and Medical Ethics. Montreal, Quebec: McGillQueen’s University Press, 1979. Also cited as being published in Buffalo, NY. 1971. Weenolsen, Patricia. Transcendence of Loss over the Life Span. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1988.

29 Practitioner Education

1972. Arnold, Ken. Doctor Death: Medicine at the End of Life, an Exhibition at the Wellcome Institute for the History of Medicine. London: Wellcome Trust, 1997. 1973. Barbera, Thomas, Richard J. Pitch, and Mary C. Howell. Death and Dying: A Guide for Serving Adults with Mental Retardation. Boston: Exceptional Parent Press, 1989. 1974. Bascue, Loy O. Counselor Responses to Death and Dying: Guidelines for Training. New Orleans: American Personnel and Guidance Association, 1974. 1975. Becvar, Dorothy Stroh. In the Presence of Grief: Helping Family Members Resolve Death, Dying, and Bereavement Issues. New York: Guilford Press, 2001. 1976. Beder, Joan. Voices of Bereavement: A Casebook for Grief Counselors. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2004. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. 1977. Benoliel, Jeanne Quint. Death Education for the Health Professional. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1982. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 1978. Berdes, Celia M. Social Services for the Aged, Dying, and Bereaved in International Perspective. Washington, DC: International Federation on Aging, 1978. 1979. Berzoff, Joan, and Phyllis R. Silverman. Living with Dying: A Handbook for End-of-Life Health Care Practitioners. New York: Columbia University Press, 2004. 265

266

Chapter 29

1980. Boba, Antonio. Death in the Operating Room. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1965. Part of the American Lecture Series, number 628. A monograph in The Bannerstone Division of American Lectures in Anesthesiology series. Edited by John Andriani, director of the Department of Anesthesia at Charity Hospital of Louisiana, New Orleans. Boba, professor of anesthesiology at Albany Medical College at Union University in Jackson, Tennessee, and a practicing anethesiologist, offers both a layman’s discussion of death issues in the operating room and a clinical analysis of death from the anesthesiologist’s perspective. He discusses accidents caused by anesthetic overdose and airway difficulties, muscle relaxants, and errors in preoperative evaluations. Includes an index and appendix featuring what appears to be a list of brief narratives assessing actual deaths in the operating room. 1981. Bowers, Margaretta K., Edgar N. Jackson, James A. Knight, and Lawrence LeShan. Counseling the Dying. New York: Jason Aronson, 1964. Also cited as being published by Thomas Nelson and Sons, New York, in 1964. Reprinted in 1975. Also published by Harper & Row, San Francisco, CA, in 1981. 1982. Brim, Orville G. Jr., ed. Death and Medical Conduct. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1969. 1983. Brim, Orville G. Jr., Howard E. Freeman, Sol Levine, and Norman A. Scotch, eds. The Dying Patient. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1970. Contains fourteen articles on issues relevant to death and dying, many by noted thanatologists. This book is divided into sections on the social context of dying; how medical professionals and institutions cope with death; and the social, ethical, legal, and economic questions surrounding the termination of life. Contributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Anselm L. Strauss, Barney G. Glaser, and David Sudnow, among others. Subjects covered include dying in a public hospital, patterns of dying, physicians’ behavior toward dying patients, the dying patient’s point of view, cultural beliefs on life and death, and innovations for prolonging life. A final chapter discusses death and dying as a field of research. An extensive bibliography compiled by Richard A. Kalish concludes the book. 1984. Bulkin, Wilma. Medical Student Education: Meeting the Challenges of Life-Threatening Illness, Death, and Bereavement. New York: American Institute of Life-Threatening Illness and Loss, a Division of the Foundation of Thanatology, 1992. Presented at a conference at Columbia-Presbyterian Medical Center in New York City, on December 13, 1991. 1985. Burnell, George M., and Adrienne L. Burnell. Clinical Management of Bereavement: A Handbook for Healthcare Professionals. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1989. The authors present a thorough clinical review of bereavement and its treatment. Beginning with an analysis of the stress caused by bereavement, they ex-

Practitioner Education

267

amine bereavement as a source of physical, psychological, and social stress. They continue with definitions and theories of bereavement, looking at the psychoanalytic theory, contemporary psychodynamic theories, attachment and interpersonal theories as well as crisis, and cognitive and behavioral theories. The definitions and theories chapter reviews the varying theories on the stages of grief, along with psychosocial factors affecting the grieving process. The book also discusses signs and symptoms of bereavement; the four categories of adult symptoms; clinical management guidelines; pathological grief; bereavement following specific losses (loss of a spouse, parental loss, loss of an older child, and so forth); anticipatory and unanticipated grief; roles of health professionals during bereavement (physicians, nurses, social workers); bereavement in the hospital and clinic; ethical and legal issues; and burnout and coping strategies. The text concludes with suggestions for helping survivors, myths about bereavement, information on training and support programs, and a section detailing when and where to refer bereaved families. Special care for widows, bereaved parents, cancer patients and their families, and survivors of suicide is incorporated. Appendixes address age-related concepts of death for children, training films, clinical guidelines for handling stillbirths and care for the parents, and a nursing care plan for a patient hospitalized during a bereavement reaction. Includes extensive references and a list of suggested readings. The authors are affiliated with the Kaiser Permanente Medical Center in Honolulu, Hawaii, and the University of Hawaii, Honolulu. 1986. Chirban, John T., ed. Coping with Death and Dying: An Interdisciplinary Approach. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1985. Chirban, a psychotherapist and an academic, offers a collection of six articles on coping with death and dying written by professionals in the fields of medicine, psychology, and religion. Chirban advocates and makes a strong case for taking an interdisciplinary approach to issues surrounding death and dying. In addition to this theme, an emphasis on communication is maintained throughout the volume. Contributors include Mel Krant, Gerald Koocher, Earl A. Grollman, Thomas Hopko, Peter Poulos, and John T. Chirban. Includes biographical information about the editor. 1987. Crane, Diana. The Sanctity of Social Life: Physicians’ Treatment of Critically Ill Patients. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1975. Also cited as being published by Transaction Books, New Brunswick, NJ, in 1977. Most appropriate for physicians and others in health care, Crane’s book presents criteria for decision making in clinical environments and sources of variation among physicians with organizational, social, and cultural variables. She also offers insightful commentary on a redefinition of death and dying, origins of popular interest in death and dying, and the clinical mentality and medical decision making. Includes charts, questionnaires, a glossary of medical terms, a bibliography, and an index. Foreword by Charles D. Cook of the Yale University School of Medicine.

268

Chapter 29

1988. Curtis, J. Randall, and Gordon D. Rubenfeld. Managing Death in the ICU: The Transition from Cure to Comfort. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001. 1989. Davis, Richard H., ed. The Doctor and the Dying Patient. Los Angeles: California School of Medicine, 1971. 1990. DeBellis, Robert. Continuing Care for the Dying Patient, Family, and Staff. New York: Praeger, 1985. 1991. DeBellis, Robert, and Michael R. Goldberg. Medical Care of the Dying Patient. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Also cited as being published with coauthor Lillian G. Kutscher by Arno Press, New York, in 1982. 1992. Degner, Leslie F., and Janet I. Beaton. Life–Death Decisions in Health Care. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1987. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 1993. Dersheimer, Richard A. Counseling the Bereaved. New York: Pergamon Press, 1990. Part of the Psychology Practitioner Guidebooks series, Arnold P. Goldstein, Leonard Krasner, and Sol L. Garfield, editors. Intended for health and human services professionals, Dersheimer’s book is a primer on working with the bereaved. The chapters are divided into three sections: “Conceptual Development,” “Assessment and Strategies of Bereavement Counseling,” and “Focus on the Counselor.” Dersheimer discusses psychosocial explanations of grief and bereavement, mourning as spiritual development, relating and assessing during the initial contact with the client, and special needs of the professional working in this arena. Appendixes include a style inventory for personal grieving and a questionnaire entitled “The Unfolding Tapestry of My Life,” reprinted from Faith Development and Pastoral Care, by James W. Fowler (Fortress Press, 1987). Includes a bibliography and author and subject indexes. 1994. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing Hidden Sorrow. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1989. Doka examines the grief experienced by disenfranchised and socially stigmatized groups in twenty-seven articles written by thirty-three contributors. Disenfranchised grief in the following groups or experienced as a result of the following conditions/experiences include gays, lesbians, and bisexuals; those suffering from AIDS as well as those who care for them; individuals involved in extramarital affairs and cohabitation; fellow employees; ex-spouses; people dealing with perinatal death; those who have underestimated their grief; individuals dealing with the effects of abortion; people suffering the loss of companion animals; men and women going through divorce; suffering young children; teens dealing with breakups; the very old; and the developmentally disabled. There is also general discussion of disenfranchised grief, intrapsychic dimensions, and psychosocial loss. A special section offers professional perspectives on such

Practitioner Education

269

topics as pastoral counseling, the funeral director’s perspective, rituals, nursing perspectives, hospice work with AIDS-related grief, and counseling those with disenfranchised grief. Includes brief narratives on the professional background of each contributor. 1995. Dowdle, Nancy O’Neill. Death and Dying Training in Counselor Education Programs: A National Study. Chicago: Loyola University Chicago, 1985. 1996. Enck, Robert E. The Medical Care of Terminally Ill Patients. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001. 1997. Epting, Franz R., and Robert A. Neimeyer. Personal Meanings of Death: Applications of Personal Construct Theory to Clinical Practice. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1984. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 1998. Gavey, C. The Management of the “Hopeless” Case. London: H. K. Lewis and Co, 1952. 1999. Gerchick, Elias. The Role of the Community Hospital in the Care of the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1975. 2000. Goldberg, Ivan K., Harold B. Haley, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Therapeutic Drugs and the Quality of Life. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1997. 2001. Goldberg, Ivan K., and Austin H. Kutscher. Pain, Anxiety, and Grief: Pharmacotherapeutic Care of the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press, 1986. 2002. Gonda, Thomas Andrew, and John Edward Ruark. Dying Dignified: The Health Professional’s Guide to Care. Menlo Park, CA: Addison-Wesley, 1984. 2003. Groopman, Jerome. The Measure of Our Days: New Beginnings at Life’s End. New York: Viking Press, 1997. A clinician, researcher, and professor of immunology at Harvard Medical School, Groopman advocates for health care providers to have greater awareness of issues impacting the dying. He does this through eight stories that illustrate what can be learned about life from the dying and their loved ones. Includes an index and biographical information about the author. 2004. Hafferty, Frederic W. Into the Valley: Death and the Socialization of Medical Students. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1991. 2005. Harper, Bernice Catherine. Death: The Coping Mechanism of the Health Professional. Greenville, SC: Southeastern University Press, 1977. Author is also cited as Bernice Wright-Harper. Noting that many of the responsibilities associated with dying have been shifted from the family to the less personal health care industry, Harper suggests

270

Chapter 29

that there is a great need for a better understanding of a coping mechanism for health professionals. Relaying experiences from the City of Hope Medical Center in California, she discusses professional anxieties, intellectualization, emotional survival during traumatic experiences, depression, deep compassion, grief, and bereavement. She includes a glossary with definitions of terms arranged according to Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s five stages of grief. Includes a bibliography and a biographical sketch of the author, along with a list of her publications. 2006. Hastings Center. Guidelines on the Termination of Life-Sustaining Treatment and the Care of the Dying. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987. 2007. Hollingsworth, Charles E., and Robert O. Pasnau, eds. The Family in Mourning: A Guide for Health Professionals. New York: Grune & Stratton, 1977. Part of the Seminars in Psychiatry series, Milton Greenblatt, editor. This title contains twenty-seven articles discussing bereavement from the perspectives of various health professions. While social workers, nurses, and cardiologists are included among the article authors, Hollingsworth and Pasnau have authored the majority of the pieces. Issues explored include psychological assessment, informing families about death, mourning following the birth of a handicapped child, psychotherapy, liaison psychiatry, and widowhood. Includes references and an extensive index. 2008. Hooyman, Nancy R., and Betty J. Kramer. Living through Loss: Interventions across the Life Span. New York: Columbia University Press, 2006. Part of the Foundations of Social Work Knowledge series, Frederic G. Reamer, editor. Intended primarily for professionals working in grief therapy settings, Hooyman and Kramer’s exceptional text examines the grief process, looks at theoretical perspectives on grief, and offers comments on grief at various life stages as well as intervention strategies for each stage. Notable cited research includes the use of paradox with Native American adolescents bereaved by suicide, school responses to the trauma of violent death, and suggestions for preparing for crosscultural assessment and communication. Includes an extensive list of references and a detailed index. 2009. Humphrey, Geraldine M., and David G. Zimpfer. Counseling for Grief and Bereavement. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1996. 2010. Jones, Mary. Love after Death: Counseling in Bereavement. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1995. In this 67-page paperback, Jones uses case histories from her experience as a counselor to examine the issues surrounding bereavement and the feelings that stem from it. Intended as a guide for counselors and those who provide support to the grieving, the book explains the processes behind bereavement and offers suggestions for communicating with and providing care to the bereaved. Jones strongly emphasizes the importance of counseling. She also wrote Secret Flowers (1987), an autobiographical account of her husband’s death.

Practitioner Education

271

2011. Kellehear, Allan. Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End-of-Life Care. New York: Routledge, 2005. Kellehear, a sociologist and professor of palliative care at La Trobe University in Melbourne, Australia, suggests that in the intense and intimate experience of death, people are able to recognize a bigger societal picture, almost stepping outside of themselves to understand a greater community and a greater good. He compares parallel histories of public health and end-of-life care and advocates for the inclusion of death, loss, and compassion in public health approaches and policies. Includes references and an index. 2012. Kemp, Charles. Terminal Illness: A Guide to Nursing Care. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott, 1999. 2013. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Death and Dying: What the Dying Have to Teach Doctors, Nurses, Clergy, and Their Families. New York: Macmillan, 1969. Published by Tavistock Publications, London, in 1973. Reprint edition published by Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, New York, in 1997, and by Scribner, New York, in 2003. In one of the most celebrated and best-selling books on death and dying, Kübler-Ross discusses her five stages of dying: denial, anger, bargaining, depression, and acceptance. This is an important and influential text. 2014. Kuebler, Kim K., Patricia H. Berry, and Debra E. Heidrich. End-of-Life Care: Clinical Practice Guidelines. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 2001. 2015. Kutscher, Austin H., and Michael R. Goldberg. Caring for the Dying Patient and His Family: A Model for Medical Education—Medical Center Conferences. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Co., 1973. Published for the Foundation of Thanatology by Health Sciences Publishing Co. 2016. Kutscher, Austin H., Bernard Schoenberg, and Arthur C. Carr. Oral Care: The Mouth in Critical and Terminal Illness. New York: Arno Press, 1980. 2017. ———. The Terminal Patient: Oral Care. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1973. Distributed by Columbia University Press. 2018. Lair, George S. Counseling the Terminally Ill: Sharing the Journey. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1996. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 2019. Lord, Janice Harris. Trauma, Death, and Death Notification: A Seminar for Professional Counselors and Victim Advocates. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Office for Victims of Crime, 2000. 2020. Lynn, Joanne, Janice Lynch Schuster, and Andrea Kabcenell. Improving Care for the End of Life: A Sourcebook for Health Care Managers and Clinicians. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.

272

Chapter 29

2021. McGrory, Arlene. A Well Model Approach to Care of the Dying Client. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978. 2022. Naylor, Harriet H., and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Role of the Volunteer Director in the Care of the Terminal Patient and the Family. New York: Arno Press, 1980. 2023. Norlander, Linda. To Comfort Always: A Nurse’s Guide to End-of-Life Care. Washington, DC: American Nurses Association, 2001. 2024. Osis, Karlis. Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses. New York: Parapsychology Foundation, 1961. Noting how the study of death has evolved from a field within religion and philosophy to one of scientific study, Osis suggests that death can now be defined as the ultimate destruction and end of a human personality. He discusses how researchers in parapsychology have “unearthed information rather difficult to explain without assuming some modus of survival after death.” Topics covered include mediumistic messages, deathbed hallucinations, “Peak in Darrien” cases, out-of-body experiences, pharmacological explanations for unusual deathbed experiences, elated mood phenomena, visions and apparitions, and effects of anesthesia. Incorporates several odd yet interesting tables and charts, for example, “Biological Variables in Terminal and Nonterminal Patients Who Hallucinated Persons or Religious Figures.” Appendixes include a questionnaire; case description forms; and a summary in English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish. 2025. Parkes, Colin Murray, Marilyn Relf, and Ann Couldrick. Counseling in Terminal Care and Bereavement. Baltimore, MD: P. H. Brookes Publishing Co., 1996. Also published by B.P.S. Books in Leicester, UK. 2026. Pearl, Raymond. The Biology of Death: A Series of Lectures Delivered at the Lowell Institute in Boston in December 1920. New York: Arno Press, 1976. 2027. Pearson, Althea. Growing through Loss and Grief: A Counselor’s Guide. London: HarperCollins, 1994. 2028. Playing God: The Dilemma of the Dying Patient. Reston, VA: American Medical Student Association, 1995. 2029. Post, Kalmon D. Acute, Chronic, and Terminal Care in Neurosurgery. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1987. 2030. Prichard, Elizabeth R., Jean Goliard, Ben A. Orcutt, Austin H. Kutscher, and Irene Seelan, eds. Social Work with the Dying Patient and the Family. New York: Columbia University Press, 1977. 2031. Quill, Timothy E. Caring for Patients at the End of Life: Facing an Uncertain Future Together. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.

Practitioner Education

273

2032. Raether, Howard C. The Funeral Director and His Role as Counselor. Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Association, 1975. Also published by Bulfin Press. 2033. Rando, Therese A. Grief, Dying, and Death: Clinical Interventions for Caregivers. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1984. Originally published in 1981. 2034. ———. Treatment of Complicated Mourning. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1993. 2035. Raven, Ronald W. The Dying Patient: The Role of the Family Doctor, Nurse, and Medical Social Worker. New York: State Mutual, 1975. Also cited as being published by Beekman in 1975 and Pitman Medical in the United Kingdom in the same year. 2036. Saunders, Cicely M. The Management of Terminal Disease. Chicago: Yearbook Medical Publishers, 1978. 2037. ———. The Management of Terminal Illness. London: Hospital Medicine Publications, 1967. 2038. ———, ed. The Management of Terminal Malignant Disease. London: Edward Arnold, 1984. Part of the Management of Malignant Disease Series. 2039. Schnaper, Nathan, J. W. Annis, and Lawrence J. Roose. Management of the Dying Patient and His Family. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974. 2040. Schoenberg, B. Mark, ed. Bereavement Counseling: A Multidisciplinary Handbook. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1980. Includes “A Psychiatric Model of Bereavement Counseling,” by Beverly Raphael. 2041. Schoenberg, Bernard, Arthur C. Carr, David Peretz, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Loss and Grief: Psychological Management in Medical Practice. New York: Columbia University Press, 1970. Reprinted in 1973. Includes the article “The Child’s Reaction to Death in the Family,” by Robert A. Furman. 2042. Smith, Helen C. Care of the Dying Patient: A Comparison of Instructional Plans. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1965. 2043. Society for the Right to Die. The Physician and the Hopelessly Ill Patient: Legal, Medical, and Ethical Guidelines. New York: Society for the Right to Die, 1985. 2044. 1978.

Speck, Peter. Loss and Grief in Medicine. London: Bailliere Tyndall,

274

Chapter 29

Speck, a hospital chaplain, emphasizes the importance of medical personnel being attentive to grief and loss with their patients. Through several case studies he covers different kinds of losses in the context of religious and various world views. 2045. Strosberg, Martin A., I. Alan Fein, and James D. Carroll, eds. Rationing of Medical Care for the Critically Ill: Report of a Conference Held in Washington, D.C., on May 27, 1986. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution, 1989. This report, a collection of articles, discusses the ethics of rationing, alternatives, case studies from the United Kingdom, federal policy, criteria for admission to intensive care units, reimbursement policy, triage, legal perspectives on allocation of services, and political implications. 2046. Swanson, Jan, and Alan Cooper. A Physician’s Guide to Coping with Death and Dying. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 2005. The authors present an introductory text for physicians on death and dying issues and coping with them. Swanson and Cooper practice internal medicine and clinical psychology, respectively. They discuss the importance of understanding death, the stages of dying, the physician’s role in a peaceful death, and treatment options. Other topics covered include talking with the dying patient; death and children, including spiritual needs; physicians as patients; facing the end of life; and death in the emergency department. Swanson and Cooper offer suggestions on how to cope with the death of a patient, dealing with guilt and shame, and various problems in coping with death. The final section focuses on reducing stress, offering ideas for relaxation, meditation, visualization, keeping a journal, spirituality, and opening up to others. An extensive list of organizations, associations, and websites is incorporated with brief information on each. Also includes a list of references. 2047. Tedeschi, Richard G., and Lawrence G. Calhoun. Helping Bereaved Parents: A Clinician’s Guide. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2004. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. 2048. Trotman, Frances K., and Claire M. Brody. Psychotherapy and Counseling with Older Women: Cross-Cultural, Family, and End-of-Life Issues. New York: Springer, 2001. 2049. Troup, Stanley B., and William A. Greene, eds. The Patient, Death, and the Family. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1974. Presented at the Conference on the Patient, Death, and the Family at the Rochester General Hospital in Rochester, New York, in October 1971. The book consists of twelve essays from the fields of medicine, nursing, sociology, philosophy, and chaplaincy. It also features an essay by Robert Anderson on the death of his wife.

Practitioner Education

275

2050. Vachon, Mary L. S. Occupational Stress in the Care of the Critically Ill, the Dying, and the Bereaved. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1987. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor. 2051. Walker, Earl A. Cerebral Death. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico, School of Medicine, 1981. 2052. Walsh-Burke, Katherine. Grief and Loss: Theories and Skills for Helping Professionals. Boston: Pearson Allyn & Bacon, 2006. 2053. Warthin, Alfred. The Physician of the Dance of Death. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1931. 2054. Weisman, Avery D. The Realization of Death: A Guide for the Psychological Autopsy. New York: Jason Aronson, 1974. A physician, psychiatrist, and psychoanalyst, Weisman gives an academic examination of the multidisciplinary arena of the psychological autopsy. In his foreword, noted thanatologist Edwin S. Shneidman describes the effort of the psychological autopsy as trying to “bring him to ‘life’ as it were—and then trying to divine his motivations, intentions, attitudes, and ambivalences in relation to one specific temporal span of behavior which in itself had extreme consequences—his dying.” Weisman discusses the Los Angeles Suicide Prevention Center, geriatric, and Omega versions of the psychological autopsy as well as its comparison with the regular autopsy. He includes eight case illustrations, most of them suicides. Another section explores the common denominators of death. Includes extensive references and a brief index. 2055. Wilkes, Eric. The Dying Patient: The Medical Management of Incurable and Terminal Illness. Ridgewood, NJ: G. A. Bogden, 1982. Also published by MTP Press, London. 2056. Wolf, Stewart G., ed. The Responsible Physician: Standards of Excellence and the Critically Ill Patient. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1988. 2057. Wolf, Stewart G., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Caregiving in the Community Hospital for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved. New York: Arno Press, 1982. 2058. Worden, J. William. Grief Counseling and Grief Therapy: A Handbook for the Mental Health Practitioner. 3rd ed. New York: Springer, 2002. Originally published in 1982. Second edition published in 1991.

30 Rituals

2059. Albery, Nicholas, Stephanie Wienrich, Gil Elliot, and Joseph Elliot. The New Natural Death Handbook. 3rd ed. London: Rider, 2000. Previous edition published in 1997. The authors describe British options for nontraditional funerals and interments. Examples include burial grounds in forests and cardboard coffins. 2060. Anderson, Megory. Sacred Dying: Creating Rituals for Embracing the End of Life. Roseville, CA: Prima Publishing, 2001. Also cited as being published by Marlowe & Company, New York. 2061. Ball, Mog. Death. New York: Oxford University Press, in association with Chameleon/Ikon, 1976. Part of the Standpoints series. In this 64-page paperback, Ball purports to provide information “usually restricted to professionals such as doctors and undertakers.” She attempts to do this through numerous black-and-white photographs, cartoons, reproduced articles, and quotes, all arranged as collages. The photographs depict mummies, contemporary dead bodies, cemeteries, a murdered corpse, crematoria, funeral scenes, caskets, and mourners. This book is a graphic discussion of death and the rituals surrounding it. 2062. Budge, E. A. Wallis. The Book of the Dead: An English Translation of the Chapters, Hymns, Etc., of the Theban Recension, with Introduction, Notes, Etc. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1960. Second edition revised and enlarged (eighth impression) with 20 plates and 400 vignettes. Also published by University Books, New Hyde Park, NY, in 1960. E. A. Wallis Budge was keeper of the Egyptian and Assyrian antiquities in the British Museum. In this book, he offers a translation of the Book of the Dead as

276

Rituals

277

well as interpretive commentary. Includes illustrations, notably a pull-out color plate of the Funeral Procession with brief descriptions below. 2063. Childs-Gowell, Elaine. Good Grief Rituals: Tools for Healing. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill Press, 1992. 2064. Derrida, Jacques. The Work of Mourning. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001. Edited by Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. The editors offer a collection of eulogies written by famous philosopher Derrida about his friends and colleagues in the form of memorial essays, letters of condolence, funeral orations, and traditional eulogies. Includes a collection of bibliographies. 2065. Diamant, Anita. Saying Kaddish: How to Comfort the Dying, Bury the Dead, and Mourn as a Jew. New York: Schocken Books, 1998. 2066. Eimer, Robert, and Sarah O’Malley. In the Potter’s Hands: Nine Wake Services. San Jose, CA: Resource Publications, 1998. This work is a practical guide for families, ministers, funeral directors, and bereavement teams to use to plan wake services. Eimer and O’Malley discuss the need to be flexible and personable with the services, catering to individual needs and addressing the circumstances. 2067. Feinstein, David, and Peg Elliott Mayo. Mortal Acts: Eighteen Empowering Rituals for Confronting Death. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1990. 2068. ———. Rituals for Living and Dying: From Life’s Wounds to Spiritual Awakening. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1990. 2069. Hockey, Jennifer Lorna, Jeanne Katz, and Neil Small, eds. Grief, Mourning, and Death Ritual. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2001. Jennifer Lorna Hockey is also cited as Jenny Hockey. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor. The contributors examine various responses to death and how they occur “within the unique set of cultural, social, and historical circumstances [that] characterizes postwar society.” Articles document contemporary practices and review the ways grief, mourning, and death rituals have been approached by researchers in the field. Subject matter covered includes theories of grief, grief as illness, widowhood, bereavement care, support for bereaved children in school environments, the Child Death Helpline, funeral rituals past and present, Hindu death and mourning rituals, the cemetery as evidence of continuing bonds, grieving in public, and postdisaster rituals. Includes a list of British organizations and addresses as well as an index. 2070. Huntington, Richard, and Peter Metcalf. Celebrations of Death: The Anthropology of the Mortuary Ritual. New Rochelle, NY: Cambridge University Press, 1979.

278

2071.

Chapter 30

Irion, Paul E. Cremation. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1968.

2072. ———. The Funeral: An Experience of Value. Lancaster, PA: Lancaster Theological Seminary, 1956. Also cited as being a publication of the National Funeral Directors Association, Milwaukee, WI. 2073. 1966.

———. The Funeral: Vestige or Value? Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,

2074. Iserson, Kenneth V. Death to Dust: What Happens to Dead Bodies? Tucson, AZ: Galen Press, 2001. 2075. Jackson, Edgar N. For the Living. New York: Channel Press, 1964. Jackson gives details on how the funeral assists the bereaved and discusses psychological and theological implications. 2076. ———. The Significance of the Christian Funeral. Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Association, 1966. 2077. Kolatch, Alfred J. The Jewish Mourner’s Book of Why. Middle Village, NY: Jonathan David Publishers, 1993. In this informative book on Jewish death and mourning rites, Kolatch seemingly addresses every matter on the topic in more than 400 pages. Several helpful appendixes are incorporated, including “The Unveiling Service,” “Home Yizkor Memorial Service,” “Family Yahrzeit Record,” “Rabbis’ Kaddish,” “Mourners’ Kaddish,” “Full Kaddish,” “Half Kaddish,” and “Burial Kaddish.” Includes a bibliography, an index, and biographical information on the author. 2078. Llewellyn, John F. Saying Goodbye Your Way: Planning or Buying a Funeral or Cremation for Yourself or Someone You Love. Glendale, CA: Tropico Press, 2004. Llewellyn, president of Forest Lawn Memorial-Parks and Mortuaries, provides an insider’s guide to the daunting task of planning a funeral. He covers the entire funeral landscape with insightful narrative and helpful guidance. Subjects addressed include “simple” and “traditional” funeral services, graveside and memorial services, grief and mourning, emotional and physical reactions to death, communicating about death, pallbearers, the length of a funeral service, clergy and honoraria, obituaries, open or closed caskets, flowers, cremation and options associated with this choice, shipping bodies and cremated remains, prearranged funerals, estates and wills, mortuaries, endowment care funds, memorial and cremation societies, retail casket sellers, monument dealers, outer burial containers and vaults, autopsies, death certificates, hospice, social security and veterans’ benefits, and public aid funerals. Three appendixes feature guidance on keeping financial and other valuable papers; a list of goods and services provided by funeral homes and cemeteries; and a section on helpful organizations, with contact information, Web addresses, and descriptions of their services. Includes a helpful and lengthy glossary, a bibliography, and an index.

Rituals

279

2079. Margolis, Otto Schwarz. Grief and the Meaning of the Funeral. Edison, NJ: MSS Information Corp., 1975. Also cited as being published in New York. 2080. Martin, Edward. Psychology of Funeral Service. Grand Junction, CO: Sentinel Printers, 1950. 2081. Mayo, Peg Elliott. The Healing Sorrow Workbook: Rituals for Transforming Grief and Loss. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2001. 2082. Metrick, Sydney Barbara. Crossing the Bridge: Creating Ceremonies for Grieving and Healing from Life’s Losses. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 1994. Examining a variety of responses to loss, Metrick offers the five stages of a healing ceremony: intention, planning, preparation, manifestation, and incorporation. As assistant professor of psychology, certified expressive therapist, ordained minister, and clinical hypnotherapist, Metrick assists individuals, couples, and groups experiencing loss and grief by creating special ceremonies and therapeutic techniques. Her title page includes a quote from Stephen Levine’s Healing into Life and Death: “The toll for crossing to the other shore of wholeness is the relinquishment of suffering. This crossing over is what is called healing.” Includes a list of support groups divided by subject and suggestions for further reading. 2083. Morgan, Ernest A. A Manual of Death Education and Simple Burial. 10th ed. Burnsville, NC: Celo Press, 1984. Published in 1964 as A Manual for Simple Burial. Published as Dealing Creatively with Death: A Manual of Death Education and Simple Burial, by Zinn Communications, Bayside, NY, in 1994. This booklet discusses efforts at funeral reform during the 1950s and 1960s, suggesting patterns by which, through group interaction, funerals may be made simpler and less costly. Morgan advocates cremation as a means of disposing of the dead, though not exclusively. 2084. Pine, Vanderlyn R., Austin H. Kutscher, David Peretz, Robert C. Slater, Robert DeBellis, Robert J. Volk, Daniel J. Cherico, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Acute Grief and the Funeral. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1976. The editors have assembled an extensive collection of articles and essays on the relationship between the funeral and grief. Contributors include child development researchers, mortuary science educators, funeral service providers, clergy, physicians, sociologists, and psychiatrists. Many of the contributors are cited elsewhere in the book. Among the many topics covered are a physician’s perspective on acute grief, the use of psychopharmacologic agents for the bereaved, postbereavement family support services, traditional funerals in contemporary society, the sociology of the mortuary, expressing grief, social meanings of the funeral, humanist services, funerary social behavior, roles for the funeral professional, death anxiety for funeral home workers, pastoral care of the bereaved, loss and grief among the elderly, helping children mourn, funeral behavior and unresolved grief, the school and the funeral, and bibliotherapy as a tool to help

280

Chapter 30

children cope with acute grief. Includes an extensive index and professional information for each contributor. 2085. Prioreschi, Plinio. A History of Human Responses to Death: Mythologies, Rituals, and Ethics. Lewiston, Australia: Eden Mellen Press, 1990. 2086. Raether, Howard C., and Robert C. Slater. The Funeral: Facing Death as an Experience of Life. Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Association, 1974. 2087. Roach, Mary. Stiff: The Curious Lives of Human Cadavers. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, 2003. 2088. Rushton, L. Death Customs. Boston: Thomson Learning, 1993. Intended for ages seven to ten. 2089. Santino, Jack. Spontaneous Shrines and the Public Memorialization of Death. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006. 2090. Soper, Susan. ObitKit: A Guide to Celebrating Your Life: How to Personalize the Obituary Process and Create Your Written Legacy. Atlanta, GA: ObitKit.com, 2008. In this 72-page spiral-bound guide to writing obituaries, Soper offers comforting and insightful guidance for those charged with handling a person’s final wishes or for those thinking ahead and preparing for their own death. She includes a brief history of the obituary and offers numerous tips for preparing an abbreviated life story. The guide can be used as a workbook with several fill-inthe-blank forms for compiling your personal information. Helpful advice is also provided on funeral services. Soper includes numerous quotes, homilies, and Bible verses as well as a list of eight online resources. Soper worked as a reporter in New York writing obituaries, news, and feature stories before writing for CNN and serving as features editor at the Atlanta Journal-Constitution. 2091. Starhawk, and M. Macha NightMare. The Pagan Book of Living and Dying: Practical Rituals, Prayers, Blessings, and Meditations on Crossing Over. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1997. 2092. Theroux, Phyllis, ed. The Book of Eulogies: A Collection of Memorial Tributes, Poetry, Essays, and Letters of Condolence. New York: Scribner, 1997. 2093. Wallis, C. J. The Funeral Encyclopedia: A Source Book. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 1953. 2094. Wolfelt, Alan D. Creating Meaningful Funeral Ceremonies: A Guide for Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2000. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.

Rituals

281

2095. ———. Creating Meaningful Funeral Services: A Guide for Families. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2000. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition. 2096. Wood, William, and John Wharton. Death-Bed Scenes. London: C. and J. Rivington, 1826. 2097. York, Sarah. Remembering Well: Rituals for Celebrating Life and Mourning Death. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2000. This is a guide and sourcebook for planning memorial ceremonies and other rituals. York, a Unitarian Universalist minister, respects cultural and religious diversity in offering ideas and insights into the planning of funerals and rituals honoring the dead. She does, however, present all in the context of spirituality. Following chapters that address variations in types of deaths, committal ceremonies, and rituals long after death, she offers three resource sections that give specific ideas for blessing and preparing a body; text on five actual services created by families and friends; and selections of readings, prayers, and blessings. Includes a list of recommended titles, biographical information about the author, and an index. 2098. Young, Gregory W. The High Cost of Dying: A Guide to Funeral Planning. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1994.

31 Sibling Loss and Grief

2099. Barber, Erika R. Letters from a Friend: A Sibling’s Guide for Coping and Grief. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. Presented as a workbook, Barber’s text offers an interactive and creative way to learn about and deal with childhood death. She provides places in the book to include photos, information about the sibling and their death, and drawings. In the chapter concerning the body, she includes space for a gravestone rubbing. The text also includes numerous gentle suggestions for coping. This book is an unusual but excellent therapeutic learning tool that is comprehensive in its treatment of childhood grief. Tips for utilizing the book are included for parents and caregivers. Includes an index. 2100. Bluebond-Langner, Myra. In the Shadow of Loss: Parents and Siblings of the Chronically Ill Child. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996. Bluebond-Langner focuses on well siblings of children with chronic, lifethreatening illness. Most of her research is with children suffering from cystic fibrosis. She divides her text into three parts: the introduction and impact of cystic fibrosis, portraits of nine families, and containing the intrusion of the illness and all that it brings. An afterword provides general guidelines for clinical intervention and suggestions for communication within the family. Includes three tables, a helpful glossary, a lengthy list of works cited, and an index. 2101. Brandt, Raymond William. Twin Loss: A Book Where the Twinless and Others Can Seek Answers to the Many Questions Which Rise During Terminal Illness and after the Death of Their Beloved Twin. Leo, IN: Twinsworld Publishing Co., 2001.

282

Sibling Loss and Grief

283

2102. Davies, Betty. Shadows in the Sun: The Experiences of Sibling Bereavement in Childhood. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Davies provides a scholarly, research-based examination of childhood grief following the death of a sibling. She explores the bond between siblings and examines the many dimensions of sibling relationships. She then writes about the impact of sibling bereavement. Other topics covered include the child’s understanding of death; sibling responses to a child’s death; individual, situational, and environmental variables affecting sibling bereavement responses; the family’s role in sibling bereavement; and long-term effects. Davies concludes her text with a paradigm model of sibling bereavement and implications for caregiving adults. Appendixes include summaries of anecdotal and scholarly articles in the literature as well as summaries of research reports. A lengthy list of references is also included. 2103. DeVita-Raeburn, Elizabeth. The Empty Room: Surviving the Loss of a Brother or Sister at Any Age. New York: Scribner, 2004. Focusing on the psychological aspects of losing a sibling, DeVita-Raeburn offers a compassionate and poignant examination of the unique nature of grief and bereavement associated with a sibling. Rooted in the author’s own grief for her oldest brother and best friend, Ted, she discusses ambiguous loss, disenfranchised grief, reforming an identity, the loss of a twin, and recovery from grief. Includes an annotated list of books, an extensive bibliography, and a list of organizations and websites. 2104. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Sibling. New York: Dodd, Mead & Company, 1988. A columnist for Thanatos, Donnelly offers a guide for children and adults who have suffered the loss of a brother or sister. She calls them “forgotten grievers” and “lonely mourners.” She addresses the unique issues surrounding the grief that follows the loss of a sibling. Donnelly touches on the sometimes love–hate relationship between siblings and discusses feelings of anger and guilt, denial, and symptoms of sibling grief. Several case studies and stories are presented. Includes a directory of organizations and support groups in the United States and Canada as well as a brief list of suggested readings prepared by Froma Lippmann, a parent education/resource consultant in Arlington, Virginia. 2105. Fanos, Joanna H. Sibling Loss. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1996. Based on extensive interviews and a review of existing literature on sibling loss, Fanos offers a thorough examination of clinical and therapeutic issues for mental health researchers and clinicians. She discusses fundamental problems with sibling loss, the family setting, sibling relationships, how siblings view illness, ensuing grief and bereavement stages, the fear of death, guilt, resolution,

284

Chapter 31

and recommendations for practitioners. An appendix includes Fanos’s detailed research methods. Includes an extensive bibliography. 2106. Jenkins, Clare, and Judy Merry. Relative Grief: Parents and Children, Sisters and Brothers, Husbands, Wives, and Partners, Grandparents and Grandchildren Talk about Their Experience of Death and Grieving. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2005. Jenkins and Merry, British radio broadcasters, offer a collection of personal stories and experiences from their interviewees that relay experiences with bereavement. The book is divided into sections based on the relationship to the deceased. Includes a list of useful contacts, all in the United Kingdom, and a brief list of titles recommended by the interviewees. 2107. LaTour, Kathy. For Those Who Live: Helping Children Cope with the Death of a Brother or Sister. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1983. 2108. Linn, Erin. Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Siblings. Incline Village, NV: Publisher’s Mark, 1982. Linn offers a guide for bereaved siblings of all ages through the stories, illustrations, and quotations from young grieving siblings. Children discuss their experiences of loss, learning of the death, the funeral, their reactions and feelings, and what assisted them in their healing. 2109. Rosen, Helen. Unspoken Grief: Coping with Childhood Sibling Loss. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1986. 2110. Ruiz, Ruth Ann. Coping with the Death of a Brother or Sister. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 2001. 2111. Smith, Alison. Name All the Animals: A Memoir. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2004. An account of dramatic and monumental loss, Smith describes the grief that encompassed her following the death of her teenage brother, Roy. The book is a poignant look at sibling loss and severe bereavement as well as unconventional survival methods. 2112. Wray, T. J. Surviving the Death of a Sibling: Living through Grief When an Adult Brother or Sister Dies. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2003.

32 Thanatology

2113. Borchelt, Peter L. Animal Behavior and Thanatology. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1988. 2114. Cherico, Daniel J., and Otto Schwarz Margolis. Thanatology Course Outlines. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno Press. This book is divided into “General,” “Religion,” and “Philosophy” sections. 2115. Clark, Elizabeth J., and Austin H. Kutscher. The Thanatology Community and the Needs of the Movement. New York: Haworth Press, 1992. 2116. Cohen, Marion Deutsch. Epsilon Country. New York: Center for Thanatology Research and Education, 1995. 2117. Coly, Lisette, and Joanne D. S. McMahon. Parapsychology and Thanatology: Proceedings of an International Conference Held in Boston, Massachusetts, November 6–7, 1993. New York: Parapsychology Foundation, 1995. 2118. DeBellis, Robert. The House Staff and Thanatology. New York: Arno Press, 1982. 2119. DeBellis, Robert, and Jeanne D. Cole. Thanatology CurriculumMedicine. New York: Haworth Press, 1988. 2120. Donne, John. Biathanatos. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1930. 2121. Eckert, William G., and Thomas T. Noguchi, eds. Thanatology. Wichita, KS: International Reference Organization in Forensic Medicine, 1968. 2122. Fleming, Thomas P., ed. Communications and Thanatology. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1974. 285

286

Chapter 32

2123. Fleming, Thomas P., and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Communicating Issues in Thanatology. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976. 2124. Gelfand, Donald E., Richard Raspa, Sherylyn H. Briller, and Stephanie Myers Schim. End-of-Life Stories: Crossing Disciplinary Boundaries. New York: Springer, 2005. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. The authors present a variety of end-of-life experiences with interdisciplinary analyses. From the social sciences to the helping professions to the law, each case is examined from three to four different perspectives, for example, a cultural response, a provider response, a family response, and an economic response. The contributions of “responses” come from members of the Wayne State University End-of-Life Interdisciplinary Project. The responses analyze the end-of-life narrative. Includes biographical information on each of the contributors and editors. 2125. Halporn, Roberta. The Thanatology Librarian. New York: Highly Specialized Promotions, n.d. 2126. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death Is of Vital Importance: On Life, Death, and Life after Death. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill Press, 1995. Compiled and edited by Goran Grip, with photographs by Ken Ross. This book is a compilation of transcripted tape recordings of lectures given by acclaimed psychiatrist and thanatologist Elisabeth Kübler-Ross from 1976 to 1989. The title of the book is taken from her first Stockholm lecture in 1980. Other lectures include “The Cocoon and the Butterfly”; “Life, Death, and Life after Death”; “Healing in Our Time, to Say Yes to It at the Edgar Cayce Foundation”; and “Making the Most of the Inbetween.” Grip is a translator of Kübler-Ross’s books as well as an attending physician at University Hospital in Uppsala, Sweden. 2127. Kutscher, Austin H., Arthur C. Carr, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Principles of Thanatology. New York: Columbia University Press, 1987. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series. The editors present a collection of articles by noted thanatologists, including Therese A. Rando, Stephen V. Gullo, Vanderlyn Pine, Robert G. Stevenson, and Margot Tallmer. Subjects addressed include thanatology education, multidisciplinary approaches in the care of terminally ill patients, death and dying as taboo topics, open communication about death, death without indignity, how healthy life outlooks necessitate comprehending death, grief as a normal response, rights of the bereaved, somatic symptoms of grief, severe reactions to grief and special care, clinical care of dying patients, and the art and science of thanatology. Includes an index and brief information on the contributors. 2128. Lampke, Robert S. Perspectives on the AIDS Crisis: Thanatologic Aspects. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1989.

Thanatology

287

2129. Leenaars, Antoon A. Lives and Deaths: Selections from the Works of Edwin S. Shneidman. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. Leenaars presents a collection of thirty-seven writings by the noted thanatologist and authority on suicide. 2130. Lynn, Margaret Mount, and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Lillian G. Kutscher Thanatology Collection in the Gill Library of the College of New Rochelle. New Rochelle, NY: College of New Rochelle, 1996. 2131. Mercer, John Edward. Why Do We Die?: An Essay in Thanatology. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1919. Originally published by Keegan Paul, London. 2132. Morgan, John D. Readings in Thanatology. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1997. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. Beginning with a chapter on death education in the context of general education, Morgan presents a collection of thirty-five articles on various topics within the interdisciplinary field of thanatology. This book is divided into the sections “North American Death Attitudes,” “The Care of the Terminally Ill,” “Bereavement,” “Children and Death,” “Questions of Values,” and “Suicide.” Subjects treated in the articles include historical and cultural attitudes toward death, dying, and grieving; death in film; death in adult and children’s literature; music and death; patterns of bereavement in Indian and English society; the economics of death; dying in the hospital; AIDS, death, and censorship; family stress during the terminal illness of a loved one; general care of the dying; nursing care of dying patients; social work in palliative care; home care of the dying; rituals and resources for grief management through funerals and funeral directors; disenfranchised grief; counseling techniques for both the dying and the bereaved; complicated bereavement; working with widows in groups; men and grief; adult bereavement following parental death; grief patterns in youth; bereavement among African American children; issues of autonomy among dying patients; assisted suicide; immortality and resurrection; death and dying in major Eastern traditions; suicide in youth and the elderly; and suicide theories. Each article is fully referenced, and Morgan includes professional background information for each contributor following each article. An extensive index is also included. 2133. Morgan, Mary Ann, and John D. Morgan. Thanatology: A Liberal Arts Approach. London, Ontario: King’s College, 1988. 2134. Orcutt, Ben Avis. Social Work and Thanatology. New York: Arno Press, 1980. Published by MSS Information Corp., New York, in 1978. 2135. Park, Roswell. The Evil Eye, Thanatology, and Other Essays. Boston: R. G. Badger, 1912.

288

Chapter 32

2136. Rhodes, Colbert, and Clyde B. Vedder. An Introduction to Thanatology: Death and Dying in American Society. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983. The authors attempt to introduce students and the general reader to the many issues surrounding death and dying and intend to better equip them in coping with bereavement and assisting loved ones in the dying process. Both Rhodes and Vedder are professors of sociology at the University of Texas of the Permian Basin in Odessa. Their text discusses definitions of death, trends in mortality, factors affecting longevity, the importance of death education, perspectives on death from children and young adults, the fear of death, nursing home environments, old women and identity maintenance, hospice, terminal status in facilities for the aged, ministry and death counseling, funerals and other death rituals, bereavement, living wills, suicide, euthanasia, and immortality. Includes an index. 2137. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, Austin H. Kutscher, Lester C. Mark, Robert DeBellis, David Peretz, Irwin Gerber, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Education of the Medical Student in Thanatology. New York: Arno Press, 1981. A volume in the Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on Thanatology. The editors present a significant collection of articles addressing issues of death in medical education. Though many of the pieces are general commentaries on the role, purpose, and importance of death education in medical schools, several explore more narrow subject matter, for example, confronting death in gross anatomy labs, communicating with the dying, students’ views on grieving, sensitization, and literary and sociological approaches to death education. Includes a list of contributors with academic affiliations. 2138. Torpie, Richard J., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Radiation Therapy and Thanatology. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. 2139. Toynbee, Arnold. Man’s Concern with Death. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1968. A classic of thanatology, this work reviews philosophical, medical, and religious concepts of death and includes chapters by Simon Yudkin, Keith Mant, Ninian Smart, and Eric Rhode. 2140. Wolf, Stewart G. The Community Hospital and Its Expanding Role in Thanatology. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1985.

33 Widowhood

2141. Ames, Edward M., and Diane Robertson. A Handbook for Widowers. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 2004. Photographs by Diane Robertson. In this 48-page paperback filled with practical advice, Ames relays many of the common experiences widowers face. He covers loneliness, depression, isolation, guilt, taking care of oneself, employment and financial matters, living alone, parenthood as a widower, rediscovering purpose in life, and moving beyond grief. Includes a brief list of supportive resources. 2142. Anthony, Nancy. Mourning Thoughts: Facing a New Day after the Death of a Spouse. Mystic, CT: Twenty-Third Publications, 1991. 2143. Armstrong, Alexandra, and Mary R. Donahue. On Your Own: A Widow’s Passage to Emotional and Financial Well-Being. 3rd ed. Chicago: Dearborn, 2000. 2144. Auchard, Betty. Dancing in My Nightgown: The Rhythms of Widowhood. Las Vegas, NV: Stephens Press, 2005. This book is a touching and bittersweet collection of stories documenting Auchard’s path through bereavement. Through her wonderful storytelling skills, she relays her experiences following the death of her husband of forty-nine years. 2145. Bowling, Ann, and Ann Cartwright. Life after Death: A Study of the Elderly Widowed. New York: Tavistock, 1982. 2146. Brothers, Joyce. Widowed. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1990. Having provided advice on innumerable topics for many years, here Brothers relays her feelings of deep loss and even suicidal thoughts following the death

289

290

Chapter 33

of her husband to cancer after thirty-nine years of marriage. The book is both a self-help guide and memoir. 2147. Caine, Lynn. Being a Widow. New York: Arbor House/William Morrow, 1988. An Eleanor Friede book. Having learned the lesson that she should have been more realistic and less heroic during her husband’s fourteen-month terminal illness, Caine writes about her experiences both before and after his death. She writes that she and her husband “playacted, assuming roles we considered admirable and playing to the hilt the gallant young couple facing death with courage, honesty, and grace under pressure.” She discusses such practical issues as insurance and finances. Chapters also explore disorientation and denial, the need to express emotion, help from dreams, sleeping and eating disorders, rebuilding self-confidence, being assertive, creating a new social life, dating and sexuality, and the impact of death. She includes several resources that offer help as well as narrative about each relating personal experiences to the various situations. A section for those in the helping professions is also included. An epilogue written by Caine notes that she was diagnosed with breast cancer in 1983, and a note follows informing that she died of cancer in 1987. Includes a list of organizations, a short list of titles for recommended reading, and an index. 2148. ———. Lifelines. New York: Doubleday, 1977. Author of the bestselling book Widow, Caine addresses the lonely and isolated woman. While there is much in this book unrelated to death and dying, she does offer valuable and insightful commentary on loss that may be pertinent to recovery from bereavement in widowhood. 2149. ———. Widow. New York: Bantam Books, 1975. Published by William Morrow, New York, in 1974. 2150. Campbell, Scott, and Phyllis Rolfe Silverman. Widower. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1987. Published by Baywood Publishing, Amityville, NY, in 1996, as Widower: When Men Are Left Alone, as part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor. Through sixteen touching, emotional, and sometimes shocking stories of widowers in their own voice, Campbell and Silverman illustrate the many ways in which widowers grieve. They also provide a brief list of self-help organizations and suggested reading. 2151. Carr, Deborah, Randolph M. Nesse, and Camille B. Wortman, eds. Spousal Bereavement in Late Life. New York: Springer, 2006. Based on a conference held in June 2002, at the University of Michigan, this book also highlights the findings of the Changing Lives of Older Couples (CLOC) study funded by the National Institute on Aging. Articles explore methodological issues in studying late life widowhood, the “black box” of widowhood, how older Americans die today in comparison with those living in previous decades,

Widowhood

291

the psychological consequences of spousal loss, the change in health behaviors following spousal loss, interpersonal and spiritual connections among bereaved older adults, the economic and practical adjustments to late life spousal loss, changing demographic and economic contexts, implications of the changing environment on education and training, and clinical interventions for the bereaved. A section on new perspectives on grief and bereavement includes an article by Robert A. Neimeyer entitled “Widowhood, Grief, and the Quest for Meaning: A Narrative Perspective on Resilience.” A history of the CLOC study and a primary data analysis are also presented. Includes references, twenty-six illustrations and tables, and a thorough index. Foreword by Margaret S. Stroebe. 2152. Chambers, Pat. Older Widows and the Lifecourse: Multiple Narratives of Hidden Lives. Burlington, VT: Ashgate Publishing Co., 2005. 2153. Chapin, Bruce. The Hardest Challenge: Surviving the Death of a Spouse. New York: Teachers Insurance and Annuity Association, College Retirement Equities Fund, 1990. 2154. Colgrove, Melba, Harold H. Bloomfield, and Peter McWilliams. How to Survive the Loss of a Love: Fifty-Eight Things to Do When There Is Nothing to Be Done. New York: Bantam Books, 1983. Originally published in 1976. Published by Mary Book/Prelude Press, Los Angeles, in 1993. Designed to directly respond to the reader’s stage of loss, this book offers concise, practical suggestions for surviving loss, healing from grief, and growing beyond bereavement. The authors validate feelings, offer encouraging and reaffirming thoughts, and incorporate poetry that accompanies each step or suggestion. 2155. Convissor, Kate. Young Widow: Learning to Live Again. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1992. 2156. Curry, Cathleen L. When Your Spouse Dies: A Concise and Practical Source of Help and Advice. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1990. 2157. Daniels, Alice Grossman. After the Flowers: Life beyond Widowhood. Santa Barbara, CA: Fithian Press, 1996. 2158. DiGiulio, Robert C. Beyond Widowhood: From Bereavement to Emergence and Hope. New York: Free Press, 1989. Focusing on the different stages of widowhood, DiGiulio discusses the images and reality of the widowed in the United States, bereavement, feelings of loss, growing through and beyond widowhood, support groups, and the obstacles and satisfactions of remarriage. DiGiulio is a widower himself, and he incorporates his own experiences into the text. He also includes words of such famous widows as Jihan Sadat, Coretta Scott King, and Corazon Aquino. Includes an extensive list of sources of organized support in the United States and Canada.

292

Chapter 33

2159. Feinberg, Linda Sones. I’m Grieving as Fast as I Can: How Young Widows and Widowers Can Cope and Heal. Far Hills, NJ: New Horizon Press, 1994. Founder of the first nonprofit organization for young widowed people, Feinberg offers twenty-seven chapters that explore the many feelings encountered following the death of a spouse, including guilt and anger. Chapters also explore the issues of visits to the cemetery; difficult times and holidays; wearing rings; dealing with possessions; returning to work; matters of how the person died; support groups; and socializing, dating, and sex. 2160. Felber, Marta. Finding Your Way after Your Spouse Dies. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 2000. Felber presents a step-by-step (sixty-four total steps) guide to recovery for widows and widowers written from a Christian perspective. She includes prayers and scripture suggestions for each step. Page 136 offers a handwritten note from Felber to the grieving reader. The book concludes with an annotated bibliography of books and periodicals, a list of mail-order sources for books and other grief materials, and a list of organizations with a paragraph about each and how they might help widows. 2161.

Garrison, Gene K. Widowhood Happens. Philadelphia: Xlibris, 2002.

2162. Ginsburg, Genevieve Davis. Widow: Rebuilding Your Life. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1995. Originally published in 1987. Revised edition published as Widow To Widow: Thoughtful, Practical Ideas for Rebuilding Your Life, by De Capo Press, in 2004. 2163. Gordon, Beverly S. The First Year Alone. Dublin, NH: William L. Bauhan, 1986. In her foreword, Elizabeth Yates notes that when the author’s husband, Tom Gordon, died suddenly of a heart attack, all who knew them asked, “What will Beverly do?” Yates says, “This is her answer.” Gordon writes that this book is “not only for women who have lost their husbands, but for families and friends who are seeking a better understanding of the grieving process that is unique to widowhood.” 2164. Greene, Phyllis. It Must Have Been Moonglow: Reflections on the First Years of Widowhood. New York: Villard, 2001. Reprinted in 2003. 2165. Harvey, Carol D. H., and Howard M. Bahr. The Sunshine Widows: Adapting to Sudden Bereavement. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1980. Both professors of sociology, the authors explore a multitude of emotions, experiences, personal stories, and social tensions in this academic study of sudden widowhood. This book features thirty-six charts and tables representing surveys and research on various aspects of widowhood. Among them are family income, phone calls and personal visits, volunteering, church activity and salience of

Widowhood

293

religion, life satisfaction, self-esteem, and loneliness. Includes references and an index. 2166. Heinlein, Susan, and Grace Brumett. When a Lifemate Dies: Stories of Love, Loss, and Healing. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 1997. 2167.

Hosansky, Anne. Widow’s Walk. New York: D. I. Fine, 1993.

2168. Hyman, Herbert Hiram. Of Time and Widowhood: Nationwide Studies of Enduring Effects. Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1983. Part of the Duke Press Policy Studies. Hyman, a professor of sociology, reports on research funded by the National Institute of Mental Health in this 118-page book. It is an analysis of the effects of widowhood according to such factors as income, number of children, race, age, recency of death, and others. Includes twelve tables, several surveys, a bibliography, and an index. 2169.

Jebb, Philip. Widowed. Still River, MA: St. Bede’s Publications, 1984.

2170. Jones, Jane Griz. From Grief to Gladness: Coming Back from Widowhood. Baltimore, MD: Recovery Communications, 1999. Jones provides suggestions for both men and women on grief recovery. 2171. Karo, Nancy, and Alvera Michelson. Adventure in Dying. Chicago: Moody Press, 1976. Karo emotionally recalls the last months of her husband Lindon’s life, focusing on the quality of living rather than how death arrives. Written from a Christian perspective, the text includes prayers, homilies, stories, and poems. Begins with the Apostles’ Creed. 2172. Kohn, Jane Burgess, and Willard K. Kohn. The Widower. Boston: Beacon Press, 1978. Among the many books on thanatological subjects published in the 1970s, this is the first work devoted to the unique grief of widowers. Based on Willard K. Kohn’s experiences with his first wife’s terminal illness and his feelings of loneliness and guilt following her death, this book is both an emotional story and a professional perspective on Kohn’s experience by his second wife, professor of sociology at the University of Wisconsin, who is herself a widow. They met at a meeting of widows and widowers where she was speaking professionally. The text examines the psychological, sociological, and physiological implications of widowhood. 2173. Kramer, Rita Wendy. Widowhood Isn’t for Wimps: Meditations for Women in the First Three Months of Widowhood by Someone Who’s Been There. Preston, MN: Heirloom Press, 2004. 2174. 1957.

Langer, Marion. Learning to Live as a Widow. New York: J. Messner,

294

Chapter 33

2175. Lenhart, Gloria. Planet Widow: A Mother’s Story of Navigating a Suddenly Unrecognizable World. Emeryville, CA: Seal Press, 2006. A widow at the age of forty-two with two young children, Lenhart describes the practical and emotional struggles of widowhood. She is extremely frank and relays stark but humorous anecdotes about her experiences being inspired by Jacqueline Kennedy Onassis, looking for a psychic, and following someone she believes to be her deceased husband. Her mantra becomes “What would Jackie do?” In addition to documenting her difficult struggle, Lenhart offers insights into dealing with legal, financial, and other important everyday issues for widows. Includes a resource guide and information about the author. 2176. Levinson, Deborah. Surviving the Death of Your Spouse: A Step-by-Step Workbook. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2004. 2177. Lieberman, Morton A. Doors Close, Doors Open: Widows, Grieving, and Growing. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1996. 2178. Lindsay, R. Alone and Surviving: A Guide for Today’s Widow. New York: Walker Publishing, 1977. 2179. Loewinsohn, R. Survival Handbook for Widows (and for Relatives and Friends Who Want to Understand). Washington, DC/ Glenview, IL: AARP/ Scott, Foresman and Company, 1984. 2180. Lopata, Helena Z. Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1996. Part of the Understanding Families series, Bert M. Adams and David M. Klein, editors. Lopata’s emphasis is on the differences between widowhood today and what being a widow meant in the past, both in the United States and elsewhere. A leading researcher on widowhood, she examines widowhood in both diverse and homogeneous communities, factors affecting caregiving stress, the pervasive identity of widowhood, the role of the widow, loneliness and other emotions, risk factors in bereavement, roles of relatives, friendship and romantic relationships, and community and societal responses to widowhood. Annette Prosterman, a doctoral student at Loyola University in Chicago, authored the chapter on community and societal responses to widowhood. Includes references, an index, and information about the author. 2181. ———. Widowhood in an American City. Morristown, NJ: General Learning Corp., 1972. Also published by Schenkman, Cambridge, MA, in 1971. 2182. ———. Women as Widows: Support Systems. New York: Elsevier North Holland, 1979. 2183. Lund, Dale A., ed. Older Bereaved Spouses: Research with Practical Applications. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1989. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.

Widowhood

295

2184. Marris, P. Widows and Their Families. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1968. Originally published in 1958. 2185. Matthews, Anne Martin. Widowhood in Later Life. Toronto, Ontario: Butterworths, 1991. Part of the Perspectives on Individual and Population Aging series, Barry McPherson, editor. Matthews is director of the Gerontology Research Centre and a professor in the Department of Family Studies at the University of Guelph in Ontario. An indepth exploration of the literature on widowhood in Canada, the text discusses the topic amidst frequent comparisons with United States and international approaches to death and widowhood. She highlights distinctions between widowed people with and without children and those who live in rural and urban areas. Includes an index and a lengthy bibliography. 2186. McNally, Shirley Reeser, Barbara Harrison Mulhern, and Mary Witt Wydman. When Husbands Die: Women Share Their Stories. Santa Fe, NM: Sunstone Press, 2005. 2187. Moore, Alinde J., and Dorothy C. Stratton. Resilient Widowers: Older Men Speak for Themselves. New York: Springer, 2002. Part of the Springer Series: Focus on Men. Published by Prometheus Books, Amherst, NY, in 2003. Noting that most widowhood studies focus on older women, the authors emphasize the importance of research on widowers. This text brings forth the stories and experiences of fifty-one widowers, each with a unique message. Moore and Stratton do not attempt to create statistics from the stories or categories of widowers because of this uniqueness. They indicate in their preface that their purpose is to set the widowhood experience within the context of the life experience for the purpose of contributing to the knowledge base about widowhood and older men, informing professionals who work with older men to improve services and encourage researchers to explore the lives of older widowed men. Topics explored include resilience in widowers, models of resilience, caregiving and communication, saying goodbye, grief and adjustment, living alone, remarriage, adult children and social support, and cohorts and the future. Appendixes include the methodology and interview topics of the research as well as characteristics of the respondents. Characteristics include year born, religious affiliation, highest educational achievement, occupation, marital status at interview or follow-up, and number of children reared. Includes a subject index and an index of authors referenced in the text. 2188. Murphy, Sylvia. Surviving Your Partner: How to Live with the Death of the Person Closest to You. Oxford, England: How To Books, 1998. 2189. 2003.

Nowak, Pat. The ABCs of Widowhood. Bloomington, IN: 1stBooks,

296

Chapter 33

Nowak describes the challenges of the unknown world of widowhood following the death of her husband after a five-year nonlife-threatening illness exacerbated by alcoholism. Each step and experience is relayed in great detail. 2190. Owen, Margaret. A World of Widows. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Zed Books, 1996. 2191. Peterson, James A., and Michael P. Briley. Widows and Widowhood: A Creative Approach to Being Alone. New York: Association Press, 1977. 2192. Phipps, Joyce. Death’s Single Privacy: Grieving and Personal Growth. New York: Seabury Press, 1974. This book is a personal and poignant story about Phipps’s husband’s death at an early age from a heart attack. She conveys a gentle strength and quiet pride about her ability to deal effectively with the circumstances and her grief. Phipps provides indirect advice and counseling on widowhood. She also provides guidance for speaking to children about the death of a parent. 2193. Presnell, Romaine. Taking the Trip: A Journey through Widowhood. Omaha, NE: Centering Corp., 1997. 2194. 1990.

Rice, Rebecca. A Time to Mourn. New York: New American Library,

2195. Roberts, Barbara K. Death without Denial, Grief without Apology: A Guide for Facing Death and Loss. Troutdale, OR: NewSage Press, 2002. Roberts, former Governor of Oregon (1991–1995), lost her husband, Frank Roberts, former state senator, to lung cancer in 1993. This work is her account of the year prior to his death and her subsequent years of grieving. It serves as a practical guide that examines both the personal and societal aspects of death and bereavement. Chapters include “Facing Death: The Misery and the Moment,” “Saying Goodbye,” “Permission to Be Weird,” “Grieving into Healing,” and “The Long, Slow Climb Back.” Includes a short list of resources for those grieving. Roberts later became professor and associate director of Leadership Development at Portland State University. She is now an active public speaker on death and dying. 2196.

Schoen, Elin. Widower. New York: Morrow, 1984.

2197.

Seskin, Jane. Young Widow. New York: Ace Books, 1975.

2198. Shuchter, Stephen R. Dimensions of Grief: Adjusting to the Death of a Spouse. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1986. Part of the Jossey-Bass Social and Behavioral Science Series. Shuchter, associate clinical professor of psychiatry and director of the Gifford Mental Health Clinic at the University of California, San Diego, explores the differences between normal and unhealthy grief following the death of a spouse. He

Widowhood

297

also discusses the different ways of grieving using real life stories from fifty-five widows and twenty-five widowers. Shuchter also examines the effectiveness of support groups, medical treatment, and family therapy in assisting the bereavement process. Other topics include understanding the experience of bereavement, emotional and mental responses to the death of a spouse, how bereaved people cope with emotional pain, continuing ties to the deceased, relationship changes with friends and family, and the effects of bereavement on health and work life. The author is also associated with the San Diego Widowhood Project. An appendix describes the bereavement study. Also includes a brief bibliography divided by subject. 2199. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Widow-to-Widow: How the Bereaved Help One Another. New York: Springer, 1986. Second edition published by BrunnerRoutledge, New York, in 2004. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor. The first edition of this book was a report on the Widow-to-Widow Program, which demonstrated how someone who had been widowed for some time could be helpful to the newly widowed. Silverman, an internationally recognized authority on widowhood and grieving children, notes in the preface to her second edition that by 2004, widows seeking other widows out for support had become commonplace. The text explores these relationships and their value. Topics covered include gender differences, grief as both a normal life event and an illness, detachment, building a new life, uncertainty, differences between expected and unanticipated deaths, when the silence of the grave becomes real, confronting family issues, widowhood as a new status, continuing bonds with the deceased, widowhood with dependent children, childhood bereavement in this context, reality versus disbelief, theoretical perspectives on grief and mourning, and the role of adult children with the older widowed. Appendixes include a summary of the research findings and resources with descriptions for the widowed (mostly organizations). Includes references and an index. 2200. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe, Dorothy Mackenzie, Mary Pettipas, and Elizabeth Wilson, eds. Helping Each Other in Widowhood. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp, 1974. 2201. Start, Clarissa. On Becoming a Widow. New York: Family Library, 1968. Also published by Pyramid Publications for Concordia Publishing, St. Louis, in 1973. Start, a veteran journalist, describes her experiences of widowhood from a Christian perspective. She writes about her husband’s sudden death, how she reacted to it in the days and months thereafter, and how she began to reshape her life. She notes that, “You can surmount your grief. . . . You will eventually even sense a certain pity for those whose lives have not been touched by grief, for they have not lived life to the fullest.”

298

Chapter 33

2202. Stroebe, Wolfgang, and Margaret S. Stroebe. Bereavement and Health: The Psychological and Physical Consequences of Partner Loss. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1987. The Stroebes examine the physical effects of conjugal loss. Promotional narrative for the book appropriately muses on whether the popular notion of a “broken heart” may have some grounding in reality. The text explores ways in which bereavement affects the body in ways that can actually necessitate medical care and possibly be life-threatening. The authors analyze stress and depression models of bereavement and offer their own approach, emphasizing the interpersonal nature of grief. They discuss cultural variations in emotional reactions to loss, absence of grief, mediators between stress and illness, risk factors in bereavement outcomes, and reducing the risk of poor bereavement outcomes. Holmes and Rahe’s social readjustment rating scale for forty-three life events is included and discussed. Includes an extensive list of references as well as author and subject indexes. 2203. Strugnell, Cecile. Adjustment to Widowhood and Some Related Problems: A Selective and Annotated Bibliography. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1974. Strugnell’s book is intended to provide a background for research done in the Widow-to-Widow Program directed by Phyllis Rolfe Silverman at Harvard Medical School’s Laboratory of Community Psychiatry. The annotated bibliography, which constitutes most of the book’s text, is divided into the following sections: “Concerning Bereavement,” “Problems Related to Widowhood,” “Helping Relationships,” and “Related Bibliographies.” Titles include monographs and journal articles. Many of the titles do not relate well to widowhood. 2204. Van den Hoonaard, Deborah K. The Widowed Self: The Older Woman’s Journey through Widowhood. Waterloo, ON: Wilfrid Laurier University Press, 2001. 2205. Whipple, Vicky. Lesbian Widows: Invisible Grief. New York: Harrington Park Press, 2006. Through the personal stories of twenty-five women, including her own, Whipple discusses grief among lesbians and related issues of discrimination in the legal, financial, and social arenas. An associate professor of counseling at National-Louis University, Whipple offers advice for coping and recovering. Topics covered include shock and denial; terminal illness and disbelief; longterm illness; caretaking; parting moments; funerals and memorial services; grief work; disenfranchised grief; learning to love again; long-term grief following a death; relationships with friends and family; and information for professionals on counseling lesbians, the lesbian community, and grief models. The women in Whipple’s study all suffered the death of their life partner at a young age. Their stories are principally from their first two years of widowhood. Appendixes include a list of resources recommended by the widows in the book and brief

Widowhood

299

biographical information on the widows and their life partners. Also includes a brief bibliography. 2206. Williams, Marna B. Living through the Death of a Spouse: Leader’s Guide. Nashville, TN: Graded Press, 1987. 2207. Wylie, Betty Jane. Beginnings: A Book for Widows. Toronto, Ontario: McClelland & Stewart, 1977. 2208. Yates, Martha. Coping: A Survival Manual for Women Alone. New York: Spectrum/Prentice-Hall, 1976. 2209. Zonnebelt-Smeenge, Susan J., and Robert C. DeVries. Getting to the Other Side of Grief: Overcoming the Loss of a Spouse. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Book House, 1998.

Name Index

Aaker, David A., 1873 Abbott, John W., 1487 Abel-Smith, Brian, 1488 Abrams, Michael, 667 Abrams, Rebecca, 1801 Acri, Albert Jay, 123 Adams, Christine A., 1095 Adams, David W., 69, 565 Adams, J. Robert., 1598 Adams, Jay Edward, 819 Adler, Charles S., 1096 Adlerstein, Arthur M., 61 Agee, James, 928 Ahmedzai, Sam, 1751 Aid Association for Lutherans, 1620 Aiken, Lewis R., 929 Ainley, Rosa, 1802 Ainsworth-Smith, Ian, 306 Aisenberg, Ruth, 80, 1023 Ajemian, Ina, 1742 Ajjan, Diana, 1803 Akhtar, Salman, 1653 Akins, Dianna L., 120 Akins, Faren R., 120 Akner, Lois F., 1804 Albery, Nicholas, 2059 Alden, Henry M., 704, 930 Alderman, Linda, 135 Aldiss, Brian Wilson, 626

Aldiss, Margaret, 626 Aldrich, Sandra Picklesimer, 1097 Aldridge, David, 1743 Alexander, Helen Mae, 1098 Allen, Charles Livingstone, 1099 Allen, Janet, 1 Alles, Wesley, 497 Almeder, Robert F., 864 Alpert, Richard, 434 Alters, Sandra, 842 Altschul, Sol, 136 Amenta, Madalon O’Rawe, 1489, 1522 American Association of Retired Persons, 1844 American Nurses Association, 1719 Ames, Edward M., 2141 Anders, Rebecca, 986 Anderson, Colena M., 1100 Anderson, Herbert, 1872 Anderson, J. Kerby, 1695 Anderson, John L., 643 Anderson, Jon, 307 Anderson, Megory, 2060 Anderson, Patricia, 62, 1621 Anderson, Ray S., 1845 Andre, Dena, 1524 Andreae, Christine, 1490 Andrews, Maureen Lyons, 1108 Angel, Marc D., 32, 1805 301

302 Annis, J. W., 2039 Anspaugh, D. J., 981 Anthony, E. James, 544 Anthony, Nancy, 2142 Anthony, Sylvia, 137 Appel, Gerald B., 692 Appleton, Michael, 1491, 1492 Arcangel, Dianne, 1301 Archer, John, 1101 Arendzen, John Peter, 820 Argondizzo, Nina T., 1722 Aries, Philippe, 1102, 1103, 1679 Arkin, Arthur, 1179 Armstrong, Alexandra, 2143 Armstrong, H. G., 627 Armstrong, Harry G., 63 Armstrong, O. V., 1104 Armstrong-Dailey, Ann, 1493 Arnold, Joan Hagan, 545 Arnold, Johann Christoph, 912 Arnold, Ken, 1972 Arnstein, Helene S., 266 Arvio, Raymond Paavo, 628 Ascher, Barbara Lazear, 1105 Ashenburg, Katherine, 390 Ashton, Dennis, 546 Ashton, Joyce, 546 Asquith, Glenn H., 1846 Attig, Thomas, 1106, 1107 Atwater, P. M. H., 1696 Auchard, Betty, 2144 Austin, Mary, 629 Autton, Norman, 1847 Auz, Martin M., 1108 Avery, Gillian, 547 Bachmann, Charles C., 1848 Backer, Barbara A., 630, 631, 931 Bahr, Howard M., 2165 Bailey, Lloyd R., 391 Bailey, Richard M., 1849 Bailey, Robert W., 1850 Baines, Mary, 779, 1790 Baird, Robert M., 308, 843 Baisch, Mary Jo, 1370 Baker, Veronica E., 1731 Balk, David E., 4

Name Index Ball, Mog, 2061 Ballard, James O., 697 Bane, J. Donald, 1851 Barahal, Hyman S., 918 Barber, Erika R., 2099 Barbera, Thomas, 1937 Bardis, Panos Demetrios, 1448 Barkin, Carol, 600 Barley, Nigel, 1449 Barlow, Brent, 392 Barnard, Christiaan, 309 Barnard, David, 1744 Barnard, Paul, 138 Barnett, Geraldine E., 483 Barry, Vincent E., 1912 Bartlow, Bruce G., 310 Bartocci, Barbara, 1806 Barton, David, 311 Bascue, Loy O., 1974 Basta, Lofty L., 632 Bataille, Georges, 1680 Battin, Delia, 1179 Battin, Margaret Pabst, 844, 845, 1786 Bauman, Harold, 1109 Bauman, Zygmunt, 1599 Baxter, Grant, 2 Bayles, Michael D., 846 Bayless, Raymond, 1697 Bayly, Joseph, 1698 Beaton, Janet I., 1992 Beauchamp, Tom L., 847 Becker, Ernest, 913 Becker, Marilyn R., 1807 Beckman, Gunnel, 312 Becvar, Dorothy Stroh, 1975 Bedard, Kathryn, 1110 Beder, Joan, 1976 Behrman, Richard E., 572 Bencala, Rose, 1494 Bender, David L., 848 Bendiksen, Robert A., 1141 Benham, F. Lucas, 941 Bennett, Roger V., 484 Benoliel, Jeanne Quint, 33, 1977 Benson, Hazel B., 106 Berardo, Felix M., 808 Berdes, Celia M., 1978

Name Index Beresford, Larry, 1495 Berg, David W., 485, 486, 487, 1913 Berg, Julie, 548 Berger, Arthur, 393 Berger, Arthur S., 849, 914, 1622 Berger, Joyce, 914 Bergersen, Betty S., 633 Berkan, William A., 564 Berkus, Rusty, 1111 Berlinsky, Ellen B., 1808 Bermann, Eric, 915 Bernard, Hugh Y., 1623 Bernard, Jan Selliken, 1496 Bernstein, Joanne E., 107, 139, 140, 228, 1112 Bernstein, Judith R., 549 Berridge, Kate, 1681 Berrigan, Daniel, 267 Berry, Joy Wilt, 141, 142 Berry, Patricia H., 2014 Berry, Rebecca L., 763 Bertman, Sandra L., 932, 1113 Bertoia, Judi, 550 Berzoff, Joan, 1979 Better Business Bureau, 268 Bigelow, John, 704 Biller, Henry B., 1808 Billops, Camille, 476 Birtchnell, John, 1809 Blackwell, Roger D., 933 Blackwood, Andrew W., 1852 Blair, Cornelia, 872 Blair, Pamela D., 1312 Blanchette, Patricia L., 394 Bland, Olivia, 934 Blank, Jeanne Webster, 1114 Blauner, Bob, 1810 Bleckman, Isaac A., 935 Bleeker, Sonia, 31 Bloch, Maurice, 936 Bloch, Sidney, 1226 Bloom, Shalom, 937 Bloom-Feshbach, Jonathan, 1654 Bloom-Feshbach, Sally, 1654 Bloomfield, Harold H., 2154 Blowers, Margaret Robin, 488 Bluebond-Langner, Myra, 551, 2100

Blues, Ann G., 1745 Boase, Thomas Sherrer Ross, 1450 Boba, Antonio, 1980 Bode, Janet, 3 Boerstler, Richard W., 634 Boisvert, Marcel, 1778 Bolen, Jean Shinoda, 1914 Bondeson, Jan, 916 Borchelt, Peter L., 2113 Bordow, Joan, 552 Boritzer, Etan, 143 Boros, Ladislaus, 938 Boss, Pauline, 1115 Boston, Patricia, 1744 Botsford, Anne L., 34 Botsford, Force Lawrence T., 34 Bouvard, Marguerite Guzman, 1116 Bowers, Margaretta K., 1981 Bowlby, John, 1117 Bowling, Ann, 2145 Bowman, George W., 1853 Boyd, Pamela, 1527 Boyle, Joan M., 35 Bozarth, Alla Renee, 1118, 1119 Brabant, Sarah, 1120 Bradbury, Mary, 64 Bradley, Buff, 939 Branch, Roger G., 1881 Brandon, S. G. F., 1854 Brandon, Samuel G., 821 Brandt, Raymond William, 2101 Brant, Patricia, 148 Bratman, Fred, 1811 Brauer, Paul H., 635 Braun, Kathryn L., 394 Breaux, John, 1157 Breebaart, Joeri, 553 Breebaart, Piet, 553 Bregman, Lucy, 395, 636, 940 Bremer, J. M., 1451 Brener, Anne, 396 Brewer, Ruth M., 530 Brice, Carleen, 397 Bride, Brian E., 1168 Bright, Ruth, 1121 Briley, Michael P., 2191 Briller, Sherylyn H., 2124

303

304

Name Index

Brim, Orville G., Jr., 1982, 1983 Brinkman, June M., 489 Brock, Dan W., 1915 Brodie, Howard, 850 Brody, Claire M., 2048 Brohl, Noreen O’Brien, 573 Brokhoff, John R., 1122 Brooke, Jill, 1123 Brooke, Tal, 1916 Brookman, Philip, 1524 Brooks, Anne M., 1124 Brooks, Jane, 1812 Brookside, Lynn, 1295 Brothers, Joyce, 2146 Brouardel, Paul, 941 Brown, Erica, 1125 Brown, Judy, 851 Brown, Norman O., 313 Brown, Reg, 1126 Browning, Mary H., 1720 Bruce, Elizabeth J., 1127 Bruce, Hank, 637 Bruce, James W., 554 Bruera, Eduardo, 1746 Brumett, Grace, 2166 Bruno, Susan, 777 Bryant, Clifton D., 942, 1682 Bryant-Mole, Karen, 269 Buckingham, Robert W., 555, 1128, 1497, 1498, 1499, 1547 Buckman, Robert, 270 Budge, E. A. Wallis, 2062 Bugen, Larry A., 943 Bulkeley, Kelly, 1699 Bulkeley, Patricia, 1699 Bulkin, Wilma, 1984 Bultmann, Rudolph, 944 Burke, Dianne O’Quinn, 216 Burland, C. A., 945 Burnell, Adrienne L., 1985 Burnell, George M., 638, 1985 Burstein, Andrew, 1468 Burton, Lindy, 556 Buschman, Penelope, 619 Butler, Shari, 1813 Buttery, Thomas J., 500 Byock, Ira, 639, 794

Cable, Dana G., 490 Caine, Lynn, 2147, 2148, 2149 Cairnes, Moira, 1747 Calder, Bobby J., 88 Calhan, Kenneth, 1759 Calhoun, Lawrence G., 2047 Calhoun, Nancy, 247 Callahan, Daniel, 65 Callanan, Maggie, 27 Callari, Elizabeth S., 314 Callis, Stephen, 1387 Camp, Marcia, 1624 Campbell, Karen, 640 Campbell, Scott, 2150 Campling, Jo, 1791 Canfield, Jack, 1129 Canine, John D., 1655 Cantor, Norman L., 1625 Caplan, Sandi, 1130 Capron, Alexander Morgan, 867, 1633 Carey, Deborah Allen, 1501 Carey, Gabrielle, 946 Cargas, Harry J., 315 Carlozzi, Carl G., 641 Carlson, Lisa, 316 Carmody, John, 272 Carmody, John Tully, 642 Carpenter, Edward, 317 Carr, Arthur C., 1131, 1366, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 2016, 2017, 2041, 2127, 2137 Carr, Deborah, 2151 Carr, Thomas K., 947 Carrington, Hereward, 917, 1600 Carroll, David, 318 Carroll, James D., 2045 Carse, J. P., 1937 Carse, James P., 491 Carter, James, 398 Carter, Nick, 319 Carter, Steven, 320 Carter, Yvonne, 1761 Cartwright, Ann, 643, 2145 Cassel, Christine K., 1763 Cassell, Dana K., 948 Castles, Mary Reardon, 644 Caughill, Rita E., 645

Name Index Central Service for the Chronically Ill, 1748 Chambers, Pat, 2152 Chambers, Ross, 646 Champagne, Marian, 1132 Chaney, Earlyne, 647 Chaney, Patricia S., 949 Chapin, Bruce, 2153 Charles-Edwards, Allison, 1721 Charmaz, Kathy, 399 Chase, Deborah, 1502 Chatman, Delle, 1814 Chen, Clarence Lee, 400 Chen, Pauline, 1749 Cherico, Daniel J., 118, 119, 456, 1269, 1271, 1874, 2084, 2114 Cherry, Frank, 1215 Chidester, David, 950 Childs-Gowell, Elaine, 2063 Chirban, John T., 1986 Chord, Melody, 213 Choron, Jacques, 951, 952, 1917 Christ, Grace Hyslop, 144 Chung, Sue Fawn, 401 Churchill, Dorothy, 1133 Church of England, Board for Social Responsibility, 402 Churn, Arlene H., 403 Cicirelli, Victor G., 36 Cinnamon, Kenneth M., 1377 Clark, David, 292, 953, 1503, 1578, 1750, 1751, 1762, 1769 Clark, Elizabeth J., 2115 Claspell, Emily, 1135 Cleiren, Marc, 1134 Clemens, Christopher, 954 Cline, Sally, 492 Cobb, Mark, 1752, 1855 Cobb, Nancy, 273 Coberly, Margaret, 1753 Cochran, Larry, 1135 Cohen, Audrey, 600 Cohen, Cynthia B., 1754 Cohen, Kenneth P., 1504 Cohen, Marion Deutsch, 2116 Cole, Jeanne D., 2119 Colgrove, Melba, 2154

305

Collett, Merrill, 1505 Colletti, Lorenza, 600 Collick, Elizabeth, 1136 Collins, Vincent J., 1137 Colman, Hila, 648 Colman, Penny, 1452 Coloroso, Barbara, 145 Colwell, Jim, 507 Coly, Lisette, 2117 Comper, Frances M. M., 1453 Congdon, Howard, 1856 Conley, Herbert N., 649 Connelly, Robert Joseph, 1626 Connor, Stephen R., 1506 Conrad, Bonnie Hunt, 557 Convissor, Kate, 2155 Cook, Alicia Skinner, 1656 Cook, Judith A., 558 Cook, Mary Lou, 1173 Cook, Sarah Sheets, 559 Cooke, Hannah, 650 Cooper, Alan, 2046 Cooper, Sharon, 1714 Cooper-Lewter, Nicholas C., 404 Cope, Gilbert, 955 Copperman, Harriet, 651 Corless, Inge B., 956, 957, 958, 1507 Corner, Jessica, 1762 Cornils, Stanley P., 1138, 1139 Corr, Charles A., 4, 5, 146, 253, 254, 493, 539, 560, 959, 960, 1508 Corr, Donna M., 146, 560, 960, 1508 Coryell, Deborah Morris, 1140 Couldrick, Ann, 2025 Coulter, David L., 38 Counts, David R., 405 Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 405 Coute, Lucille, 274 Cox, Gerry R., 961, 1141, 1857 Crane, Diana, 1987 Crenshaw, David A., 1142 Crichton, Ian, 652 Crider, Tom, 561 Crissman, James K., 406 Croskery, Beverly F., 494 Cundiff, David E., 1509 Curl, James Stevens, 66, 1454

306

Name Index

Curley, Terence P., 1143 Curnen, Mary G. McCrea, 472 Curry, Cathleen L., 1815, 2156 Curtis, J. Randall, 1988 Cutler, Donald R., 852 Cutler, William, 1144 Cutter, Fred, 321 Daher, Douglas, 562 Dalai Lama XIV, 643 Dallery, Arlene B., 491 Dane, Barbara O., 1145, 1146 Daniels, Alice Grossman, 2157 Danto, Bruce L., 1147 D’Arcy, Martin Cyril, 962 Dastre, Albert, 963 Daugherty, George G., 485, 486, 487, 1913 Davenport, Donna S., 1816 Davey, Richard, 1455 Davidman, Lynn, 1817 Davidsen-Nielsen, Marianne, 1250 Davidson, Glenn W., 654, 1148, 1510 Davidson, Joyce, 1149 Davidson, Joyce D., 1158, 1159, 1160 Davidson, Marjoe, 655 Davidson, Susan Wengerhoff, 596 Davies, Betty, 322, 2102 Davies, Douglas James, 1456 Davies, Phyllis, 1150 Davis, Carol, 1762 Davis, Mellar P., 1774 Davis, Richard H., 323, 1989 Davis, Thomas Martin, 495 Davy, John, 1755 Dawson, Ann, 1151 Dawson, Pam, 611 Day, Stacey B., 67, 407 Dean, Katie Hodge, 563 Deaton, Bob, 564 De Bary, Richard, 324 de Beauvoir, Simone, 964 DeBellis, Robert, 51, 118, 1152, 1271, 1546, 1990, 1991, 2084, 2118, 2119, 2137 de Bosis, Lauro, 656

Degner, Leslie F., 1992 Dehejia, Vidya, 822 Delfosse, Renee, 1511 Della Monica, Elissa, 1527 DeLone, Susan Talia, 1153 Dempsey, David, 275, 657 Dennison, Allie, 147 Dennison, Amy, 147 Dennison, David, 147 de Parvillez, Alphonse, 68 DeRopp, Robert Sylvester, 37 Derr, Paula, 359 Derrida, Jacques, 1918, 2064 Dersheimer, Richard A., 1993 DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, 966, 967 Destouches, L. F., 325 Deveau, Eleanor J., 69, 565 DeVita-Raeburn, Elizabeth, 2103 de Vries, Brian, 965 DeVries, Robert C., 2209 Diamant, Anita, 2065 Diamond, Jonathan, 1818 Dick, Harold M., 566 Dickenson, Donna L., 968 Dickerson, Julie G., 148 Dickinson, George E., 1040 Dicks, Russell, 326 Dietrich, Bernard C., 1919 Dietrich, David R., 1657 DiGiulio, Robert C., 276, 2158 Dileo, Cheryl, 658 Dillard, James, 1756 Dingus, C. Mary, 892 Dinsmore, J. S., 1627 Dobihal, Edward F., Jr., 659 Dockrey, Karen, 1154 Dodder, Barbara, 853 Dodder, Clyde, 853 Dodson, Owen, 476 Doerr, Maribeth Wilder, 567 Doka, Kenneth J., 149, 150, 327, 346, 456, 854, 969, 1149, 1155, 1156, 1157, 1158, 1159, 1160, 1278, 1994 Dolan, Vikki A., 1731 Dombrink, John, 862 Donahue, Mary R., 2143

Name Index Donne, John, 970, 2120 Donnelly, John, 971 Donnelly, Katherine Fair, 568, 1819, 2104 Doss, Richard W., 823 Doudera, A. Edward, 1628 Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 151, 152, 153 Dowdle, Nancy O’Neill, 1995 Dower, Laura, 6 Downing, A. B., 893 Doyle, Derek, 660, 1512, 1757, 1758, 1759 Doyle, Nancy, 328 Doyle, Polly, 1161 Drath, Bill, 167 Draznin, Yaffa, 662 Droege, Thomas A., 663, 1858 Drolet, Judy Catherine, 234 Dublin, Louis I., 972 DuBois, Paul M., 1514, 1515, 1516, 1517 Du Boulay, Shirley, 1513 Dubrow, Nancy, 449 Ducasse, Curt John, 824, 973 Duckett, Eleanor Shipley, 1458 Duda, Deborah, 664 Dudgeon, Deborah, 1778 Dufault, Karin, 1557 Duhring, Nathan, 1601 Dulany, Joseph P., 1859 Dumont, Richard G., 70 Dunlop, R. J., 1790 Dunlop, Richard S., 1162 Dunne, Tad, 1860 Durkheim, Emile, 974 Dworkin, Daniel S., 1656 Dyck, Arthur J., 855 Dyer, Barry Albin, 408 Dyregov, Atle, 154 Earle, Ann M., 1722 Easson, William M., 569 Ebon, Martin, 1683 Eckert, William G., 975, 976, 2121 Eddy, James M., 496, 497 Edelman, Hope, 1820, 1821 Edelstein, Linda, 570 Edwards, Dan, 665

Ehrlich, Carol H., 1538 Eimer, Robert, 2066 Eisenberg, Barbara, 600 Eissler, Kurt R., 1658 Eliade, Mircea, 825, 826 Elias, Norbert, 666 Ellard, John, 1163 Elliot, Gil, 977, 2059 Elliot, Joseph, 2059 Ellis, Susan, 1755 Ellis, Thomas M., 1164 Ellis-Hill, Caroline, 757 Elsegood, John, 201 Emswiler, James P., 155 Emswiler, Mary Ann, 155 Enck, Robert E., 1996 Engram, Sara, 1165 Enright, D. J., 978 Epstein, Charlotte, 1723 Epting, Franz R., 1997 Erickson, Beth M., 1822 Ericsson, Stephanie, 1166 Eshelman, Byron, 1861 Espeland, Pamela, 9, 187 Ettinger, Robert C. W., 1602 Evans, Jocelyn, 668 Evans, W. E. D., 979 Evans-Wentz, W. E., 980 Ewens, James, 1518, 1519 Ezell, G., 363, 981 Faber, H., 1279 Fahy, Thomas Richard, 1684 Fainsinger, Robin L., 1746 Fallon, Marie, 1760 Fanos, Joanna H., 2105 Farber, Maurice L., 1920 Farberow, Norman L., 108, 329 Fargues, Marie, 571 Farrell, James J., 982 Fassler, Joan, 156 Faull, Christina, 1761 Fayerweather Street School, The Unit, 527 Fedden, Henry Romilly, 1459 Feifel, Herman, 1921, 1922

307

308 Feigenberg, Loma, 669 Fein, I. Alan, 2045 Fein, Leonard J., 670 Feinberg, Linda Sones, 2159 Feinstein, David, 2067, 2068 Felber, Marta, 2160 Feldman, Marvin J., 918 Felsenthal, Carol, 1188 Ferrater, Mora Jose, 1923 Ferrero, Guglielmo, 704 Ferris, Frank D., 1275 Fetro, Joyce V., 234 Field, David, 409, 1762 Field, Marilyn J., 572, 1763 Figley, Charles R., 1167, 1168 Filene, Peter G., 1460 Finch, Stuart M., 7 Fingerarette, Herbert, 1924 Finn, William F., 1659 Fins, Joseph, 1764 Fiorini, Jody J., 157 Firth, Pam, 1765 Fischer, John Martin, 1925 Fischoff, Joseph, 573 Fisher, Diane, 1173 Fitzgerald, Helen, 8, 158, 1169 Flammarion, Camille, 1926 Fleming, Steve, 71 Fleming, Thomas P., 2122, 2123 Flew, Anthony, 983 Flew, Anthony G. M., 893 Floyd, Gregory, 574 Flumiani, Carlo M., 984, 1927 Flynn, Chuck, 1702 Fogarty, James A., 159 Foos-Graber, Anya, 1700 Footman, Marilyn E., 9 Forbes, John Douglas, 985 Ford, Gillian, 1766 Forman, Walter B., 1583 Forrai, Maria S., 986 Foss, Dennis C., 70 Foss, Martin, 1928 Foster, Zelda, 1507 Fox, Sandra Sutherland, 160 Frances, Gill, 178 Frandsen, Kathryn J., 860

Name Index Frank, Dick, 244 Frantz, Thomas T., 575, 1193 Frazer, James G., 919, 1603 Fredrick, David L., 498 Fredrick, Donna M., 498 Freeman, Eugene, 856 Freeman, Howard E., 1983 Freeman, Lucy, 1170 Freeman, Stephen J., 1171 Freemantle, Francesca, 410 Freese, Arthur S., 1172 Frenay, Adolph Dominic, 1461 Freud, Sigmund, 1929, 1930 Frick, Marlena, 671 Friedler, Anna B., 109 Friedman, Mary M., 1574 Friedman, Russell, 175 Frigo, Victoria, 1173 Froman, Paul Kent, 1174 Frozena, Cynthia L., 1521 Fruehling, James A., 987 Fry, Christopher, 1931 Fry, Virginia Lynn, 161 Fulton, Gere B., 988 Fulton, Robert, 72, 73, 110, 111, 112, 525, 989, 990 Fundis, Ronald J., 1857 Furman, Edna, 162 Furman, Joan, 330 Gaasch, Ann, 193, 194, 195 Gaffney, Donna A., 163 Gaffney, Patrick, 768 Gagne, Kathleen Dunne, 228 Gallagher-Allred, Charlette R., 1522 Gallop, Ruth, 270 Ganeri, Anita, 1175 Gardiner, Alan H., 1462 Garfield, Charles A., 1660 Garrison, Gene K., 2161 Garrison, Webb, 991 Gary, Juneau Mahan, 1176 Gatch, Milton M., 1932 Gatliffe, Eleanor D., 499 Gatov, Elizabeth Smith, 1629 Gattegno, Caleb, 992 Gaughen, Shasta, 1177

Name Index Gaventa, William C., 38 Gavey, C., 1998 Gavin, William Joseph, 1933 Gelfand, Donald E., 2124 Gemma, Penelope Buschman, 545 Gentles, Ian, 1178 Gerard, H. I., 61 Gerber, Irwin, 1179, 1674, 2137 Gerchick, Elias, 1999 Germino, Barbara B., 956, 957, 958 Gervais, Karen Grandstrand, 857 Gibbons, Joan Lyon, 672 Gibson, A. Barbara, 500 Giddens, Owen, 10 Giddens, Sandra, 10 Gilbert, Sandra M., 993 Ginsburg, Genevieve Davis, 2162 Gissler, Mary, 1370 Gittings, C., 1463 Gladu, Evelyn, 1116 Glaser, Barney G., 673, 674, 675, 676 Glasscock, Geoffrey, 1180 Glavan, Denise, 1523 Gleason, Edward S., 677 Glick, Ira O., 1181 Godin, Andre, 827 Goldberg, I. K., 40 Goldberg, Ivan K., 1131, 1179, 1366, 1663, 1665, 1767, 2000, 2001 Goldberg, Jim, 1524 Goldberg, Michael R., 1991, 2015 Golden, Thomas R., 1182 Goldfischer, Morrie, 1234 Goldin, Nan, 1524 Goldman, Ann, 576 Goldman, Linda, 164, 165, 166 Goldsmith, Charles E., 74 Goldstein, Barbara J., 600 Goliard, Jean, 2030 Gollwitzer, Helmut, 678 Golubow, Mark, 277 Gonda, Thomas Andrew, 2002 Gongaware, Timothy B., 961 Goodman, Lisl Marburg, 75 Gordon, Albert I., 1183 Gordon, Audrey K., 419, 501 Gordon, Beverly S., 2163

309

Gordon, David Cole, 920 Gordon, P., 731 Gorer, Geoffrey, 411, 1184 Gorostiza, Jose, 994 Goss, Robert, 412 Goulding, Mary McClure, 1185 Graham, Billy, 679 Grainger, Roger, 1186 Gravelle, Karen, 11 Graves, M. J., 665 Graves, Sandra L., 1187 Greely, Andrew M., 828 Green, Betty R., 502 Green, Daniel, 1247 Green, H. Leon, 1701 Green, Mary Lou Johnson, 1685 Green, Morris, 1321 Greene, Carlton, 1464 Greene, Phyllis, 2164 Greene, William A., 2049 Greenlee, Sharon, 167 Greenstock, David L., 995 Greer, David S., 1563 Gregg, Joan Young, 630 Greinacher, Norbert, 680 Gressor, Megan, 1180 Greyson, Bruce, 1702 Griffin, Mary, 1188 Griffith, William H., 331, 681, 1862 Grof, Christina, 683 Grof, Stanislav, 332, 682, 683 Grollman, Earl A., 12, 168, 278, 333, 413, 684, 996, 997, 1189, 1190 Groopman, Jerome, 2003 Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, 76, 858 Groves, Richard F., 1863 Gruber, Otto, 334 Gruman, Gerald J., 685 Gualtieri, Antonio R., 77 Guardini, Romano, 829 Gubrium, Jaber F., 335 Guggenheimer, Kurt J., 935 Guilmartin, Nance, 279 Guinan, John, 1385 Guinness, Howard Wyndham, 686 Gullo, Stephen V., 140, 503

310

Name Index

Guntzelman, Joan, 1191 Guroian, Vigen, 859 Gurrin, Basil, 962 Gusmer, Charles W., 1864 Guthman, Robert F., Jr., 113 Gyulay, Jo-Eileen, 577 Hablitzel, William E., 687 Hafen, Brent Q., 860 Hafer, W. Keith, 1192 Hafferty, Frederic W., 2004 Hagen, Richard, 848 Hagglund, Tor-Bjorn, 688 Hale, Mahlon S., 51, 1546 Haley, Harold B., 2000 Haley, James, 998 Halifax, Joan, 332 Hallam, Elizabeth, 1934 Halporn, Roberta, 114, 118, 504, 1525, 2125 Hamilton, Michael Pollock, 1526 Hamner, James E., 999 Hamovitch, Maurice B., 578, 579 Hampe, Johann Christoff, 689 Hampton, C., 690 Handal, Paul J., 918 Hanks, Geoffrey W. C., 1758, 1760 Hanlan, Archie J., 691 Hanley, E., 830 Hanninen, Amy E., 119 Hannon, Natalie, 630, 631, 931 Hanratty, J. F., 1768 Hansen, Adolf, 336 Hansen, James C., 1193 Hansen, Mark Victor, 1129 Hansson, Robert O., 1396 Harbaugh, Oary L., 1398 Hardt, Dale V., 1000 Hardwig, John, 861 Hardy, Mark A., 692 Harlow, Ilana Beth, 1443 Harmon, Louise, 693 Harper, Bernice Catherine, 2005 Harper, George Lea, 694 Harrington, Alan, 1604 Harris, Audrey Jane Axelrod, 1194 Harris, Marilyn D., 1527

Harris, Maxine, 1823 Harris, Raymond I., 1686 Harrison, Robert Pogue, 1001 Harrold, Joan, 695, 739 Hartnett, Johnette, 169, 280, 1195 Harvey, Andrew, 768 Harvey, Carol D. H., 2165 Harvey, John H., 1196, 1197, 1198, 1199 Harwell, Amy, 696 Haskins, Charles, 11 Hastings Center, 1528, 2006 Hathaway, Nancy, 1258 Haupt, Barbara J., 1529 Hawke, Sharryl, 1002 Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker, 78, 697 Hayslip, Bert, 115, 414, 1530 Health Care Financing Administration, United States Government, 1531 Hector, Winifred, 1724 Hedtke, Lorraine, 281 Heegaard, Marge Eaton, 170, 1200, 1201 Heidrich, Debra E., 2014 Heilman, Samuel C., 415, 1003 Heinlein, Susan, 2166 Heit, Philip, 44, 45 Henderson, Joseph L., 831 Henderson, Randi, 337 Hendin, David, 1004 Hendin, Herbert, 416 Hennezel, Marie de, 698 Henry, DeWitt, 1202 Henschell, Todd, 1492 Hentoff, Nat, 861 Herbeck, David J., 1630 Herhold, Robert M., 699 Herrington, Patricia, 1518, 1519 Hertz, Robert, 1935 Herzog, Edgar, 1936 Hessler, Florence M., 1937 Hick, John H., 832 Hickey, Tom, 1203 Hickman, Martha Whitmore, 171, 1204 Hickman, Tom, 1005 Higginson, Irene, 1768 Higginson, Thomas Wentworth, 704 Hill, D., 1532

Name Index Hill, Karen Liffring, 1559 Hill, Lenore, 580 Hill, Nancy, 700 Hill, T. Patrick, 701 Hilliard, Russell E., 1533 Hillyard, Daniel, 862 Hinton, John M., 702 Hirschman, Leigh Ann, 1756 Hockey, Jennifer Lorna, 409, 1006, 1934, 2069 Hockey, Lisbeth, 643 Hocking, William Earnest, 1605, 1606 Hockley, J., 1787 Hockley, Jo, 1751, 1769 Hoffman, Frederick J., 1938 Hogan, N. S., 13 Holbrook, Frank B., 505 Holck, Frederick H., 1465 Holden, Douglas T., 1865 Holderby, Robert A., 1561 Holford, Karen, 172 Holland, John, 1824 Hollingsworth, Charles E., 2007 Holloway, Karla F. C., 417 Holmes, Frances B., 176 Homans, Peter, 1466 Hooyman, Nancy R., 2008 Horan, Dennis J., 863 Horn, Robert C., 703 Horn, Sandra, 1325 Horton, Keith V., 506 Hosansky, Anne, 2167 Hospice and Palliative Nurses Association, 1725 Hospice Saint John, 1553 Houghton, Peter, 1007 Houlbrooke, Ralph A., 1467 Howard, Deborah, 1205 Howarth, Glennys, 399, 418, 1008, 1469, 1934 Howe, Julia Ward, 704 Howell, Mary C., 1937 Howells, W. D., 704 Howes, Elizabeth, 1939 Howes, Elizabeth Boyden, 672 Hrycyniak, Stephen J., 1291 Hubbard, David A., 705

311

Huber, Jim, 1206 Huber, M., 1535 Huber, Terri, 581 Huggard, Sandra K., 1128 Hughes, Lynne B., 14 Hughes, Marylou, 1207 Hughes, Richard, 1009 Hughs, Hugh Llewelyn, 1208 Humber, James M., 864 Humphrey, Geraldine M., 2009 Humphry, Derek, 865, 866 Hunt, Gladys M., 706 Huntington, Richard, 2070 Huntley, Theresa, 173 Hurley, Ann, 1592 Hurst, Noonan, 1726 Hurtt, Maryann, 1521 Hutschnecker, Arnold A., 707 Hyde, Margaret O., 708 Hyman, Herbert Hiram, 2168 Ilse, Sherokee, 1252 Indiana Health Planning and Agency Support Bureau, 1536 Infeld, Donna Lind, 419, 1537 Ingleton, Christine, 1732 Ingpen, Robert, 202 Irion, Paul E., 1866, 1867, 2071, 2072, 2073 Irish, Donald P., 420, 502 Irish, Jerry A., 15 Ironside, Virginia, 1209 Isaacs, Ronald H., 421 Isenberg, Nancy, 1468 Iserson, Kenneth V., 282, 2074 Jackson, Aariane R., 174 Jackson, Charles O., 1010 Jackson, D. A., 467 Jackson, Edgar N., 283, 284, 338, 1210, 1211, 1212, 1981, 2075, 2076 Jackson, Kenneth C., II, 1777 Jackson, Maggie, 507 Jacobs, Barbara J. Sax, 999 Jacobs, Selby, 1213, 1214 Jacobsen, Fay W., 709 Jacobsen, Gail B., 285

312

Name Index

Jaffe, Carolyn, 1538 Jalland, Pat, 422 James, Henry, 704 James, John W., 175, 1215 Jarow, Rick, 423 Jatz, Jay, 867 Jebb, Philip, 2169 Jeffrey, David, 1759 Jeffreys, J. Shep, 1216, 1217 Jenkins, Bill, 1218 Jenkins, Clare, 2106 Jennings, Bruce, 854, 1539, 1770 Jens, Walter, 870 Jensen, Amy Hillyard, 1219 Jersild, Arthur T., 176 Jessop, Julie, 203 Jewett, Claudia L., 177 Jewish Theological Seminary of America, 424 Jimerson, Shane R., 193, 194, 195 Job, Nina, 178 Johns, Fran Moreland, 921 Johnson, Catherine, 812 Johnson, Christopher Jay, 425 Johnson, Elizabeth A., 710 Johnson, Jan, 1839 Johnson, Joy, 179, 180, 582 Johnson, L. D., 339 Johnson, Malcolm Lewis, 968 Johnson, Margaret Woods, 711 Johnson, Marv, 180, 582 Johnson, Paul, 1883 Johnson, Sherry E., 583 Johnson, Steven, 119 Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals, 1540, 1541 Jones, Barbara, 1687 Jones, Constance, 1011 Jones, Jane Griz, 2170 Jones, Mary, 2010 Jones, William Tudor, 1012 Jozefowski, Joanne T., 1220 Judd, Dorothy, 584 Juneau, Barbara Frisbie, 181 Jungel, Eberhard, 1940 Jupp, Peter C., 418, 1469, 1868

Jury, Dan, 39 Jury, Mark, 39 Kabcenell, Andrea, 2020 Kachoyeanos, Mary, 1370 Kaebnick, Gregory E., 1770 Kagan, Henya, 585 Kalina, Kathy, 1542 Kalish, Richard A., 426, 427, 712, 713, 1013, 1014, 1221 Kamath, M. V., 1941 Kamerman, Jack B., 428 Kamm, Phyllis, 1421 Kan, S., 1607 Kane, William, 19 Kantonen, T. A., 833 Kaplan, Karen Orloff, 1631 Kaplan, Louise J., 714 Kaplan, Pascal M., 79 Kapleau, Philip, 1470, 1942 Karim, Abul Bashr Mohammed Fazlul, 1015 Karnes, Barbara, 715, 1632 Karo, Nancy, 2171 Kasden, Madelaine Perri, 600 Kast, Verena, 1222 Kastenbaum, Beatrice, 1024 Kastenbaum, Robert J., 80, 115, 340, 468, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1024, 1677, 1943 Katafiasz, Karen, 1223 Kato, Shuichi, 436 Katz, Jay, 1633 Katz, Jeanne, 2069 Katz, Jeanne Samson, 968, 1771 Kauffman, Jeffrey, 1025, 1661 Kaufman, Barry Neil, 81 Kaufman, Sharon R., 716 Kaufman, Suzi Lyte, 81 Kavanaugh, R. E., 341 Kay, Alan A., 429 Kaye, Peter, 1772 Kearl, Michael C., 1026 Kearney, Michael, 717 Keizer, Bert, 1027 Keleman, Stanley, 718

Name Index Kellehear, Allan, 399, 719, 1028, 2011 Kelly, Evelyn B., 342 Kelly, Patricia, 271 Kelly, Robert, 537 Kemp, Charles, 2012 Kennedy, Alexandra, 1825 Kennedy, E. A., 56 Kennedy, Elizabeth A., 1662 Kennedy, Eugene C., 1224 Kennedy, Nathalie E., 805 Kennedy, Patricia H., 720 Keogh, Martin J., 1225 Kepler, Thomas, 326 Kessler, David, 721, 722, 1033, 1236 Keyfitz, Nathan, 761 Kienow, Nancy Louise, 508 Kiernan, John M., 692 Killilea, Alfred G., 1944 Kilner, John F., 868 Kindlen, Margaret, 709 Kinzbrunner, Barry M., 1773 Kircher, Pamela M., 1543 Kirk, Paul, 780 Kirschling, Jane Marie, 1548 Kissane, David, 1226 Kittleson, Mark J., 19 Klagsbrun, Samuel C., 1546, 1663 Klass, Dennis, 412, 501, 586, 1227, 1228 Klauser, Henriette Anne, 1863 Kleespies, Phillip M., 869 Klein, Allen, 82 Klein, Sandra Jacoby, 1229 Klein, Stanley, 430 Klicker, Ralph L., 182 Kliman, Gilbert, 183, 244, 262 Klopfenstein, Janette, 286 Klopfenstein, Pamela, 587 Klug, Ron, 1826 Kluge, Eike-Henner W., 1945 Kluger-Bell, K., 588 Knapp, Ronald J., 589, 606 Knight, James A., 1981 Knott, J. Eugene, 83, 509 Knowles, Don, 184 Knox, Jean McBee, 1029 Koestenbaum, Peter, 1946, 1947

313

Koff, Theodore H., 1544 Kohn, Jane Burgess, 2172 Kohn, Willard K., 2172 Kohut, Jeraldine Marasco, 1545 Kohut, Sylvester, 1545 Kolatch, Alfred J., 2077 Kolf, June Cerza, 723, 1230, 1231 Koocher, Gerald P., 185 Koolman, Gladys, 1232, 1827 Koop, C. Everett, 703, 1030 Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, 186, 724, 1869 Kothari, M. L., 725 Koupernik, Cyrille, 544 Kouri, Mary K., 1233 Kraemer, David Charles, 431 Kramer, Betty J., 2008 Kramer, Herb, 84 Kramer, Kenneth, 432 Kramer, Ray, 84 Kramer, Rita Wendy, 2173 Kramer, Scott, 343 Kramp, Douglas H., 726 Kramp, Erin Tierney, 726 Krant, Melvin J., 661 Kranz, Rachel, 276 Kraus, Frances, 206 Krauss, Pesach, 1234 Kreeft, Peter J., 344 Kreis, Bernadine, 1235 Krementz, Jill, 1828 Kroen, William C., 187 Krohe, Dale C., 510 Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, 188, 189, 287, 345, 511, 590, 728, 729, 730, 834, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1236, 1688, 2013, 2126 Kuebler, Kim K., 1774, 2014 Kuehn, Eileen, 16, 1237 Kuenning, Delores, 1238 Kumar, Sameet M., 1239 Kung, Hans, 870 Kurtzman, J., 731 Kushner, Harold S., 1034 Kushner, Thomasine Kimbrough, 897 Kutscher, Austin H., 40, 51, 116, 117, 118, 119, 288, 289, 456, 619, 692,

314

Name Index

1035, 1131, 1147, 1179, 1240, 1241, 1242, 1243, 1244, 1269, 1271, 1366, 1546, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1722, 1767, 1882, 2000, 2001, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2030, 2041, 2084, 2115, 2123, 2127, 2137 Kutscher, Lillian G., 289, 692, 767, 1243, 1244, 1269, 1270, 1659, 1674, 1727, 1875, 1991, 2022, 2057, 2084, 2127, 2130, 2137, 2138 Kutscher, Martin L., 118, 119 Kysar, Ardis, 190 Lack, Sylvia A., 1036, 1547 Laderman, Gary, 1471 LaGrand, Louis E., 17 Lair, George S., 2018 Lamb, David, 871 Lambrinidou, Yanna, 1744 Lamers, William, Jr., 191 Lamerton, Richard, 732, 1036 Lamm, Maurice, 433, 1245 Lamont, Corliss, 1948 Lampke, Robert S., 2128 Landau, Elaine, 192 Landes, Alison, 872 Landsberg, Paul-Louis, 1949 Lang, Gordon, 1130 Langer, Marion, 2174 Langner, Thomas S., 922 Langue, John, 1037, 1038 Lansing, Patricia, 512 Lantos, John D., 1775 Larson, Dale G., 1246 Larson, Judith, 1313 Lasagna, Louis, 873 LaTour, Kathy, 2107 Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia, 346, 1548, 1549 Laungani, Pittu, 443, 444, 445, 446, 454 Lawhon, Leigh, 174 Lawrenz, Mel, 1247 Lawton, Julia, 1776 Lawton, M. Powell, 1039 Leahey, Maureen, 347 Leaman, Oliver, 513, 1008 Leary, Timothy Francis, 434 Lee, Carol, 1248

Lee, Elizabeth, 348 Lee, J. Y., 435 Lee, Robert G., 1634 Leech, Peter, 1249 Leenaars, Antoon A., 2129 Lehmann, Linda, 193, 194, 195 Lehner, Ernst, 85 Leick, Nini, 1250 Lembke, Janet, 349 Leming, Michael R., 1040 Lendrum, Susan, 1251 Lenhart, Gloria, 2175 Leon, Joel, 1530 Lepp, Ignace, 1041 Lerman, Dan, 1550 Lerner, E., 1472 Lerner, Gerda, 350 Lerner, I., 1472 LeShan, Eda, 196, 197 LeShan, Lawrence, 1981 Leslie, Robert C., 805 Levang, Elizabeth, 1252 Levering, Matthew Webb, 1870 Levete, Sarah, 198 LeVier, Emily, 372 Levine, Aaron, 1253 Levine, Carol, 1145 Levine, Phyllis, 600 Levine, Sol, 1983 Levine, Stephen, 290, 733, 734, 735, 1254, 1255 Levinson, Deborah, 2176 Leviton, Daniel, 1042, 1256 Levy, Alexander, 1829 Levy, E. L., 199 Lewin, Ian G., 1766 Lewis, C. S., 1043 Lewis, Edith Patton, 1720 Lewis, Martyn, 1551 Lewis, Paddy Greenwall, 200 Ley, D., 1552 Lieberman, Alicia F., 1830 Lieberman, Morton, 2177 Liebman, Joshua Loth, 1257 Liechty, Daniel, 1689 Lifton, Robert J., 436, 736, 1950 Lightner, Candy, 1258

Name Index Ligouri, Alphonsus, 923 Limbo, Rana K., 591 Lindenberg, Steven Phillip, 1666 Lindholm, Dorothy, 1044 Lindsay, Bruce, 201 Lindsay, R., 2178 Lindsey, Karen, 1795 Linn, Erin, 291, 2108 Lintermans, Gloria, 1259 Linzer, N., 1260 Lipman, Arthur G., 1777 Lippman, Jessica G., 200 Liss-Levinson, Nechama, 437 Lister, Elena, 6 Lister, Marcie, 592 Little, Deborah Whiting, 351 Littlewood, Jane, 1261 Livingston, Gordon, 593 Livington, Jane, 1524 Llewellyn, John F., 2078 Llewellyn, Nigel, 1473 Loewinsohn, R., 2179 Loewy, Erich H., 874 Loewy, Joanne, 658 Loewy, Roberta Springer, 874 Lofland, Lyn H., 737, 1045 Lonetto, Richard, 71, 86 Long, Ariella, 600 Long, Susan Orpett, 438 Longacre, Christine, 738 Longacre, Marilee, 62 Longanacre, Cindy, 1523 Lopata, Helena Z., 2180, 2181, 2182 Lopez, Donald S., 643 Lord, Janice Harris, 1262, 2019 Lorenzo, Raphael, 119 Lovell, Sandra, 592 Luchterhand, Charlene, 1667 Luczak, Jacek, 1503 Luff, Gill, 1765 Lugt, Herbert Vander, 352 Lukas, Christopher, 1631 Lunceford, Judy, 87 Lunceford, Ronald, 87 Lund, Dale A., 1263, 2183 Lundahl, Craig R., 1703 Lundquist, Kathleen F., 420

315

Lunney, June Rigby, 514 Lutheran Welfare Service of Northeastern Pennsylvania, 1553 Lynn, Joanne, 695, 739, 2020 Lynn, Margaret Mount, 2130 Lyons, Christine, 231 MacDonald, Neil, 1778 Mace, Gillian S., 120 MacGregor, Cynthia, 292 Mack, Arien, 1474 Mack, Stanley, 1264 Mackenzie, Dorothy, 2200 MacNab, Francis A., 1265 Macpherson, Colin R., 515 MacPherson, Myra, 1779 Madden, Ed, 740 Maeterlinck, Maurice, 1046, 1047, 1608 Magee, Bryan, 741 Mahoney, John J., 1549 Malitz, S., 1767 Malitz, Sidney, 1665 Malkinson, Ruth, 1266 Mall, David, 863 Mallonie, Bryan, 202 Mann, Sally, 1524 Manning, Doug, 1267, 1268 Manning, Margaret, 1554 Marcil, William Matthew, 800 Marcus, Eric R., 1269, 1663 Marek, Richard, 337 Margolis, Otto S., 456 Margolis, Otto Schwarz, 1269, 1270, 1271, 2079, 2114 Mark, Lester C., 2137 Markham, Ursula, 1272 Marks, Amy Seidel, 88 Marks, Renee U., 121 Marrelli, Tina M., 1555, 1556 Marris, P., 2184 Marris, Peter, 1273 Marrone, Robert L., 1048 Marshall, Fiona, 1831 Marshall, George N., 1274 Marshall, Victor W., 41 Martin, Edward, 2080 Martin, J. Paul, 875

316 Martin, Jenny A., 742 Martin, John, 270, 1275 Martin, Sheila, 1276 Martin, Sherry Hendricks, 1277 Martin, Terry L., 1278 Martinson, Ida Marie, 594, 595 Martocchio, Benita C., 743, 1557 Marx, Robert J., 596 Maryuma, Terence Chikako, 1558 Mason, Edward A., 1690 Massimini, Kathy, 249 Masterson-Allen, Susan, 1564 Matse, Jan, 1279 Matson, Archie, 1704, 1705 Matthews, Anne Martin, 2185 Matthews, Leslie Landon, 175 Matzo, Marianne, 1728 Mauger, P. A., 1358 Maxwell, Katie, 1635 Maxwell, Robert J., 59 Mayer, Gladys, 835 Mayfield, James L., 1280 Mayo, Peg Elliott, 2067, 2068, 2081 McBride, Alfred, 18 McCabe, Marilyn, 1281 McCain, Kevin, 172 McCall, Junietta Baker, 42, 1871 McCann, Barbara A., 1559 McCarthy, J., 924 McCarthy, Jane Ribbens, 203 McCarthy, Sarah, 1282 McCormack, Jerusha Hull, 1283 McCoy, Marjorie Casebier, 89 McCracken, Anne, 597 McDermott, R., 1780 McDonnell, Alice, 1560 McFarlane, Marilyn, 1320 McGeachy, D. P., 353 McGee, Ann Young, 43 McGee, Marsha G., 425 McGoldrick, Monica, 1416 McGrory, Arlene, 2021 McGuire, Leslie, 204 McHugh, James T., 1636 McIlwain, Charlton, 439 McIlwraith, Hamish, 1284 McIntosh, Elaine, 1494

Name Index McKerrow, Margaret M., 354 McKhann, Emily P., 726 McLean, Sheila, 1637 McMahon, Joan D., 543 McMahon, Joanne D. S., 2117 McMullen, Ernan, 355 McNabb, David, 330 McNally, Shirley Reeser, 2186 McNamara, Beverley, 356 McNees, Pat, 744 McNeil, Joan N., 5 McNeil, John S., 1391 McNulty, Elizabeth G., 1561 McSteen, Kerstin, 1835 McWilliams, Peter, 2154 Meader, John R., 1600 Meagher, David K., 122, 516, 745 Meeks, Linda Brower, 44, 45 Mehren, Elizabeth, 598 Mehta, L. A., 725 Mehta, Rohit, 1049 Melton, David, 210 Memorial Society of Edmonton and District, 517 Mennes, Marya, 746 Menten, Ted, 293, 1285 Mercer, John Edward, 2131 Merkeley, Donald K., 1691 Merry, Judy, 2106 Mervyn, Carol, 357 Metcalf, Peter, 2070 Metchnikoff, Elie, 747, 1951 Metress, E. K., 988 Metrick, Sydney Barbara, 2082 Metze, Erno, 1063 Metzgar, Margaret, 1286 Metzger, Arnold, 358 Metzner, Ralph, 434 Meyer, Charles, 748 Meyer, Joachim E., 1668 Meyer, Maria M., 359 Meyers, David W., 1638 Meyers, Karen, 19 Michelson, Alvera, 2171 Millen, Rochelle L., 440 Miller, Arlene B., 868 Miller, Eric D., 1199

Name Index Miller, Galen W., 1549 Miller, Jack Silvey, 1287 Miller, James E., 1182, 1288, 1289 Miller, Jolanda, 1290 Miller, Michael James, 123 Miller, Nancy K., 1832 Miller, Randolph Crump, 1952 Miller, Robert J., 1291 Miller, Sally Downham, 205, 1292 Miller, Samuel O., 1146 Miller, Sukie, 599 Millet, Edmund A., 20 Mills, Gretchen C., 518 Mills, Liston O., 876 Mims, Cedric, 1050 Minamide, Elaine, 1293 Minear, Paul Sevier, 1294 Minot, Charles, 46 Misbin, Robert I., 877 Mitchell, Ellen, 600 Mitchell, Kenneth R., 1872 Mitchell, Marjorie Edythe, 90 Mitford, Jessica, 1051 Mitsch, Raymond R., 1295 Mitscherlich, Alexander, 1296 Mitscherlich, Margarete, 1296 Model Projects in Aging Programs, 1553 Moffat, M. J., 1297 Moffatt, Bettyclare, 294 Mogensen, Greg, 1298 Mojtabai, A. G., 1562 Moller, David Wendell, 441, 749, 750, 1052 Moltmann, Jurgen, 836, 1299 Monroe, Barbara, 206, 1057, 1781 Montague, William P., 1706 Montgomery, Herb, 1300 Montgomery, Mary, 1953 Montgomery, Mary Ann, 1300 Moody, A., 207 Moody, Raymond A., Jr., 1301, 1707 Moore, Alinde J., 2187 Moore, Crystal Dea, 1774 Moore, James W., 1302 Moore, Jane Peters, 208 Moore, Marvin, 1609 Moore, Virginia, 91

317

Moorey, James, 1303 Mor, Vincent, 1563, 1564 Moraczewski, Albert S., 1639 Morduch, Anna, 751 Morgan, David H., 1696 Morgan, Derek, 1634 Morgan, Ernest A., 2083 Morgan, J. H., 124 Morgan, John D., 21, 47, 209, 360, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 519, 878, 959, 969, 1095, 1304, 1305, 2132, 2133 Morgan, Mary Ann, 2133 Moriarty, David M., 1306 Morland, Ian, 138 Morley, John, 1475 Morris, Sarah, 1307 Morris, Virginia, 295 Morriss, James E., 35 Morrissey, Paul F., 1565 Morse, Melvin, 1708, 1709 Moscrop, Janet, 769 Moser, Adolph, 210 Moss, Miriam S., 1833 Moss, Sidney Z., 1833 Mount, Balfour M., 1742 Moxley, Sheila, 770 Mulhern, Barbara Harrison, 2186 Mullen, Jodi Ann, 157 Muller, Alois, 680 Mullin, Glenn H., 447, 448 Mundy, Jon, 752 Mundy, Linus, 1308 Mundy, Michaelene, 211 Munley, Anne, 1566 Munnichs, Joep M. A., 48 Munro, Susan, 1567 Murphey, Cecil, 1711 Murphy, Marie, 92 Murphy, N. Michael, 93 Murphy, Nancy, 1667 Murphy, Sylvia, 2188 Murray, Donald Morison, 601 Muth, Annemarie, 1640 Myers, Edward, 22, 1834 Nabe, Clyde M., 960 Nadeau, Janice Winchester, 361

318

Name Index

Nader, Kathleen, 449 Nagy, Jan, 138 Nagy, Marie H., 1954 Nairn, Rob, 753 National Cancer Foundation, 94 National Conference on Social Welfare, 1568 Natural Death Centre, 1053 Naylor, Harriet H., 2022 Neale, Robert E., 754, 1882 Nearing, Helen, 49 Neimeyer, Robert A., 95, 808, 1309, 1310, 1997 Nelson, Jan C., 1873 Nelson, Leonard J., 1054 Nelson, Vivian Jenkins, 420 Nesse, Randolph M., 2151 Nessit, Marion, 520 Neuberger, Julia, 450 Neuhaus, Richard John, 755 Nevejan, Marc-Armand-Jean-Marie, 1279 Nevins, M., 879 Newell, Martha M., 362 Newnes, Craig, 1055 Nickman, Stephen L., 1228 Nieto, Beatriz C., 1343 NightMare, M. Macha, 2091 Noel, Brook, 1311, 1312 Noguchi, Thomas T., 2121 Nolen-Hoeksema, Susan, 1313 Noorbergen, Rene, 1333 Norlander, Linda, 1835, 2023 Northcott, Herbert C., 451 Nouwen, Henri J. M., 96, 1314, 1710 Nowak, Pat, 2189 Noys, Benjamin, 925 Nugent, Christopher, 1955 Nuland, Sherwin B., 756 Nussbaum, Kathy, 212, 213 Oakes, Maud, 831 Oaks, J., 363, 981 Oaks, Judy, 1317 Oates, Martha D., 215 Oates, Wayne Edward, 1318, 1876, 1877 Obayashi, Hiroshi, 1610 Ober, Doris, 599

O’Brien, Joanne, 1782 Ochs, Robert J., 1956 O’Connor, Andrea, 1729 O’Connor, Brian, 1874, 1875 O’Connor, Mary Catherine, 1476 O’Connor, Nancy, 1315 O’Connor, Patrice M., 1581 Oden, Thomas C., 880 Ogg, Elizabeth, 1056 Oliver, Marjorie, 364 Oliver, Samuel Lee, 1878 Oliviere, David, 1057, 1765, 1781 Olson, Eric, 736 Olson, Melodie, 1730 O’Malley, Sarah, 2066 O’Neill, Christopher, 198 Oraison, Mark, 1879 Orbach, Ann, 1957 Orcutt, Ben A., 2030, 2134 O’Reilly, Karen, 1783 Orr, Martha L., 692 Osborne, Ernest, 365 Osgood, Judy, 602 O’Shaughnesay, T., 452 Osis, Karlis, 2024 Osler, William, 1611 Osmont, Kelly, 1319, 1320 Osterweis, Marian, 1321 Ostheimer, J. M., 1958 Ostheimer, N. C., 1958 Otero, George G., 521 O’Toole, Donna R., 214, 1316 Overall, Christine, 50 Overstad, Elizabeth, 190 Owen, Margaret, 2190 Owens, Michael R., 1784 Pacholski, Richard A., 522, 523, 539 Padilla, Geraldine V., 1731 Palmer, Greg, 453 Palmer, Pat, 216 Papadatos, Constantine J., 217 Papadatou, Danai, 217 Papenbrock, Patricia L., 218 Paradis, Lenora Finn, 1569 Pardi, Marco M., 1058 Park, James, 1959

Name Index Park, Roswell, 2135 Parkes, Colin Murray, 454, 1181, 1322, 1323, 1324, 2025 Parrish-Harra, Carol E., 1059 Parry, Joan K., 366, 455 Parry, Jonathan, 936 Parsonnet, Lissa, 692 Pasnau, Robert O., 2007 Patterson, Paul R., 503, 618, 619 Pattie, Alice, 1235 Pattison, E. Mansell, 1060 Payne, Sheila, 757, 1325, 1732 Peace, Richard, 1144 Peace, Sheila M., 1771 Peachey, Mark, 758 Peacock, Carol Antoinette, 1326 Pearl, Raymond, 2026 Pearson, Althea, 1327, 2027 Pearson, Cynthia, 367 Pearson, Judy C., 603 Pearson, Leonard S., 1061 Peck, Rosalie, 1062 Pedersen, Debbie Wiley, 604 Pegg, Patricia F., 1063 Pelgrin, Mark, 368 Pelikan, Jaroslav, 1477 Penelhum, Terence, 1612 Pennells, Margaret, 219, 241 Penner, Nadine Reimer, 1537 Penso, D., 1532 Peppers, Larry G., 605, 606 Peretz, David, 119, 1131, 1366, 1673, 1674, 2041, 2084, 2137 Perlin, Seymour, 847 Perrett, Roy W., 1613 Perry, Deborah, 792 Perry, J. K., 369 Perry, Paul, 1708, 1709 Pershy, Mary Kelly, 23 Persico, V. Richard, 457 Peters, J. Douglas, 1628 Peters, Rudolph, 1451 Peterson, James A., 2191 Petrinovich, Lewis, 881 Petrosino, Barbara M., 1570 Pettipas, Mary, 2200 Peveto, Cynthia A., 414

319

Phelps, Elizabeth Stuart, 704 Phillips, D. Z., 1614 Phipps, Joyce, 2192 Phipps, William E., 1880 Piaget, Jean, 1692 Pieper, Josef, 1615 Pietsch, James H., 394 Pike, Diane Kennedy, 1328 Pincus, Lily, 1329 Pine, Vanderlyn R., 456, 1269, 2084 Piper, Don, 1711 Pitch, Richard J., 1937 Piven, Jerry S., 1960 Platt, Larry A., 457, 1881 Plouffe, Rhea Therese, 759 Poirrier, Gail, 883, 1733 Pojman, Louis P., 882 Policzer, Joel S., 1773 Pollock, G. H., 136 Pollock, George H., 1330 Poor, Belinda, 883, 1733 Poslusny, Elsa, 1727 Poss, Sylvia, 760 Post, Carole, 632 Post, Kalmon D., 2029 Poteet, G. Howard, 125, 126 Powers, J. Bruce, 1271 Poznanski, Elva O., 7 Pregent, Carol, 607 Prend, Ashley Davis, 1331 President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral Research, 1641, 1642 Presnell, Romaine, 2193 Preston, S. H., 761 Preston, Thomas A., 1785 Prettyman, Barrett, 1643 Price, Ann Back, 1438 Price, Eugenia, 1332 Price, Julius J., 458 Prichard, Elizabeth R., 51, 2030 Priest, Mary Woodward, 762 Prince, Arlene, 127 Pringle, Laurence, 220 Prioreschi, Plinio, 2085 Proctor, W., 927

320

Name Index

Prunkl, Peter R., 763 Putnam, Constance E., 1571 Pyles, Marian S., 524 Quarles, Tresa F., 489 Quicksall, Larry E., 764 Quill, Timothy E., 370, 765, 1786, 2031 Quint, Jeanne C., 1734 Raab, Robert A., 1064 Rabinowicz, Rabbi Tzvi, 459 Radcliffe, Jack, 1524 Raether, Howard C., 1269, 1271, 2032, 2086 Rahner, Karl, 460 Ramsay, Ronald W., 1333 Ramsey, P., 884 Randall, Rebecca, 230 Rando, Therese A., 608, 1334, 1335, 1336, 2033, 2034 Raphael, Beverly, 1337 Rapoport, Nessa, 1338 Rasberry, Salli, 766 Raspa, Richard, 2124 Rathke, Julia Wilcox, 221 Raven, Ronald W., 2035 Rawnsley, Marilyn M., 1663 Ray, M. Catherine, 1572 Redshaw, Thomas Dillon, 407 Reed, Elizabeth L., 222 Reed, Margaret R., 112 Reed, Mary Lou, 609 Reeves, Nancy, 184 Reeves, Robert B., 1882 Regnard, C., 1787 Reich, Michael, 436 Reid, Helen F., 1526 Reiffel, James, 767 Reinsmith, A. M. Brady, 1339 Reisler, Ray, 518 Relf, Marilyn, 1325, 2025 Remolino, Linda, 1176 Reoch, Richard, 371 Resnick, David B., 1573 Resnick, Sheila Handler, 296 Reynolds, David K., 427 Reynolds, Frank E., 1478

Reynolds, Kimberley, 547 Reynolds, Paul Davidson, 525 Reynolds, Rita M., 526 Rhea, Carolyn, 1340 Rheingold, Joseph C., 610 Rhinehart, Emily, 1574 Rhodes, Colbert, 2136 Rice, Rebecca, 2194 Rich, Phil, 1341, 1342 Richards, Larry O., 1883 Riches, Gordon, 611 Richmond, Judy, 223 Riemer, Jack, 461, 462, 463 Ring, Kenneth, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715 Rinpoche, Sogyal, 768 Rinpoche, Tulku Chagdud, 1065 Risley, Robert L., 885 Rivera, Michelle A., 1575 Roach, Mary, 2087 Roach, Sally S., 1343 Robben, Antonius C., 464 Robbins, Joy, 769 Roberts, Barbara K., 2195 Roberts, Harry, 886 Roberts, Polly C., 500 Robertson, Diane, 2141 Robertson, John A., 1644 Robinson, Alice E., 518 Rochlin, Gregory, 1344 Rock, Lois, 770 Rodd, Susan, 1378 Rodman, F. Robert, 771 Rofes, Eric E., 527 Rogers, Tony, 1868 Rogers, W. F., 1669 Rogers, William F., 1884 Rogness, A. N., 1885 Rogo, D. S., 1886 Rollin, Betty, 772 Romain, Trevor, 224 Romanyshyn, Robert, 1345 Romond, Janice Loomis, 225 Ronan, Margaret, 465 Roos, Susan, 1346 Roose, Lawrence J., 2039 Rose, Ada Campbell, 1347 Rose, Charles Spencer, 1576

Name Index Rosen, Elliott J., 773 Rosen, Helen, 2109 Rosen, Marvin, 387 Rosenbaum, Stuart E., 308, 843 Rosenblatt, Paul C., 466, 467, 612, 613, 1348 Rosenfeld, Stephen S., 774 Roslansky, John D., 52 Rosner, Gerald, 1645 Rosof, Barbara D., 614 Ross, E. Betsy, 1349 Rossman, Parker, 1577 Roth, Deborah, 372, 1350 Rothman, J. C., 373 Rothschild, Janet, 528 Rowland, M., 775 Rowling, Louise, 226 Ruark, John Edward, 2002 Rubenfeld, Gordon D., 1988 Rubin, Simon, 1266 Rudman, Masha Kabakow, 227, 228 Rudolph, Marguerita, 297 Rugg, Sharon, 229, 230 Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus, 1351, 1961 Ruiz, Ruth Ann, 2110 Rumbold, Bruce D., 1887 Rupp, Joyce, 1888 Rushton, L., 2088 Russell, J., 1780 Russell, Martha E., 1739 Russell, Noreen A., 631, 931 Russell, Robert A., 1352 Ryan, Angela Shen, 455 Ryerson, Marjorie, 776 Ryndes, True, 777 Rynearson, Edward K., 1353 Sabom, Michael, 1716 Sahler, Ollie Jane Z., 615 St. John-Stevas, Norman, 1650 Salem, Cheryl, 1354, 1355 Salem, Harry, 1354, 1355 Salinas, Robert C., 948 Salzman, Cynthia, 1494 Samarel, Nelda, 53 Sanders, Catherine M., 539, 616, 1356, 1357, 1358

321

Sanders, Pete, 1066 Sankar, Andrea, 374 Santino, Jack, 2089 Santora, Joseph C., 126 Sargent, Marilyn, 529 Sauer, Herbert I., 778 Saunders, Cicely M., 468, 779, 1067, 1578, 1579, 1788, 1789, 1790, 2036, 2037, 2038 Savary, Karen, 437 Schaefer, Dan, 231 Schaefer, Daniel J., 456 Schaper, Donna, 1836 Schatz, William H., 1359 Schaverien, Joy, 1670 Scherer, Jennifer M., 887 Scherzer, Carl J., 1889 Schiff, Harriet Sarnoff, 617, 1360 Schim, Stephanie Myers, 2124 Schleifer, Jay, 1361 Schmitt, Abraham, 1362 Schnaper, Nathan, 2039 Schneider, Carl, 888 Schneider, John, 1363 Schneider, John M., 1364 Schneider, Miriam, 1496 Schneiderman, G., 1365 Schoen, Elin, 2196 Schoen, Robert, 761 Schoenberg, B. Mark, 2040 Schoenberg, Bernard, 1131, 2041 Schoenberg, Bernard S., 1366, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 2016, 2017, 2137 Schoeneck, Therese, 24, 1367 Schowalter, John E., 503, 618, 619 Schraff, Sylvia H., 1735 Schuklenk, Udo, 889 Schulman, J. L., 620 Schultz, Cynthia L., 1127 Schulz, Richard, 1068 Schur, Max, 1962 Schuster, Janice Lynch, 2020 Schuurman, Donna L., 232, 233 Schweibert, Pat, 780 Scotch, Norman A., 1983 Scott, D. H., 1616 Scott, Frances G., 530

322 Scott, Milton Berry, 1646 Scott, Nathan A., 1069 Scott, Patricia Cumin, 1580 Scrimgeour, Elizabeth, 781 Scrivani, Mark, 25 Scrutton, Steve, 1368 Seale, Clive, 1369 Secunda, Victoria, 1837 Sed, C., 56 Seelan, Irene, 2030 Seeland, Irene B., 782, 1269, 1271 Segerberg, Osborn, 783, 1617 Segraves, Kelly L., 1070 Seibert, Dinah, 234 Selavan, Ida Cohen, 469 Selder, Florence, 1370, 1736 Seligman, Martin, 784 Sell, Irene L., 128 Sell, Kenneth D., 129 Selzer, Richard, 1071 Semel, Mary, 597 Sendor, Virginia F., 1581 Seskin, Jane, 2197 Seymour, Jane, 1732, 1750 Shabad, Peter C., 1657, 1675 Shaffer, Thomas L., 1647 Shaler, Nathaniel Southgate, 1072 Shane, Thomas W., 785 Shannon, Thomas A., 890 Shapiro, Ester R., 1371 Shapiro, R. Debra, 745 Sharoff, Kenneth, 375 Sharp, Anne Wallace, 1582 Sharp, Joseph, 376 Shatte, Howard Alexander, 837 Shavelson, Lonny, 891 Shaw, Eva, 1372 Sheehan, Denice C., 1583 Sheepshanks, Mary, 1373 Sheikh, Anees A., 97 Sheikh, Katharina S., 97 Sheldon, Frances, 1791 Shepard, Martin, 298, 786 Sherlock, Richard, 892 Sherlock, William, 1073 Sherman, Deborah Witt, 1728 Sherr, Lorraine, 1074, 1374

Name Index Shibles, Warren, 1963 Shield, Renee Rose, 377 Shiloh, Ailon, 469 Shipley, Roger R., 1648 Shirley, David A., 701 Shively, Charles, 1479 Shneidman, Edwin S., 329, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1964 Shoemaker, D. J., 1682 Shoemark, Allison, 709 Short, Robert, 1078 Shoshanna, Brenda, 1375 Shrut, Samuel D., 54 Shuchter, Stephen R., 2198 Shuman, Ron, 787 Shuy, Roger, 794 Siebold, Cathy, 1584 Siegel, Mary-Ellen, 456, 1663 Siekmann, Theodore C., 235 Silverman, Janis, 236 Silverman, Nancy Jean Price, 531 Silverman, Phyllis R., 1228, 1979 Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe, 237, 1376, 2150, 2199, 2200 Silverman, William B., 1377 Simon, Clea, 1838 Simon, Leslie, 1839 Simon, Rita James, 887 Simpson, Michael, 838 Simpson, Michael A., 130, 1079 Singer, Lilly, 1378 Singer, Peter, 98 Singer, Zeva, 1249 Singh, Kathleen Dowling, 788 Sinick, Daniel, 55 Sirot, Margaret, 1378 Sirvis, Barbara, 238 Slater, E., 893 Slater, Robert C., 2084, 2086 Small, Neil, 409, 2069 Smilansky, Sara, 239 Smith, Alison, 2111 Smith, B. A., 240 Smith, Bradford, 378 Smith, Carole R., 379 Smith, Curtis A., 1649 Smith, Doug, 1585, 1792

Name Index Smith, Harold Ivan, 1379, 1380, 1381, 1382, 1840 Smith, Helen C., 2042 Smith, Kathleen, 1383, 1384 Smith, Mark, 954 Smith, Rodney, 789 Smith, Sharon Hines, 470 Smith, Shirley Ann, 1793 Smith, Susan C., 219, 241 Smith, Walter J., 790 Smith, William A., 1890 Smolin, Ann, 1385 Snow, Lois W., 380 Snyder, Carrie, 894 Society for the Right to Die, 2043 Soder-Alderfer, Kay, 1386 Sogn, Donnelen L., 242 Solomon, Fredric, 1321 Solomon, Lewis D., 471 Somerville, Rose M., 532 Soper, Susan, 2090 Sorensen, Rosemary Lee, 946 Sorenson, Stephen, 724, 1869 Soulen, Richard N., 1891 Southard, Samuel, 131 Spall, Bob, 1387 Speck, Peter, 306, 2044 Spencer, Glenn M., Jr., 1892 Spiegel, Maura, 381 Spiegel, Yorick, 1388, 1389 Spies, Karen Bornemann, 1390 Spilling, Roy, 791 Spinetta, John J., 533 Spiro, Howard M., 472 Spiro, Jack D., 473 Spivey, John, 1523 Sprang, Ginny, 1391 Sprung, Barbara, 243 Spurgeon, C. H., 1080 Stamm, B. H., 449 Standard, Nathan H., 299 Standard, S., 299 Stanford, Gene, 792 Stannard, David E., 99, 1480 Stanwood, P. G., 1899 Stanworth, Rachel, 1893 Starck, Peter, 793

323

Starenko, R. C., 1894 Starhawk, 2091 Start, Clarissa, 2201 Staton, Jana, 794 Staudacher, Carol, 1392, 1393, 1394 Steele, Shirley, 1737 Stefanics, Charlotte, 1062 Stein, Diane, 1395 Stein, Sara Bonnett, 244 Steinberg, Maurice D., 895 Steinfels, Peter, 1081 Stephens, C. S., 1618 Stephenson, John S., 1082 Sterns, H. L., 56 Stetson, Brad, 621 Stevenson, Eileen P., 534 Stevenson, Robert G., 245, 516, 534, 619, 1141 Stewart, Charles W., 659 Stewart, Gail B., 246 Stillion, Judith M., 100 Stoddard, Sandol, 1586 Stolzman, Marilyn, 1259 Storey, Porter, 1794 Storley, C. J., 382 Strack, Stephen, 1965 Stratton, Dorothy C., 2187 Straub, Sandra Helene, 795 Strauss, A. L., 673 Strauss, Anselm L., 674, 675, 676, 796 Strickland, Albert Lee, 966, 967 Stroebe, Margaret S., 1396, 2202 Stroebe, Wolfgang, 1396, 2202 Strong, P. N., 1358 Strosberg, Martin A., 2045 Strothmann, Maynard Herman, 839 Strugnell, Cecile, 2203 Stuart, Friend, 1895 Stuart, Wendy, 2 Stubbs, Margaret L., 367 Sturzl, JoAnn, 1909 Sudnow, David, 383 Sullender, R. S., 1896 Sulzberger, Cyrus, 474 Summers, Dorothy H., 1579 Suszycki, Lee H., 797 Sutton, Marilyn, 1089

324

Name Index

Swanson, Jan, 2046 Swetland, Sandra, 247 Switzer, David K., 1397, 1897 Syme, Gabrielle, 1251 Szabo, John F., 132 Tagliaferre, Lewis, 1398 Tallmer, Margot, 51, 57, 618, 619, 798, 1399, 1546 Tanner, Dennis C., 1400 Tanner, I. J., 1401 Tarlow, Sarah, 1402 Tart, Charles, 1714 Tatelbaum, Judy, 1403 Taylor, Jeremy, 1898, 1899 Taylor, Joan Leslie, 1587 Taylor, Michael J., 1966 Taylor, Richard P., 475 Taylor, Timothy, 1481 Tedeschi, Richard G., 2047 Tehan, Claire B., 1489, 1550 Temes, Roberta, 1404 Templer, Donald I., 86 Tengbom, Mildred, 622, 1405, 1900 Terbay, Susan Handle, 1582 Terhune, James A., 248 Theroux, Phyllis, 2092 Thielen, Joyce H., 112 Thielicke, Helmut, 896, 1901, 1967 Thiermann, Sara, 940 Thomas, James L., 535 Thomas, Pat, 536 Thomas, V. R., 300 Thomasma, Davis C., 897 Thompson, Douglas K., 799 Thompson, Ian, 898 Thompson, Marney, 1747 Thompson, Neil, 1406 Thomson, William Hanna, 704 Thornton, V. K., 1407 Tigges, Kent Nelson, 800 Tis’Ney, Carol, 1408 Tittensor, John, 623 Tobin, Daniel R., 1795 Toder, Francine, 624 Tomer, Adrian, 58 Tompkins, Susan E., 840

Torpie, Richard J., 1546, 2138 Torrens, Paul R., 1588 Torres, Carole, 692 Towers, Anna M., 1744 Toynbee, Arnold, 841, 1482, 2139 Toynbee, Jocelyn M. C., 1482 Treadway, David C., 1409 Tristman, Richard, 381 Tromp, Nicholas J., 1483 Trotman, Frances K., 2048 Troup, Stanley B., 2049 Trozzi, Maria, 249 Tuccille, Jerome, 1619 Tuck, William P., 1410 Turnage, Anne Shaw, 1902 Turnage, Mac N., 1902 Turnbull, Richard, 384 Twycross, Robert G., 801, 1796 Tyler, Linda S., 1777 Ufema, Joy, 1738 Uhlmann, Michael M., 899 Ulanov, Barry, 1083 Ulin, Richard Otis, 537 Umberson, Debra, 1841 United States Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, 802 United States General Accounting Office, 1589, 1590 United States Senate, 900 United States Senate, Special Committee on Aging, 1591 Urofsky, Melvin I., 1651 Vachon, Mary L. S., 2050 Vail, Elaine, 1411 Valarino, Evelyn, 1715 Valentine, Bill, 1412 Van Bommel, Harry, 385, 1552 Vandeman, George E., 250 Van den Hoonaard, Deborah K., 2204 Van Den Hout, Theo P. J., 1451 Van Der Zee, James, 476 VanDuivendyk, Tim P., 1903 Van Praagh, James, 1413 Van Zeller, Hubert, 1084 Vargas, Kathy, 1524

Name Index Vaux, Kenneth L., 803, 901 Vaux, Sara Anson, 803 Veatch, Robert M., 847, 902, 1081 Vedder, Clyde B., 2136 Ventifridda, V., 1796 Vermilye, Gretchen, 518 Vernick, Joel J., 133 Vernon, Glenn M., 386, 1968 Verwoerdt, Adriaan, 301 Vince, Ken R., 1717 Vlitos, Roger, 198 Vogel, Linda Jane, 251 Vogt, Christopher P., 804 Volicer, Ladislav, 1592 Volk, Robert J., 2084 Volkan, Vamik D., 1163, 1414 Volpe, Rita, 600 Voss, Robert F., 218 Voysey, M., 1085 Vredevelt, Pam W., 1415 Wagner, August H., 1969 Wagner, Heather Lehr, 387 Wagner, J., 1904 Wahl, Charles W., 805 Wainwright, Wendy, 1747 Wald, Florence S., 1739 Wald, George, 52 Walker, Alice, 806 Walker, Earl A., 2051 Walker, Kenneth M., 101 Wallace, Beverly R., 466 Wallis, C. J., 2093 Walsh, Froma, 1416 Walsh, R. P., 467 Walsh-Burke, Katherine, 2052 Walter, Carolyn Ambler, 1417 Walter, Tony, 1418, 1797 Walton, Charlie, 1419 Walton, Douglas N., 904, 1970 Wandel, Lee Palmer, 472 Wanderer, Zev, 807 Ward, Barbara, 26, 252 Wardi, Anissa Janine, 477 Ware, Shirley Gerald, 1843 Warner, W. Lloyd, 1086 Warthin, Alfred, 2053

325

Wass, Hannelore, 253, 254, 538, 539, 808 Waterhouse, Michael, 809 Waters, Brent, 1905 Watson, David, 810 Watson, Max S., 1783 Watson, Wilbur H., 59 Watt, Jill, 478 Watts, Alan W., 811 Watts, Richard G., 302 Waugh, Earle H., 1478 Weatherhead, Leslie, 1906 Webb, Marilyn, 388 Webb, Nancy Boyd, 255 Weeks, O. Duane, 812 Weenolsen, Patricia, 813, 1971 Wegars, Priscilla, 401 Weidner, Halbert, 1907 Weiner, Bill, 102 Weingarten, Violet, 814 Weinreb, Neil J., 1773 Weir, Robert F., 905, 906 Weisman, Avery D., 1420, 1676, 1677, 2054 Weiss, Abner, 479 Weiss, Jess E., 103 Weiss, Robert S., 1181, 1324 Weitzman, Elizabeth, 256 Weizman, Savine Gross, 1421 Wells, Robert V., 1484 Welshons, John E., 1422 Wengerd, Sara, 1423 Wentzel, Kenneth B., 1593 Wertenbaker, Lael T., 1087 Wertheimer, Alison, 1424 Westberg, Granger E., 1425 Whaley, Joachim, 1485 Wharton, John, 2096 Wheeler, David R., 815 Wheeler, Sara Rich, 591 Whipple, Vicky, 2205 Whitaker, Agnes, 1426 White, Ann, 315 White, James R., 1427 White Deer of Autumn, 480 Whiter, Walter, 1693 Whitfield, Sarah, 1724 Wiener, Alfred, 1179, 1674

326

Name Index

Wienrich, Stephanie, 2059 Wiersbe, David, 1908 Wiersbe, Warren W., 1908 Wilcox, Sandra Galdieri, 1089 Wilde, Gary, 27 Wilkenfeld, Loren, 625 Wilkerson, R., 1718 Wilkes, Eric, 2055 Williams, Donna Reilly, 1909 Williams, Elaine K., 1594 Williams, Marna B., 2206 Williams, Mary Beth, 1446 Williams, Mary E., 907, 908, 1090, 1798, 1799 Williams, P. W., 1910 Williams, Robert H., 909 Williams, Tom A., 926 Willis, Clarissa, 1624 Wilson, Antoine, 1428 Wilson, Donna M., 451 Wilson, Elizabeth, 2200 Wilson, Ian C., 1809 Wilson, Liz, 481 Winn, Denise, 1595 Winn, Peter S., 948 Winslade, John, 281 Winter, Arthur, 816 Winters, Paul A., 1091 Wiscniak, Debra, 1740 Wogrin, Carol, 303 Wolf, Anna M., 540 Wolf, Stewart G., 2056, 2057, 2140 Wolfe, Thomas, 1429 Wolfelt, Alan D., 28, 29, 30, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 389, 1430, 1431, 1432, 1433, 1434, 1435, 1911, 2094, 2095 Wolfelt, Megan E., 30 Wolfenstein, Martha, 262, 1694 Wolff, S., 263 Wolfson, Ron, 482 Wolk, Gloria Grening, 1652 Womack, Sharon Kay, 113 Wong, Mary M., 1436 Wood, William, 2096 Woodruff, R., 1800 Wooten-Green, Ron, 304

Worcester, Alfred, 1092 Worden, J. William, 264, 927, 1437, 2058 Worswick, Jacqueline, 1596 Worth, Richard, 817 Wortman, Camille B., 2151 Wray, T. J., 1438, 2112 Wright, Bob, 1439 Wright, H. T., 1093 Wright, Lorraine M., 347 Wright, Michael, 1503 Wroblieski, Adina, 1440 Wu, Kuang-ming, 343 Wydman, Mary Witt, 2186 Wylie, Betty Jane, 1441, 2207 Wyschogrod, Edith, 1094 Yates, Martha, 2208 York, Sarah, 2097 Young, Dennis, 1442 Young, Gregory W., 2098 Youngner, Stuart J., 895 Yount, Lisa, 910 Zagaranski, D., 305 Zalaznik, Patricia Weller, 134, 541 Zandee, Jan, 1486 Zarbock, Sarah F., 1493 Zarit, Steven H., 60 Zeitlin, Steven J., 1443 Zelenka, Linda, 1444 Zeligs, Rose, 265 Zerwekh, Joyce V., 1741, 1745 Zim, Herbert S., 31 Zimmerman, Jack McKay, 1597 Zimmerman, Susan, 1445 Zimpfer, David G., 2009 Zinker, Joseph Chaim, 104 Zinner, Ellen, 490, 542, 543, 1446 Zintl, Elizabeth, 1414 Zisook, Sidney, 1447, 1678 Zonnebelt-Smeenge, Susan J., 2209 Zorza, Rosemary, 818 Zorza, Victor, 818 Zucker, Marjorie B., 911

Title Index

ABC of Palliative Care, 1760 The ABCs of Grief: A Handbook for Survivors, 1095 The ABCs of Widowhood, 2189 About Death, 141 About Dying: An Open Family Book for Parents and Children Together, 244 About Mourning: Support and Guidance for the Bereaved, 1421 Access to Experimental Drugs in Terminal Illness: Ethical Issues, 889 Access to Hospice Care: Expanding Boundaries, Overcoming Barriers: A Special Supplement to the Hastings Center Report, 1528 Acknowledgment: Opening to the Grief of Unacceptable Loss, 1249 Acquainted with Grief, 1347 An Act of Love: Preparing Your Spouse for Life without You, a Financial Guide, 1630 Acute, Chronic, and Terminal Care in Neurosurgery, 2029 Acute Grief and the Funeral, 2084 Acute Grief: Counseling the Bereaved, 1271 The Adjustment of Parents Following the Death of a Child from a Terminal Illness: A Dissertation, 558

Adjustment to Widowhood and Some Related Problems: A Selective and Annotated Bibliography, 2203 Admission to the Feast, 312 Adolescence and Death, 5 Adolescent Suicide, 7 Adventure in Dying, 2171 Affairs in Order: A Complete Resource Guide to Death and Dying, 1621 African American Daughters and Elderly Mothers: Examining Experiences of Grief, Loss, and Bereavement, 470 African American Grief, 466 After a Child Dies: Counseling Bereaved Families, 583 After Goodbye: How to Begin Again after the Death of Someone You Love, 1285 Afterlife: Reports from the Threshold of Death, 1704 After the Darkest Hour the Sun Will Shine Again: A Parent’s Guide to Coping with the Loss of a Child, 598 After the Flowers Have Gone, 1232 After the Flowers: Life beyond Widowhood, 2157 After You Lose Someone You Love: Advice and Insight from the Diaries of Three Kids Who’ve Been There, 147 327

328

Title Index

After You Say Goodbye: When Someone You Love Dies of AIDS, 1174 Against the Dying of the Light: A Father’s Journey through Loss, 670 Aging and Dying as Aspects of Living, 32 Aging, Death, and Human Longevity: A Philosophical Inquiry, 50 Aging, Dying, and Death, 44 Aging, Dying, and Death: A Teacher’s Guide, 45 AIDS and the Hospice Community, 1489 AIDS and the New Orphans: Coping with Death, 1145 AIDS: Intervening with Hidden Grievers, 1146 AIDS: The Ultimate Challenge, 728 Alerting Bereaved Families: A Special Bulletin, 268 All in the End Is Harvest: An Anthology for Those Who Grieve, 1426 All Kinds of Love: Experiencing Hospice, 1538 All of Us: Americans Talk about the Meaning of Death, 62 All Our Losses, All Our Griefs: Resources for Pastoral Care, 1872 All the Days of His Dying, 671 Alone and Surviving: A Guide for Today’s Widow, 2178 Ambiguous Loss: Learning to Live with Unresolved Grief, 1115 The American Book of Dying: Lessons in Healing Spiritual Pain, 1863 The American View of Death: Acceptance or Denial?, 70 The American Way of Death, 1051 The American Way of Dying, 627 Among Friends: Hospice Care for the Person with AIDS, 1497 The Anatomy of Bereavement, 1337 And a Time to Die (Howes), 1939 And a Time to Die (Pelgrin), 368 And a Time to Die: How American Hospitals Shape the End of Life, 716 And Peace at Last, 326

And the Passenger Was Death: The Drama and Trauma of Losing a Child, 562 And You Visited Me: Sacramental Ministry to the Sick and Dying, 1864 Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Patient, 674 Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Trajectory, 675 Animal Behavior and Thanatology, 2113 Annotated Catalog of Books and Audiovisual Materials on Thanatology: Death, Bereavement, Loss, Grief, and Recovery from Bereavement, 105 Anticipatory Grief, 1366 Aphasia: The Family’s Guide to the Psychology of Loss, Grief, and Adjustment, 1400 Appointment with Death, 1885 Approaching Death: Improving Care at the End of Life, 1763 Are You Sad Too?: Helping Children Deal with Loss and Death, 234 Ars Morendi: The Book of the Craft of Dying and Other Early English Tracts Concerning Death, 1453 The Art of Death: Visual Culture in the English Death Ritual, c. 1500-1800, 1473 The Art of Dying (Crichton), 652 The Art of Dying (Neale), 754 The Art of Dying: Honoring and Celebrating Life’s Passages, 766 The Art of Dying: How to Leave This World with Dignity and Grace, at Peace with Yourself and Your Loved Ones, 813 The Art of Dying Well: The Development of Ars Moriendi, 1476 As I Lay Dying: Meditations upon Returning, 755 As It Is Said: A Selected, Annotated Bibliography in Death and Dying, 122 As Much Time as It Takes: A Guide for the Bereaved, Their Family, and Friends, 1225

Title Index Aspects of Grief: Bereavement in Adult Life, 1261 As Someone Dies: A Handbook for the Living, 710 At Home with Dying: A Zen Hospice Approach, 1505 At Home with Terminal Illness: A Family Guide to Hospice in the Home, 1492 Attachment and Loss: Loss, Sadness, and Depression, 1117 The Attitude of Ancient Egyptians to Death and the Dead, 1462 Attitudes on Death and Dying: A CrossCultural View, 87 Attitudes toward Death and Funerals, 88 Autobiography of Dying, 691 Awakening from Grief: Finding the Way Back to Joy, 1422 Awareness of Dying, 673 Awareness of Mortality, 1025 Barriers to Hospice Care: Are We Shortchanging Dying Patients: Hearing before the Special Committee on Aging, United States Senate, One Hundred Sixth Congress, Second Session, Washington, DC, September 18, 2000, 1591 Becoming Myself: Living Life to the Fullest after the Loss of Your Parents, 1813 Before and After My Child Died: A Collection of Parents’ Experiences, 573 Before the Great Silence, 1046 Beginning Again: Tools for the Journey through Grief, 1277 Beginning at the End: A Study in Death and Life, 382 Beginnings: A Book for Widows, 2207 Behind the Veils of Death and Sleep, 835 Being and Death, 1923 Being a Widow, 2147 Being Human in the Face of Death, 372 Belief in Immortality and the Worship of the Dead, 1603

329

Be Not Afraid: Overcoming the Fear of Death, 912 Bequest and Betrayal: Memoirs of a Parent’s Death, 1832 The Bereaved Child: Analysis, Education, and Treatment: An Abstracted Bibliography, 120 Bereaved Children and Teens: A Support Guide for Parents and Professionals, 12 The Bereaved Parent, 617 Bereavement and Adaptation: A Comparative Study of the Aftermath of Death, 1134 Bereavement and Commemoration: An Archeology of Mortality, 1402 Bereavement and Grief: Supporting Older People through Loss, 1368 Bereavement and Health: The Psychological and Physical Consequences of Partner Loss, 2202 Bereavement and Support: Healing in a Group Environment, 1207 Bereavement Care: A New Look at Hospice and Community-Based Services, 1548 Bereavement: Client Adaptation and Hospice Services, 1537 Bereavement Counseling: A Multidisciplinary Handbook, 2040 Bereavement Counseling: Pastoral Care for Complicated Grieving, 1871 Bereavement: Counseling the Grieving throughout the Life Cycle, 1142 Bereavement in Children under Stress, 263 Bereavement: Its Psychosocial Aspects, 1674 The Bereavement Ministry Program: A Comprehensive Guide for Churches, 1873 Bereavement: Reactions, Consequences, and Care, 1321 Bereavement: Studies of Grief in Adult Life, 1322

330

Title Index

Bereavement: Three Aspects of Mourning for the Bereaved and for Those Who Want to Help Them, 1279 Between Life and Death, 1016 Beyond All Pain: A Companion for the Suffering and Bereaved, 1788 Beyond and Back: Those Who Died–and Lived to Tell about It, 1718 Beyond Death: The Gates of Consciousness, 683 Beyond Endurance: When a Child Dies, 589 Beyond Grief: A Guide for Recovering from the Death of a Loved One, 1392 Beyond Loss: A Practical Guide through Grief to a Meaningful Life, 1378 Beyond Silence and Denial: Death and Dying Reconsidered, 636 Beyond Sorrow: Reflections on Death and Grief, 1300 Beyond Tears: Living after Losing a Child, 600 Beyond the Body: Death and Social Identity, 1934 Beyond the Innocence of Childhood: Factors Influencing Children and Adolescents’ Perceptions and Attitudes toward Death, 69 Beyond the Innocence of Childhood: Helping Children and Adolescents Cope with Life-Threatening Illness and Dying, 565 Beyond the Mirror: Reflections on Death and Life, 1710 Beyond Widowhood: From Bereavement to Emergence and Hope, 2158 Biathanatos, 2120 Biblical Perspectives on Death, 391 A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 19351968, 116 A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 19681972, 117 Bibliography of the Thanatology Literature, 119

A Bibliography on Death, Grief, and Bereavement II, 1975-1980, 112 Bibliography on Grief: Your Guide to the Right Resources to Cope with Loss and Death, 134 Bibliography on Suicide and Suicide Prevention: 1897-1957; 1958-1967, 108 A Bioethical Perspective on Death and Dying, 879 Bioethical Problems: Death and Social Responsibility, 856 The Biology of Death: A Series of Lectures Delivered at the Lowell Institute in Boston in December 1920, 2026 Biopsychosocial Aspects of Bereavement, 1678 The Bird of My Loving: A Personal Response to Loss and Grief, 1373 Birth to Death: Science and Bioethics, 897 Bitter, Bitter Tears: Nineteenth-Century Diarists and Twentieth-Century Grief Theories, 1348 Black Grief and Soul Therapy, 404 Black Suicide, 416 Blessed Are Those Who Mourn: Comforting Catholics in Their Time of Grief, 1892 Blessed Grieving: Reflections on Life’s Losses, 1191 Blessing the Bridge: What Animals Teach Us about Death, Dying, and Beyond, 526 Body, Mind, and Death, 983 The Book of Eulogies: A Collection of Memorial Tributes, Poetry, Essays, and Letters of Condolence, 2092 The Book of the Dead: An English Translation of the Chapters, Hymns, Etc., of the Theban Recension, with Introduction, Notes, Etc., 2062 Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and Loss, 107 Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and Loss: An Annotated Bibliography, 228 A Boy Thirteen: Reflections on Death, 15

Title Index Brain Death: Ethical Considerations, 904 Breaking the Silence: A Guide to Help Children with Complicated Grief– Suicide, Homicide, AIDS, Violence, and Abuse, 164 A Brief History of Death, 1456 Brief Interventions with Bereaved Children, 206 The Broken Connection: On Death and the Continuity of Life, 1950 A Broken Heart Still Beats: After Your Child Dies, 597 Buried Alive: The Terrifying History of Our Most Primal Fear, 916 The Buried Soul: How Humans Invented Death, 1481 But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort for Those Bereaved, 1240 But Won’t Granny Need Her Socks?: Dealing Effectively with Children’s Concerns about Death and Dying, 184 Canadian Guide to Death and Dying, 478 Can You Hear Me Smiling?: A Child Grieves a Sister, 174 Cardinal Bernardin’s Stations of the Cross: Transforming Our Grief and Loss into New Life, 1224 Care for the Dying and the Bereaved, 1178 Care for the Dying: Resources of Theology, 1891 Caregiving and Loss: Family Needs, Professional Responses, 1158 Caregiving: Hospice-Proven Techniques for Healing Body and Soul, 1585 Caregiving in the Community Hospital for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved, 2057 The Care of the Aged, Dying, and Dead, 1092 The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the Dead, 1017 Care of the Child Facing Death, 556 Care of the Dying (Lamerton), 732 Care of the Dying (Saunders), 1067 Care of the Dying Child, 576

331

Care of the Dying Child: A Practical Guide for Those Who Help Others, 555 Care of the Dying Patient: A Comparison of Instructional Plans, 2042 Care of the Terminally Ill: The Hospice Concept, 1500 Caring for a Dying Relative: A Guide for Families, 660 Caring for Dying Children and Their Families, 580 Caring for Dying People of Different Faiths, 450 Caring for Life and Death, 53 Caring for Patients at the End of Life: Facing an Uncertain Future Together, 2031 Caring for the Dead: Your Final Act of Love, 316 Caring for the Dying: Critical Issues at the Edge of Life, 308 Caring for the Dying Patient and His Family: A Model for Medical Education-Medical Center Conferences, 2015 Caring for the Dying Patient and the Family, 769 Caring Relationships: The Dying and the Bereaved, 712 Carpe Diem: Enjoying Every Day with a Terminal Illness, 740 Casebook on the Termination of LifeSustaining Treatment and the Care of the Dying, 1754 Ca$h for the Final Days: A Financial Guide for the Terminally Ill and Their Advisors, 1652 Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides What?, 867 Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides What? A Psychosocial and Legal Analysis of the Problems Posed by Hemodialysis and Organ Transplantation, 1633 Causes of Death, 761 A Celebration of Death, 66 Celebrations of Death: The Anthropology of the Mortuary Ritual, 2070

332

Title Index

The Center for Bioethics and Human Dignity Presents Dignity and Dying: A Christian Appraisal, 868 Cerebral Death, 2051 A Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement, 956 The Chances of Surviving Death (Ingersall Lecture, 1932), 1706 The Changing Face of Death: Historical Accounts of Death and Disposal, 1469 Changing Ways of Death in TwentiethCentury Australia: War, Medicine, and the Funeral Business, 422 The Chemistry of Death, 979 Chicken Soup for the Grieving Soul: Stories about Life, Death, and Overcoming the Loss of a Loved One, 1129 The Child and Death (Grollman), 168 The Child and Death (Sahler), 615 The Child and Death (Schowalter et al.), 619 The Child and the Mystery of Death, 571 A Child Dies: A Portrait of Family Grief, 545 Childhood and Death, 253 Childhood Bereavement and Its Aftermath, 136 Childhood Bereavement: Developing the Curriculum and Pastoral Support, 178 The Child in His Family: The Impact of Disease and Death, 544 Children and Death, 217 Children and Death: Perspectives from Birth through Adolescence, 618 Children and Dying: An Exploration and a Selective Professional Bibliography, 559 Children and Grief: Big Issues for Little Hearts, 169 Children and Grief: When a Parent Dies, 264 Children and the Death of a President: Multidisciplinary Studies, 262 Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Siblings (Levy), 199

Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Siblings (Linn), 2108 Children, Bereavement, and Trauma: Nurturing Resilience, 138 Children Die, Too, 582 Children Facing Grief, 225 Children Mourning, Mourning Children, 149 Children’s Conceptions of Aging and Death, 71 Children’s Experience with Death, 265 Children’s Fears, 176 Children’s Literature: An Issues Approach, 227 The Child’s Attitude toward Death, 90 The Child’s Conception of Physical Casualty, 1692 The Child’s Discovery of Death: A Study in Child Psychology, 137 A Child’s Parent Dies: Studies in Childhood Bereavement, 162 A Child’s View of Grief: A Guide for Parents, Teachers, and Counselors, 257 Chinese American Death Rituals: Respecting the Ancestors, 401 Chinese Americans in Loss and Separation: Social, Medical, and Psychiatric Perspectives, 400 Choices at the End of Life: Finding Out What Your Parents Want before It’s Too Late, 1835 The Choice: Seasons of Loss and Renewal after a Father’s Decision to Die, 851 Choices for Living: Coping with Fear of Dying, 922 Choices: For People Who Have a Terminal Illness, Their Families, and Their Caregivers, 385 A Chosen Death: The Dying Confront Assisted Suicide, 891 The Christian Way of Death, 706 Chronic and Terminal Illness: New Perspectives on Caring and Carers, 757 Chronic Illness and the Quality of Life, 796

Title Index The Chronic Pain Solution: The Comprehensive, Step-by-Step Guide to Choosing the Best of Alternative and Conventional Medicine, 1756 Chronic Sorrow: A Living Loss, 1346 Cicely Saunders: Founder of the Hospice Movement, Selected Letters, 19591999, 1578 Cicely Saunders, Founder of the Modern Hospice Movement, 1513 The Circle of Life: A Search for an Attitude to Pain, Disease, Old Age, and Death, 101 A Clinical Decision Guide to Symptom Relief in Palliative Care, 1787 Clinical Dimensions of Anticipatory Mourning: Theory and Practice in Working with the Dying, Their Loved Ones, and Their Caregivers, 1334 Clinical Management of Bereavement: A Handbook for Healthcare Professionals, 1985 Clinical Protocols for Care of Hospice Patients: An Interdisciplinary Approach, 1535 Closer to the Light: Learning from the Near-Death Experiences of Children, 1708 Close to the Bone: Life-Threatening Illness and the Search for Meaning, 1914 A Collection of Near-Death Research Readings: Scientific Inquiries into the Experiences of Persons Near-Physical Death, 1703 Come Phoenix Word: An Account of a Woman’s Journey and Struggle for Consciousness during a Terminal Illness: Journal and Writings of Joan Lyon Gibbon, 1924-1987, 672 Come the End: Instructions for Young People on the Last Things, 235 Comfort and Care in a Final Illness: Support for the Patient and Caregiver, 723 Comfort for Those Who Mourn, 1104

333

Comforting Those Who Grieve: A Guide for Helping Others, 1267 The Comfort of Home: An Illustrated Stepby-Step Guide for Caregivers, 359 Coming Home: A Guide to Dying at Home with Dignity, 664 Coming to Terms with Death: How to Face the Inevitable with Wisdom and Dignity, 321 Communicating Issues in Thanatology, 2123 Communications and Thanatology, 2122 Communication with the Fatally Ill, 301 The Community Hospital and Its Expanding Role in Thanatology, 2140 Companions for the Passage: Stories of the Intimate Privilege of Accompanying the Dying, 776 Companion through the Darkness: Inner Dialogues on Grief, 1166 A Comparison of Attitudes of Associate Degree Student Nurses Caring for the Dying Patient before and after Death Education, 512 Compassion and Courage in the Aftermath of Traumatic Loss: Stones in My Heart Forever, 1110 Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End-of-Life Care, 2011 A Compilation of Studies of Attitudes toward Death, Funerals, and Funeral Directors: Participated in by the Clergy, the Public, Including Critical Segments Thereof, Funeral Directors, 72 The Complete Hospice Guide, 1498 The Complete Idiot’s Guide to Near-Death Experience, 1696 Complicated Grieving and Bereavement: Understanding and Treating People Experiencing Loss, 1141 A Comprehensive Bibliography of the Thanatology Literature, 119 Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for the Living, 996

334

Title Index

Confrontations on Death: A Book of Readings and a Suggested Method of Instruction, 530 Confronting Death, 331 Confronting Death: Values, Institutions, and Human Mortality, 1052 Considering Alan Ball: Essays on Sexuality, Death, and America in the Television and Film Writings, 1684 Consolation: The Spiritual Journey beyond Grief, 1245 A Constant Burden, 1085 Constructing Death: The Sociology of Dying and Bereavement, 1369 A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness (Brauer), 635 A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness (National Cancer Foundation), 94 The Consumer’s Guide to Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 1648 Contemporary Issues in the Sociology of Death, Dying, and Disposal, 418 Continuing Bonds: New Understandings of Grief, 1228 Continuing Care for the Dying Patient, Family, and Staff, 1990 The Continuing Care of Terminal Cancer Patients, 1796 Contributions to Psychiatry, Education of the Health Professional, Thanatology, and Ethical Values, 1672 Conversations at Midnight: Coming to Terms with Dying and Death, 84 Conversations with a Dying Friend (Carmody), 272 Conversations with a Dying Friend (Coute), 274 Coping: A Survival Manual for Women Alone, 2208 The Coping Capacity: On the Nature of Being Mortal, 1420 Coping Skills Therapy for Managing Chronic and Terminal Illness, 375 Coping with Bereavement, 1284 Coping with Bereavement from Death or Divorce, 1192

Coping with Death (Gaughen), 1177 Coping with Death (Raab), 1064 Coping with Death and Dying: An Interdisciplinary Approach, 1986 Coping with Death and Grief, 170 Coping with Death in the Family, 1365 Coping with Death on Campus, 542 Coping with Dying: A Study of Patient and Family Interaction in Terminal Illness, 296 Coping with Grief, 1128 Coping with Grieving and Loss, 10 Coping with Loss, 1313 Coping with Loss and Grief, 1180 Coping with Loss and Grief through Online Support Groups, 1176 Coping with Personal Losses, 248 Coping with Public Tragedy, 346 Coping with Separation and Loss as a Young Adult: Theoretical and Practical Realities, 17 Coping with the Death of a Brother or Sister, 2110 Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving, 405 Coping with Tragedy: Successfully Facing the Problem of a Seriously Ill Child, 620 Coping with Workplace Grief: Dealing with Loss, Trauma, and Change, 1216 Corpses, Coffins, and Crypts: A History of Burial, 1452 The Cost of Dying and What You Can Do about It, 628 Counseling Children and Adolescents through Grief and Loss, 157 Counseling for Grief and Bereavement, 2009 Counseling in Terminal Care and Bereavement, 2025 Counseling Older Persons: Careers, Retirement, Dying, 55 Counseling Skills in Palliative Care, 1755 Counseling the Bereaved, 1993 Counseling the Dying, 1981 Counseling the Terminally Ill: Sharing the Journey, 2018

Title Index Counselor Responses to Death and Dying: Guidelines for Training, 1974 The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living, Recovery, and Growth, 1403 The Courage to Laugh: Humor, Hope, and Healing in the Face of Death and Dying, 82 Crafting a Crazy Quilt: Four Teachers Piece Together Death in a School Context, 208 The Craft of Dying: The Modern Face of Death, 737 Creating Meaningful Funeral Ceremonies: A Guide for Caregivers, 2094 Creating Meaningful Funeral Services: A Guide for Families, 2095 Creativity in Death Education and Counseling, 493 Cremation, 2071 A Critical Examination of the Belief in a Life after Death, 824 A Cross-Cultural Look at Death, Dying, and Religion, 455 A Cross-Index of Indices of Books of Thanatology, 118 Crossing Over: Narratives of Palliative Care, 1744 Crossing the Bridge: Creating Ceremonies for Grieving and Healing from Life’s Losses, 2082 Cry for Help, 1188 The Cry for Help, 329 Cultural Changes in Attitudes toward Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 414 Cultural Issues in End-of-Life Decision Making, 394 The Culture of Death, 925 Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities, 2180 Cuttin’ the Body Loose: Historical, Biological, and Personal Approaches to Death and Dying, 1933 Dancing in My Nightgown: The Rhythms of Widowhood, 2144 Dancing on the Grave, 1449

335

Dancing with Broken Bones: Portraits of Death and Dying among Inner-City Poor, 441 Dancing with Mr. D: Notes on Life and Death, 1027 Day by Day, 787 The Day My Father Died: Women Share Their Stories of Love, Loss, and Life, 1803 Dead but Not Lost: Grief Narratives in Religious Traditions, 412 Dead Reckoning: A Therapist Confronts His Own Grief, 1409 Dealing Creatively with Death: A Manual of Death Education and Simple Burial, 2083 Dealing with Death, 323 Dealing with Death: A Four-Week Course to Help Junior Highers Explore Their Feelings about Death, 27 Dealing with Death and Dying, 949 Dealing with Death and Dying: A Nursing Skillbook, 1726 Dealing with Death: A Strategy for Tragedy, 342 Dealing with Death: Discussions of Death Presented for Those Concerned with the Delivery of Care Service for the Elderly, 33 Dealing with Grief, 1437 Dealing with Grief and Loss: Hope in the Midst of Pain, 1144 Dealing with Terminal Illness in the Family, 387 Dear Gift of Life: A Man’s Encounter with Death, 378 Death (Ball), 2061 Death (Maeterlinck), 1047 Death (Sprung), 243 Death (Spurgeon), 1080 Death (Stewart), 246 Death (Watts), 811 Death: A Bibliographical Guide, 123 Death: A Book of Preparation and Consolation, 1083 Death, Afterlife, and Eschatology, 825

336

Title Index

Death: An Anthropological Perspective, 1058 Death and Afterlife: Perspectives of World Religions, 1610 Death and Attitudes toward Death, 67 Death and Bereavement, 1035 Death and Bereavement across Cultures, 454 Death and Bereavement: A Halakhic Guide, 479 Death and Bereavement around the World: Asia, Australia, and New Zealand (Volume 4), 443 Death and Bereavement around the world: Death and Bereavement in Europe (Volume 3), 444 Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement in the Americas (Volume 2), 445 Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement in the Emerging World, 442 Death and Bereavement around the World: Major Religious Traditions, 446 Death and Beyond, 828 Death and Beyond in the Eastern Perspective: A Study Based on the Bardo Thodol and the I Ching, 435 Death and Burial in the Roman World, 1482 Death and Children: A Guide for Educators, Parents, and Caregivers, 503 Death and Contemporary Man: The Crisis of Terminal Illness, 641 Death and Decision, 355 Death and Denial: Interdisciplinary Perspectives on the Legacy of Ernest Becker, 1689 Death and Dignity, 370 Death and Dying (Donne), 970 Death and Dying (Kastenbaum), 1018 Death and Dying (Knox), 1029 Death and Dying (Peacock), 1326 Death and Dying (Sanders), 1066 Death and Dying: A Bibliographical Survey, 131

Death and Dying: A Bibliography, 19501974, 125 Death and Dying: A Bibliography (19741978), 126 Death and Dying: A Guide for Serving Adults with Mental Retardation, 1973 Death and Dying: A Living Study, 1002 Death and Dying: A Mediagraphy: An Annotated Listing of Audiovisual Materials, 127 Death and Dying among African Americans: Cultural Characteristics and Coping Tidbits, 398 Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography, 128 Death and Dying: An Educational Module for Special Educators, 238 Death and Dying: An Examination of Legislative and Policy Issues, 1627 Death and Dying: A Quality of Life, 1063 Death and Dying: A Reader, 890 Death and Dying: A Resource Bibliography for Clergy and Chaplains (1960-1976), 124 Death and Dying: A Selective Bibliography for Gerontology Instruction, 115 Death and Dying, A to Z: A Loose-Leaf Encyclopedic Handbook on Death and Dying and Related Subjects, 935 Death and Dying: Attitudes of Patient and Doctor, 76 Death and Dying: Challenge and Change, 989 Death and Dying: Current Issues in the Treatment of the Dying Person, 1061 Death and Dying Education, 537 Death and Dying: From a Health and Sociological Perspective, 981 Death and Dying from the Perspective of the Caring Professions: A Curriculum Model for the Local Church, 1862 Death and Dying in Central Appalachia: Changing Attitudes and Practices, 406 Death and Dying in Children’s and Young People’s Literature: A Survey and Bibliography, 524

Title Index Death and Dying: Individuals and Institutions, 931 Death and Dying in the Classroom: Readings for Reference, 535 Death and Dying, Life and Living, 960 Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints (Bender and Hagen), 848 Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints (Haley), 998 Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints (Winters), 1091 Death and Dying Sourcebook: Basic Consumer Health Information for the Layperson about End-of-Life Care and Related Ethical and Legal Issues, 1640 Death and Dying, Spirituality, and Religions: A Study of the Death Awareness Movement, 395 Death and Dying: Theory, Research, and Practice, 943 Death and Dying: The Tibetan Tradition, 447 Death and Dying Training in Counselor Education Programs: A National Study, 1995 Death and Dying: Understanding and Care, 631 Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures, 426 Death and Dying: Who Decides? (Alters), 842 Death and Dying: Who Decides? (Landes and Blair), 872 Death and Dying: Who Decides? (Snyder), 894 Death and Eastern Thought: Understanding Death in Eastern Religions and Philosophies, 1465 Death and Eternal Life (Hick), 832 Death and Eternal Life (Simpson), 838 Death and Ethnicity: A Psychocultural Study, 427 Death and Friends, 307 Death and Grief: A Guide for Clergy, 1911 Death and Grief and the Family, 1193 Death and Grief: Healing through Support, 1379

337

Death and Hope, 315 Death and Identity, 990 Death and Illness, 204 Death and Immortality (Perrett), 1613 Death and Immortality (Phillips), 1614 Death and Immortality (Pieper), 1615 Death and Its Mysteries, 1041 Death and Its Mystery before Death, 1926 Death and Life (D’Arcy and Gurrin), 962 Death and Life (Thielicke), 1901 Death and Life in the Tenth Century, 1458 Death and Loss: Compassionate Approaches in the Classroom, 513 Death and Medical Conduct, 1982 Death and Ministry: Pastoral Care of the Dying and the Bereaved, 1851 Death and Modern Man, 951 Death and Mourning, 1351 Death and Neurosis, 1668 Death and Presence: Studies in the Psychology of Religion, 827 Death and Sensuality: A Study of Eroticism and the Taboo, 1680 Death and Sleep: Their Analogy Illustrated by Examples, 1464 Death and Society: A Book of Readings and Sources, 491 Death and Spirituality, 969 Death and Sudden Death, 941 Death and the Adolescent: A Resource Handbook for Bereavement Support Groups in Schools, 2 Death and the Afterlife: A Cultural Encyclopedia, 475 Death and the Arc of Meaning in African American Literature, 477 Death and the Caring Community, 1883 Death and the College Student, 1076 Death and the Creative Life: Conversations with Prominent Artists and Scientists, 75 Death and the Curriculum, 484 Death and the Dead for Fun and Profit: Thanatological Entertainment as Popular Culture, 1682 Death and the Family: The Importance of Mourning, 1329 Death and Then What?, 1879

338

Title Index

Death and the Quest for Meaning: Essays in Honor of Herman Feifel, 1965 Death and the Regeneration of Life, 936 Death and the Right Hand, 1935 Death and the Sexes: An Examination of Differential Longevity, Attitudes, Behaviors, and Coping Skills, 100 Death and the Supreme Court, 1643 Death and the Visual Arts: An Original Arno Press Anthology, 1019 Death and Trauma: The Traumatology of Grieving, 1168 Death and Western Thought, 1917 Death, a New Perspective on the Phenomena of Disease and Dying, 725 Death: An Interdisciplinary Analysis, 1963 Death Anxiety, 86 Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumentation, and Application, 95 Death Anxiety of Perinatal Nurses: The Relationship to Death Education and Death Exposure, 483 Death, a Part of Life: An Experimental Unit, 521 Death around the World, 465 Death as a Fact of Life, 1004 Death as an Enemy According to Ancient Egyptian Conceptions, 1486 Death as a Speculative Theme in Religious, Scientific, and Social Thought: An Original Anthology, 1020 Death: A Teacher’s Guide, 520 Death Attitudes and the Older Adult: Theories, Concepts, and Applications, 58 Death: A User’s Guide, 1005 Death 101: A Workbook for Educating and Healing, 1304 Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses, 2024 Death-Bed Scenes, 2096 Death, Bereavement, and Mourning, 1003 Death, Brain Death, and Ethics, 871 Death, Burial, and the Individual in Early Modern England, 1463 Death: Confronting the Reality, 1880 Death: Coping with the Pain, 16

Death: Current Perspectives, 1075 Death Customs, 2088 The Death Decision, 1054 Death Deferred: How to Live Long and Happily, Defer Death, and Lose All Fear of It, 917 Death Descending, 640 Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 968 Death, Dying, and Bereavement: An Insight for Carers, 1074 Death, Dying, and Euthanasia, 863 Death, Dying, and Grief: A Bibliography, 113 Death, Dying, and Social Differences, 1057 Death, Dying, and Society, 1055 Death, Dying, and Terminal Illness, 937 Death, Dying, and the Biological Revolution: Our Last Quest for Responsibility, 902 Death, Dying, and the Law (McHugh), 1636 Death, Dying, and the Law (McLean), 1637 Death, Dying, Transcending, 1013 Death Education, 497 Death Education: A Concern for the Living, 500 Death Education: An Annotated Resource Guide, 539 Death Education and Counseling: A Training Manual, 498 Death Education and Death Anxiety in Student Nurse Aides, 508 Death Education as Part of Family Life Education: Using Imaginative Literature for Insights into Family Crises, 532 Death Education: A Survey and Study of Colleges and Universities, 485 Death Education: Attitudes of Teachers, School Board Members, and Clergy, 494 Death Education for the Health Professional, 1977 Death Education II: An Annotated Resource Guide, 538

Title Index Death Education in Canada: Survey, Curricula, Protocols, Bibliography, 519 Death Education: Preparation for Living, 502 Death Education Resource Book, 489 Death: End of the Beginning?, 1953 Death Etiquette for the 90s: What to Do, What to Say, 280 Death: Everyone’s Heritage, 192 Death, Fate, and the Gods: The Development of a Religious Idea in Greek Popular Belief and in Homer, 1919 Death, Gender, and Ethnicity, 409 Death, Grief and Bereavement: A Bibliography, 1845-1975, 110 Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A Chronological Bibliography, 18431970, 111 Death, Grief, and Bereavement II: A Bibliography, 1975-1980, 112 Death, Grief, and Caring Relationships, 1014 Death, Grief, and Mourning, 1184 Death, Grief, and Mourning in Contemporary Britain, 411 Death, Grief, and Mourning: Individual and Social Realities, 1082 Death, Grief, Mourning, the Funeral, and the Child, 191 Death: Grim Realities and Comic Relief, 954 Death, Heaven, and the Victorians, 1475 Death Imagery: Confronting Death Brings Us to the Threshold of Life, 97 Death in America, 99 Death in American Experience, 1474 Death in Black and White: Death, Ritual, and Family Ecology, 439 The Death in Every Now, 1956 Deathing: An Intelligent Alternative for the Final Moments of Life, 1700 Death in Other Words, 1084 Death in Our Lives and Thoughts, 80 Death Inside Out: The Hastings Center Report, 1081

339

Death: Interpretations by Dell, 1961 Death in the Classroom: A Resource Book for Teachers and Others, 499 A Death in the Family, 928 Death in the Middle Ages: Mortality, Judgment, and Remembrance, 1450 Death in the Midst of Life: Social and Cultural Influences on Death, Grief, and Mourning, 428 Death in the Operating Room, 1980 Death in the Public Scene, Facing the 1990s: Papers and Addresses of ADEC’s 1989 Conference, 490 Death in the School Community: A Handbook for Counselors, Teachers, and Administrators, 215 Death Is a Kind of Love, 1931 Death Is All Right, 1846 Death Is a Miracle, 1044 Death Is a Noun: A View of the End of Life, 1037 Death Is Hard to Live With: Teenagers Talk about How They Cope with Loss, 3 Death Is Natural, 220 Death Is of Vital Importance: On Life, Death, and Life after Death, 2126 Death: Its Causes and Phenomena with Special Reference to Immortality, 1600 Death: Meaning and Mortality in Christian Thought and Contemporary Culture, 1932 Death Meanings, 1968 Death: Medical, Spiritual, and Social Care of the Dying, 1015 Death, Mourning, and Burial: A CrossCultural Reader, 464 Death, Mourning, and Caring, 1048 Death of a Man, 1087 Death of a Mother: Daughters’ Stories, 1802 The Death of an Adult Child: A Book for and about Bereaved Parents, 1114 The Death of a Parent in Midlife: Coping Strategies, 1833

340

Title Index

The Death of a Parent: Reflections for Adults Mourning the Loss of a Father or Mother, 1814 Death of a Parent: Transition to a New Adult Identity, 1841 A Death of One’s Own, 350 Death on the Installment Plan, 325 Death out of the Closet: A Curriculum Guide to Living with Dying, 792 Death: Philosophical Soundings, 1924 Death, Property, and Lawyers: A Behavioral Approach, 1647 Death Rites: Law and Ethics at the End of Life, 1634 Death, Ritual, and Bereavement, 1467 Death Row Chaplain, 1861 Death, Sacrifice, and Tragedy, 1928 Death’s Door: Modern Dying and the Ways We Grieve, 993 Death Shall Have No Dominion (Holden), 1865 Death Shall Have No Dominion (McBride), 18 Death, Society, and Human Experience, 1021 The Deaths of Man, 1964 Death’s Single Privacy: Grieving and Personal Growth, 2192 Death Strain, 319 Death: The Coping Mechanism of the Health Professional, 2005 Death: The Doorway to the Future, 665 Death, the Experience, 745 Death: The Final Frontier, 1000 Death: The Final Stage of Growth, 1031 Death: The Glorious Adventure, 995 Death, the Press, and the Public, 275, 288 Death: The Riddle and the Mystery, 1940 Death: The Trip of a Lifetime, 453 Death to Dust: What Happens to Dead Bodies?, 2074 Death Warmed Over, 985 Death Week: Exploring the Dying Process, 763 A Death with Dignity, 380

Death with Dignity: A New Law Permitting Physician Aid-in-Dying, 885 Death with Dignity: An Inquiry into Related Public Issues, 900 Death with Dignity: A Reply to “On Dying Well,” 893 Death without Denial, Grief without Apology: A Guide for Facing Death and Loss, 2195 Death without End, 994 Death without Notice, 795 A Decembered Grief: Living with Loss While Others Are Celebrating, 1380 Deciding to Forego Life-Sustaining Treatment: A Report on the Ethical, Medical, and Legal Issues in Treatment Decisions, 1641 Decision for Death: Simulation of a Societal Consensus Group, 525 Defining Death: Medical, Legal, and Ethical Issues in the Determination of Death, 1642 The Denial of Death, 913 Describing Death in America: What We Need to Know, 514 Design for Death, 1687 Despair and the Return of Hope: Echoes of Mourning in Psychotherapy, 1675 Determination of Death: Theological, Medical, Ethical, and Legal Issues, 1639 The Development and Validation of a Knowledge Test of Death and Dying for College Students, 496 Development of the National Home and Hospice Care Survey, 1529 Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation, 85, 1472 Dialogues: The Dying and the Living, 289 Diary of Courage: Coping with LifeThreatening Illness, 762 Different Losses, Different Issues: What to Expect and How to Help, 1195 Dilemmas of Dying: A Study in the Ethics of Terminal Care, 898 Dimensions of Dying and Rebirth, 682

Title Index Dimensions of Grief: Adjusting to the Death of a Spouse, 2198 Dimensions of Loss and Death Education: A Resource and Curriculum Guide, 541 Disaster: A Psychological Essay, 1694 Discovering Grace in Grief, 1280 The Discovery of Death in Childhood and After, 137 Discussing Death: A Guide to Death Education, 518 Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Challenges, and Strategies for Practice, 1155 Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing Hidden Sorrow, 1994 Dissertation on the Disorder of Death: The State of the Frame under the Signs of Death Called Suspended Animation, 1693 Distance and the Dying Patient, 633 The Doctor and the Dying Patient, 1989 The Doctor as Judge of Who Shall Live and Who Shall Die, 896 Doctor Death: Medicine at the End of Life, an Exhibition at the Wellcome Institute for the History of Medicine, 1972 The Dominion of the Dead, 1001 Don’t Despair on Thursdays!: The Children’s Grief Management Book, 210 Don’t Let Death Ruin Your Life: A Practical Guide to Reclaiming Happiness after the Death of a Loved One, 1123 Don’t Take My Grief Away from Me, 1268 Doors Close, Doors Open: Widows, Grieving, and Growing, 2177 Do the Terminally Ill Have a Right to Die?, 907 The Dougy Letter: A Letter to a Dying Child, 590 The Drama of Love and Death, 317 Drawings from a Dying Child: Insights into Death from a Jungian Perspective, 550

341

Dreads and Besetting Fears, 926 Dreaming beyond Death: A Guide to Predeath Dreams and Visions, 1699 Dry Those Tears, 1352 Dying, 702 Dying: A Book of Comfort, 744 Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping, 786 Dying and Death: A Clinical Guide for Caregivers, 311 Dying and Death: A Resource for Christian Reflection, 1905 Dying and Death: Coping, Caring, and Understanding, 363 Dying and Death in Canada, 451 Dying and Death in Law and Medicine: A Forensic Primer for Health and Legal Professionals, 849 Dying and Death: Perspectives on the Role of the Financial and Estate Planner: A New Compensable Service, 1645 Dying and Dignity: The Meaning and Control of a Personal Death, 661 Dying and Disabled Children: Dealing with Loss and Grief, 566 Dying and Grief: Nursing Interventions, 1729 The Dying and the Bereaved Teenager, 21 Dying: A Psychoanalytic Study with Special Reference to Individual Creativity and Defensive Organization, 688 Dying at Home, 651 Dying at Home: A Family Guide for Caregiving, 374 Dying at Home with Cancer, 720 Dying at Home with Hospice, 1502 The Dying Child, 577 The Dying Child: An Annotated Bibliography, 106 The Dying Child, the Family, and the Health Professionals, 594 The Dying Child: The Management of the Child or Adolescent Who Is Dying, 569 Dying, Death, and Bereavement, 929

342

Title Index

Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, 957 Dying, Death, and Bereavement: Continuities, Changes, and Challenges: Papers from ADEC’s 1990 Conference, 516 Dying, Death, and Bereavement: Theoretical Perspectives and Other Ways of Knowing, 958 Dying, Death, and Disposal, 955 Dying, Death, and Grief: A Critically Annotated Bibliography and Source Book of Thanatology and Terminal Care, 130 Dying Declarations: Notes from a Hospice Volunteer, 1573 Dying Dignified: The Health Professional’s Guide to Care, 2002 Dying: Facing the Facts, 808 Dying, Grieving, Faith, and Family: A Pastoral Care Approach, 1853 Dying in an Institution: Nurse/Patient Perspectives, 644 Dying in the Human Life Cycle: Psychological, Biomedical, and Social Perspectives, 790 Dying of Cancer: The Final Year of Life, 719 The Dying Patient (Brim et al.), 1983 The Dying Patient (Twycross), 801 The Dying Patient: A Nursing Perspective, 1720 The Dying Patient: A Supportive Approach, 645 The Dying Patient in Psychotherapy: Desire, Dreams, and Individuation, 1670 The Dying Patient: The Medical Management of Incurable and Terminal Illness, 2055 The Dying Patient: The Role of the Family Doctor, Nurse, and Medical Social Worker, 2035 The Dying Person and the Family, 328 The Dying Process: Patients’ Experiences of Palliative Care, 1776

Dying Right: The Death with Dignity Movement, 862 The Dying Soul: Spiritual Care at the End of Life, 1855 The Dying Time: Practical Wisdom for the Dying and Their Caregivers, 330 Dying Unafraid, 921 Dying Was the Best Thing That Ever Happened to Me: Stories of Healing and Wisdom along Life’s Journey, 687 Dying We Live, 677 Dying We Live: The Final Messages and Records of the Resistance, 678 Dying Well, 803 Dying Well: A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their Carers, 371 Dying Well: The Prospect for Growth at the End-of-Life, 639 Dying with Dignity: A Plea for Personal Responsibility, 870 The Dynamics of Grief: Its Sources, Pain, and Healing, 1397 An Easeful Death?: Perspectives on Death, Dying, and Euthanasia, 878 Education of the Medical Student in Thanatology, 2137 The Effectiveness of a Death Education Program on Children’s Knowledge and Attitudes toward Death, 488 The Effect of the Death Education Film “In My Memory” on Elementary School Students in the La Crosse Wisconsin Public Schools, 495 The Effects of Chronic and Terminal Illness on the Family, 357 The Effects of Early Parent Death, 1809 Elders: The Need for Death Education, 506 Element Guide to Bereavement: Your Questions Answered, 1272 Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Josefina B. Magno Present Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing Terminal Illness, 1518 Elisabeth Kübler-Ross: Encountering Death and Dying, 817

Title Index Embarkations: A Guide to Dealing with Death and Parting, 1375 Embracing Their Memory: Loss and the Social Psychology of Storytelling, 1196 The Emerging Death Mystique: The Challenge and the Promise, 63 Empowering the Laity in a Local Church to Minister to the Dying, 1849 Empty Arms, 1415 The Empty Room: Surviving the Loss of a Brother or Sister at Any Age, 2103 Encounter with Terminal Illness, 724 Encyclopedia of Death, 1024 Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, 1008 The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, 948 Ending Life: Ethics and the Way We Die, 844 Endings: A Book about Death, 939 Endings: A Sociology of Death and Dying, 1026 The End Is Just the Beginning: Lessons in Grieving for African Americans, 403 The End of Life: A Discussion at the Nobel Conference, 52 End of Life Care: A Guide for Supporting Older People with Intellectual Disabilities and Their Families, 34 End-of-Life Care: Bridging Disability and Aging with Person-Centered Care, 38 End-of-Life Care: Clinical Practice Guidelines, 2014 End-of-Life Decisions: A Psychosocial Perspective, 895 End of Life in Care Homes: A Palliative Approach, 1771 End of Life Issues, 883 End of Life Issues: Interdisciplinary and Multidimensional Perspectives, 965 End of Life Nursing Care, 1733 End-of-Life Stories: Crossing Disciplinary Boundaries, 2124 Enduring Grief: True Stories of Personal Loss, 1370 Epsilon Country, 2116 Eschatology and the Mission of Christianity, 839

343

Eternity and Me: The Everlasting Things in Life and Death, 1028 Ethical Decisions in Medicine, 850 Ethical Dilemmas at the End of Life, 854 Ethical Issues in Death and Dying (Beauchamp and Perlin), 847 Ethical Issues in Death and Dying (Weir), 905 Ethical Issues in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved Aged, 47 Ethics at the Edges of Life: Medical and Legal Intersections, 884 Ethics in Hospice Care: Challenges to Hospice Values in a Changing Health Care Environment, 1539 The Ethics of Terminal Care: Orchestrating the End of Life, 874 Ethnic Groups of America: Their Morbidity, Mortality, and Behavior Disorders, Volume I: The Jews, 469 Ethnic Variations in Dying, Death, and Grief: Diversity in Universality, 420 Euthanasia and Other Aspects of Life and Death, 886 Euthanasia and the Right to Die: A Comparative View, 887 Euthanasia Is Not the Answer: A Hospice Physician’s View, 1509 Euthanasia: The Good of the Patient, the Good of Society, 877 Euthanasia: The Moral Issues, 843 Every Person’s Guide to Death and Dying in the Jewish Tradition, 421 Everything You Need to Know about Grieving, 1390 Everything You Need to Know When a Parent Dies, 1811 Everything You Need to Know When Someone You Know Has Been Killed, 1361 Evidence-Based Symptom Control in Palliative Care: Systemic Reviews and Validated Clinical Practice Guidelines for Fifteen Common Problems in

344

Title Index

Patients with Life Limiting Disease, 1777 The Evidence for Life after Death, 1683 The Evil Eye, Thanatology, and Other Essays, 2135 An Existential Understanding of Death: A Phenomenology of Ontological Anxiety, 1959 The Experience of Death: The Moral Problem of Suicide, 1949 The Experience of Dying (Greinacher and Muller), 680 The Experience of Dying (Pattison), 1060 Experiences Facing Death, 629 Experiences of Death: An Anthropological Account, 1006 Experiencing Bereavement, 1098 Explaining Death to Children (Grollman), 278 Explaining Death to Children (Jackson), 283 An Exploration of Issues and Challenges Surrounding the Marital Relationships of Parents after the Death of a Child, 604 Expressions of Healing: Embracing the Process of Grief, 1187 Faces of Death: Grief, Dying, Euthanasia, Suicide, 860 Facing Death (Kavanaugh), 341 Facing Death (Magee), 741 Facing Death and Finding Hope: A Guide to the Emotional and Spiritual Care of the Dying, 738 Facing Death and Grief: A Sensible Perspective for the Modern Person, 1274 Facing Death and Loss, 1056 Facing Death and the Life After, 679 Facing Death: Images, Insights, and Interventions: A Handbook for Educators, Healthcare Professionals, and Counselors, 932 Facing Death: Where Culture, Religion, and Medicine Meet, 472 Facing Grief and Death, 1410

Facing It: AIDS Diaries and the Death of the Author, 646 Facing Life Alone, 1132 Facing Terminal Illness, 758 Facing the “King of Terrors”: Death and Society in an American Community, 1750-1990, 1484 Facing the Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child, 596 Factbook on Man from Birth to Death, 972 The Facts of Death, 1079 Fading Away: The Experience of Transition in Families with Terminal Illness, 322 Families and Life-Threatening Illness, 347 Families and the Gravely Ill: Roles, Rules, and Rights, 892 Families Facing Death: Family Dynamics of Terminal Illness, 773 Families Making Sense of Death, 361 The Family Book of Hospice Care, 1520 The Family Caregiver’s Journal: A Guide to Facing the Terminal Illness of a Loved One, 637 Family Grief Therapy, 1226 The Family in Mourning: A Guide for Health Professionals, 2007 Fatherless Sons: Healing the Legacy of Loss, 1818 Fatherless Women: How We Change after We Lose Our Dads, 1838 Father Loss: Daughters Discuss the Man Who Got Away, 1842 Fearful Living: The Fear of Death, 924 Fear No Evil: One Man Deals with Terminal Illness, 810 The Fear of the Dead in Primitive Religion, 919 Fear of the Unknown: Enlightened Aid-inDying, 914 Fears Related to Death and Suicide, 918 A Few Months to Live: Different Paths to Life’s End, 794 Films on Death and Dying, 1690 The Final Act of Living, 1632

Title Index Final Choices: To Live or to Die in an Age of Medical Technology, 638 Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice at the End of Life, 438 Final Departures: Weird and Wonderful Tales of Death, Funerals, and Bereavement from around the World, 408 Final Exam, 1749 Final Exit: The Practicalities of SelfDeliverance and Assisted Suicide for the Dying, 865 Final Gifts: Understanding the Special Awareness Needs and Communications of the Dying, 271 The Final Goodbye: The Struggle to SelfAwareness, 1843 The Final 48 Hours: Observations on the Last Days of Life, 782 The Final Mystery, 430 The Final Transition, 713 Final Victory: Taking Charge of the Last Stages of Life, Facing Death on Your Own Terms, 1785 Finding Hope When a Child Dies: What Other Cultures Can Teach Us, 599 Finding My Way: Healing and Transforming through Loss and Grief, 1364 Finding Your Way after Your Spouse Dies, 2160 First American Hospice: Three Years of Home Care, 1547 First Person Mortal: Personal Narratives of Dying, Death, and Grief, 940 The First Year Alone, 2163 The First Year of Bereavement, 1181 Focus on the End of Life: Scientific and Social Issues, 1039 For Better or Worse: For Couples Whose Child Has Died, 567 The Forgotten Mourners: Guidelines for Working with Bereaved Children, 219 For the Bereaved, 1243 For the Bereaved: The Road to Recovery, 1241 For the Living, 2075

345

For the Living: Coping, Caring, and Communicating with the Terminally Ill, 277 For Those Bereaved: But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort, 1242 For Those Who Live: Helping Children Cope with the Death of a Brother or Sister, 2107 Fragile Lives: Death, Dying, and Care, 356 Fragments on the Deathwatch, 693 Frank Answers on Death, 505 Freedom and Death, 358 Freud: Living and Dying, 1962 Friendgrief: An Absence Called Presence, 1381 From Death to Mourning, 1429 From Grief to Gladness: Coming Back from Widowhood, 2170 From Grief to Glory: Rediscovering Life after Loss, 1354 From Grief to Glory: Spiritual Journeys of Mourning Parents, 554 From Mourning to Morning: Discovering the Healing Power of God’s Love to Take You from Grief to Glory, 1355 From Mourning to Morning: Six Years Later, 1133 From This World to the Next: Jewish Approaches to Illness, Death, and the Afterlife, 424 The Funeral and the Mourners: Pastoral Care of the Bereaved, 1866 The Funeral: An Experience of Value, 2072 The Funeral Director and His Role as Counselor, 2032 The Funeral Encyclopedia: A Source Book, 2093 The Funeral: Facing Death as an Experience of Life, 2086 The Funeral: Sourcebook for Ministers, 1852 The Funeral: Vestige or Value?, 2073 Gentle Closings: How to Say Goodbye to Someone You Love, 293

346

Title Index

A Gentle Death: Personal Caregiving to the Terminally Ill, 314 Geographic Patterns in the Risk of Dying and Associated Factors, United States, 1968-1972, 778 Geriatrics and Thanatology, 51 Getting through the Night: Finding Your Way after the Loss of a Loved One, 1332 Getting to the Other Side of Grief: Overcoming the Loss of a Spouse, 2209 The Gift of Death, 1918 The Gift of Grief: Healing the Pain of Everyday Losses, 1401 Gift of Tears: A Practical Approach to Loss and Bereavement Counseling, 1251 Gifts for the Living: Conversations with Caregivers on Death and Dying, 294 Gifts: Two Hospice Professionals Reveal Messages from Those Passing On, 1582 Gili’s Book: A Journey into Bereavement for Parents and Families, 585 Give Sorrow Words: A Father’s Passage through Grief, 561 Give Sorrow Words: Perspectives on Loss and Trauma, 1197 Give Sorrow Words: Working with a Dying Child, 584 Giving a Voice to Sorrow: Personal Responses to Death and Mourning, 1443 Giving Sorrow Words: How to Cope with Grief and Get on with Your Life, 1258 God, Grass, and Grace: A Theology of Death, 1894 Gone from My Sight: The Dying Experience, 715 Good Answers to Tough Questions about Death, 142 A Good Death: A Guide for Patients and Carers Facing Terminal Illness at Home, 348 A Good Death: Taking More Control at the End of Your Life, 701

The Good Death: The New American Search to Reshape the End of Life, 388 A Good Dying: Shaping Health Care for the Last Months of Life, 695 Good End: End-of-Life Concerns and Conversations about Hospice and Palliative Care, 1491 Good Grief: A Constructive Approach to the Problem of Loss, 1425 Good Grief: Experiencing Loss, 1248 Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with over Elevens and Adults: A Holistic Approach, 26 Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with under Elevens: A Holistic Approach, 252 Good Grief: Helping Groups of Children When a Friend Dies, 160 Good Grief Rituals: Tools for Healing, 2063 Good Life/Good Death: A Doctor’s Case for Euthanasia and Suicide, 309 A Graceful Exit: Life and Death on Your Own Terms, 632 The Grace in Dying: How We Are Transformed Spiritually as We Die, 788 A Gradual Awakening, 1254 Gramp: A Man Ages and Dies, 39 Grandparents Cry Twice: Help for Bereaved Grandparents, 609 Grandpa’s Berries: A Story to Help Children Understand Grief and Loss, 148 Grave Matters: A Lively History of Death around the World, 1449 Grave Words: Notifying Survivors about Sudden, Unexpected Deaths, 282 The Great Change: A Native American Perspective on Dying, 480 Greeting the Angels: An Imaginal View of the Mourning Process, 1298 Grief: A Natural Reaction to Loss, 1200 Grief and AIDS, 1374 Grief and Bereavement, 1447 Grief and Growth: Pastoral Resources for Emotional and Spiritual Growth, 1896

Title Index Grief and How to Live with It, 1307 Grief and Loss: Theories and Skills for Helping Professionals, 2052 Grief and Loss: Understanding the Journey, 1171 Grief and Mourning in Cross-Cultural Perspectives, 467 Grief and the Healing Arts: Creativity as Therapy, 1113 Grief and the Loss of an Adult Child, 1269 Grief and the Meaning of the Funeral, 2079 Grief as a Family Process: A Developmental Approach to Clinical Practice, 1371 The Grief Care Guide, 1382 Grief: Climb toward Understanding, SelfHelp When You Are Struggling, 1150 Grief Counseling and Grief Therapy: A Handbook for the Mental Health Practitioner, 2058 Grief Counseling and Sudden Death: A Manual and Guide, 1161 Grief Counseling Homework Planner, 1341 Grief Dreams: How They Help Heal Us after the Death of a Loved One, 1438 Grief, Dying, and Death: Clinical Interventions for Caregivers, 2033 Grief Education for Caregivers of the Elderly, 42 Grief for a Season, 1405 Grief: How to Live with Sorrow, 1137 Grief in Children: A Handbook for Adults, 154 Grief in Cross-Cultural Perspective: A Casebook, 457 Grief in School Communities: Effective Support Strategies, 226 Griefjourney: Notes on Grief for Teens, Young Adults, and Anyone Who Is Grieving, 24 Grief, Loss, and Death: The Shadow Side of Ministry, 1907 Grief Ministry: Helping Others Mourn, 1909 Grief, Mourning, and Death Ritual, 2069

347

A Grief Observed, 1043 The Grief Process, 1388 The Grief Process: Analysis and Counseling, 1389 Grief Quest: Reflections for Men Coping with Loss, 1291 The Grief Recovery Handbook: A Stepby-Step Program for Moving beyond Loss, 1215 Griefs and Discontents: The Focus of Change, 1344 Grief’s Courageous Journey, 1130 Grief: Selected Readings, 1131 Grief’s Journey . . . When a Child Dies, 563 Grief’s Slow Work, 1109 Grief Steps: Ten Steps to Regroup, Rebuild, and Renew after Any Life Loss, 1311 Grief Support Training for Clergy and Congregations: Training Manual, 1844 Grief: The Mourning After, Dealing with Adult Bereavement, 1356 Grief Therapy for Men: How to Grieve Like a “Real” Man, 1308 Grief Therapy: Out of Pain Can Come Profound Transforming Healing, 1223 Grief, Transition, and Loss: A Pastor’s Practical Guide, 1876 A Grief Unveiled: One Father’s Journey through the Death of a Child, 574 Grieving, 1335 Grieving: A Beginner’s Guide, 1283 Grieving: A Handbook for Those Who Care, 1121 The Grieving Child: A Parent’s Guide, 158 Grieving Mindfully: A Compassionate and Spiritual Guide to Coping with Loss, 1239 Grieving: Our Path Back to Peace, 1427 The Grieving Teen: A Guide for Teenagers and Their Friends, 8 Grieving the Loss of Someone You Love: Daily Meditations to Help You through the Grieving Process, 1295

348

Title Index

The Grieving Time: A Year’s Account of Recovery from Loss, 1124 The Grim Reader: Writings on Death, Dying, and Living On, 381 Group Psychotherapy with People Who Are Dying, 1666 Growing through Grief: A K-12 Curriculum to Help Young People through All Kinds of Loss, 214 Growing through Loss and Grief: A Counselor’s Guide, 2027 Growing through Loss and Grief: Dealing with Life’s Tough Times, 1327 Guidebook on Helping Persons with Mental Retardation Mourn, 1661 Guided Grief Imagery: A Resource for Grief Ministry and Death Education, 1858 Guidelines on the Termination of LifeSustaining Treatment and the Care of the Dying, 2006 A Guide to Dying at Home, 664 A Guide to Life: Jewish Laws and Customs of Mourning, 459 Guide to the 400 Best Children’s and Adult’s Multicultural Books about Disability, Illness, and Death, 109 Guiding Your Child through Grief, 155 Handbook for Mortals: Guidance for People Facing Serious Illness, 739 Handbook for Those Who Grieve: What You Should Know and What You Can Do During Times of Loss: A Resource for Family, Friends, Ministers, Caregivers, and Colleagues, 1108 A Handbook for Widowers, 2141 Handbook of Adolescent Death and Bereavement, 4 Handbook of Bereavement: Theory, Research, and Intervention, 1396 Handbook of Childhood Death and Bereavement, 146 Handbook of Death and Dying, 942 The Handbook of Hospice Care, 1499 Handbook of Hospice Policies and Procedures, 1527

Handbook of Palliative Care, 1761 Hanging On, 648 The Hardest Challenge: Surviving the Death of a Spouse, 2153 The Harlem Book of the Dead, 476 Heading toward Omega: In Search of the Meaning of Near-Death Experience, 1712 Healing a Child’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers, 259 Healing a Father’s Grief, 1359 Healing a Friend’s Grieving Heart: One Hundred Practical Ideas for Helping Someone You Love through Loss, 1430 Healing after Loss: Daily Meditations for Working through Grief, 1204 Healing after the Suicide of a Loved One, 1385 Healing and Growing through Grief, 1316 Healing and the Grief Process, 1343 Healing a Teen’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers, 28 Healing Children’s Grief: Surviving a Parent’s Death from Cancer, 144 Healing Conversations: What to Say When You Don’t Know What to Say, 279 Healing Grief, 1219 Healing Grief at Work: One Hundred Practical Ideas after Your Workplace Is Touched by Loss, 1431 Healing Grief: Reclaiming Life after Any Loss, 1413 A Healing Grief: Walking with Your Friend through Loss, 1423 Healing into Life and Death, 733 A Healing Journey through Grief: Your Journey for Reflection/Recovery and Clinician’s Guide to a Healing Journey through Grief, 1342 Healing Pain: Attachment, Loss, and Grief Therapy, 1250 The Healing Power of Grief, 1287 The Healing Power of Grief: The Journey through Loss to Life and Laughter, 1259

Title Index The Healing Sorrow Workbook: Rituals for Transforming Grief and Loss, 2081 Healing the Bereaved Child: Grief Gardening, Growth through Grief, and Other Touchstones for Caregivers, 258 Healing the Dying, 1730 Healing the Grieving Heart: Practical Ideas for Families, Friends, and Caregivers, 1432 Healing through the Shadow of Loss, 1140 Healing Together: For Couples Grieving the Death of Their Baby, 592 Healing Your Grieving Heart for Kids: 100 Practical Ideas: Simple Advice and Activities for Children after a Death, 260 Healing Your Grieving Heart for Teens: One Hundred Practical Ideas, 29 The Healing Your Grieving Heart Journal for Teens, 30 Healing Your Grieving Heart: One Hundred Practical Ideas, 1433 The Heart of Grief: Death and the Search for Lasting Love, 1106 The Heart of Hospice, 1552 Heavenly Hurts: Surviving AIDS-Related Deaths and Losses, 1229 The Helper’s Journey: Working with People Facing Grief, Loss, and LifeThreatening Illness, 1246 Help for Bereaved Parents, 622 Help for the Bereaved, 1383 Help for the Bereaved: What the Family of the Deceased Should Know, 1649 Help for the Terminally Ill, 1900 Help for Your Grief: Turning Emotional Loss into Growth, 1172 Helping a Child Understand Death, 251 Helping Adults with Mental Retardation Grieve a Death Loss, 1667 Helping Bereaved Children: A Handbook for Practitioners, 255 Helping Bereaved Parents: A Clinician’s Guide, 2047 Helping Children Cope: Mastering Stress through Books and Stories, 156 Helping Children Cope with Death, 232

349

Helping Children Cope with Death: A Guide for School Personnel, 247 Helping Children Cope with Death: Guidelines and Resources, 254 Helping Children Cope with Grief, 261 Helping Children Cope with Loss: A Bibliotherapy Approach, 139 Helping Children Cope with Separation and Loss, 177 Helping Children Cope with the Death of a Parent: A Guide for the First Year, 200 Helping Children Cope with the Loss of a Loved One: A Guide for Grownups, 187 Helping Children Grieve When Someone They Love Dies, 173 Helping Children with the Mystery of Death, 222 Helping Each Other in Widowhood, 2200 Helping Grieving People–When Tears Are Not Enough: A Handbook for Care Providers, 1217 Helping People through Grief, 1238 Helping Teens Work through Grief, 23 Helping the Bereaved, 1162 Helping the Bereaved: Therapeutic Interventions for Children, Adolescents, and Adults, 1656 Helping the Dying Patient and His Family, 805 Helping the Grieving Child in School, 165 Helping the Grieving Student: A Guide for Teachers: A Practical Guide for Dealing with Death in Your Classroom, 151 Helping Women Cope with Grief, 1376 Helping Young Children Cope with Crisis: A Guide for Training Child Care Workers, 190 Helping Your Children to Understand Death, 540 Helplessness and Hope: Pastoral Care in Terminal Illness, 1887 Helplessness: On Depression, Development, and Death, 784

350

Title Index

Help Me Say Goodbye: Activities for Helping Kids Cope When a Special Person Dies, 236 Help Your Marriage Survive the Death of a Child, 612 Here Comes Immortality, 1619 Here Is My Hope: Inspirational Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital, 337 Hidden Futures: Death and Immortality in Ancient Egypt, Anatolia, the Classical, Biblical, and Arabic-Islamic World, 1451 The High Cost of Dying: A Guide to Funeral Planning, 2098 A History of Human Responses to Death: Mythologies, Rituals, and Ethics, 2085 A History of Ideas about the Prolongation of Life, 685 A History of Mourning, 1455 History of Thanatology: Philosophical, Religious, Psychological, and Sociological Ideas Concerning Death from Primitive Times to the Present, 1448 A History of the Conception of Death in America, 1650-1860, 1479 Ho for Heaven! Man’s Changing Attitude toward Dying, 91 Holy Living and Holy Dying, 1899 Home Care for the Dying: A Reassuring, Comprehensive Guide to Physical and Emotional Care, 351 Home Care for the Dying Child: Professional and Family Perspectives, 595 Honoring Differences: Cultural Issues in the Treatment of Trauma and Loss, 449 Honouring Sacred Spaces: Voicing Stories of Terminal Illness, 781 Hope for the Bereaved: Understanding, Coping, and Growing through Grief, 1367 Horrendous Death and Health: Toward Action, 1256 Horrendous Death, Health, and WellBeing, 1042 The Hospice: 1800-1948, 1488

Hospice, a Caring Challenge, 1561 Hospice: A Caring Community, 1544 Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing Terminal Illness, 1519 Hospice, a Labor of Love, 1523 The Hospice Alternative: A New Context for Death and Dying, 1566 The Hospice Alternative: Living with Dying, 1554 Hospice and Home Health Agency Characteristics: United States, 1991, 1511 Hospice and Ministry, 1867 Hospice and Palliative Care: An Interdisciplinary Approach, 1789 Hospice and Palliative Care: Concepts and Practice, 1583 Hospice and Palliative Care Handbook: Quality, Compliance, and Reimbursement, 1555 Hospice and Palliative Care Music Therapy: A Guide to Program Development and Clinical Care, 1533 Hospice and Palliative Care Nursing, 1745 Hospice and Palliative Care: Questions and Answers, 1581 Hospice, an International English Language Bibliography, 129 Hospice: A Photographic Inquiry, 1524 Hospice Approaches to Pediatric Care, 560 Hospice as a Social Health Care Institution, 1568 Hospice as a Social Health Care Institution: Report of the Pre-Forum Institute of the 105th Annual Forum of the National Conference on Social Welfare, 1534 Hospice Care, 1530 Hospice Care, a Growing Concept in the United States: Report to the Congress, 1589 Hospice Care and Cultural Diversity, 419 Hospice Care and Culture: Comparison of the Hospice Movement in the West and Japan, 1558

Title Index Hospice Care Demonstration Project: A Study of Two Models of Hospice Home Care Delivery, 1494 Hospice Care for Children, 1493 Hospice Care for Patients with Advanced Progressive Dementia, 1592 The Hospice: Care for People with Terminal Illness, 1536 Hospice Care on the International Scene, 468 Hospice Care Planning: An Interdisciplinary Guide, 1521 Hospice Care: Principles and Practice, 1508 Hospice Care Systems: Structure, Process, Costs, and Outcomes, 1564 Hospice: Caring for the Terminally Ill, 1545 The Hospice Choice: In Pursuit of a Peaceful Death, 1549 Hospice: Complete Care for the Terminally Ill, 1597 The Hospice Concept, 1525 Hospice Concepts: A Guide to Palliative Care in Terminal Illness, 1793 Hospice: Creating New Models of Care for the Terminally Ill, 1577 The Hospice: Development and Administration, 1510 Hospice Education Program for Nurses, 1739 The Hospice Handbook: A Complete Guide, 1495 Hospice Handbook: A Guide for Managers and Planners, 1569 A Hospice Handbook: A New Way to Care for the Dying, 1526 The Hospice Heritage: Celebrating Our Future, 1507 Hospice Hounds: Animals and Healing at the Borders of Death, 1575 Hospice Inpatient Environments: Compendium and Guidelines, 1501 The Hospice Movement, 1563 The Hospice Movement: A Better Way of Caring for the Dying, 1586

351

The Hospice Movement: Easing Death’s Pains, 1584 Hospice or Hemlock?: Searching for Heroic Compassion, 1571 Hospice: Practice, Pitfalls, and Promise, 1506 Hospice, Prescription for Terminal Care, 1504 Hospice Programs and Public Policy, 1588 The Hospice Project Report, 1559 Hospice Resource Manual for Local Churches, 1487 Hospice Saint John: A Three-Year Demonstration of Hospice Care, 1553 Hospices: A New Way to Die, 1515 Hospice Self-Assessment and Survey Guide, 1540 Hospice Standards Manual, 1541 Hospice: The Living Idea, 1579 Hospice: The Nursing Perspective, 1735 Hospice U.S.A., 1546 The Hospice Way, 1595 The Hospice Way of Death, 1514 Hospital-Based Palliative Care Teams: The Hospital-Hospice Interface, 1516 Hospital-Hospice Management Models: Integration and Collaboration, 1550 The Hour of Death, 1036 The Hour of Our Death: The Classical History of Western Attitudes toward Death over the Last One Thousand Years, 1102 A House Called Helen: The Development of Hospice Care for Children, 1596 The House Staff and Thanatology, 2118 How Can Care of the Terminally Ill Be Improved?, 1798 How Can I Help?: How to Support Someone Who Is Grieving, 1230 How Different Religions View Death and Afterlife, 425 How Do We Tell the Children?, 231 How It Feels When a Parent Dies, 1828 How Should One Cope with Death?, 1293

352

Title Index

How Should the Physical and Emotional Pain of Terminal Illness Be Addressed?, 1799 How to Care for Yourself While You Care for the Dying and the Bereaved, 389 How to Conduct a One-Day Conference on Death Education: The Dos and Don’ts, 543 How to Conquer Physical Death, 1895 How to Cope with a Fatal Illness: The Rational Management of Death and Dying, 667 How to Die, 775 How to Face Death without Fear, 923 How to Go on Living after the Death of a Baby, 605 How to Go on Living When Someone You Love Dies, 1335 How to Prepare for Death: Your Own or Someone Else’s, 662 How to Survive the Loss of a Child: Filling the Emptiness and Rebuilding Your Life, 616 How to Survive the Loss of a Love: FiftyEight Things to Do When There Is Nothing to Be Done, 2154 How to Survive the Loss of a Parent: A Guide for Adults, 1804 How We Die: Reflections on Life’s Final Chapter, 756 How We Grieve: Relearning the World, 1107 How Will They Know If I’m Dead?: Transcending Disability and Terminal Illness, 703 Human Aging and Dying: A Study in Sociocultural Gerontology, 59 The Human Encounter with Death, 332 I Can’t Stop Crying: It’s So Hard When Someone You Love Dies, 1275 I Don’t Know What to Say: How to Help and Support Someone Who Is Dying, 270 If I Should Wake Before I Die: The Medical and Biblical Truth about Near-Death Experiences, 1701

If Your Dearest Should Die, 1122 I Know Just How You Feel: Avoiding the Clichés of Grief, 291 The Image of Death as Portrayed in Fiction for Children, 1685 Images of Growth and Death, 1688 Images of Man and Death, 1679 I’m Grieving as Fast as I Can: How Young Widows and Widowers Can Cope and Heal, 2159 I’m Here to Help: A Guide for Caregivers, Hospice Workers, and Volunteers, 1572 I Miss Grandpa: A Story to Help Your Child Understand Death–and Eternal Life, 172 I Miss You: A First Look at Death, 536 The Immoralist: An Approach to the Engineering of Man’s Divinity, 1604 Immortality, 1612 The Immortality Factor, 1617 Immortality: Physically, Scientifically, Now: A Reasonable Guarantee of Bodily Preservation, a General Discussion, and Research Targets, 1601 The Impact of an Educational Intervention Module on Death and Dying on Death Anxiety among Middle-Aged and Older Adults in North Carolina, 43 The Impact of Cognitive Development and Socialization Factors on the Concept of Death among Adults with Mental Retardation, 1662 Improving Care for the End of Life: A Sourcebook for Health Care Managers and Clinicians, 2020 Improving End-of-Life Care: Why Has It Been So Difficult?, 1770 The Inability to Mourn: Principles of Collective Behavior, 1296 In after Days: Thoughts on the Future Life, 704 Including the Children: A Resource Guide for Adults to Help Children Deal with the Terminal Illness and Death of a Loved One, 213

Title Index Income Level and Parental Attitudes toward Death Education for Preschool Children, 528 The Individual: A Study of Life and Death, 1072 The Individual, Society, and Death, 1913 Infection Control in Home Care and Hospice, 1574 In Lieu of Flowers: A Conversation for the Living, 273 In Sickness and in Health: How to Cope When Your Loved One Is Ill, 684 Insights on Death and Dying, 1738 Institutional Protocols for Decisions about Life-Sustaining Treatments: Special Report, 802 Interacting with Dying Patients: An Interhospital Nursing Research and Nursing Education Project, 1731 The Interpretation of Death, 1961 Interpreting Death: Christian Theology and Pastoral Practice, 1868 Interventions with Bereaved Children, 241 In the Arms of Others: A Cultural History of the Right-to-Die in America, 1460 In the End, the Beginning: The Life of Hope, 1299 In the Light of Dying: The Journals of a Hospice Volunteer, 1587 In the Midst of Life: A Hospice Volunteer’s Story, 1576 In the Midst of Winter: Selections from the Literature of Mourning, 1297 In the Potter’s Hands: Nine Wake Services, 2066 In the Presence of Grief: Helping Family Members Resolve Death, Dying, and Bereavement Issues, 1975 In the Shadow of Loss: Parents and Siblings of the Chronically Ill Child, 2100 Intimate Death: How the Dying Teach Us How to Live, 698 An Intimate Loneliness: Supporting Bereaved Parents and Siblings, 611 Intimations of Mortality, 814 In Times of Sorrow, 1183

353

Into the Valley: Death and the Socialization of Medical Students, 2004 Introducing Death and Dying: Readings and Exercises, 947 Introduction to Forensic Sciences, 975 An Introduction to Thanatology: Death and Dying in American Society, 2136 Inventing the American Way of Death, 1830-1920, 982 An Investigation among Junior Highs into the Understanding of Death and Dying and a Program Response, 20 The Investigation of Death, 1691 An Investigation of the Adolescent Sibling Bereavement Process and Adaptation, 13 Is Death the End?, 840 Is There a Duty to Die?, 864 Is There a Duty to Die?: And Other Essays in Bio-Ethics, 861 Is There an Answer to Death?, 1946 Is There Life after Death?, 1616 It Must Have Been Moonglow: Reflections on the First Years of Widowhood, 2164 I Wasn’t Ready to Say Goodbye: Surviving, Coping, and Healing after the Sudden Death of a Loved One, 1312 I Will Remember You: What to Do When Someone You Love Dies: A Guidebook through Grief for Teens, 6 I Will Tell Thee the Mystery, 819 “I Wish I Could Hold Your Hand”: A Child’s Guide to Grief and Loss, 216 Janet and Me: An Illustrated Story of Love and Loss, 1264 A Jewish Book of Comfort, 429 Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning, 461 The Jewish Mourner’s Book of Why, 2077 Jewish Reflections on Death, 462 The Jewish Tradition and Choices at the End of Life: A New Judaic Approach to Illness and Dying, 471 The Jewish Way in Death and Mourning, 433

354

Title Index

Journal of Religion, Disability, and Health, 38 Journey’s End: Death and Mourning, 1175 A Journey through Grief: Gentle Specific Help to Get You through the Most Difficult Stages of Grieving, 1118 The Journey through Grief: Reflections on Healing, 1434 Journey to the Other Side, 815 The Journey with Death, 1049 Joy Beyond Grief, 1100 Joy in the Face of Death, 68 The Joy of Living and Dying in Peace, 653 The Judgment of the Dead, 1854 Judgment of the Dead: Life after Death in Major Religions, 821 Just You and Me: Making Memories with Your Children, 223 Keys to Dealing with the Loss of a Loved One, 1233 Keys to Helping Children Deal with Death and Grief, 179 The Kids’ Book about Death and Dying, by and for Kids, 527 A Land beyond Tears: The Liberating Approach to Death and Dying, 81 Landscape without Gravity: A Memoir of Grief, 1105 Language, Metaphysics, and Death, 971 Last Breath: Cautionary Tales from the Limits of Human Endurance, 793 Last Chapters: A Sociology of Aging and Dying, 41 The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, 966 The Last Enemy: A Christian Understanding of Death, 823 The Last Enemy: Living with Terminal Illness, 686 Last Rights: A Case for the Good Death, 746 Last Rights?: Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia Debated, 899

Last Rights: Death and Dying in Texas Law and Experience, 1626 The Last Things Concerning Death, Purification after Death, Resurrection, 829 Last Touch: Preparing for a Parent’s Death, 1807 Last Week My Brother Anthony Died, 171 Last Wish, 772 Law at the End of Life: The Supreme Court and Assisted Suicide, 888 The Law of Death and Disposal of the Dead, 1623 The Lazarus Case: Life-and-Death Issues in Neonatal Intensive Care, 1775 Leaders Guide for Grief Recovery Support Groups, 1317 Lead Me Home: An African American’s Guide through the Grief Journey, 397 Learning to Die, 752 Learning to Die, Learning to Live, 699 Learning to Live as a Widow, 2174 Learning to Say Goodbye: Dealing wth Death and Dying, 1062 Learning to Say Goodbye: When a Parent Dies, 196 The Least Worst Death: Essays in Bioethics on the End of Life, 845 Legal and Ethical Aspects of Treating Critically and Terminally Ill Patients, 1628 Legal Frontiers of Death and Dying, 1625 Lesbian Widows: Invisible Grief, 2205 Lessons from the Dead: The Graveyard as a Classroom for the Study of the Life Cycle, 504 Lessons from the Dying, 789 Lessons from the Light: What We Can Learn from the Near-Death Experience, 1715 Lessons of Loss: A Guide to Coping, 1309 Let Me Die before I Wake: Hemlock’s Book of Self-Deliverance for the Dying, 866 Let Someone Hold You: The Journey of a Hospice Priest, 1565 Let’s Talk about When a Parent Dies, 256

Title Index Letters from a Friend: A Sibling’s Guide for Coping and Grief, 2099 Letting Go, 807 Letting Go: A Holistic and Meditative Approach to Living and Dying, 634 Letting Go: Caring for the Dying and the Bereaved, 306 Letting Go: Death, Dying, and the Law, 1651 Letting Go with Love: The Grieving Process, 1315 Life after Death (Hanley), 830 Life after Death (Kantonen), 833 Life after Death (Toynbee et al.), 841 Life after Death: A Study of the Elderly Widowed, 2145 Life after Grief: How to Survive Loss and Trauma, 1247 Life after Life: The Investigation of a Phenomenon–Survival of Bodily Death, 1707 Life after Loss: Conquering Grief and Finding Hope, 1301 Life after Loss: Getting over Grief, Getting on with Life, 1265 Life after Loss: The Lessons of Grief, 1414 Life after Suicide: A Ray of Hope for Those Left Behind, 1349 Life after What?, 1609 Life against Death, 313 Life and Death (Bultmann), 944 Life and Death (Dastre), 963 Life and Death (Flumiani), 984 Life and Death (Zim and Bleeker), 31 Life and Death Decisions: Psychological and Ethical Considerations in End-ofLife Care, 869 Life and Death: Grappling with the Moral Dilemmas of Our Time, 882 Life and Death Issues, 999 Life and Death: Philosophical Essays in Biomedical Ethics, 1915 Life and Loss: A Guide to Help Grieving Children, 166 Life at Death: A Scientific Investigation of the Near-Death Experience, 1713 Life before Death, 643

355

Life Begins at Death, 1906 Life, Death, and Beyond, 1695 Life, Death, and the Doctor, 873 Life, Death, and the Law, 1650 Life-Death Decisions in Health Care, 1992 Life in Relation to Death, 1065 Life Is Goodbye, Life Is Hello: Grieving Well through All Kinds of Loss, 1119 Life Is Victorious!: How to Grow through Grief, 1328 Life Lessons: Two Experts on Death and Dying Teach Us about the Mysteries of Life and Living, 1033 Lifelines, 2148 Life or Death–Who Controls?, 1958 Life, Psychotherapy, and Death: The End of Our Exploring, 1957 Life’s End: Technocratic Dying in an Age of Spiritual Yearning, 749 Life’s Living toward Dying: A Theological and Medical-Ethical Study, 859 Life’s Worth: The Case against Assisted Suicide, 855 Lifetimes: The Beautiful Way to Explain Death to Children, 202 Lifting the Taboo: Women, Death, and Dying, 492 Light and Death: One Doctor’s Fascinating Account of Near-Death Experiences, 1716 Light in the Valley, 352 Light on Aging and Dying, 49 The Lillian G. Kutscher Thanatology Collection in the Gill Library of the College of New Rochelle, 2130 The Lively Shadow: Living with the Death of a Child, 601 Lives and Deaths: Selections from the Works of Edwin S. Shneidman, 2129 Live Until You Die, 1952 Living and Dying, 736 Living and Dying: An Inquiry into the Enigma of Death and Afterlife, 822 Living and Dying at Murray Manor, 335 Living and Dying Gracefully, 649 Living and Dying Well, 881

356

Title Index

The Living and the Dead, 1086 The Living and the Dead: Social Dimensions of Death in South Asian Religions, 481 Living beyond Loss: Death in the Family, 1416 Living, Dreaming, Dying: Practical Wisdom from the Tibetan Book of the Dead, 753 Living in the Face of Death: The Tibetan Tradition, 448 Living Our Dying: A Way to the Sacred in Everyday Life, 376 Living through Loss: A Manual for Those Working with Issues of Terminal Illness and Bereavement, 709 Living through Loss: Interventions across the Life Span, 2008 Living through Mourning: Finding Comfort and Hope When a Loved One Has Died, 1360 Living through the Death of a Spouse: Leader’s Guide, 2206 Living through the Loss of Someone You Love: One Woman’s Story of Loss, Grief, and New-Found Hope, 1097 Living under the Sword: Psychosocial Aspects of Recurrent and Progressive Life-Threatening Illness, 1664 Living Victims, Stolen Lives: Parents of Murdered Children Speak to America, 621 Living When a Loved One Has Died, 1189 Living While Dying, 743 Living with a Man Who Is Dying, 668 Living with an Empty Chair: A Guide through Grief, 1404 Living with Death (Blackwell), 933 Living with Death (Segerberg), 783 Living with Death (Thielicke), 1967 Living with Death and Dying, 287 Living with Dying: A Guide for Relatives and Friends, 654 Living with Dying: A Guide to Palliative Care, 1790 Living with Dying: A Handbook for Endof-Life Health Care Practitioners, 1979

Living with Dying: A Loving Guide for Family and Close Friends, 318 Living with Dying: Finding Meaning in Chronic Illness, 694 Living with Dying: The Management of Terminal Disease, 779 Living with Grief after Sudden Loss: Suicide, Homicide, Accident, Heart Attack, Stroke, 1156 Living with Grief and Mourning, 1303 Living with Grief: At Work, at School, at Worship, 1149 Living with Grief: Children, Adolescents, and Loss, 150 Living with Grief: Loss in Later Life, 1157 Living with Grief When Illness Is Prolonged, 1160 Living with Grief: Who We Are, How We Grieve, 1159 Living with Life-Threatening Illness: A Guide for Patients, Their Families, and Caregivers, 327 Living with Loss: A Dramatic New Breakthrough in Grief Therapy, 1333 Living with Loss, Healing with Hope: A Jewish Perspective, 413 Living with Terminal Illness, 700 Living with the End in Mind: A Practical Checklist for Living Live to the Fullest by Embracing Your Mortality, 726 Living Your Dying, 718 The Loneliness of Dying, 666 Longing for Dad: Father Loss and Its Impact, 1822 Long-Term Effects of Death Education and Counseling: Papers from the 1987 Annual Meeting of ADEC, 522 A Look at Death, 986 Losing a Parent: Passage to a New Way of Living, 1825 Losing a Parent: Practical Help for You and Other Family Members, 1831 Losing a Parent to Death in the Early Years: Guidelines for the Treatment of Traumatic Bereavement in Infancy and Early Childhood, 1830

Title Index Losing Your Parents, Finding Yourself: The Defining Turning Point of Adult Life, 1837 Loss and Anticipatory Grief, 1336 Loss and Bereavement, 1325 Loss and Change, 1273 Loss and Grief, 1439 Loss and Grief: A Guide for Human Services Practitioners, 1406 Loss and Grief in Medicine, 2044 Loss and Grief: Psychological Management in Medical Practice, 2041 Loss and Grief Recovery: Help Caring for Children with Disabilities, Chronic or Terminal Illness, 546 Loss and How to Cope with It, 1112 Loss and Trauma: General and Close Relationship Perspectives, 1199 Loss, Bereavement, and Grief: A Guide to Effective Caring, 1387 Loss, Change, and Bereavement in Palliative Care, 1765 Loss, Change, and Grief: An Educational Experience, 1125 Loss, Grief, and Bereavement: A Guide for Counseling, 1270 Loss: How Children and Teenagers Can Cope with Death and Other Kinds of Loss, 218 The Loss of a Life Partner: Narratives of the Bereaved, 1417 The Loss of Loved Ones: The Effects of a Death in the Family on Personality Development, 1306 Loss Reaction and Grief Management, 1203 The Loss That Is Forever: The Lifelong Impact of the Early Death of a Mother or Father, 1823 Loss: Understanding the Emptiness, 1237 Love after Death: Counseling in Bereavement, 2010 Love and Loss: The Roots of Grief and Its Complications, 1323 Love Is Stronger Than Death, 344

357

Love Is the Link: A Hospice Doctor Shares Her Experience of Near-Death and Dying, 1543 Love, Loss, and Healing: A Woman’s Guide to Transforming Grief, 1153 Macmillan Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, 1022 The Magical Thoughts of Grieving Children: Treating Children with Complicated Mourning and Advice for Parents, 159 Making Sense of Death: Spiritual, Ethical, and Pastoral Aspects of Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 1857 Man against Dying, 37 The Management of Terminal Disease, 2036 The Management of Terminal Illness, 2037 The Management of Terminal Malignant Disease, 2038 Management of the Dying Patient and His Family, 2039 The Management of the “Hopeless” Case, 1998 Managing Death in the ICU: The Transition from Cure to Comfort, 1988 Managing Terminal Illness, 1766 Man Answers Death, 1948 Man Does Survive Death, 1886 Man’s Concern with Death, 2139 A Manual for the Grief Experience Inventory, 1358 A Manual of Death Education and Simple Burial, 2083 The Many Faces of Bereavement: The Nature and Treatment of Natural, Traumatic, and Stigmatized Grief, 1391 The Many Faces of Grief, 1210 Marriage after Mourning: The Secrets of Surviving Couples, 603 Marriage after the Death of a Child, 604 Maternal Bereavement: Coping with the Unexpected Death of a Child, 570 A Matter of Life and Death, 353

358

Title Index

Matters of Life and Death: Finding the Words to Say Goodbye, 303 The Matthew Tree, 1093 Mature Grief: When a Parent Dies, 1836 The Meaning of Death (Feifel), 1921 The Meaning of Death (Nagy), 1954 The Meaning of Grief, 1135 The Meaning of Immortality in Human Experience, Including Thoughts on Life and Death, 1605 Meaning Reconstruction and the Experience of Loss, 1310 The Meanings of Death in Rabbinic Judaism, 431 The Measure of Our Days: New Beginnings at Life’s End, 2003 The Medical Care of Terminally Ill Patients, 1996 Medical Care of the Dying Patient, 1991 Medical Care of the Soul: A Practical and Healing Guide to End-of-Life Issues for Families, Patients, and Health Care Providers, 310 Medical Student Education: Meeting the Challenges of Life-Threatening Illness, Death, and Bereavement, 1984 Medical Treatment of the Dying: Moral Issues, 846 Medicare Hospice Benefits: A Special Way of Caring for People Who Have a Terminal Illness, 1531 Medicare: Program Provisions and Payments Discourage Hospice Participation: Report to the Subcommittee on Health, Committee on Way and Means, House of Representatives, 1590 Medicolegal Implications of Death and Dying: A Detailed Discussion of the Medical and Legal Implications Involved in Death and/or Care of the Dying and Terminal Patient, 1638 Meditations for Bereaved Parents, 602 Meditations on the End of Life, 642 Meeting Death, 708

Meetings at the Edge: Dialogues with the Grieving and the Dying, the Healing, and the Healed, 290 Meeting the Needs of Our Clients Creatively: The Impact of Art and Culture on Caregiving, 360 Memories Live Forever: A Memory Book for Grieving Children, 229 Men and Grief: A Guide for Men Surviving the Death of a Loved One: A Resource for Caregivers and Mental Health Professionals, 1393 Men Coping with Grief, 1263 Mending the Torn Fabric: For Those Who Grieve and Those Who Want to Help Them, 1120 Men Don’t Cry . . . Women Do: Transcending Gender Stereotypes of Grief, 1278 The Metaphysics of Death, 1925 Metaphysics of Life and Death, 1012 Midlife Loss: Coping Strategies, 1221 Midlife Orphan: Facing Life’s Changes Now That Your Parents Are Gone, 1812 Midwife for Souls: Spiritual Care for the Dying: A Guide for Hospice Care Workers and All Who Live with the Terminally Ill, 1542 A Midwife through the Dying Process: Stories of Healing and Hard Choices at the End of Life, 765 Mindsight: Near-Death and Out-of-Body Experiences in the Blind, 1714 The Minister and Grief, 1850 The Minister as Crisis Counselor, 1897 Ministering to the Dying, 1889 Ministering to the Grief-Sufferer, 1848 Ministering to the Mourning: A Practical Guide for Pastors, Church Leaders, and Other Caregivers, 1908 The Mirror of Time: Images of Aging and Dying, 35 Mirrors of Mortality: Studies in the Social History of Death, 1485 Modern Man and Mortality, 951 The Modern Vision of Death, 1069

Title Index Moment of Death, 816 More Than a Parting Prayer: Lessons in Caregiving for the Dying, 681 More Than Surviving: Caring for Yourself While You Grieve, 1319 More Than You Dare Ask: The First Year of Living with Cancer, 1902 The Morning after Death, 339 Mortal Acts: Eighteen Empowering Rituals for Confronting Death, 2067 Mortality, Immortality, and Other Life Strategies, 1599 Mortal Lessons: Notes on the Art of Surgery, 1071 Mortal Matters: When a Loved One Dies, 1165 The Mortal No: Death and the Modern Imagination, 1938 Mortal Remains: Death in Early America, 1468 Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook, 132 Mosby’s Home Care and Hospice Drug Handbook, 1556 The Mother, Anxiety, and Death: The Catastrophic Death Complex, 610 Motherhood and Mourning: Perinatal Death, 606 Motherless Daughters: The Legacy of Loss, 1820 Motherless Mothers: How Mother Loss Shapes the Parents We Become, 1821 Motherloss, 1817 Mourner, Come to My Bosom, 1408 The Mourner’s Dance: What We Do When People Die, 390 The Mourning After: How to Manage Grief Wisely, 1138 Mourning and Dancing: A Memoir of Grief and Recovery, 1292 Mourning and Dancing for Schools: A Grief and Recovery Sourcebook for Students, Teachers, and Parents, 205 Mourning and Melancholia, 1929 Mourning and Mitzvah: A Guided Journal for Walking the Mourner’s Path through Grief to Healing, 396

359

Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Early Childhood Edition: Kindergarten-Grade 2, 193 Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Middle Childhood Edition: Grades 3-6, 194 Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Preschool Edition: Denny the Duck Stories, 195 The Mourning Handbook: The Most Comprehensive Resource Offering Practical and Compassionate Advice on Coping with All Aspects of Death and Dying, 1169 Mourning Journey: Spiritual Guidance for Facing Grief, Death, and Loss, 1442 The Mourning-Liberation Process, 1330 Mourning Thoughts: Facing a New Day after the Death of a Spouse, 2142 Mr. Death: Four Stories, 207 Muhammed’s Thoughts on Death: A Thematic Study of the Qur’Anic Data, 452 A Music I No Longer Heard: The Early Death of a Parent, 1839 Music Therapy at the End of Life, 658 Music Therapy in Palliative Care: New Voices, 1743 Music Therapy in Palliative/Hospice Care, 1567 Must I Think about Death? Now?: Student Essays from “Death, Dying, and Grieving,” a First-Year Course, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, Ohio, 515 My Brother Death, 474 My Experiments with Death: A Study of the World Soul in Its Relations with the Private Self, 324 My Heart Will Forever Go On: Coping with the Daily Challenges of Raising a Child with Special Needs and How to Survive the Loss When They Are Called Away, 587 My Life Is on Hold: One Family’s Struggle with Terminal Illness, 655 Mystery of Death, 938

360

Title Index

The Mystery of Death: Initiation at the Moment of Death, 647 The Mystery of Suffering and Death, 1966 Mysticism, Death, and Dying, 1955 The Myth of Eternal Return, 826 Myths of Life and Death, 945 Name All the Animals: A Memoir, 2111 The Natural Death Handbook, 1053 Natural Salvation: The Message of Science, Outlining the First Principles of Immortal Life on Earth, 1618 Nature, Mind, and Death, 973 The Nature of Grief: The Evolution and Psychology of Reactions to Loss, 1101 The Nature of Man: Studies in Optimistic Philosophy, 1951 The Near-Death Experience: Problems, Prospects, Perspectives, 1702 The Needs of the Dying: A Guide for Bringing Hope, Comfort, and Love to Life’s Final Chapter, 721 Never the Same: Coming to Terms with the Death of a Parent, 233 Never Too Young to Know: Death in Children’s Lives, 237 The New Age Handbook on Death and Dying, 1059 New Beginnings: Living through Loss and Grief, 1441 New Images of the Last Things: Karl Rahner on Death and Life after Death, 92 New Meanings of Death, 1922 The New Natural Death Handbook, 2059 New Themes in Palliative Care, 1751 The Next Step Forward: Music Therapy with the Terminally Ill, 742 90 Minutes in Heaven: A True Story of Death and Life, 1711 Nobody’s Child Anymore: Grieving, Caring, and Comforting When Parents Die, 1806 No Lifetime Guarantee: Dealing with the Details of Death, 1635 No More Dying, 731

Nonfinite Loss and Grief: A Psychoeducational Approach, 1127 Normal and Pathological Responses to Bereavement, 1163 No Screen for the Dying, 751 Not Dying, 771 Notes on Symptom Control in Hospice and Palliative Care, 1772 The Nothing That Is and the Nothing That Is Not: On Death, Dying, and Suffering, 320 No Time for Goodbyes: Coping with Grief, Anger, and Injustice after a Tragic Death, 1262 No Time Out from Grief: Surviving the Death of My Son, 581 No Voice Is Ever Wholly Lost, 714 The Nurse and the Dying Patient, 1734 The Nurse as Caregiver for the Terminal Patient and His Family, 1722 Nursing and Thanatology, 1727 Nursing Care at the End of Life: Palliative Care for Patients and Families, 1741 Nursing Care for the Dying Patient and the Family, 1724 Nursing Care of the Child with Long-Term Illness, 1737 The Nursing Care of the Dying Patient, 1721 Nursing Education in Thanatology: A Curriculum Continuum, 1736 Nursing in Hospice and Terminal Care: Research and Practice, 1570 Nursing the Dying Patient: Learning Processes for Interaction, 1723 Nutrition and Hydration in Hospice Care: Needs, Strategies, Ethics, 1522 ObitKit: A Guide to Celebrating Your Life: How to Personalize the Obituary Process and Create Your Written Legacy, 2090 Occupational Stress in the Care of the Critically Ill, the Dying, and the Bereaved, 2050 Of Time and Widowhood: Nationwide Studies of Enduring Effects, 2168

Title Index Old Age and Death Attitudes: A Comparative Analysis and Evaluation of Responses by a Group of Ambulatory White Female Persons Sixty-Five Years and Older Living under Varying Conditions of Institutional Supervision, 54 Old Age and Finitude: A Contribution to Psychogerontology, 48 Older Adults’ Views on Death, 36 Older Bereaved Spouses: Research with Practical Applications, 2183 Older Widows and the Lifecourse: Multiple Narratives of Hidden Lives, 2152 On Becoming a Widow, 2201 On Bereavement: The Culture of Grief, 1418 On Children and Death: How Children and Their Parents Can and Do Cope with Death, 188 On Christian Dying: Classic and Contemporary Texts, 1870 On Death, 976 On Death and Dying: What the Dying Have to Teach Doctors, Nurses, Clergy, and Their Families, 2013 On Death: An Essay, 992 On Death, Dying, and Not Dying, 1007 On Death: Helping Children Understand and Cope, 239 On Death without Dignity: The Human Impact of Technological Dying, 750 On Defining Death: An Analytic Study of the Concept of Death in Philosophy and Medical Ethics, 1970 On Dying and Denying: A Psychiatric Study of Terminality, 1676 On Dying Well: An Anglican Contribution to the Debate on Euthanasia, 402 On Grief and Dying: Understanding the Soul’s Journey, 1395 On Grief and Grieving: Finding the Meaning of Grief through the Five Stages of Loss, 1236 On Grieving the Death of a Father, 1840 On Life after Death, 834

361

Only Spring: On Mourning the Death of My Son, 593 On Our Way: The Final Passage through Life and Death, 340 On the Theology of Death, 460 On Your Own: A Widow’s Passage to Emotional and Financial Well-Being, 2143 Opening Doors: Improving Access to Hospice and Specialist Care Services by Members of Black and Ethnic Minority Communities, Occasional Paper 7, 1532 Oral Care of the Aging and Dying Patient, 40 Oral Care: The Mouth in Critical and Terminal Illness, 2016 The Orphaned Adult: Confronting the Death of a Parent, 1805 The Orphaned Adult: Understanding and Coping with Grief and Change after the Death of Our Parents, 1829 The Other Side of Death, 1697 The Other Side of Death: Does Death Seal Your Destiny?, 1916 Our Dad Died: The True Story of Three Kids Whose Lives Changed, 147 Our Eternity (Extension of Essay on Death), 1608 Our Greatest Gift: A Meditation on Dying and Caring, 96 Our Mothers’ Spirits: On the Death of Mothers and the Grief of Men, 1810 Outline of Death Investigation, 1686 Overcoming the Fear of Death, 920 The Oxford Book of Death, 978 Oxford Textbook of Palliative Medicine, 1758 The Pagan Book of Living and Dying: Practical Rituals, Prayers, Blessings, and Meditations on Crossing Over, 2091 Pain and Palliation, 1783 Pain, Anxiety, and Grief: Pharmacotherapeutic Care of the Dying Patient and the Bereaved, 2001

362

Title Index

Pain Management in Terminal Illness, 1782 Palliative Care: A Shared Experience, 1780 Palliative Care for Older People in Care Homes, 1769 Palliative Care in Terminal Illness, 1768 Palliative Care in the Home, 1759 Palliative Care Medicine: Patient-Based Learning, 1746 Palliative Care Nursing, 1732 Palliative Care Nursing: Quality Care to the End of Life, 1728 Palliative Care: The Management of FarAdvanced Illness, 1757 A Palliative Ethic of Care: Clinical Wisdom at Life’s End, 1764 Palliative Medicine, 1800 Palliative Medicine: A Case-Based Manual, 1778 Palliative Practices: An Interdisciplinary Approach, 1774 Papa, Are You Going to Die?, 250 The Paradox of Loss: Toward a Relational Theory of Grief, 1281 Parapsychology and Thanatology: Proceedings of an International Conference Held in Boston, Massachusetts, November 6-7, 1993, 2117 Parental Death and Psychological Development, 1808 Parental Grief: Solace and Resolution, 1227 Parental Loss of a Child, 608 Parental Reactions to the Death of a Child, 579 The Parent and the Fatally Ill Child, 578 Parent Grief: Narratives of Loss and Relationship, 613 Parenting through Crisis: Helping Kids in Times of Loss, Grief, and Change, 145 Parting Company: Understanding the Loss of a Loved One: The Caregiver’s Journey, 367 Parting Is Not Goodbye: Coping with Grief in Creative, Healthy Ways, 1320

Part of Me Died, Too: Stories of Creative Survival among Bereaved Children and Teenagers, 161 Passed On: African American Mourning Stories: A Memorial, 417 Passing On: The Social Organization of Dying, 383 Passing: The Vision of Death in America, 1010 Pastoral Care and Counseling in Grief and Separation, 1877 The Pastoral Care of the Dying, 1847 Pastoral Care of the Dying and the Bereaved: Selected Readings, 1882 The Pastoral Role in Caring for the Dying and Bereaved: Pragmatic and Ecumenical, 1875 The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, 967 Pathologic Grief: Maladaptation to Loss, 1213 The Path through Grief: A Compassionate Guide, 1116 A Pathway for Patients and Families Facing Terminal Illness, 777 Patience, Compassion, Hope, and the Christian Art of Dying Well, 804 The Patient, Death, and the Family, 2049 Patient Participation in Palliative Care: A Voice for the Voiceless, 1781 Patterns of Transcendence: Religion, Death, and Dying, 950 PDA (Personal Death Awareness): Breaking Free of Fear to Live a Better Life Now, 927 Peace at the Last, 1208 Peaceful Dying: The Step-by-Step Guide to Preserving Your Dignity, Your Choice, and Your Inner Peace at the End of Life, 1795 Peace of Mind, 1257 The Penguin Book of Death, 946 Personal Care in an Impersonal World: A Multidimensional Look at Bereavement, 1305 A Personal Guide to Living with Loss, 1411

Title Index Personal Meanings of Death: Applications of Personal Construct Theory to Clinical Practice, 1997 Person-Centered Planning for Later Life: A Curriculum on Death and Dying for Adults with Mental Retardation, 56 Perspectives on Bereavement, 1179 Perspectives on Death, 876 Perspectives on Death and Dying, 988 Perspectives on Death and Dying: CrossCultural and Multidisciplinary Views, 393 Perspectives on Death: Student Activity Handbook, 486 Perspectives on Death: Teacher’s Resource Book, 487 Perspectives on Loss: A Sourcebook, 1198 Perspectives on the AIDS Crisis: Thanatologic Aspects, 2128 The Phenomenon of Death: Faces of Mortality, 1094 Philosophical Aspects of Thanatology, Volumes I and II, 1937 Philosophical Thinking about Death and Dying, 1912 Philosophies of Death and Dying, 1941 The Philosophy of Life and the Philosophy of Death, 1927 The Phoenix Phenomenon: Rising from the Ashes of Grief, 1220 The Physician and the Hopelessly Ill Patient: Legal, Medical, and Ethical Guidelines, 2043 Physician-Assisted Dying: The Case for Palliative Care and Patient Choice, 1786 Physician-Assisted Suicide, 906 Physician-Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia, 910 The Physician of the Dance of Death, 2053 A Physician’s Guide to Coping with Death and Dying, 2046 A Pilgrimage through Grief: Healing the Soul’s Hurt after Loss, 1288 The Place of Grief Work in Mental Health, 1669

363

A Place of Healing: Working with Suffering in Living and Dying, 717 Planet Widow: A Mother’s Story of Navigating a Suddenly Unrecognizable World, 2175 Planning and Managing Death Issues in the Schools, 564 Playing God: The Dilemma of the Dying Patient, 2028 The Politics of Being Mortal, 1944 Positive Approaches to Living with End Stage Renal Disease: Psychosocial and Thanatologic Aspects, 692 A Practical Discourse Concerning Death, 1073 The Practice of Death, 1945 Praying Our Goodbyes, 1888 Preparing the Children: Information and Ideas for Families Facing Terminal Illness and Death, 212 Preventive Opportunities in Childhood Bereavement (Death of a Parent Study), 183 Primary Care Issues for End-of-Life Care, 1784 Primer of Palliative Care, 1794 Primitive Conceptions of Death and the Nether World in the Old Testament, 1483 Principles of Thanatology, 2127 The Private Worlds of Dying Children, 551 The Problem of Age, Growth, and Death, 46 The Problem of Loss and Mourning: Psychoanalytic Perspectives, 1657 Problems of Death: Opposing Viewpoints, 848 The Prolongation of Life: Optimistic Studies, 747 The Prospect of Immortality, 1602 Prospects for Immortality: A Sensible Search for Life after Death, 1598 Psyche and Death, 1936 The Psychedelic Experience: A Manual on the Tibetan Book of the Dead, 434 Psychiatric Aspects of Terminal Illness, 1663

364

Title Index

The Psychiatrist and the Dying Patient, 1658 The Psychological Autopsy: A Study of the Terminal Phase of Life, 1677 The Psychology of Death, 1023 The Psychology of Death and Dying, 1068 The Psychology of Death in Fantasy and History, 1960 Psychology of Funeral Service, 2080 The Psychology of Separation and Loss: Perspectives on Development, Life Transitions, and Clinical Practice, 1654 Psychopharmacological Agents for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved, 1767 Psychopharmacological Agents in the Care of the Terminally Ill and the Bereaved, 1665 Psychosocial Aspects of Cardiovascular Disease: The Life-Threatened Patient, the Family, and the Staff, 767 The Psychosocial Aspects of Death and Dying, 1655 Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care, 1673 Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care of Oral Cancer, 1671 Psychosocial Care of the Dying Patient, 1660 Psychosocial Palliative Care: Good Practice in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved, 1791 Psychotherapy and Counseling with Older Women: Cross-Cultural, Family, and End-of-Life Issues, 2048 Puppet Plays for Grieving Children, 230 The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in Religion, Culture, and Social Change, 1480 The Pursuit of Death, 1856 A Qualitative Study Exploring the Quality of Life of Informal Caregivers Caring for Someone with a Terminal Illness, 1740 Quality Hospice Care: Administration, Organization, and Models, 1560

The Quality of Life: Living Well, Dying Well, 349 Questions and Answers on Death and Dying, 511 Quiet Desperation: Plain Talk on Life and Death, 102 Rabbinic Conceptions about Death, 458 The Radiant Shock of Death, 1009 Radiation Therapy and Thanatology, 2138 Rationing of Medical Care for the Critically Ill: Report of a Conference Held in Washington, D.C., on May 27, 1986, 2045 Readings in Aging and Death: Contemporary Perspectives, 60 Readings in Thanatology, 2132 Ready to Live, Prepared to Die: A Provocative Guide to the Rest of Your Life, 696 The Realization of Death: A Guide for the Psychological Autopsy, 2054 Realized Millennialism: A Study in Biblical Eschatology, 819 Recognizing Spiritual Needs in People Who Are Dying, 1893 Reconstructing Illness: Studies in Pathography, 78 Recovering from the Loss of a Child, 568 Recovering from the Loss of a Parent, 1819 Recovering from the Loss of a Sibling, 2104 Recovery from Bereavement, 1324 Recovery from Loss: A Personalized Guide to the Grieving Process, 1398 Redefining Death, 857 Reflections on Death, Dying, and Bereavement: A Manual for Clergy, Counselors, and Speakers, 1890 Reflections on Palliative Care, 1750 Reflections on War and Death, 1930 Reforming the Rights of Death, 1904 A Refuge from the Storm: A Shelter from the Storm of Caring for a Loved One with a Terminal Illness, 799

Title Index A Regulatory Handbook for Hospice Social Workers: The Heart of Healing, 1594 The Relationship between End-of-Life Education Obtained through Didactic, Clinical, Personal, and Introspective Experiences and the Attitudes of Nursing Students toward the Care of the Dying Patient, 531 The Relationship between Religious Belief and Death Affect, 61 Relative Grief: Parents and Children, Sisters and Brothers, Husbands, Wives, and Partners, Grandparents and Grandchildren Talk about Their Experience of Death and Grieving, 2106 Religion and Bereavement, 1244 Religious Encounters with Death: Insights from the History and Anthropology of Religions, 1478 Remembering Lives: Conversations with the Dying and the Bereaved, 281 Remembering Well: Rituals for Celebrating Life and Mourning Death, 2097 Remembering with Love: Messages of Hope for the First Year, 1252 Remember the Laughter: Children, Death, and Loss, 242 Remember the Secret, 189 Representations of Childhood Death, 547 Representations of Death: A Sociological Perspective, 64 Re-Searching Death: Selected Essays in Death Education and Counseling, 523 Researching Palliative Care, 1762 Resilient Widowers: Older Men Speak for Themselves, 2187 Resources for the Ministry in Death and Dying, 1881 Responding to Loss: A Resource for Caregivers, 336 The Responsible Physician: Standards of Excellence and the Critically Ill Patient, 2056

365

Rest in Peace: A Cultural History of Death and the Funeral Home in America, 1471 Retelling Violent Death, 1353 Rethinking Life and Death: The Collapse of Our Traditional Ethics, 98 Return to Life: Two Imaginings of the Lazarus Theme, 1943 The Revival of Death, 1797 The Rights of the Critically Ill: The Basic ACLU Guide to the Rights of Critically Ill and Dying Patients, 1644 The Rights of the Dying: A Companion for Life’s Final Moments, 722 The Right to Die Debate: A Documentary History, 911 The Right to Die: Decision and Decision Makers, 858 The Right to Life, the Right to Die, 1030 R.I.P.: The Complete Book of Death and Dying, 1011 Rituals for Living and Dying: From Life’s Wounds to Spiritual Awakening, 2068 The Role of the Community Hospital in the Care of the Dying Patient and the Bereaved, 1999 The Role of the Minister in Caring for the Dying Patient and the Bereaved, 1874 The Role of the Volunteer Director in the Care of the Terminal Patient and the Family, 2022 The Role of the Volunteer in the Care of the Terminal Patient and the Family, 362 The Royal Way of Death, 934 The Rules and Exercises of Holy Dying, 1898 The R.V.H. Manual on Palliative/Hospice Care: A Resource Book, 1742 The Sacred and the Secular: Attitudes of the American Public toward Death, 73 The Sacred Art of Dying: How the World Religions Understand Death, 432 Sacred Dying: Creating Rituals for Embracing the End of Life, 2060

366

Title Index

Sacred Passage: How to Provide Fearless, Compassionate Care for the Dying, 1753 Sad but O.K. My Daddy Died Today: A Child’s View of Death, 181 Sad Isn’t Bad: A Good-Grief Guidebook for Kids Dealing with Loss, 211 The Sanctity of Social Life: Physicians’ Treatment of Critically Ill Patients, 1987 Saying Goodbye to Daniel: When Death Is the Best Choice, 373 Saying Goodbye to Grandma, 300 Saying Goodbye with Love: A Step-byStep Guide through the Details of Death, 1276 Saying Goodbye Your Way: Planning or Buying a Funeral or Cremation for Yourself or Someone You Love, 2078 Saying Kaddish: How to Comfort the Dying, Bury the Dead, and Mourn as a Jew, 2065 Scapegoat: The Impact of Death-Fear on an American Family, 915 Science and Immortality, 1611 Scope and Standards of Hospice and Palliative Nursing Practice, 1725 A Season of Grief, 1412 A Season of Grief: A Comforting Companion for Difficult Days, 1151 Seasons of Grief and Healing: A Guide for Those Who Mourn, 1289 The Seasons of Grief: Helping Your Children Grow through Loss, 163 Selected Bibliography on Death and Dying, 133 Sexuality and Life-Threatening Illness, 798 Shadows in the Sun: The Experiences of Sibling Bereavement in Childhood, 2102 The Shape of Death, Life, and Immortality in the Early Fathers, 1477 She Came to Live Out Loud: An Inspiring Family Journey through Illness, Loss, and Grief, 1779

Should Physicians Be Permitted to Hasten the Deaths of Terminally Ill Patients?, 908 Should the Children Know?: Encounters with Death in the Lives of Children, 297 Should the Patient Know the Truth?, 299 Should Treatment Be Terminated?, 880 Sibling Loss, 2105 The Significance of the Christian Funeral, 2076 Singing Mother Home: A Psychologist’s Journey through Anticipatory Grief, 1816 Six Lives, Six Deaths: Portraits from Modern Japan, 436 Six Steps for Managing Loss: A Catholic Guide through Grief, 1143 Social Services for the Aged, Dying, and Bereaved in International Perspective, 1978 The Social Symbolism of Grief and Mourning, 1186 Social Work and Terminal Care, 797 Social Work and Thanatology, 2134 Social Work Practices with the Terminally Ill: A Transcultural Perspective, 369 Social Work Theory and Practice with the Terminally Ill, 366 Social Work with the Dying and Bereaved, 379 Social Work with the Dying Patient and the Family, 2030 The Sociology of Death: An Analysis of Death-Related Behavior, 386 Sociology of Death and Dying: A Teaching Resource, 961 The Sociology of Death: A Selected Bibliography, 121 The Sociology of Death: Theory, Culture, Practice, 953 Some Information for Those Caring for Patients, 1580 Someone You Love Is Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping, 298 Somewhere Just Beyond, 240 Soon: Tales from Hospice, 1562

Title Index The Sorrow and the Fury: Overcoming Hurt and Loss from Childhood to Old Age, 1170 Sorrow’s Company: Writers on Loss and Grief, 1202 The Soul in Grief: Love, Death, and Transformation, 1345 Sourcebook on Death and Dying, 987 Special Issues in Palliative Care, 1752 A Special Kind of Love: Care of the Dying Child, 555 A Special Scar: The Experiences of People Bereaved by Suicide, 1424 Spiritual, Ethical, and Pastoral Aspects of Death and Bereavement, 1857 The Spiritual Lives of Bereaved Parents, 586 Spontaneous Shrines and the Public Memorialization of Death, 2089 Spousal Bereavement in Late Life, 2151 The Stages of Sorrow, 1384 Standards and Scope of Hospice Nursing Practice, 1719 Statements on Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 959 Staying Close: A Positive Approach to Dying and Bereavement, 809 Staying in Charge: Practical Plans for the End of Your Life, 1631 Step by Step: Your Guide to Making Practical Decisions When a Loved One Dies, 1620 Stepping Stones to Grief Recovery, 1350 Stiff: The Curious Lives of Human Cadavers, 2087 The Story of My Death, 656 Straight Talk about Death and Dying, 276 Straight Talk about Death with Young People, 302 Strange Facts about Death, 991 Stress, Loss, and Grief: Understanding Their Origins and Growth Potential, 1363 Stuck for Words: What to Say When Someone Is Grieving, 305

367

A Student Dies, a School Mourns: Dealing with Death and Loss in the School Community, 182 A Study of Death, 930 Suffering: Psychological and Social Aspects in Loss, Grief, and Care, 1152 Suicide (Choron), 952 Suicide (Dodder and Dodder), 853 Suicide (Durkheim), 974 Suicide and Bereavement, 1147 Suicide: A Social and Historical Study, 1459 Suicide: Prevention, Intervention, Postvention, 997 The Suicide Problem in the United States, 1461 Suicide Survivors: A Guide for Those Left Behind, 1440 Sunsets: Reflections for Life’s Final Journey, 1205 The Sunshine Widows: Adapting to Sudden Bereavement, 2165 A Survey to Determine the Status of Death Education in the Wisconsin Secondary Health Education Curriculum, 510 Survival Handbook for Widows (and for Relatives and Friends Who Want to Understand), 2179 Surviving Death: A Practical Guide to Caring for the Dying and Bereaved, 748 Surviving Grief and Learning to Live Again, 1357 Surviving Grief: Thirty Questions and Answers for a Time of Loss, 1339 Surviving the Death of a Sibling: Living through Grief When an Adult Brother or Sister Dies, 2112 Surviving the Death of Your Spouse: A Step-by-Step Workbook, 2176 Surviving the Loss of a Loved One: Living through Grief, 1126 Surviving Your Partner: How to Live with the Death of the Person Closest to You, 2188 The Survivor’s Guide, 1407 Symbolic Immortality, 1607

368

Title Index

Symbolic Loss: The Ambiguity of Mourning and Memory at Century’s End, 1466 Symposia on Hospice, Compassionate Care, and the Dying Experience, 1557 Symposium: Death as an Ethical Issue for the Professions, 875 Taking the Trip: A Journey through Widowhood, 2193 Tales for the Dying: The Death Narratives of the Bhagavita-Purana, 423 Talking about Death, 269 Talking about Death with “Normal” Children: Research Strategies and Issues, 185 Talking about Death Won’t Kill You, 295 Talking to Children about Death, 529 Talking with Children about Loss, 249 Talking with Children with a LifeThreatening Illness: A Handbook for Health Care Professionals, 533 The Tao of Dying: A Guide to Caring, 1792 A Teacher’s Handbook of Death, 507 Teaching Students about Death: A Comprehensive Resource for Educators and Parents, 534 A Teaching Unit on Death and Dying, 517 Tears and Smiles: The Hospice Handbook, 1551 Teenagers Face-to-Face with Bereavement, 11 Teens, Loss, and Grief: The Ultimate Teen Guide, 22 Telling a Child about Death, 284 Tell Me about Death, Mommy, 286 Tell Me Papa: A Family Book for Children’s Questions about Death and Funerals, 180 Terminal and Life-Threatening Illness: An Occupational Behavior Perspective, 800 Terminal Care, 384 Terminal Care at Home, 791 Terminal Care for Cancer Patients, 1748

Terminal Care: Friendship Contracts with Dying Cancer Patients, 669 Terminal Care Support Teams: The Hospital-Hospice Interface, 1517 Terminal Illness, 724 Terminal Illness: A Guide to Nursing Care, 2012 Terminal Illness and the Experience of God: A Qualitative Study of the Transitional Space, 759 Terminal Illness as a Source of Personality Change in a Woman Suffering from Cancer, 104 Terminal Illness: Opposing Viewpoints, 1090 The Terminal Patient: Oral Care, 2017 Thanatologic Aspects of Aging: Selected Readings, 57 Thanatology, 2121 Thanatology: A Liberal Arts Approach, 2133 The Thanatology Community and the Needs of the Movement, 2115 Thanatology Course Outlines, 2114 Thanatology Curriculum–Medicine, 2119 The Thanatology Librarian, 2125 The Thanatology Library, 114 Thanatopics: Activities and Exercises for Confronting Death, 83 Thanatopics: A Manual of Structured Learning Experiences for Death Education, 509 Theology, Death, and Dying, 1845 Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implications of a Christian Eschatology, 836 A Theoretical Analysis of Attitudes of Older People toward Dying, 74 Theory of Suicide, 1920 Therapeutic Drugs and the Quality of Life, 2000 They Need to Know: How to Teach Children about Death, 501 Thinking through Death, 343 Thirty-Five Ways to Help a Grieving Child, 152

Title Index This Thing Called Grief: New Understandings of Loss, 1164 Thoughts on Death and Life, 1606 A Thousand Goodbyes: A Son’s Reflection on Living, Dying, and the Things That Matter Most, 1206 Three Faces of Mourning: Melancholia, Manic Defense, and Moving On, 1653 Through Grief: The Bereavement Journey, 1136 Through the Valley: A Caregiver’s Account of Terminal Illness, 364 The Tibetan Book of Living and Dying, 768 The Tibetan Book of the Dead, 980 The Tibetan Book of the Dead: The Great Liberation through Hearing in the Bardo, 410 Time and Its End: A Comparative Existential Interpretation of Time and Eschatology, 837 Time for Dying, 676 The Time Is at Hand, 819 The Time of Their Dying, 774 A Time to Be Born–A Time to Die, 1078 A Time to Care: A Study in Terminal Illness, 354 Time to Go: Three Plays on Death and Dying, with Commentary on End-ofLife Issues, 697 A Time to Grieve: Meditations for Healing after the Death of a Loved One, 1394 A Time to Mourn, 2194 A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort, 482 A Time to Mourn, a Time to Dance, 1286 A Time to Mourn: Growing through the Grief Process, 1222 Time to Mourn: Judaism and the Psychology of Bereavement, 473 Time to Say Goodbye: Moving beyond Loss, 1185 To Comfort Always: A Nurse’s Guide to End-of-Life Care, 2023 To Comfort the Bereaved, 1253 To Die and to Live: Christ’s Resurrection and Christian Vocation, 1294

369

To Die Is to Gain: The Experience of One’s Own Death, 689 To Die Well: A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their Caregivers, 371 To Die with Style!, 89 To Heal Again: Toward Serenity and the Resolution of Grief, 1111 To Hell with Dying, 806 To Listen, to Comfort, to Care: Reflections on Death and Dying, 630 To Live and to Die: When, Why, and How, 909 To Live Until We Say Goodbye, 729 To Those Who Need It Most: Hospice Means Hope, 1593 Toward a Sociology of Death and Dying, 1045 Toward Death with Dignity: Caring for Dying People, 760 Transcendence of Loss over the Life Span, 1971 Transcending Loss: Understanding the Lifelong Impact of Grief and How to Make It Meaningful, 1331 Transformed by the Light: The Powerful Effect of Near-Death Experiences on People’s Lives, 1709 Transition Called Death, 690 Transitions in Dying and Bereavement: A Psychosocial Guide for Hospice and Palliative Care, 1747 Transitions in End-of-Life Care: Hospice and Related Developments in Eastern Europe and Central Asia, 1503 Trauma, Death, and Death Notification: A Seminar for Professional Counselors and Victim Advocates, 2019 Traumatic and Nontraumatic Loss and Bereavement: Clinical Theory and Practice, 1266 Traumatic Grief: Diagnosis, Treatment, and Prevention, 1214 Traumatology of Grieving: Conceptual, Theoretical, and Treatment Foundations, 1167 Treatment of Complicated Mourning, 2034

370

Title Index

The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality, 65 The True Work of Dying: A Practical and Compassionate Guide to Easing the Dying Process, 1496 The Truth about Death and Dying, 19 Tuluak and Amaulik: Dialogues on Death and Mourning with the Inuit Eskimo, 407 The Tunnel and the Light: Essential Insights on Living and Dying, 1032 Turn Again to Life: Growing Old through Grief, 1362 Twentieth Century Book of the Dead, 977 Twenty Common Problems: End-of-Life Care, 1773 Twin Loss: A Book Where the Twinless and Others Can Seek Answers to the Many Questions Which Rise During Terminal Illness and after the Death of Their Beloved Twin, 2101 The Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child, 552 Unattended Sorrow: Recovering from Loss and Reviving the Heart, 1255 Understanding Children’s Experiences of Parental Bereavement, 1824 Understanding Death, 392 Understanding Death and Dying: An Interdisciplinary Approach, 1089 Understanding Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 1040 Understanding Death from a Spiritual Perspective, 79 Understanding Grief and Bereavement, 1260 Understanding Grief: Helping Yourself Heal, 1435 Understanding Grief: Its Roots, Dynamics, and Treatment, 1211 Understanding Mourning: A Guide for Those Who Grieve, 1148 Understanding Your Grieving Heart after a Loved One’s Death, 1436 Uneasy Endings: Daily Life in an American Nursing Home, 377

The Unknown Country: Death in Australia, Britain, and the USA, 399 Unrecognized and Unsanctioned Grief: The Nature and Counseling of Unacknowledged Loss, 456 Unspeakable Loss: Understanding the Experience of Pregnancy Loss, Miscarriage, and Abortion, 588 Unspoken Grief: Coping with Childhood Sibling Loss, 2109 An Untimely Loss: A Passage to the Gentle Side of Grief, 1444 The Unwanted Gift of Grief: A Ministry Approach, 1903 Updating Life and Death: Essays in Ethics and Medicine, 852 Up from Grief: Patterns of Recovery, 1235 Using Literature to Help Troubled Teenagers Cope with End-of-Life Issues, 1 A Very Easy Death, 964 The Vestibule, 103 The Victorian Celebration of Death, 1454 The View from a Hearse, 1698 Vigor Mortis: The End of the Death Taboo, 1681 Visions of God: From the Near Death Experience, 1717 Vitality of Death: Essays in Existential Psychology and Philosophy, 1947 Vital Signs (The Way We Die in America), 1038 A Voice for Those Bereaved by Suicide, 1282 Voices of Bereavement: A Casebook for Grief Counselors, 1976 Voices of Death, 1077 Volunteers in Hospice and Palliative Care: A Handbook for Volunteer Service Managers, 1512 The Vulture and the Bull: Religious Responses to Death, 77 The Waiting World: What Happens after Death, 1705 A Way to Die, 818

Title Index The Way We Die: An Investigation of Death and Dying in America Today, 657 We Are But a Moment’s Sunlight: Understanding Death, 1096 We Can Minister with Dying Persons, 1859 We Die before We Live: Talking with the Very Ill, 267 We Lived with Dying, 711 A Well Model Approach to Care of the Dying Client, 2021 We Love You, Matty: Meeting Death with Faith, 1860 We Need to Talk: A Practical Guide for Those Facing Terminal Illness, 764 Western Attitudes toward Death: From the Middle Ages to the Present, 1103 What Becomes of the Dead?: A Study of Eschatology, 820 What Children Need When They Grieve: The Four Essentials: Routine, Love, Honesty, and Security, 221 What Happens When You Die?: Twentieth-Century Thought on Survival after Death, 1969 What Helped Me When My Loved One Died, 1190 What Is Death?, 143 What on Earth Do You Do When Someone Dies?, 224 What the Dying Teach Us: Lessons on Living, 1878 What to Do When a Loved One Dies: A Practical and Compassionate Guide to Dealing with Death on Life’s Terms, 1372 What to Do When Someone Dies: A Legal, Financial, and Practical Guide, 1646 What to Do When the Police Leave: A Guide to the First Days of Traumatic Loss, 1218 What to Tell Your Child about Birth, Illness, Death, Divorce, and Other Family Crises, 266 What Will We Do? Preparing a School Community to Cope with Crises, 245

371

The Wheel of Death: A Collection of Writings from Zen Buddhists and Other Sources on Dying, Death, Rebirth, 1470 The Wheel of Life: A Memoir of Living and Dying, 730 When a Baby Dies: A Handbook for Healing and Helping, 591 When a Child Dies, 607 When a Child Has Been Murdered: Ways You Can Help the Grieving Parents, 557 When a Classmate Dies, 548 When a Community Weeps: Case Studies in Group Survivorship, 1446 When a Friend Dies: A Book for Teens about Grieving and Healing, 9 When a Friend Is Dying: A Guide to Caring for the Terminally Ill, 659 When a Grandparent Dies: A Kid’s Own Remembering Workbook for Dealing with Shiva and the Year Beyond, 437 When a Jew Dies: The Ethnography of a Bereaved Son, 415 When a Lifemate Dies: Stories of Love, Loss, and Healing, 2166 When All the Friends Have Gone: A Guide for Aftercare Providers, 812 When a Loved One Dies, 1910 When a Man Faces Grief: Twelve Practical Ideas to Help You Heal from Loss, 1182 When a Parent Is Very Sick, 197 When Bad Things Happen to Good People, 1034 When Children Die, 625 When Children Die: Improving Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families, 572 When Children Grieve: For Adults to Help Children Deal with Death, Divorce, Pet Loss, Moving, and Other Losses, 175 When Death Comes, 1088 When Death Impacts Your School: A Guide for School Administrators, 153 When Death Takes a Father, 1827

372

Title Index

When Death Walks In: For Teenagers Facing Grief, 25 When Evening Comes: The Education of a Hospice Volunteer, 1490 When Goodbye Is Forever, 770 When Grief Breaks Your Heart, 1302 When Grief Is Your Constant Companion: God’s Grace for a Woman’s Heartache, 1340 When Hello Means Goodbye, 780 When Husbands Die: Women Share Their Stories, 2186 When I Die, 334 When I Die, Will I Get Better?, 553 When Life Ends: Legal Overviews, Medicolegal Forms, and Hospital Policies, 1622 When Life Meets Death: Stories of Death and Dying, Truth and Courage, 785 When Mourning Comes: A Book of Comfort for the Grieving, 1377 When Parents Die: A Guide for Adults, 1834 When Parents Die: Learning to Live with the Loss of a Parent, 1801 When People Die (Bernstein and Gullo), 140 When People Die (Levete et al.), 198 When Someone Dies (Greenlee and Drath), 167 When Someone Dies (Jackson), 338 When Someone Dies: A Practical Guide to Holistic Care at the End of Life, 650 When Someone Very Special Dies, 1201 When Someone You Love Is Dying: A Handbook for Counselors and Those Who Care, 1869 When the Bough Breaks: Forever after the Death of a Son or Daughter, 549 When the Dying Speak: How to Listen and Learn from Those Facing Death, 304 When the Feast Is Finished: Reflections on Terminal Illness, 626 When There Are No Words: Finding Your Way to Cope with Loss and Grief, 1419 When We Die: The Science, Culture, and Rituals of Death, 1050

When Will I Stop Hurting?: Dealing with a Recent Death, 1231 When You Lose a Loved One (Allen), 1099 When You Lose a Loved One (Osborne), 365 When Your Child Has a Life-Threatening Illness, 575 When Your Child Is Gone: Learning to Live Again, 624 When You’re Dead, You’re Dead, 1070 When Your Loved One Is Dying, 333 When Your Parent Dies, 1826 When Your Parent Dies: A Concise and Practical Source of Help and Advice for Adults Grieving the Death of a Parent, 1815 When Your Spouse Dies: A Concise and Practical Source of Help and Advice, 2156 Where Has Grandpa Gone?: Helping Children Cope with Grief and Loss, 186 Who Dies?: An Investigation of Conscious Living and Conscious Dying, 734 Why Did Daddy Die?: Helping Children Cope with the Loss of a Parent, 135 Why Did He Die?, 1194 Why Do I Have to Die?, 705 Why Do People Die?: Helping Your Child Understand–with Love and Illustrations, 292 Why Do We Die?: An Essay in Thanatology, 2131 Why Me?: Coping with Grief, Loss, and Change, 1234 Widow, 2149 Widowed (Brothers), 2146 Widowed (Jebb), 2169 The Widowed Self: The Older Woman’s Journey through Widowhood, 2204 Widower (Campbell and Silverman), 2150 Widower (Schoen), 2196 The Widower, 2172 Widowhood Happens, 2161 Widowhood in an American City, 2181 Widowhood in Later Life, 2185

Title Index Widowhood Isn’t for Wimps: Meditations for Women in the First Three Months of Widowhood by Someone Who’s Been There, 2173 Widow: Rebuilding Your Life, 2162 Widows and Their Families, 2184 Widows and Widowhood: A Creative Approach to Being Alone, 2191 Widows in the Dark: Rescuing Your Financial Position, 1629 Widow’s Walk, 2167 Widow-to-Widow: How the Bereaved Help One Another, 2199 Will I Ever Feel Good Again?: When You’re Overwhelmed by Grief and Loss, 1154 The Will to Live, 707 Will to Live–Will to Die: Ethics and the Search for a Good Death, 901 The Wisdom of Dying: Practices for Living, 93 Wisdom of the Serpent: The Myths of Death, Rebirth, Resurrection, 831 With Open Arms: Receiving Care with Grace and Gratitude, 663 With Those Who Grieve: Twenty Grief Survivors Share Their Stories of Loss, Pain, and Hope, 1386 A Woman’s Book of Grieving, 1338 Women and Loss: Psychobiological Perspectives, 1659 Women as Widows: Support Systems, 2182 Women, Birth, and Death in Jewish Law and Practice, 440 Women Facing Loss: Disease, Bereavement, and Emotional Response, 1399 Working It Through, 345 Working with Children in Grief and Loss, 201 The Work of Mourning, 2064

373

A World of Widows, 2190 The Worst Loss: How Families Heal from the Death of a Child, 614 The Wounded Healer, 1314 Wrestling with the Angel: Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning, 463 Write Grief: How to Transform Loss with Writing, 285 Writing to Heal the Soul: Transforming Grief and Loss through Writing, 1445 Year One: A Record, 623 A Year to Live: How to Live This Year as If It Were Your Last, 735 Ye Shall Be Comforted, 1884 You and a Death in Your Family, 1428 You and Your Grief, 1212 You Are Not Alone: Teens Talk about Life after the Loss of a Parent, 14 You Can Become Whole Again: A Guide to Christians in Grieving, 1290 You Can Help Someone Who’s Grieving: A How-To Healing Handbook, 1173 You Can’t Leave Till You Do the Paperwork: Matters of Life and Death, 1624 You’ll Get over It: The Rage of Bereavement, 1209 Young People and Death, 209 Young People, Bereavement, and Loss: Disruptive Transitions?, 203 Young Widow, 2197 Young Widow: Learning to Live Again, 2155 Your Healing Journey through Grief: A Practical Guide to Grief Management, 1139 Your Particular Grief, 1318 The Zen of Living and Dying: A Practical and Spiritual Guide, 1942

About the Author

John F. Szabo is director of the Atlanta-Fulton Public Library System. He was previously director of the Clearwater Public Library System and served as president of the Florida Library Association. He has also served as director of the Palm Harbor Public Library in Palm Harbor, Florida, and the Robinson Public Library District in Robinson, Illinois. Szabo was head librarian of the Residential College at the University of Michigan, where he received his master’s in information and library studies. The author of Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook (Scarecrow, 1993), he has studied the literature of death and dying for many years.

375